SPECIFICATION NO. 1360S - EMWD · 13127 Aluminum Flat Cover 1 thru 4 13205 . Aboveground Fuel...

Riverside County Perris, California

SPECIFICATION NO. 1360S

MV /SJV/TV RWRF BLOWER ELECTRIFICATION PROJECT

Work Order # 419003

A PUBLIC WORKS PROJECT

January, 2019

Volume 1 of 3

Contents: Specifications | Notice Inviting Bids | Bidding Requirements | Bid Forms | Contract Forms |

Conditions of Contract

Paul D. Jones, II, P.E. - General Manager

Safety is of paramount and overriding importance to Eastern Municipal Water District

Visit our website at www.emwd.org to view currently advertised projects Navigate to Construction Construction Bid Opportunities

http://www.emwd.org/

[PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK]

00010-1 Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS PAGE 00000 Title Page 00010 Table of Contents 00012 Notice Inviting Bids NIB-1 thru NIB-6 00014 Bid Opening Map 00016 Bid Walk-thru map/directions 00018 Instructions to Bidders B-1 thru -600020 Bidding Sheets & Equipment & Material List (submit with bid) BS-1 thru -600024 Proposal (7 day) (submit with bid) C3-1 thru -200027 Bidder’s Experience Record & Resumes (submit with bid) BR-1 thru -200028 Designation of Subcontractors (submit with bid) C5a thru e00030 Contractor's Licensing Statement (submit with bid) C6-1 thru -200032 Non-Collusion Declaration (submit with bid) C7-1 thru -200034 Agreement C8a thru d00036 Performance Bond C9-1 thru -400038 Payment Bond C10-1 thru -400040 Bid Bond (submit with bid) BB-100042 Worker’s Compensation Insurance Certificate C11-1 thru -200044 Certificate of Insurance Sample C1200046 Iran Contracting Act Certification (submit with bid if over $1million) C13-1 thru -4 00050 Cal-OSHA form 300A (submit with bid) C16-1 thru -2 00052 Contractor’s Cal Osha Compliance History

and SIC Code (submit with bid) C17-1 thru -2 00056 Employee Safety & Health Training Records C19-1 thru -2 00057 Contractor Registration Extract(s) (submit with bid) C22-1 thru -2

GENERAL CONDITIONS 00062 Section E, Inspection & Tests E-1 thru E-200064 Section F, Labor & Construction F-1 thru F-58

Includes Exhibit A – Escrow Agreement 00066 Section H, Permits H-1 thru H-2

SPECIAL CONDITIONS 00100 Special Conditions SC-1 thru SC-18


CONTRACT DRAWINGS PAGE 00200 Section P Standard & Construction Drawings (list) P-1 thru P-4

EMWD DETAILED PROVISIONS (For identification purposes, an “E” precedes EMWD Detailed provisions in the table of contents only) E01000 General Safety Requirements 1 thru 8 E01026 Schedule of Values 1 thru 4 E01140 Work Restriction (Custom) 1 thru 8 E01381 Pre-Const. Audio Video Taping Above Ground Facilities 1 thru 4 E01430 Operation and Maintenance Data 1 thru 10 E02050 Demolition and Salvage (Custom) 1 thru 2 E02221 Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting 1 thru 10 E02242 Cement Stabl. Sand Bedding/Backfill 1 thru 2 E02252 Control Density Fill 1 thru 4 E02505 Roadway Base Course 1 thru 4 E02513 Asphalt Concrete Paving 1 thru 4

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01350 Seismic Anchorage and Bracing 1 thru 8

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 1 thru 8 03200 Reinforcing Steel 1 thru 8 03250 Concrete Accessories 1 thru 8 03290 Joints in Concrete 1 thru 4 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete 1 thru 24 03350 Concrete Finishes 1 thru 6 03370 Concrete Curing 1 thru 6 03400 Precast Concrete 1 thru 6 03600 Grout 1 thru 6 03732 Concrete Repairs 1 thru 6

DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04100 Mortar and Masonry Grout 1 thru 4 04150 Masonry Accessories 1 thru 6 04200 Unit Masonry 1 thru 12

DIVISION 5 METALS 05010 Metal Materials 1 thru 6 05035 Galvanizing 1 thru 4 05050 Metal Fastening 1 thru 14 05061 Stainless Steel 1 thru 12

https://hazenandsawyer-my.sharepoint.com/personal/henriquez_hazenandsawyer_com/Documents/Projects/20011-005/Design/Technical%20Specifications/Working%20Specs/Division%2001/01350%20-%20Seismic%20Anchorage%20and%20Bracing.doc


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE

05120 Structural Steel 1 thru 6 05140 Structural Aluminum 1 thru 4 05500 Metal Fabrications 1 thru 4

05531 Gratings, Access Hatches, and Access Doors 1 thru 4

05830 Bearing Devices and Anchoring 1 thru 8

DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 1 thru 4

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 1 thru 4 07700 Roof Specialties and Accessories 1 thru 4 07900 Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking 1 thru 6

DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 1 thru 4 08710 Finish Hardware 1 thru 8

DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09825 Acoustical Wall Panel System 1 thru 4 09900 Painting 1 thru 14

VOLUME 2

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISION 11000 Equipment General Provisions 1 thru 18

11183 Dual Core High Speed Direct-Drive Centrifugal Blower Packages 1 thru 34

11184 Single Core High Speed Direct-Drive Centrifugal Blower Packages 1 thru 34

11185 Installation of Owner-Furnished Aeration Blowers and Accessories 1 thru 4

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13127 Aluminum Flat Cover 1 thru 4

13205 Aboveground Fuel Storage Tank and Accessories 1 thru 8



DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15000 Basic Mechanical Requirements 1 thru 18

15013 Steel Pipe for Low Pressure Process Air Service 1 thru 8

15020 Pipe Supports 1 thru 6

15030 Piping and Equipment Identification Systems 1 thru 4

15101 Butterfly Valves 1 thru 2

15106 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators 1 thru 10

15170 Low Voltage Electric Motors 1 thru 16 15290 Insulation 1 thru 4 15390 Schedules 1 thru 4 15500 Basic HVAC Requirements 1 thru 6 15590 Fans 1 thru 8 15598 Metallic Ductwork and Duct Accessories 1 thru 10 15980 Commissioning of HVAC Systems 1 thru 6 15990 HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1 thru 10

DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16000 Basic Electrical Requirement 1 thru 10 16055 Power System Studies 1 thru 8 16111 Conduit 1 thru 20 16114 Cable Trays 1 thru 6 16118 Underground Electrical 1 thru 6 16121 Medium Voltage Cable 1 thru 8 16123 Low Voltage Wire and Cable 1 thru 14 16130 Boxes 1 thru 8 16141 Wiring Devices 1 thru 4 16170 Grounding and Bonding 1 thru 6 16190 Supporting Devices 1 thru 4 16195 Electrical - Identification 1 thru 4

16322 Medium Voltage Transformers – Liquid Filled Pad Mounted 1 thru 10

16346 Medium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breaker Switchgear – 15kV 1 thru 6

16360 Medium Voltage Pad Mounted Switchgear – 15kV 1 thru 18

16391 Neutral Grounding Resistors 1 thru 6 16426 Low Voltage Switchboards 1 thru 18



16440 Disconnect and Manual Transfer Switches 1 thru 6

16461 Dry Type Distribution Transformers 1 thru 6 16470 Panelboards 1 thru 10 16481 Individual Motor Controllers 1 thru 10 16500 Lighting 1 thru 8 16620 Packaged Engine Generator Systems 1 thru 26 16902 Electric Controls and Relays 1 thru 8

DIVISION 17 CONTROL AND INFORMATION SYSTEMS

17000 Control and Information System Scope and General Requirements 1 thru 10

17030 Control and Information System Submittals 1 thru 12

17040 Control and Information System Training Requirements 1 thru 6

17050 Tools, Supplies, and Spare Parts, General 1 thru 2 17060 Signal Coordination Requirements 1 thru 4

17070 Control and Information System Testing, General 1 thru 2

17071 Factory Acceptance Test 1 thru 4 17072 Field Testing 1 thru 4 17073 Final Acceptance Test 1 thru 2 17080 Quality Assurance 1 thru 6

17100 Control and Information System Hardware, General 1 thru 2

17120 Programmable Logic Controllers 1 thru 8 17125 Operator Interface Terminals 1 thru 4 17180 Process Control System Networks 1 thru 6 17190 Uninterruptible Power Systems 1 thru 4

17200 Control and Information System Software Requirements 1 thru 2

17500 Enclosures, General 1 thru 6 17510 Cabinets and Panels 1 thru 2 17520 Field Panels 1 thru 2 17550 Panel Instruments and Accessories 1 thru 6 17560 Surge Protection Devices 1 thru 4 17600 Unpowered Instruments, General 1 thru 4 17670 Level Switches (Suspended Float Type) 1 thru 2



17698 Instrumentation and Control System Accessories 1 thru 4

17700 Powered Instruments, General 1 thru 6

17740 Ultrasonic Liquid Level Measurement Systems 1 thru 2

17760 Pressure Indicating Transmitters 1 thru 4 17770 Temperature Indicating Transmitters 1 thru 2 17772 Resistance Temperature Detectors 1 thru 2 17800 Analytical Instruments, General 1 thru 6

17900 Schedules and Control Descriptions, General 1 thru 4

17910 Instrument Schedule 1 thru 2 17920 Control System Input/Output Schedule 1 thru 12 17950 Functional Control Descriptions 1 thru 14

APPENDICES (Provided on CD)

Appendix A APG Neuros Blower Scope of Supply Appendix B APG Neuros Blower Submittal Appendix C APG Neuros Blower Technical Support Appendix D TVRWRF Existing Blower Condition Assessment and Refurbishment Proposal Appendix E Electrical Hazard Assessment proposal for MVRWRF, SJVRWRF and TVRWRF Appendix F TVRWRF Plant 2 Air Line Replacement Appendix G TVRWRF Paint Test Report Appendix H TVRWRF Air Line Corrosion Assessment Appendix I TVRWRF Fiber Optic Cable Installation Drawings Appendix J TVRWRF Fiber Conduit Schedule Appendix K TVRWRF 23 MGD Closed Transition Drawings Appendix L TVRWRF LCP Shop Drawings

VOLUME 3

DRAWINGS (BOUND SEPARATELY)

NIB-1 00012 Notice Inviting Bid

EASTERN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT SPECIFICATION NO. 1360S

MV/SJV/TV RWRF BLOWER ELECTRIFICATION PROJECT 2019

NOTICE INVITING BID

NIB-1. Receipt of Bids. Sealed proposals (bids) for this project will be received and time-stamped by Eastern Municipal Water District no later than 10:00 a.m., TUESDAY, MARCH 12, 2019 (from time stamp clock) at which time and place they will be publicly opened.

Hand deliver/Fed Ex your bid to: EMWD, 2270 Trumble Road, Perris, CA, 92570 Mail your bid to: EMWD, P O Box 8300, Perris, CA 92572-8300

Bids are received at the Operations and Maintenance Center lobby only. Please follow the VENDORS/BIDDERS signs to the Operations and Maintenance parking lot, enter the lobby, and have your bids time-stamped by the Receptionist.

All bids submitted will become the property of EMWD and subject to disclosure under the Public Records Act. All bids will be posted on the website www.emwd.org approximately 10 days from bid opening.

NIB-2. Contract Documents. The contract documents, which include instructions to bidders, plans and specifications, are available at www.emwd.org. To view and download these documents, navigate to Construction and select Construction Bid Opportunities. If obtaining the contract documents online, please complete the Planholder Registration form to receive email notification of addenda issued. Bidders shall use full size drawings to prepare bid.

To purchase a CD of the contract documents, mail your request and a check in the amount of $5.00 (includes sales tax; non-refundable) as follows:

Eastern Municipal Water District, Field Engineering, Attn: Suzy Free Regular or Express mail: P.O. Box 8300, Perris, CA 92572-8300 UPS or Federal Express: 2270 Trumble Road, Perris, CA 92570 For faster service, please provide your Federal Express account number

Plans and Specifications may also be viewed at the District's office, 2270 Trumble Road, Perris, CA. A limited number of CD’s will be available for purchase at the pre-bid walk-through meeting. Please bring checks only.




NIB-3. Location and Description of Work. The work to be constructed is located at three (3) regional water reclamation facilities located at the following addresses:

• Moreno Valley Regional Water Reclamation Facility (MVRWRF) is located at 17140Kitching Street, Moreno Valley, Riverside County, CA 92551.

• San Jacinto Valley Regional Water Reclamation Facility (SJVRWRF) is located at770 N. Sanderson Avenue, San Jacinto, Riverside County, CA 92583.

• Temecula Valley Regional Water Reclamation Facility (TVRWRF) is located at42565 Avenida Alvarado, Temecula, Riverside County, CA 92590.

The work comprises of construction to relocate and recondition one existing high efficiency electric turbo blower from TVRWRF to MVRWRF, and install it and install new master control panel and programming at MVRWRF; install one high efficiency electric turbo blower, one standby generator and fuel storage tank, modify existing master control panel and programming at the SJVRWRF; install three high efficiency electric turbo blowers to replace existing engine-driven blowers, new redundant master control panel, one standby generator and fuel storage tank, modify existing master control panel and programming at the TVRWRF. The work shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, materials, and supplies needed to replace existing engine-driven blowers, install blowers, new generator and fuel storage tanks, provide new or modify existing piping, electrical, and control systems; and demolition and properly disposal of existing equipment, piping, electrical, controls, and associated appurtenances, in accordance with these specifications and the contract drawings.

NIB-4. Mandatory Pre-Bid Walk-Through will be conducted by EMWD on TUESDAY, FEBRUARY 19, 2019 at 9:00 a.m. The pre-bid walk through will start at the TVRWRF, then proceed to the SJVRWRF, and conclude at the MVRWRF. Bidders must attend the pre-bid walk-through meetings at all three facilities in order to be deemed responsive to the bid. Please refer to NIB-3 above for the addresses of each facility.

Please arrive promptly! All bidders must have an employee of their firm sign-in and attend the mandatory pre-bid walk-through meeting. Failure to do so shall deem your bid non-responsive.

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). For your safety, attendees shall bring and wear hard hats, safety vests, and close-toed shoes, if construction is present.

QUESTIONS: All questions must be submitted in writing by 5:00 p.m. on FRIDAY, FEBRUARY 22, 2019 to Sarah Li c/o Suzy Free; EMAIL: [email protected] & [email protected]. Questions received after this time may not be responded to.

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]


NIB-5. Contract Bonds. All bonds shall be executed by admitted surety insurers, as defined in Code of Civil Procedure section 995.120. Each proposal must be accompanied by a certified check or satisfactory surety bond (by utilizing the District’s Bid Bond form BB-1) for not less than 10% of the bidder's total contract price as a guarantee that the bidder shall, within seven (7) days after the mailing of a notice of acceptance of bid by the District to the bidder, enter into the written contract supplied by the District. The District shall return the bid bond, upon request. The Contractor shall furnish a faithful performance bond in an amount equal to 100% of the amount of the contract and a labor payment bond in an amount equal to 100% of the contract amount.

Pursuant to Section 995.660(a) of the Code of Civil Procedure, the Contractor shall submit the following documents with the performance and payment bonds:

(1) The original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney,bylaws, or other instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bondto do so;

(2) A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the State ofCalifornia’s Insurance Commissioner; and

(3) Copies of the insurer's most recent annual and quarterly statements filed with theDepartment of Insurance.

NO PAYMENT SHALL BE MADE UNTIL THE BONDS ARE APPROVED BY THE DISTRICT

NIB-6. Safety. Safety of all activities in connection with the work is of paramount and overriding importance to the District. The District is recognized by the California Occupational Safety and Health Administration (Cal OSHA) as an active participant in the California Voluntary Protection Program (Cal VPP). The District is designated a Cal STAR site due to our high-level commitment to safety. Bidders on this project will be required to comply with and meet all applicable Cal OSHA requirements of Title 8 of the California Code of Regulations, including their current Injury and Illness Prevention Plan, T8 CCR Section 3203.

All bidders shall complete the C-16 Annual Summary of Work Related Injuries and Illness (Cal/OSHA Form 300A) and the C-17 Contractor’s Cal/OSHA Compliance History and SIC Code form. Failure to fully divulge, complete and submit these forms may deem your bid non-responsive

A safety conference shall be scheduled prior to the preconstruction conference to review the experience modification rating, the respective safety requirements, and to discuss implementation of all health and safety provisions related to this project.


NIB-7. Contract Time. No bid or bid security may be withdrawn for seventy-five (75) calendar days after the date bids are received. The successful bidder shall, within seven (7) calendar days after the District mails a notice of acceptance of bid, return the signed agreement and bonds, and attend the pre-construction conference at the District office. The contract period shall commence seven (7) calendar days from the date of the Notice-of-Acceptance-of-Proposal. The Contractor shall complete all work, including testing, within three hundred and sixty (360) calendar days.

NIB-8. Contractor Classification. Bidders on this work will be required to be licensed by the State of California as Classification A - General Engineering Contractor at the time of the bid and at the time of award as such license is defined in Section 7056 and/or Section 7058 of the Business and Professional Code and Section 732 of the California Administrative Code.

Please refer to BR-1 Bidder’s Experience Record & Resumes Of Key Personnel for additional requirements.

NIB-9. Non-Discrimination. Bidders on this work will be required to comply with the provisions of the California Labor Code and with the President's Executive Order No. 11246 and supplements thereto. The requirements for bidders and contractors under this order are explained in the specifications.

NIB-10. Minimum Wages. In accordance with the provisions of the California Labor Code, the Director of Industrial Relations has ascertained the general prevailing rates of wages and the general prevailing rates for legal holiday and overtime work in Riverside County (refer to Section F-General Conditions). Copies of said rates are on file at the office of the District, which copies shall be made available for review to any interested party on request. The successful bidder shall post a copy of such determinations at the jobsite.

NIB-11. Public Works Requirements California Administrative Code, Title 8, Group 3, Section 16100 apply, which are/include:

A. all applicable requirements of sections 1771, 1774 - 1776, 1813, and 1815.B. the appropriate number of apprentices are on the job site, as set forth in Labor Code

Section 1777.5.C. workers' compensation coverage, set forth in Labor Code Sections 1860 and 1861.D. to keep accurate records of the work performed on the public works project, as set

forth in Labor Code Section 1812.E. inspection of payroll records pursuant to Labor Code Section 1776, and as set forth in

Section 16400 (e) of these regulations.F. and other requirements imposed by law.


NIB-12. Public Works Contractor and Subcontractor Registration. This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations.

No contractor or subcontractor may be listed on a bid proposal or be awarded a contract for a public works project unless registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code section 1725.5 [with limited exceptions from this requirement for bid purposes only under Labor Code section 1771.1(a)].

BIDDERS AND THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS (listed on the Designation of Subcontractors List C-05) are to provide an extract (pdf) at time of bid showing active registration from the PublicWorks Contractor Registration online registration at https://efiling.dir.ca.gov/PWCR/Search

All contractors and subcontractors, including soils, survey and inspection services must furnish electronic certified payroll records directly to the Labor Commissioner (aka Division of Labor Standards Enforcement). Additionally, the awarded Contractor shall submit certified payroll records to the District.

In addition, awarded Contractor must post jobsite notices prescribed by regulations.

NIB-13. Ineligibility of Contractor or Subcontractor. Pursuant to Section 1777.1 and 1777.7 of the Labor Code, any contractor or subcontractor who is found by the Labor Commissioner to be in violation of certain provisions of law and is debarred for a specific period of time, is ineligible to bid or work on, or be awarded, a public works contract.

NIB-14. Substitution of Securities. Substitution of securities shall be permitted for any monies withheld to ensure contract performance, in accordance with the provisions of law and Section F-General Conditions of the contract specifications.

NIB-15. No Equal Clause. The application of California Public Contract Code Section 3400 (b) applies. The District’s Board of Directors has authorized the General Manager to approve purchase and installation of certain equipment, material and services which has been designated sole-sourced and as no-equal in order to match other equipment and services already completed or in the course of construction.

https://efiling.dir.ca.gov/PWCR/Search

Q

FH

GA

TE

4

GA

TE

2

MAPES ROAD

TR

UM

BLE

R

OA

D

GATE

3

Building B (OMC)

Building A (ADMIN)

MAPES RD

TR

UM

BLE

RD

STATE HWY 74 EAST

VENDORS

PUBLIC

SHIPPING/RECEIVING

EMWD

Perris, Ca 92570

2270 Trumble Rd

N

S

EW

EASTERN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICTADMINISTRATIVE, OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE CENTER

N

S

EW

RIVERSIDE COUNTY, CALIFORNIA

To Reach the Main Office:

Take HWY 74 West to PerrisTurn Right (North) onto Trumble Rd.

From I-215 (North)...

Take HWY 74 East Exit to HemetTurn Left (North) onto Trumble Rd.

From I-215 (South)...

Take HWY 74 East Exit to HemetTurn Left (North) onto Trumble Rd.

From Hemet area...

FROM I - 215

TAKE STATE

HWY 74 EAST

OMCParking Lot

ADMINParking Lot

OMCLobby

C. REBER EMWD 11-27-2017

NOT TO SCALE

Vendor Bid Check-in Map 01

VENDOR “BID” CHECK-IN

AND PARKING

LOCATION

Please follow the sign(s) to theVENDORS entrance (Gate 3) and park

your vehicle in the Operations andMaintenance (OMC) parking lot.Please enter through the OMC

Lobby.

Take your BID to the Receptionistand have your BID stamped in

IMMEDIATELY

00016 Pre-Bid Walk-Thru Map/Directions

Mandatory Pre-Bid Walk-thru Map and Directions

OVERALL MAP OF PROJECT SITES


DIRECTIONS & MAPS TO THE TEMECULA VALLEY RWRF

Temecula Valley Regional Water Reclamation Facility (TVRWRF) is located at 42565 Avenida Alvarado, Temecula, CA 92590.

From the I-215 Freeway:

• Exit on Winchester Avenue, go west

• Turn left (north) on Diaz Road

• Turn right (west) on Avenida Alvarado

• Proceed to the end of the road and turn left into TVRWRF

• Proceed approximately ½ mile north of Globe Street directly to the plant entrance onthe east side of road

• Proceed to the main Control Building after passing the gate


DIRECTIONS & MAPS TO THE SAN JACINTO VALLEY RWRF

The San Jacinto RWRF is located at 770 N. Sanderson Avenue, San Jacinto, CA.

From the I-215 Freeway: From the north:

• Take 215 Freeway south to Ramona Expressway, going east• Turn right (south) at N. Sanderson Ave• Proceed south approximately 1.75 miles to 770 N. Sanderson Ave.• Plant is located on right/west side of road.• Go to the facility’s Control Building

From the south: • Take 215 Freeway north to State Highway 74 East (towards Hemet).• Turn left at the stoplight, proceeding east on State Highway 74.• Turn left (north) at N. Sanderson Ave• Proceed north approximately 3.5 miles to 770 N. Sanderson Ave. Plant is located on

left/west side of road• Go to the facility’s Control Building


DIRECTIONS & MAPS TO THE MORENO VALLEY RWRF

The Moreno Valley RWRF is located at 17140 Kitching St., Moreno Valley, CA 92551.

From the I-215 Freeway:

• Exit on Ramona Expressway, going east

• Turn left (north) on Perris Boulevard

• Turn right (east) on Globe Street

• Turn left (north) on Kitching Street

• Proceed approximately ½ mile north of Globe Street directly to the plant entrance onthe east side of road

• Go to the facility’s Control Building

Rev:04/11/16 B-1 00018 Instructions to Bidders

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

B-01. Form of Proposal and Signature. The proposal shall be submitted on the formprovided by the District and shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope marked and addressed as hereinafter directed. The Bidder shall state in words and figures the unit prices or the specific sums as the case may be, for which he proposes to supply the labor, materials, supplies, or machinery, and perform the work required by the specifications and drawings. In case words and figures do not agree, the words shall govern and the figures shall be disregarded. If the unit price and the total amount named by a Bidder for any item are not in agreement, the unit price alone will be considered as representing the Bidder's intention and totals will be corrected to conform thereto. The District reserves the right to correct any arithmetical errors. If the proposal is made by an individual it shall be signed and his full name and address shall be given; if it is made by a Firm it shall be signed with the co-partnership name by a member of the firm, who shall also sign his own name, and the name and address of each member shall be given; and if it is made by a corporation the name of the corporation shall be signed by its duly authorized officer or officers, and the names and titles of all officers of the corporation shall be given. No telegraphic proposal or telegraphic modification of a proposal will be considered.

B-02. Preparation of the Proposal. Blank spaces in the proposal shall be properly filled. The phraseology of the proposal must not be changed and no additions shall be made to the items mentioned therein. Conditions, limitations or provisos attached to a proposal will cause its rejection. Alterations by erasure or interlineation must be explained or noted in the proposal over the signature of the Bidder. Alternative proposals will not be considered unless specifically provided for in the Bidding Sheet. A Bidder may withdraw his proposal before the hour fixed for opening bids, without prejudice to himself, by submitting a written request to the General Manager of the District for its withdrawal, and his proposal will be returned to him unopened when reached in the procedure of opening bids without rendering the accompanying certified or cashier's check or bond subject to forfeiture as liquidated damages in like manner as in the case of failure to execute contract after award, as hereinafter provided. No proposal received after the time named or at any place other than the place stated in the Notice Inviting Bids (or Bidding Information sheet) will be considered. All bids will be opened and declared to be present at the opening. The District reserves the right to waive any informality in any bid, to reject any or all proposals, to reject one part of a proposal and accept the other, and to make award to the lowest responsible Bidder as the interest of the District may require.

The Non-Collusion Declaration, Subcontractor’s List naming each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the Contractor in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent (1/2 of 1%) of the Contractor's total bid, and Bid Bond or Certified or Cashier’s Check, and all required forms shall be submitted with the proposal at time of bid. Pursuant to the Iran Contracting Act of 2010 (Pub. Cont. Code § 2200-2208), contracts of one million dollars ($1,000,000) or more shall require bidder to submit the Iran Contract Act Certification with the proposal at time of bid. Where bonds are required, the Bidder shall name in his proposal the surety or sureties, which have agreed to furnish said bonds.

B-2 00018 Instructions to Bidders

B-03. Lowest Responsible Bidder. In selecting the lowest responsible Bidder,consideration will be given to the general competency of the Bidder for the performance of the work covered by the proposal, and the bidder’s financial standing, if requested. To receive favorable consideration, a bidder must present evidence satisfactory to the District that he or his associates are personally competent to manage the proposed undertaking and to carry it forward to a successful conclusion. Professional integrity and honesty of purpose shall be essential requirements.

A showing of adequate financial resources may be requested by the District, but will not alone determine whether a bidder is competent to undertake the proposed work. Each bidder must furnish a record of past performance and experience in the form required. To this end, each proposal, except as noted below, shall be supported by a statement of the bidder's experience on the form provided. This form, completely filled out, must be submitted along with the proposal. Incomplete or false statements submitted in connection with a proposal may, at the option of the Board of Directors of the District, be sufficient cause for its rejection. The District shall be the final authority with regard to whether a bid is responsive to the call for bids and as to whether a bidder is a responsible bidder under the conditions of his bid.

B-04. Equalizing Factors. Whenever applicable, equalizing elements or factors notspecifically mentioned or provided for herein, such as costs of transportation, inspection (including salaries and travel and subsistence expenses), installation, and operation, or any other factor or element in addition to that of price which would affect the total cost or value to the District will be taken into consideration in comparing bids for award of contract.

B-05. Certified or Cashier's Check or Bond. As a guarantee of good faith, each biddershall submit with his proposal an unconditional certified or cashier's check drawn on a solvent state or national bank, or he may furnish a bond, utilizing the District’s Bid Bond form BB-1, with a company acceptable to the District in the sum stated in the Notice Inviting Bids, payable to the Eastern Municipal Water District, said check or bond to be held uncollected until it becomes subject to disposal as herein provided. Any condition or limitation placed upon said check or bond may render it informal and may, at the option of the Board result in the rejection of the proposal under which such check is submitted. Original Bid Bond (BB-1) must include Notary Public Acknowledgement for Surety and Contractor. If a Bidder to whom an award is made fails or refuses to execute the contract and furnish the required bond, all within the time stated in Section B-6 hereof, said check or bond and the monies represented thereby shall be and remain the property of the District and shall be subject to deposit with the Treasurer of the District as other monies belonging to the District, the amount thereof being agreed to by the Bidder as liquidated damages due the District on account of the delay in the execution of the contract and bond, and in the performance of the work thereunder, resulting from such failure or refusal. Original Bid bond (BB-1) shall remain on file at the District with the original bid proposal and be returned upon writtenrequest only. Certified checks shall be returned at the expiration of 60 days from the date ofopening bids.


B-06. Execution of Contract. A Bidder to whom the award is made shall execute andreturn a written contract with the District on the form of Agreement attached hereto and furnish good and approved bond as required in the following paragraph, all in accordance with the provisions hereof and within the time stated in the Notice Inviting Bids (or Bidding Information sheet) or such additional time as may be allowed by the Engineer. The District will return a copy of the fully executed contract upon completion by the General Manager.

If a Bidder to whom the award is made fails or refuses to enter into contract as herein provided, or to conform to any of the stipulated requirements in connection therewith, his check shall become the property of the District as provided in Section B-5 hereof, the award will be annulled, and in the discretion of the District an award may be made to the Bidder whose proposal is next most acceptable to the District; and such Bidder shall fulfill every stipulation embraced herein as if he were the party to whom the first award was made. A corporation to which an award is made will be required, before the contract is finally executed, to furnish evidence of its corporate existence and of the authority of the officer signing the contract and bond for the corporation to so sign.

B-07. Bond

(a) A Bidder to whom contract is awarded shall within the time mentioned in thepreceding paragraph furnish a bond with a responsible corporate surety or corporate sureties conditioned upon the faithful performance by the said Bidder of all covenants and stipulations in the contract. Said bond shall be in the amount stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids (or Bidding Information sheet). Bonds in amounts of $1,000 or less shall be made in multiples of $100; in amounts exceeding $1,000 but not exceeding $5,000 in multiples of $500; in amounts exceeding $5,000 in multiples of $1,000; provided, that the amount of the bond shall be fixed at the lowest sum that fulfills all conditions of the contract.

(b) The surety or sureties on the bond furnished must be satisfactory to the Board.The required bond shall be furnished by the Bidder to whom contract has been awarded at his own cost and expense.

(c) Attention is invited to the provisions of the Insurance Code of the State ofCalifornia with reference to the writing of insurance policies and bonds covering risks located in this State, and the premiums and commissions thereon. A Bidder to whom contract is awarded shall furnish at the time his bond is submitted for approval, satisfactory evidence that the requirements of said code have been observed.

(d) The bond furnished by the surety shall agree to acceptance by the surety ofarbitration of disputes, where selected in accordance with Section F, Arbitration.

Rev:04/11/16 B-4 00018 Instructions to Bidders

B-08. Address and Marking of Proposal. The envelope enclosing a proposal MUST besealed and addressed as follows:

MAIL: General Manager STREET: General Manager Eastern Municipal Water District Eastern Municipal Water District Attn: Field Engineering Department Attn: Field Engineering Department P O Box 8300 2270 Trumble Road Perris, CA 92572-8300 Perris, CA 92570

The envelope MUST be plainly marked in the upper left hand with the name and address of the bidder, and bear the words:

Proposal For: (specification number) (name of project (date and hour)

The statement of Bidder's experience and financial condition, when required, if not already on file in the District Office, and a certified or cashier's check, or bond, should be enclosed in the same envelope with the proposal.

B-09. Complete Specifications and Drawings. It shall be the responsibility of the Bidder to verify the completeness of his set of specifications and drawings and neither the District nor any of its officers shall be held responsible for any omission therefrom unless such omission has been called to the attention of the District prior to the submission of bids. Bidders shall use full size drawings to prepare said bid.

B-10. Addenda and/or Letter of Clarification. Bidder shall be responsible for verifyingthat any addenda or letter of clarification issued by the District has been investigated and received. By submitting a bid, Bidder certifies that any addenda and letters of clarification issued to these specifications, whether acknowledged or not on the Bidding Sheets, shall be made a part of the contract. Bidder further agrees to perform all labor and services and furnish all materials, tools and appliances necessary for completing the work called out in the addenda or letter of clarification at no additional cost to the District.

B-11. Improperly Balanced Proposals. Any proposal which in the opinion of theEngineer is so unbalanced between the various contract items as to be detrimental to the interests of the District will be rejected.


B-12. Local Conditions. Bidders shall read the specifications, any background material, examine the drawings, and make their own estimates of the existing facilities and the difficulties which will attend the execution of the work called for by the proposed contract, including local conditions, uncertainty of weather, and all other contingencies. The District will identify for Bidders the location of existing utilities located on the site of construction which require removal, relocation or protection. AN EMPLOYEE ON THE COMPANY’S PAYROLL MUST HAVE INSPECTED THE SITE OF THE PROPOSED WORK TO BE CONSIDERED A RESPONSIVE BIDDER. Bidders shall satisfy themselves by personal examination of the locations of the proposed work, and by such other means as they may choose as to actual conditions and requirements and as to the accuracy of the quantities stated in the Bidding Sheet. Information derived from the maps, plans, specifications, profiles, or drawings, or from the Engineer or his assistants, shall not relieve the bidder of this responsibility, and the interpretation of the data disclosed by borings or other preliminary investigations is not guaranteed by the District.

The quantities of work or materials stated in the unit price items of the Bidding Sheet are given only as a basis for the comparison of bids and the District does not expressly or by implication agree that the actual amount of work or material will correspond therewith, but reserves the right to increase or decrease the amount of any unit price item of the work as may be deemed necessary or expedient by the Engineer.

Bidders shall not at any time after the submission of a bid make or have any claim for damages or anticipated profits or loss of profit or otherwise because of any difference between the quantities of work actually done and material furnished and those stated in said unit price items of the Bidding Sheet.


Pursuant to Public Contract Code section 7104, any public works contract of a local public entity which involves digging trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four feet below the surface shall provide for the following: (a) That the contractor shall promptly, and before the following conditions are disturbed, notify the public entity, in writing, of any: (1) Material that the contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste, as defined in Section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code, that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law. (2) Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated by information about the site made available to bidders prior to the deadline for submitting bids. (3) Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the contract. (b) That the public entity shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that the conditions do materially so differ, or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in the contractor's cost of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the work shall issue a change order under the procedures described in the contract. (c) That, in the event that a dispute arises between the public entity and the contractor whether the conditions materially differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the work, the contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date provided for by the contract, but shall proceed with all work to be performed under the contract. The contractor shall retain any and all rights provided either by contract or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the contracting parties.

B-13. Insurance. Attention is invited to the requirements set forth in SPECIFICATION -GENERAL CONDITIONS, Art. F-04 Contractor's and Subcontractor's Insurance and the Special Conditions.

BS-1 00020 Bidding Sheets


MV/SJV/TV RWRF BLOWER ELECTRIFICATION PROJECT

BIDDING SHEETS

The Contractor shall construct the project under these Specifications all in conformance with the Contract Drawings listed in Section P and these Specifications.

The District reserves the right to:

A. Accept or reject any or all bids on this specification;B. Award Contract to the lowest qualified bidder, based on the total bid price:C. Waive any defects and informalities.

The District shall be the final authority with regard to whether a bid is responsive to the call for bids and to whether a bidder is a responsible bidder under the conditions of his bid, or for any reason.

The total contract price shall include all work, materials and equipment needed to complete the project as defined in the General Conditions, Section F. The bidder shall include costs for such other items in the most appropriate category (bid item).

TO BE INSTALLED:

The District will furnish four new and one existing Neuros blowers, as well as, two new master control panels for the Contractor to install. The detailed item list is provided in Appendix A & B. The Contractor shall pick up all furnished items at the District Storage Building at each site. The Contractor shall load furnished items to their truck and move to installation locations.

EASTERN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT SPECIFICATION NO.1360S


BIDDING SHEETS

Unit Total Bid

Item Qty Unit Description

(Unit Price Written in Words)Price

(Figures) Amount (Figures)


1 1 LS Mobilization and Approved: Bonds, Insurance, and Schedule of Values (see Section 01026).

Two Hundred and Fifty Thousand Dollars $ PRESET $ 250,000 (words)

2 1 LS Provide Technical Supports for APG Neuros Blowers at, MVRWRF, SJVRWRF, and TVRWRF per project Contract Documents. (Refer to Appendix C for details.)

Ninety Thousand Dollars $ PRESET $ 90,000 (words)

3 1 LS Recondition existing APG Neuros blower at TVRWRF by APG Neuros. (Refer to Appendix D for details.)

Seventy-Five Thousand Five Hundred Dollars $ PRESET $ 75,500 (words)

4 1 LS Provide Electrical Hazard Assessment Study for MVRWRF, SJVRWRF, and TVRWRF per project Contract Documents. (Refer to Appendix E for details.)

One Hundred Forty-Nine Thousand

Five Hundred and Fifty Dollars $ PRESET $ 149,550 (words)



BIDDING SHEETS

Unit Total Bid





5 1 LS Provide Process Control and Integration Service for MVRWRF, SJVRWRF, and TVRWRF as identified in Section 17000 of project Contract Documents.

$ Lump Sum $ (words)

6 1 LS At TVRWRF, furnish all materials, labor, and supplies to disconnect one existing electrical blower for reconditioning, replace three existing engine-driven blowers with three electrical high speed turbo bowers and associated equipment, install new redundant master control panel, one new generator, fuel storage tank, including new and modifications to existing piping, electrical, control systems; and associated appurtenances per the contract plans and specifications.




BIDDING SHEETS

Unit Total Bid





7 1 LS At SJVRWRF, furnish all materials, labor, and supplies to install one electrical high speed turbo bowers and associated equipment, one generator and fuel storage tank, including new and modifications to existing piping, electrical, control systems; and associated appurtenances per the contract plans and specifications.


8 1 LS At MVRWRF, recondition one existing electrical turbo blower removed from TVRWRF site, and move it to MVRWRF, furnish all materials, labor, and supplies to install the reconditioned turbo bower and associated equipment, including new master control panel, exhaustive fans and louvers, new and modifications to existing piping, electrical, control systems; and associated appurtenances per the contract plans and specifications.


TOTAL BID (Basis of award) $________________________



MV/SJV/TV RWRF BLOWER ELECTRIFICATION PROJECT BIDDING SHEETS

ADDITION OR DEDUCTION: Provision is made here for the bidder to include an addition/deduction in their bid, if desired, to reflect any last minute adjustments in prices. The addition/deduction, if made, will be proportionately applied to item(s) (fill in) and reflected in the unit prices for payment purposes. If the addition/deduction affects more than one bid item, the proportionate application of the addition/deduction shall be mutually agreed upon by the Contractor and the District at the prejob.

Addenda and/or Letter of Clarification By submitting a bid, Bidder certifies that any addenda and letters of clarification issued to these specifications, whether acknowledged or not below, shall be made a part of the contract. Bidder further agrees to perform all labor and services and furnish all materials, tools and appliances necessary for completing the work called out in the addenda or letter of clarification.

Addenda received:

Letter of Clarification received:

Person who inspected site of the proposed work as an employee of your firm: (Representative must have inspected the jobsite and be an employee on the company’s payroll to be considered a responsive bidder)

(Name) (Date of Inspection)


EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

Identify the name of the manufacturer for the equipment and/or material items listed below, if not specified. Acceptable manufacturers listed shall be utilized by the Contractor in his construction. No substitution of the Contractor's listed manufacturer will be permitted without written justification and the approval of the District. PRODUCTS OF MANUFACTURERS LISTED AS EQUALS TO THOSE SPECIFIED MUST BE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL BY THE DISTRICT NOT LATER THAN THE TENTH (10TH) DAY PRECEDING THE DATE SET FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS.

NOTE

Please refer to Special Conditions SC-13 for Specified Equipment with No Equal Substitution.

C3-1 00024 Proposal (7 day)

P R O P O S A L

The undersigned hereby declares, as Bidder, that the only persons or parties interested in this proposal as principals are those named herein; that no director or any other officer or employee of the Eastern Municipal Water District is in any manner interested directly or indirectly in this proposal or in the profits to be derived from the contract proposed to be taken; that this bid is made without any connection with any person or persons making a bid for the same purpose; that the bid is in all respects fair and without collusion or fraud; that he has read the Notice Inviting Bids (or Bidding Information), Insurance Requirements and the Instructions to Bidders and agrees to all the stipulations contained herein; that he proposes and agrees that if his bid as submitted in the attached sheets, be accepted he will contract in the form so approved and furnish all items called for in accordance with the provisions of said approved form of Agreement, Insurance Requirements and the Specifications and to deliver the same within the time stipulated therein; and that he will accept in full payment therefore the prices named in said Bid Sheet.

The Bidder further agrees, that upon receipt of written notice of the acceptance of this proposal within 60 days after the day of opening bids (unless otherwise specified in the Notice Inviting Bids or Bidding Information) he will execute and return the Contract in accordance with the proposal as accepted and furnish the required bond(s) within SEVEN (7) days from the date of mailing the Notice of Acceptance of Proposal to him at his address given below, or within such time as allowed by the Engineer; and that upon his failure or refusal to do so within the said time, then the certified or cashier's check or bond accompanying this bid shall become the property of and be retained by the Eastern Municipal Water District as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, and shall be deposited with the Treasurer of said Eastern Municipal Water District as monies belonging to the Eastern Municipal Water District; provided, that if said Bidder shall execute the Contract and furnish the required bond within the time aforesaid, his check or bond shall be returned to him thereafter.

The Bidder further declares that the surety or sureties named in the attached sheet have agreed to furnish bond in form and amount set forth in the accompanying Notice Inviting Bids (or Bidding Information) and paragraph B-6 of the Instructions to Bidders, in the event contract is awarded on basis of this proposal.

Company:

Address: Date:

By: (Print Name) (Name should appear below) (Signature of Owner or Officer required)

Name(s) and Title of Member of Firm or Office of Corporation authorized to enter into a binding Contract:

Name Title

Address (if different from above)

For further details on this proposal, please contact: Name: Address: Email Address: Telephone:

C3-2 00024 Proposal (7 day)


BR-1 00027 Bidder’s Experience/Resumes



BIDDER’S 10-YEAR EXPERIENCE RECORD & RESUMES OF KEY PERSONNEL

All bidders must provide a detailed 10-year experience record showing successful completion, as a General Contractor, of at least three similar projects within the last 10 years as follows:

A. Contract Type - Public Works

B. Installation of 200HP or greater motor for process systems at a water orwastewater treatment plant.

C. Installation of 12” and larger aboveground pipelines for process systems.

Additionally, bidders must include resumes of key personnel proposed to work on this project when submitting your bid. This information will be critical in meeting requirements as a responsible bidder.

Failure to submit any of the above-mentioned information with your bid “may” deem your bid non-responsive

00027 Bidder’s Experience/Resumes

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

YEAR

TY

PE/D

ESCR

IPTI

ON

OF

WO

RK

VALU

E O

F W

ORK

PE

RFO

RMED

LO

CATI

ON

OF

WO

RK (C

ITY)

ENG

INEE

R /

CON

TACT

PER

SON

Ad

dres

s & p

hone

#

OW

NER

/

(CO

NTA

CT P

ERSO

N

Addr

ess &

pho

ne #

DETAILED EXPERIENCE RECORD PLEASE USE ADDITIONAL SHEETS

BR-2 00027 Bidder’s Experience/Resumes

PAGE

LEF

T IN

TEN

TIO

NAL

LY B

LAN

K


RESUMES OF KEY PERSONNEL (ATTACH HERE)

C-5(a) 00028 Designation of Subcontractors

DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS

In compliance with the provisions of Sec. 4100-4111, inclusive, of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, and any amendments thereof, each bidder shall set forth below: (a) The name and the location of the place of business of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the Contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent (1/2 of 1%) of the Contractor's total bid; and (b) the portion of the work which will be done by each such subcontractor.

Each subcontractor shall possess, both at the time the bid is submitted and at all times when work is performed, a valid contractor's license for the appropriate classification necessary to perform the work for which that subcontractor is listed. Each subcontractor shall be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations at time of bid and during the performance of the Contract.

If the Contractor fails to specify a subcontractor for any portion of the work to be performed under the contract in excess of one-half of one percent (1/2 of 1%) of the Contractor's total bid, he agrees that he is fully qualified to perform that work himself, and that he shall perform that work himself, and that he shall perform that portion himself.

The Contractor shall not, without the consent of the District, or unless, either: (a) Substitute any person as subcontractor in place of the subcontractor designated in the original bid; (b) Permit any such subcontract to be assigned or transferred or allow it to be performed by anyone other than the original subcontractor listed in the bid; or (c) Sublet or subcontract any portion of the work in excess of one-half of one percent (1/2 of 1%) of the Contractor's total bid as to which his original bid did not designate a subcontractor.

In the following instances, the District may consent to the substitution of another subcontractor:

(1) When the subcontractor listed in the bid after having a reasonable opportunity to do sofails or refuses to execute the written contract which is based upon the general terms, conditions, plans and specifications of the involved project or the terms of the subcontractor's written bid when it is presented to the subcontractor by the prime subcontractor;

(2) When the listed subcontractor becomes bankrupt or insolvent;

(3) When the listed subcontractor fails or refuses to perform his or her subcontract;

(4) When the listed subcontractor fails or refuses to meet the bond requirements of theprime Contractor to furnish a bond guaranteeing prompt and faithful performance of the subcontract and the payment of all claims for labor and materials furnished or used pursuant to Public Contract Code 4108;

(5) When the prime Contractor demonstrates to the District, as set forth in Public ContractCode 4107.5 that the name of the subcontractor was listed as the result of an inadvertent clerical error;

C-5(b) 00028 Designation of Subcontractors

As a condition to assert claim of clerical error, the Contractor must give written notice of the inadvertent clerical error to the District with copies to both the listed and intended subcontractor within two (2) working days of the time of the prime bid opening. The District shall consent to the substitution if the prime Contractor and both subcontractor listed in error and the intended subcontractor each submit an affidavit to the District within eight (8) working days of the time of the prime bid opening indicating that an inadvertent clerical error was made.

The District shall also consent to the substitution of the intended Contractor if affidavits are filed by both the prime Contractor and the intended Subcontractor within six (6) working days and the subcontractor claimed to be listed in error does not submit within six (6) working days a written objection to the claim to both the District and the Contractor.

However, if the listed subcontractor submits a written objection to the Contractor's claim of inadvertent clerical error within six (6) working days from the time of the prime bid opening, the District shall investigate the claims of the parties and shall hold a public hearing as described herein to determine the validity of those claims.

Any declarations submitted must be submitted under penalty of perjury by all three (3) parties and supported by testimony under oath and subject to cross-examination.

(6) When the listed Contractor is not licensed pursuant to the Contractor's license law;

(7) When the District determines that the work performed by the listed subcontractor issubstantially unsatisfactory and not in substantial accordance with the plans and specifications, or that the subcontractor is substantially delaying or disrupting the progress of the work.

Prior to any substitution of a subcontractor, the District shall give notice in writing to the listed subcontractor of the request to substitute subcontractors and the reasons for the request. The notice shall be served by registered or certified mail to the last known address of the subcontractor. The listed subcontractor who has been so notified shall have five (5) working days within which to submit written objections to the substitution to the District. Failure to file these written objections shall constitute the listed subcontractor's consent to the substitution. If written objections are filed, the District shall give notice in writing of at least five (5) working days to the listed subcontractor of a hearing by the District on the Contractor's request for substitution.

The original bid need not designate a subcontractor for the performance of any change orders.

No subletting or subcontracting of any portion of the work in excess of one-half of one percent (1/2 of 1%) of the prime Contractor's total bid shall be permitted except in cases of public emergency or necessity and then only after a written finding is made by the District as a public record setting forth the facts constituting the emergency or necessity.

As used in this designation, the term subcontractor means only those subcontractors who contract directly with the prime Contractor.

C-5(c) 00028 Designation of Subcontractors

If the Contractor violates any of the provisions of this section, it is deemed to have violated and breached this contract, and the District may exercise the option in its own discretion of: (1) canceling the contract; or (2) assessing the contract or a penalty in an amount of not more than ten percent (10%) of the amount of the subcontract involved, and this penalty shall be deposited in the fund out of which the prime contract is awarded. The Contractor shall be entitled to a public hearing in five (5) days notice of the time and place of the hearing.

C-5(d) 00028 Designation of Subcontractors

LIST OF DESIGNATED SUBCONTRACTORS

SPEC #:

PROJECT TITLE:

NAME OF CONTRACTOR:

In compliance with the provisions of Sec. 4100-4111, inclusive, of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, and any amendments thereof, each bidder shall set forth: the name, location of the place of business, license number, portion of the work which will be done by each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the Contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement in an amount in excess of one-half of one percent (1/2 of 1%) of the Contractor's total bid. Each portion of Subcontracted work noted in the below table must be specific and contain all major activities associated with completion of the project, outside of the services provided by the bidding Contractor. Ambiguous and/or incomplete Subcontracted work information may deem the bid nonresponsive. Each subcontractor shall possess, both at the time the bid is submitted and at all times when work is performed, a valid contractor's license for the appropriate classification necessary to perform the work for which that subcontractor is listed.

BIDDER SHALL PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: Company Name, Business Address, Email Address, License No., Contractor Registration No.,

Subcontract Work, and % Of Total Bid

* PLEASE WRITE LEGIBLY*

LICENSED SUBCONTRACTOR’S NAME, BUSINESS ADDRESS, & EMAIL ADDRESS

LICENSE # SUBCONTRACT WORK

(Be Specific)

% OF TOTAL BID CONTRACTOR

REGISTRATION #

Company Name: License #:

-------------------------- DIR Registration #:

Address:

Email Address:



Address:

Email Address:

C-5(e) 00028 Designation of Subcontractors

LICENSED SUBCONTRACTOR’S NAME, BUSINESS ADDRESS, & EMAIL ADDRESS

LICENSE # SUBCONTRACT WORK

(Be Specific)

% OF TOTAL BID



Address:

Email Address:



Address:

Email Address:



Address:

Email Address:


--------------------------- DIR Registration #:

Address:

Email Address:


--------------------------- DIR Registration #:

Address:

Email Address:

(Do not list alternative subcontractors for the same work) (Use additional pages if needed)

C6-1 00030 Contractors Licensing Statement

CONTRACTOR'S LICENSING STATEMENT

The undersigned is licensed in accordance with the laws of the State of providing for the registration of contractors. The representations made herein and in the proposal documents are made under penalty of perjury. The undersigned is hereby representing that he is properly licensed both at the time that he submits a bid as well as at the time the contract is awarded, if the contract is awarded to the undersigned.

CONTRACTOR'S CLASSIFICATION

LICENSE NUMBER TYPE EXPIRATION DATE

A. INDIVIDUAL CONTRACTOR

NAME OF INDIVIDUAL CONTRACTOR:

BUSINESS ADDRESS:

PHONE NUMBER:

SIGNATURE OF OWNER:

B. FIRM OR PARTNERSHIP

NAME OF FIRM OR PARTNERSHIP:

BUSINESS ADDRESS:

PHONE NUMBER:

SIGNATURE(S) & TITLE OF MEMBERS SIGNING ON BEHALF OF THE PARTNERSHIP:

SIGNATURE: TITLE:

SIGNATURE: TITLE:

SIGNATURE: TITLE:

C. CORPORATION

NAME OF CORPORATION:

BUSINESS ADDRESS:

PHONE NUMBER:

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED OFFICER OF CORPORATION:

SIGNATURE: TITLE:

C6-2 00030 Contractors Licensing Statement


C7-1 00032 Non-Collusion Declaration

NON-COLLUSION DECLARATION

TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BID

The undersigned declares:

I am the of ,

the party making the foregoing bid.

The bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation. The bid is genuine and not collusive or sham. The bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid. The bidder has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or to refrain from bidding. The bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or of any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or of that of any other bidder. All statements contained in the bid are true. The bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof, to effectuate a collusive or sham bid, and has not paid, and will not pay, any person or entity for such purpose.

Any person executing this declaration on behalf of a bidder that is a corporation, partnership, joint venture, limited liability company, limited liability partnership, or any other entity, hereby represents that he or she has full power to execute, and does execute, this declaration on behalf of the bidder.

I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct and that this declaration is executed on ____________[date], at ___________________[city], ____________________[state]

Signed:

Name: (Print Name Here)

C7-2 00032 Non-Collusion Declaration


Rev: 06/12/17 C8(a) 00034 Agreement

AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT, effective this day of ,

in the year , by and between the EASTERN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT,

hereinafter designated as the "District", party of the first part, and

hereinafter designated as the Contractor, party of the second part,

WITNESSETH: That in consideration of the mutual covenants herein contained and other valuable

consideration, the parties hereto agree as follows, to wit:

ARTICLE I. For and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned to be

made and performed by the District, the Contractor agrees with the District to perform the following

work:

as set forth in Specification No. and to perform and complete in a good and workmanlike manner all the work pertaining thereto shown on the drawings and described in the specifications

hereto attached and by this reference made a part thereof, to furnish at his own proper cost and

expense all tools, equipment, labor and materials necessary therefor, except such materials as in the said specifications are stipulated to be furnished by the District, and to do everything required by

this Agreement and the said specifications and drawings.

ARTICLE II. The District will pay and the Contractor shall receive in full compensation therefor the

prices named in

for of the bidding sheet of the proposal hereto attached for

furnishing all said materials and labors, furnishing and removing all plants, temporary works or

structures, tools and equipment, and doing all the work contemplated and embraced in this

Agreement; also for all loss and damage arising out of the nature of the work aforesaid, or from the

action of the elements, or from any unforeseen difficulties which may arise or be encountered in the

prosecution of the work until its acceptance by the District, and for all risks of every description

connected with the work; also for all expenses incurred by or in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of work; except such as in the said specifications are expressly stipulated to be

borne by the District; and for well and faithfully completing the work and the whole thereof, in the

manner shown and described in the said drawings and specifications and in accordance with the

requirements of the Engineer under them.

Rev: 06/12/17 C8(b) 00034 Agreement

ARTICLE III. The District hereby promises and agrees with the said Contractor to employ, and does

hereby employ the said Contractor to provide the materials and to do the work according to the

terms and conditions herein contained and referred to, for the prices aforesaid, and hereby

contracts to pay the same at the time, and in the manner and upon the conditions set forth in the

specifications; and the said parties for themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,

successors, and assigns, do hereby agree to the full performance of the covenants herein

contained.

ARTICLE IV. The Notice Inviting Bids, the Instructions to Bidders, the Proposal, Addenda, the

Specifications, and the Drawings mentioned therein, all of which are hereto attached, are hereby

incorporated in and made a part of this Agreement.

ARTICLE V. “Dispute Resolution (Per Public Contract Code § 9204) Upon receipt by District of a

claim by Contractor for a time extension or payment, sent by registered mail or certified mail with

return receipt requested, District shall, within 45 days, review the claim and provide Contractor a

written statement indicating what portion of the claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed.

Contractor shall furnish reasonable documentation to support the claim, and, upon mutual

agreement, this time period may be extended.

If District requires Board approval to issue its written statement to Contractor, and the Board does

not meet within the 45 days or mutually agreed upon time extension, District shall have 3 days after

its next regular Board meeting following the expiration of the 45-day period or extension to provide

Contractor with its written statement.

Any payments owed Contractor on undisputed portions of its claim shall be made by District within

60 days of issuance of its written statement.

If Contractor disputes District’s written response, or if District fails to provide a written response,

Contractor may demand an informal settlement conference. Such demand shall be made in writing,

sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, and District shall schedule the

settlement conference within 30 days of receiving demand.

Within 10 days following any settlement conference, District shall issue a second written statement

indicating which portions of the claim are disputed and which portions are undisputed.

Rev: 06/12/17 C8(c) 00034 Agreement

Any payments owed for undisputed portions of the claim shall be made within 60 days of District’s

written statement.

Any remaining disputed portions of the claim shall be submitted to non-binding arbitration. If the

Parties cannot agree on a mediator within 10 days after the disputed portion has been identified,

each Party shall select a mediator, and those mediators shall select a neutral to conduct the

mediation.

If mediation is unsuccessful, the portions of the claim remaining in dispute shall be subject to

applicable procedures provided by law. If the matter is litigated, the mediation conducted pursuant

to this provision shall satisfy the Parties’ obligations under section 20104.4 to mediate after

litigation has commenced.

Failure by District to comply with this provision shall result in the claim being denied in its entirety.

The procedures set forth in this provision shall apply to subcontractors and lower tier

subcontractors, who may request that Contractor submit a claim to District on their behalf. If such

a request is made, Contractor shall notify the requesting subcontractor within 45 days whether

Contractor submitted the claim to District, and if not, the reasons therefor.”

Rev: 06/12/17 C8(d) 00034 Agreement

IN WITNESS WHEREOF: The parties hereto have caused this contract to be executed the day and

year first above written.

EASTERN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT

Date: By: Paul D. Jones, II, P.E., General Manager

ATTEST:

By: Sheila Zelaya, Board Secretary

CONTRACTOR

(Company Name)

Date: By: (Signature)

(Print or Type Name & Title)

Rev: 04/11/16 Page C9-1 00036 Performance Bond

Eastern Municipal Water District Bond No.

PERFORMANCE BOND Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where

applicable.

KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Here insert full name and address of CONTRACTOR)

as Principal, hereinafter called Principal; and (Here insert full name and address of SURETY)

as Surety, hereinafter Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Full name and address of OWNER)

Eastern Municipal Water District P O Box 8300 Perris, CA 92572-8300

as Obligee, hereinafter called Owner, for the use and benefit of claimants as herein below defined, in the amount of: $ (Amount written in words) for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has by written agreement entered into a contract with Owner in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and Addenda for:

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Date:

Spec Number:

Project Name:

Project Location: which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Construction Contract.


1 The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3.1. 3 The Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after:

3.1 The Owner has notified the Contractor and the Surety at its address described in Paragraph 10 below of the Owner's intention to terminate the Construction Contract and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than ten days after service of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and 3.2 The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor’s right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than ten days after the Contractor and the Surety have been served notice as provided in Subparagraph 3.1; and 3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the terms of the contract with the Owner.

4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the following actions:

4.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner in the Owner's sole discretion, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; or 4.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contractors; or 4.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Owner’s concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor’s default; or 4.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:


.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefor to the Owner; or

.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and

notify the Owner citing reasons therefor.

5 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. 6 After the Owner has terminated the Contractor’s right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for:

6.1 The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; 6.2 Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4; and 6.3 Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.

7 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators or successors. 8 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. 9 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond shall be instituted in the Superior Court of the County of Riverside, State of California, The parties expressly consent to the jurisdiction of said court and agree that said court shall be a proper venue for any such action. This Bond shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of California, excluding any choice of law provisions.


10 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. 11 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. 12 DEFINITIONS 12.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made,

including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract and by all amounts withheld by the Owner in response to stop notices served upon the Owner, unless and until such stop notices are released. 12.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.

12.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of the Construction Contract.

Signed and sealed this day of ,

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

Company: Company: (Corporate Seal)

Signature: Signature:

Name: Name:

Title: Title: Attorney-in-Fact

Notary Public Acknowledgment required for Surety and Contractor

Rev: 02/24/15 Page C10-1 00038 Payment Bond

Eastern Municipal Water District Bond No.

PAYMENT BOND This bond is issued simultaneously with performance bond in favor of the Owner conditioned on the full and faithful performance of the contract. Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or

other party shall be considered plural where applicable.

KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Here insert full name and address of CONTRACTOR)

as Principal, hereinafter called Principal; and (Here insert full name and address of SURETY)

as Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Full name and address of OWNER)

Eastern Municipal Water District P O Box 8300 Perris, CA 92572-8300

as Obligee, hereinafter called Owner, for the use and benefit of claimants as herein below defined, in the amount of:

$ (Amount written in words) for the payment whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, Principal has by written agreement entered into a contract with Owner in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and Addenda for: CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Date:

Spec Number:

Project Name:

Project Location: which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the Contract.


NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if Principal shall promptly (1) make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and material used or reasonably required for use in the performance of the Contract, and (2) pay all amounts due under the California Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to work or labor performed under the Contract, and (3) pay for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the California Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of the Principal and subcontractors pursuant to Section 13020 of the California Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to the work and labor, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to the following conditions:

1 A claimant is defined as any of the persons named in Section 3181 of the California Civil Code.

2 The above-named Principal and Surety hereby jointly and severally agree with the Owner that every claimant as herein defined, or its assign, who has not been paid in full before the expiration of a period of ninety (90) days after the date on which the last of such claimant's work or labor was done or performed, or materials were furnished by such claimant, may sue on this bond for the use of such claimant, prosecute the suit to final judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due claimant, including reasonable attorney's fees to be fixed by the court, and have execution thereon. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit.

3 No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant:

a) Unless written notice has been givenin compliance with California CivilCode section 3252.

b) After the expiration of one (1) yearfollowing the date on which Principal ceased Work on said Contract, it being understood, however, that if any limitation embodied in this bond is prohibited by any law controlling the construction hereof such limitation shall be deemed to be amended so as to be equal to the minimum period of limitation permitted by such law.

c) Other than in a state court ofcompetent jurisdiction in and for thecounty or other political subdivisionof the state in which the Project, orany part thereof, is situated, or inthe United States District Court forthe district in which the Project, orany part thereof, is situated, and notelsewhere.

4 The amount of this bond shall be reduced by and to the extend of any payment or payments made in good faith hereunder, inclusive of the payment by Surety of mechanics’ liens which may be filed of record against said improvement, whether or not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this bond.






Name: Name:


Notary Public Acknowledgment required for Surety and Contractor

Rev:04/06/16 BB-1 00040 Bid Bond

EASTERN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT BID BOND

Bid Bond No.

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we

(Here insert full name and address or legal title of Contractor)

as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and

(Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety)

a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto Eastern Municipal Water District. Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of ________________________ Dollars (___________________), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid, dated , 20 , for (Here insert full name, address and description of Project)

NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding of Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

In the event suit is brought upon this Bond by Obligee and judgement is recovered, the Surety shall pay all costs incurred by Obligee in such suits to be fixed by the court.





Name: Name:


This Bid Bond (BB-1) form shall be submitted to be considered a responsive bid Notary Public Acknowledgment required for Surety and Contractor

Rev:11/15 C11-1 00042 Worker’s Compensation Certificate

Specification No/Project Title:

WORKERS’ COMPENSATION INSURANCE CERTIFICATE

The Contractor shall execute the following form as required by the California Labor Code, Sections 1860 and 1861:

I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which require

every employer to be insured against liability for workers’ compensation or to

undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I

will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the

work of this contract.

Date: (Contractor)

By:

(Signature)

(Title)

C11-2 00042 Worker’s Compensation Certificate


CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)

Month/Date/Year PRODUCER

Insurnce Agent/Broker Name Insurnce Agent/Broker Street Address or P.O. Box Insurnce Agent/Broker City, State & Zip Code Contact & Phone Number

THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.

INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED

Contractor's Name Street Address or P.O. Box City, State & Zip Code

INSURER A: Name of Insurance Company Enter NAIC#

INSURER B: All Carriers must be rated A- VIII or better

INSURER C: in current AM Best Rating Guide

INSURER D:

INSURER E:

COVERAGES: THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.

TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER

POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE (MM/DD/YY)

POLICY EXPIRATION DATE (MM/DD/YY)

LIMITS

A GENERAL LIABILITY

COMMERICAL GENERAL LIABILITY

CLAIMS MADE OCCUR

GEN’L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER:

POLICY PROJECT LOC

See NOTE #1 & #2

Enter Policy #

Enter Effective Date

Enter Expiration Date

EACH OCCURENCE $ 5,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ 50,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 5,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 10,000,000 PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 10,000,000

B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY

ANY AUTO

ALL OWNED AUTOS

SCHEDULED AUTOS

HIRED AUTOS

NON-OWNED AUTOS

Enter Policy # Enter Effective Date


COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Each Occurrence)

$ 5,000,000

BODILY INJURY (Per person)

BODILY INJURY (Per accident)

PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident)

GARAGE LIABILITY

ANY AUTO

AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT

OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY:

EA ACC AGG

A EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY

OCCUR CLAIMS MADE

DEDUCTIBLE

RETENTION

See NOTE #4

Enter Policy #

(if required)



EACH OCCURRENCE $Enter Limit AGGREGATE $Enter Limit

C WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS’ LIABILITY

ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECU-TIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? If yes, describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below

See NOTE #3

Enter Policy #



WC STATU-

TORY LIMITS OTH-ER

E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000

D Builder’s Risk Equipment Floater

Deductibles: BR $1,000 Enter Policy #

BR =

Equipment Floater =

Contract Value

Scheduled Equipment

DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES / EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS

Include Project Name & Spec Number here. NOTE #1: EMWD & others (See Section H & Special Conditions) named as additional insured per CG2010 (11/85) OR CG2010 (10/01) WITH CG2037 (10/01). NOTE #2: Per Project Aggregate limits per CG2503 (3/97). NOTE #3: Waiver of Subrogation endorsement to Worker’s Compensation in favor of EMWD. Endorsements must be attached. NOTE #4: Excess/Umbrella liability can be used in connection with primary liability insurance to equal amounts required. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION

EASTERN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT Attn: Field Engineering Department P O Box 8300 Perris, CA 92572-8300

SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE

EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE INSURER AFFORDING COVERAGE WILL ENDEAVOR TO

MAIL 30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT

FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE

INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES.

AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE

ACORD 25 (2001/08) © ACORD CORPORATION 1988 0004_C-12_$5$10$10_BUILDERS_RISK

INSR LTR

ADD’L INSRD

IMPORTANT

If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).

If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).

DISCLAIMER

The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contact between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.

ACORD 25 (2001/08)

POLICY NUMBER: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY

THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY.

CG 20 10 11 85 Copyright, Insurance Services Office, Inc., 1984 Page 1 of 1 ��

ADDITIONAL INSURED – OWNERS, LESSEES ORCONTRACTORS – (FORM B)

This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following:

COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART.

SCHEDULEName of Person or Organization:

(If no entry appears above, information required to complete this endorsement will be shown in the Declarationsas applicable to this endorsement.)

WHO IS AN INSURED (Section II) is amended to include as an insured the person or organization shown in theSchedule, but only with respect to liability arising out of "your work" for that insured by or for you.

Eastern Municipal Water District to be named on Additional Insured Endorsement Form

See Special Conditions and Section H-Permits for listing of others to be named asadditional insured.

Policy Number to be included

POLICY NUMBER: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 10 10 01


ADDITIONAL INSURED – OWNERS, LESSEES ORCONTRACTORS – SCHEDULED PERSON OR

ORGANIZATION This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following:

COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART

SCHEDULE Name of Person or Organization:

(If no entry appears above, information required to complete this endorsement will be shown in the Declarations as applicable to this endorsement.) A. Section II – Who Is An Insured is amended to

include as an insured the person or organization shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to li-ability arising out of your ongoing operations per-formed for that insured.

B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following exclusion is added:2. Exclusions

This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" or "property damage" occurring after:

(1) All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project (other than service, maintenance or repairs) to be performed by or on behalf of the addi-tional insured(s) at the site of the cov-ered operations has been completed; or

(2) That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcontractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project.

CG 20 10 10 01 © ISO Properties, Inc., 2000 Page 1 of 1 �


Eastern Municipal Water District to be named on Additional Insured Endorsement FormSee Special Conditions and Section H-Permits for listing of others to be named asadditional insured.

POLICY NUMBER: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 37 10 01


ADDITIONAL INSURED – OWNERS, LESSEES ORCONTRACTORS – COMPLETED OPERATIONS

This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following:

COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART

SCHEDULE Name of Person or Organization:

Location And Description of Completed Operations:

Additional Premium:

(If no entry appears above, information required to complete this endorsement will be shown in the Declarations as applicable to this endorsement.) Section II – Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an insured the person or organization shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to liability arising out of "your work" at the location designated and described in the schedule of this endorsement performed for that insured and included in the "products-completed operations haz-ard". CG 20 37 10 01 © ISO Properties, Inc., 2000 Page 1 of 1 �


Eastern Municipal Water District to be named on Additional Insured Endorsement FormSee Special Conditions and Section H-Permits for listing of others to be named asadditional insured.

Project location and name to be listed here

Policy Number must be included

Project Name to be listed here


Waiver of Subrogation form is always in favor of the Worker's Compensation.Endorsement to list EMWD and project.

Effective date must be specified

Name of Insured (per contract)

Signature

C13-1 00046 Iran Contracting Act Certification

IRAN CONTRACTING ACT CERTIFICATION (Public Contract Code sections 2202-2208)

Pursuant to the Iran Contract Act of 2010 (Public Contract Code 2200-2208), Vendors/Bidders are ineligible to bid on or submit a proposal for any contract with a public entity for goods or services of one million dollars ($1,000,000) or more if the Vendor/Bidder engages in investment activities in Iran. For bids $1,000,000 or more, bidders must certify that it is not on the list of ineligible vendors prohibited from doing business with the State of California and shall complete the Iran Contract Act Certification attached and submit with their proposal at the time of bid. Failure to do so may deem your bid non-responsive.


[Page Left Intentionally Blank]


IRAN CONTRACTING ACT CERTIFICATION Pursuant to the Iran Contract Act of 2010 (Public Contract Code 2200-2208), Vendors/Bidders are ineligible to bid on or submit a proposal for any contract with a public entity for goods or services of one million dollars ($1,000,000) or more if the Vendor/Bidder engages in investment activities in Iran.

MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH BID PROPOSAL IF BID AMOUNT IS $1,000,000 OR MORE

Prior to bidding on, submitting a proposal, or executing a contract or renewal for a public entity contract for goods or services of $1,000,000 or more, a vendor must either: a) certify it is not on the current list of persons engaged in investment activities in Iran created by the California Department of General Services (“DGS”) pursuant to Public Contract Code section 2203(b) and is not a financial institution extending $20,000,000 or more in credit to another person, for 45 days or more, if that other person will use the credit to provide goods or services in the energy sector in Iran and is identified on the current list of persons engaged in investment activities in Iran created by DGS; or b) demonstrate it has been exempted from the certification requirement for that solicitation or contract pursuant to Public Contract Code section 2203(c) or (d).

To comply with this requirement, please insert your vendor or financial institution name and Federal ID Number (if available) and complete one of the options below. Please note: California law establishes penalties for providing false certifications, including civil penalties equal to the greater of $250,000 or twice the amount of the contract for which the false certification was made, contract termination, and three-year ineligibility to bid on contracts. (Pub. Cont. Code § 2205.)

OPTION #1 - CERTIFICATION I, the official named below, certify I am duly authorized to execute this certification on behalf of the vendor/financial institution identified below, and the vendor/financial institution identified below is not on the current list of persons engaged in investment activities in Iran created by DGS and is not a financial institution extending twenty million dollars ($20,000,000) or more in credit to another person/vendor, for 45 days or more, if that other person/vendor will use the credit to provide goods or services in the energy sector in Iran and is identified on the current list of persons engaged in investment activities in Iran created by DGS.

I certify (or declare) under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct. Vendor Name/Financial Institution (Printed)

Federal ID Number (or n/a)

By (Authorized Signature) Printed Name and Title of Person Signing

Date Executed


OPTION #2 – EXEMPTION Pursuant to Public Contract Code sections 2203(c) and (d), a public entity may permit a vendor/financial institution engaged in investment activities in Iran, on a case-by-case basis, to be eligible for, or to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enters into or renews, a contract for goods and services. If you have obtained an exemption from the certification requirement under the Iran Contracting Act, please fill out the information below, and attach documentation demonstrating the exemption approval. Vendor Name/Financial Institution (Printed)

Federal ID Number (or n/a)

By (Authorized Signature) Printed Name and Title of Person Signing

Date Executed

C16-1 00050 CalOsha form 300A

Cal/OSHA Form 300A

Annual Summary of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses

Bidders shall provide the most current, completed Cal/OSHA Form 300A with their bid (blank form attached)

Failure to submit this form “may” deem your bid non-responsive

00050 CalOsha form 300A


Cal

/OSH

A F

orm

300

A (R

ev. 7

/200

7)

App

endi

x B

A

nnua

l Sum

mar

y of

Wor

k R

elat

ed In

jurie

s an

d Ill

ness

es

D

epar

tmen

t of I

ndus

tria

l Rel

atio

ns

Div

isio

n of

Occ

upat

iona

l Saf

ety

& H

ealth

Year

20

__ _

_

C1

6-2

0005

0 Ca

lOsh

a fo

rm 3

00A

All

esta

blis

hmen

ts c

over

ed b

y C

CR

Titl

e 8

Sect

ion

1430

0 m

ust c

ompl

ete

this

Ann

ual S

umm

ary,

ev

en if

no

wor

k- re

late

d in

jurie

s or i

llnes

ses o

ccur

red

durin

g th

e ye

ar. R

emem

ber t

o re

view

the

Log

to v

erify

that

the

entri

es a

re c

ompl

ete

and

accu

rate

bef

ore

com

plet

ing

this

sum

mar

y.

Usi

ng t

he L

og,

coun

t th

e in

divi

dual

ent

ries

you

mad

e fo

r ea

ch c

ateg

ory.

The

n w

rite

the

tota

ls be

low

, mak

ing

sure

you

’ve

adde

d th

e en

tries

from

eve

ry p

age

of th

e Lo

g. If

you

had

no

case

s, w

rite

“0.”

Em

ploy

ees,

form

er e

mpl

oyee

s, an

d th

eir

repr

esen

tativ

es h

ave

the

right

to r

evie

w th

e C

al/ O

SHA

Fo

rm 3

00 i

n its

ent

irety

. Th

ey a

lso

have

lim

ited

acce

ss t

o th

e C

al/

OSH

A F

orm

301

or

its

equi

vale

nt.

See

CC

R T

itle

8 Se

ctio

n 14

300.

35,

in C

al/

OSH

A’s

rec

ordk

eepi

ng r

ule,

for

fur

ther

de

tails

on

the

acce

ss p

rovi

sion

s for

thes

e fo

rms.

Num

ber o

f Cas

es

To

tal n

umbe

r of

deat

hs

To

tal n

umbe

r of

case

s with

day

s aw

ay fr

om w

ork

To

tal n

umbe

r of

case

s with

job

trans

fer o

r res

trict

ion

To

tal n

umbe

r of

othe

r rec

orda

ble

case

s

(G

)

(H)

(I

)

(J)

N

umbe

r of D

ays

Tota

l num

ber o

f day

s of

job

trans

fer o

r res

trict

ion

To

tal n

umbe

r of d

ays

away

from

wor

k

(K

)

(L)

In

jury

and

Illn

ess

Type

s To

tal n

umbe

r of…

(M

)

(1)

Inju

ries

(4)

Pois

onin

gs

(2)

Skin

diso

rder

s

(5

) H

earin

g lo

ss

(3)

Res

pira

tory

con

ditio

ns

(6)

All

othe

r Illn

esse

s

Post

this

Ann

ual S

umm

ary

from

Feb

ruar

y 1

to A

pril

30 o

f the

yea

r fol

low

ing

the

year

cov

ered

by

the

form

. Faci

lity

Info

rmat

ion

Esta

blis

hmen

t nam

e

St

reet

City

S

tate

Z

ip

In

dust

ry d

escr

iptio

n (e

.g. M

anuf

actu

rer o

f mot

or tr

uck

traile

rs)

St

anda

rd In

dust

rial C

lass

ifica

tion

(SIC

), if

know

n (e

.g. S

IC 3

715)

Empl

oym

ent I

nfor

mat

ion

(If

you

don

’t ha

ve th

ese

figur

es, u

se th

e op

tiona

l Wor

kshe

et to

esti

mat

e)

Ann

ual a

vera

ge n

umbe

r of e

mpl

oyee

s

____

_ To

tal h

ours

wor

ked

by a

ll em

ploy

ees l

ast y

ear

__

___

Sign

her

e K

now

ingl

y fa

lsify

ing

this

doc

umen

t may

res

ult i

n a

fine.

I c

ertif

y th

at I

have

exa

min

ed th

is do

cum

ent a

nd th

at to

the

best

of m

y kn

owle

dge

the

entri

es a

re tr

ue, a

ccur

ate,

and

com

plet

e.

Com

pany

exe

cutiv

e Ti

tle

Phon

e D

ate

0005

0 Ca

lOsh

a fo

rm 3

00A

[PAG

E LE

FT IN

TEN

TIO

NAL

LY B

LAN

K]

C-17 Contractor’s Cal/OSHA Compliance History and SIC Code

THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE SUBMITTED WITH THE PROPOSAL PACKAGE AT TIME OF BID

C17-1 00052 CalOsha Compliance History & SIC Code

Bidders shall complete and submit the attached C-17 form with the Proposal Package at time of bid

Failure to fully divulge, complete and submit this form “may” deem your bid

non-responsive

C17 00052 CalOsha Compliance History & SIC Code


C-17 Contractor’s Cal/OSHA Compliance History and SIC Code THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE SUBMITTED WITH THE PROPOSAL PACKAGE AT TIME OF BID

C17-2 00052 CalOsha Compliance History & SIC Code

Bid Date: Contractor’s Standard Industry Code:

Specification No. Project Name:

Contractor name:

Contractor Address:

Contractor License No. Phone No:

Contact Person:

Please answer the following questions: 1. Has the Contractor been cited by Cal/OSHA or any regulatory agency for a violation related to

safety or environmental issues within the past seven (7) years? No Yes

If yes, please attach all documentation specific to each violation and what actions have been taken to ensure that there is not a repeat violation.

2. Has the Contractor had a fatality or serious incident per Cal/OSHA on a jobsite within the past ten (10) years? No Yes

If yes, please attach all documentation specific to each violation and what actions have been taken to ensure that there is not a repeat violation.

I certify (or declare) under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct.

Contractor’s Representative signature:

Date:

Failure to fully divulge, complete and submit this form “may” deem your bid non-responsive

FOR EMWD USE ONLY: Field Engineering to forward to Risk Management for review

Approved: No Yes

Reviewed by Risk Management (signature required)

Date:

Return to (Field Eng.CAR) By:

cc: Construction Administrator File: C-17 Contractor’s Compliance History

C17 00052 CalOsha Compliance History & SIC Code


C19-1 00056 Safety Training Records

C-19 Employee Safety & Health Training Records

Documentation (spreadsheet) of safety and health training are required by Cal-Osha standards for each employee. The documentation must specifically include employee name or other identifier, training dates, type(s) of training and the name of the training provider. These records must be kept for at least one year, except that training records of employees who have worked for less than one year for the employer need not be retained beyond the term of employment if they are provided to the employee upon termination of employment.

General Contractor shall provide Employee Safety & Health Training Records for the past 12 months

(to be submitted on or after the Preconstruction Conference)

C19-2 00056 Safety Training Records


Rev:11/23/15 C22-1 00057 Contractor Registration

PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION (Pursuant to SB 854)

This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations. Pursuant to Section 1771.1 of the Labor Code, no contractor or subcontractor shall be qualified to bid on, be listed in a bid proposal pursuant to Section 4104 of the Public Contract Code, or engage in the performance of any contract for public work unless currently registered to perform public work pursuant to Section 1725.5 of the Labor Code. It shall not be a violation of this section for an unregistered contractor to submit a bid that is authorized by Section 7029.1 of the Business and Professions Code or by Sections 10164 or 20103.5 of the Public Contract Code, provided the contactor is registered to perform public work pursuant to Section 1725.5 at the time the contract is awarded.

BIDDERS AND THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS (listed on the Designation of Subcontractors List C-05) are to provide an extract (pdf) at time of bid showing active registration from the Public Works Contractor Registration online registration at https://efiling.dir.ca.gov/PWCR/Search

******************************************************************************************************** SUBMIT BIDDER & SUBCONTRACTORS CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION

EXTRACTS WITH BID PROPOSAL ********************************************************************************

Example: Legal Name Registration Number County City Registration Date Expiration Date

Contractors Name 0000000000 RIVERSIDE Temecula 06/01/2015 06/30/2016

https://efiling.dir.ca.gov/PWCR/Search

Rev:11/23/15 C22-2 00057 Contractor Registration


00062 General Conditions Section E - Inspection and Tests

E–1

Rev:08/31/15

GENERAL CONDITIONS

Section E - Inspection and Tests E-01. This section of the specifications supplements that paragraph of the General Conditions of this

specification entitled "Inspection and Testing of Materials".

A. Progress Reports. The Contractor shall furnish the District full information as to the progress of the work in its various parts and shall give the District timely notice of the Contractor's readiness for inspection. The District reserves the right to charge to the Contractor any additional cost of inspection and test when articles or materials are not ready at the time inspection is requested by the Contractor.

B. Inspection at Mill. Inspection will be made during manufacture of material. If the inspection or test, whether preliminary or final, is made on the premises of the Contractor, the Contractor shall furnish, without additional charge, all reasonable facilities and assistance for the safe and convenient inspection and test required by the Engineer.

C. Mill Test Reports. Whenever required by the Engineer the District shall be furnished promptly with complete certified copies of mill test reports showing chemical and physical properties of the materials to be furnished under the contract and also copies of rolling mill reports.

D. Samples or Test Specimens. Samples or test specimens of all materials, appliances, and fittings for delivery under these specifications or for incorporation in the products manufactured or fabricated hereunder shall be prepared at the Contractor's expense, except as otherwise specified herein, and shall be furnished to the Engineer, carriage prepaid, in such quantities and sizes as may be required by him for proper examination and in ample time for completion of all necessary tests or analyses before the time in which the Contractor desires to deliver or make use of same. Chemical tests and analyses, except those furnished by the Contractor under sub-paragraph (c) hereof, will be made by, or at the expense of, the District.

E. Inspection of Materials Not Locally Produced. When the Contractor intends to purchase materials, fabricated products, or equipment from sources located more than 100 miles outside the geographical limits of EMWD’s main office, the contractor will be responsible for the actual costs incurred for one inspector (EMWD staff or consultant employed by EMWD) to inspect the materials, equipment or process. The actual cost shall include $1,000/day for staff salary and the expenses incurred for airfare, vehicle rental, hotel, meals, etc.

00062 General Conditions Section E - Inspection and Tests E–2

This approval shall be obtained before producing any material or equipment. The inspector shall judge the materials by the requirements of the plans and specifications. The Contractor shall forward reports required by the Engineer. No materials or equipment shall be shipped nor shall any processing, fabrication or treatment of such materials be done without proper inspection. Approval shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for complying with the contract requirements.

END OF SECTION E

GENERAL CONDITIONS Section F - Labor & Construction

C O N T E N T S

GENERAL CONDITIONS F-01. DEFINITIONS .................................................................................................................................. 1 F-02. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ; GOVERNING LAW ; JURISDICTION ; VENUE ............................................. 2 INSURANCE & BONDS ................................................................................................................................................... 3 F-03. CONTRACT SECURITY ...................................................................................................................... 3 F-04. CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE..................................................................... 4 F-05. ADDITIONAL SURETY ...................................................................................................................... 7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................................ 8 F-06. AUTHORITY OF THE DISTRICT .......................................................................................................... 8 F-07. PROTESTS ...................................................................................................................................... 8 F-08. REPORTS, RECORDS AND DATA ....................................................................................................... 8 F-09. TIME AND ORDER OF WORK ........................................................................................................... 9 F-10. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PERIODIC ESTIMATES .................................................................. 10 F-11. LEGAL ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR ................................................................................................ 13 F-12. MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS ................................................................................ 13 F-13. GENERAL GUARANTEE .................................................................................................................. 13 F-14. OBLIGATIONS OF CONTRACTOR .................................................................................................... 14 F-15. PERSONAL ATTENTION ................................................................................................................. 18 F-16. ASSIGNMENT OF RIGHTS. PURSUANT TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF CALIFORNIA GOVERNMENT CODE

SECTION 4552: ............................................................................................................................. 18 F-17. SUBCONTRACTS ........................................................................................................................... 19 F-18. PATENTS ...................................................................................................................................... 20 F-19. PERMITS ...................................................................................................................................... 20 F-20. ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE ................................................................................................... 21 F-21. ADDITIONAL RIGHTS-OF-WAY ....................................................................................................... 21 F-22. PROTECTION AND PRESERVATION OF CULTURAL RESOURCES ....................................................... 21 F-23. RIGHT OF THE DISTRICT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT ....................................................................... 22 F-24. NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF ..................................................................................................... 23 F-25. UTILITIES AND SUBSTRUCTURES ................................................................................................... 24 F-26. USE OF MATERIALS FOUND ON WORK SITE ................................................................................... 25 WORK .......................................................................................................................................................................... 26 F-27. LINES, GRADES AND MEASUREMENTS .......................................................................................... 26 F-28. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 26 F-29. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL ITEMS .............................................................................................. 27 F-30. CHANGES IN WORK AND EXTRAS .................................................................................................. 35 F-31. MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND TESTS ...................................................................................... 39 F-32. DELAYS ........................................................................................................................................ 41 F-33. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF MATERIALS .................................................................................... 43 F-34. DEFECTIVE WORK OR MATERIAL ................................................................................................... 43 F-35. ACCESS TO WORK ......................................................................................................................... 44 F-36. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND FOR DAMAGES FOR LATE COMPLETION ........................................... 44 PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR....................................................................................................................................... 44 F-37. QUANTITIES OF ESTIMATE ............................................................................................................ 44 F-38. CLAIMS ........................................................................................................................................ 45 F-39. ARBITRATION ............................................................................................................................... 49

F-40. RETENTION .................................................................................................................................. 49 F-41. PAYMENT FOR EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................................... 50 F-42. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 50 F-43. DISTRICT'S RIGHT TO WITHHOLD CERTAIN AMOUNTS AND MAKE APPLICATION THEREOF ............. 50 F-44. FINAL ESTIMATE AND PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 51 F-45. PAYROLLS OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS .................................................................. 52 F-46. PREVAILING RATES OF WAGES ...................................................................................................... 52 F-47. COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................................................... 53 F-48. FINAL PAYMENT DECLARATION .................................................................................................... 53 F-49. PAYMENT ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CONTRACT ...................................................................... 54 F-50. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION.......................................................................................................... 54 F-51. MONIES MAY BE RETAINED .......................................................................................................... 54 F-52. UNPAID CLAIMS ........................................................................................................................... 54 F-53. EIGHT HOUR LAW ......................................................................................................................... 54 F-54. OVERTIME - NO EXTRA COMPENSATION ....................................................................................... 55 F-55. POSTING MINIMUM WAGE RATES ................................................................................................ 55 PERSONNEL ................................................................................................................................................................. 55 F-56. ACCIDENT PREVENTION - PUBLIC SAFETY ...................................................................................... 55 F-57. CHARACTER OF WORKERS ............................................................................................................ 56 F-58. EMPLOYMENT .............................................................................................................................. 56 F-59. NONDISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT ....................................................................................... 56 F-60. ENFORCEMENT OF ORDER ............................................................................................................ 56 F-61. SAFETY, SANITARY AND MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 56 F-62. SANITATION ................................................................................................................................. 57 F-63. FIRST AID AND PROTECTIVE FACILITIES ......................................................................................... 57 Exhibit A – Escrow Agreement for Security Deposits in Lieu of Retention

00064 General Conditions Section F - Labor & Construction

F-1

GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION F - LABOR & CONSTRUCTION

GENERAL CONDITIONS

F-01. DEFINITIONS

A. Wherever the words defined in this article, or pronouns used in their stead, occur in thesespecifications or in any of the other contract documents they shall have the meaningshere given:

B. The word DISTRICT and OWNER shall mean the Eastern Municipal Water Districtrepresented by the General Manager or his designee. All references to District andOWNER shall include Eastern Municipal Water District, the Board of Directors and eachmember of the Board, the officers and agents of the District, and the District’sconsultants.

C. The words BOARD OF DIRECTORS or BOARD shall mean the Board of Directors of the EasternMunicipal Water District.

D. The word AGENT or ENGINEER shall mean one who represents the District in dealingswith third persons and acts on behalf and subject to the control of the District.

E. The word CONSULTANT shall mean a consulting firm rendering services to theDistrict under contract.

F. The word CONTRACTOR or PRIME CONTRACTOR shall mean a firm, duly licensed as acontractor by the State of California, entering into contract with the District for theperformance of work required by these specifications, and the legal representatives of saidfirm, or the agent appointed to act for said firm in the performance of the work. Said firmis referred to throughout the contract documents as if of the singular number andmasculine gender.

G. The word SUBCONTRACTOR shall mean a contractor who will perform work or labor orrender service to the prime contractor or a contractor licensed by the State of Californiawho, under subcontract to the prime contractor, specially fabricates and installs a portionof the work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the plans andspecifications.

H. The word INSPECTOR shall mean a person who observes the work assigned forconformance with the approved design plans and specifications.

00064 General Conditions Section F - Labor & Construction F-2

I. The word CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATOR shall mean a person who administersconstruction project contracts, researches and plans for a variety of capital construction,and maintenance/improvement programs, and performs related duties.

J. The word WORK shall mean that which is proposed to be constructed or done under thecontract, including the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and services.

K. Whenever in the specifications or upon the PLANS the words DIRECTED, REQUIRED,PERMITTED, ORDERED, DESIGNATED, PRESCRIBED, or words of like import are used, itshall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation, orprescription of the District is intended, and similarly the words APPROVED, ACCEPTABLE,SATISFACTORY, or words of like import shall mean approved or acceptable to, orsatisfactory to the District, unless otherwise expressly stated.

L. EXTRA WORK shall mean additions in the work being performed when the Districtdetermines, in writing, that it is not covered by contract unit prices or stipulatedunit prices.

M. FORCE ACCOUNT shall mean work conducted by the District, as opposed to a third party.Said work is performed by employees or other agents of the District.

N. The word PLAN(s) shall mean DRAWING(s) and STANDARD DETAIL(s).

O. The word SPECIFICATION(s) shall mean TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION(s), PRE-NEGOTIATEDSCOPES OF WORK, SPECIAL PROVISIONS, DETAILED PROVISIONS and/or GENERALCONDITIONS and related Contract Documents.

F-02. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ; GOVERNING LAW ; JURISDICTION ; VENUE

A. Contract Documents. The Notice Inviting Bids, the Instructions to Bidders, the Proposal,the Notice-of-Acceptance-of-Proposal, Addenda, the Specifications, and the Plans,together with the Agreement, constitute THE CONTRACT, and what is called for in any oneshall be as binding as if called for in all. The intention of the documents is to require acomplete and finished piece of work including all labor, materials, equipment, andtransportation necessary for the proper execution of the work. Anything shown in the plansand not in the specifications, or in the specifications and not in the plans, shall beperformed by the Contractor as though shown in both the plans and the specifications.


F-3

B. Specification Precedence. In resolving conflicts resulting from errors or discrepancies in any of the Contract Documents, the order of precedence shall be as follows:

1. Special Conditions Revised by Addenda 2. Special Conditions 3. Permit Requirements 4. Addenda 5. Plans 6. Specifications 7. General Conditions

With reference to the drawings, the order of precedence shall be as follows:

1. Figures, such as coordinates or dimensions, govern over scaled dimensions 2. Detail drawings govern over general drawings 3. Addenda/Change Order drawings govern over Drawings 4. Drawings govern over standard drawings

C. Governing Law. The Contract, all Contract Documents, and all Work performed hereunder

shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the State of California, excluding any choice of law provisions. Notwithstanding any other provisions contained in any other documents, this paragraph shall take precedence over any such documents and may not be modified, altered, or changed in any manner whatsoever except by a written instrument duly executed by the District which refers specifically to this paragraph.

D. Jurisdiction; Venue. Any action taken to enforce this Contract shall be maintained in the

Superior Court of Riverside County, California. The parties expressly consent to the jurisdiction of said court and agree that said court shall be the proper venue for any such action. Notwithstanding any other provisions contained in any other documents, this paragraph shall take precedence over any such documents and may not be modified, altered, or changed in any manner whatsoever except by a written instrument duly executed by the District which refers specifically to this paragraph.

INSURANCE & BONDS F-03. CONTRACT SECURITY The Contractor shall furnish a performance bond in an amount at least equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price as security for the faithful performance of this contract. A payment bond shall be furnished in an amount not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price as security for the payment of all persons performing labor and/or furnishing materials or other supplies under this contract. All bonds shall be executed by admitted surety insurers, as defined in Code of Civil Procedure section 995.120.

00064 General Conditions Section F - Labor & Construction F-4 Pursuant to Section 995.660(a) of the Code of Civil Procedure, the Contractor shall submit the following documents with the performance and payment bonds:

A. The original, or a certified copy of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, bylaws,

or other instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so; B. A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the State of

California’s Insurance Commissioner; and C. Copies of the insurer’s most recent annual and quarterly statements filed with the

Department of Insurance. The Contractor shall take out and maintain performance and payment bonds at his sole cost and expense at all times during the life of this contract, including the entire time of the Contractor's guarantee, with surety carriers admitted to transact business in the State of California.

The following provision shall be added to and made a part of the bond agreement:

"Surety agrees to the acceptance of arbitration as to any controversy or claim affecting its obligation where agreed to by the contracting parties pursuant to Arbitration of the Contract Conditions."

F-04. CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained and submitted all policies of insurance (including all endorsements) acceptable to the District, nor shall he allow any subcontractor to commence work until all policies of insurance of the subcontractor have been obtained (by the Contractor), as required hereunder.

The Contractor and his subcontractors shall take out and maintain insurance, with coverage acceptable to the District, at his sole cost and expense at all times during the life of this Contract, including the entire time of the Contractor's guarantee.

Each such policy of insurance shall:

A. Be issued by insurance carriers that are:

1. Rated no less than A-, Class VIII or better by the A. M. Best Company

2. Licensed to transact insurance business in the State of California

3. Captive and Risk Retention groups are not acceptable unless rated no less than A-,

VIII or better by the A. M. Best Company


F-5

4. Self Insured Retention (SIR) greater than $10,000 is not acceptable on any policy.

Any insurance carrier, which is strategically affiliated with a parent insurance company or insurance group, must disclose the name of the parent company or group in any certificate of insurance documentation provided to the District.

Non-admitted/Surplus Lines insurance carriers (carriers not licensed in the State of California) may be acceptable to the District under certain conditions. The District reserves the right to disqualify a non-admitted insurer without cause.

Non-admitted insurance carriers providing any form of insurance coverage must be:

1. Domiciled in the United States

2. Listed as an approved insurance carrier on the California Department of

Insurance L.E.S.L.I. list

3. Rated no less than “A-, Class VIII” or better by the A.M. Best Company

4. Captive and Risk Retention groups are not acceptable unless rated no less than A, VIII or better by the A. M. Best Company

B. Name and list the District, Agent(s), and other personals and entities as required and specified in

the special conditions, and/or all permittors listed in Section H – Permits, as additional insured, by utilizing “CG 2010 11/85" endorsement form or similar, to include completed-operations up to 5 years beyond the completion date. If CG 20 10 11/85 is not available, then additional insured endorsement CG 20 10 10/01 along with CG 20 37 10/01 (Additional Insured-Completed Operations) endorsements executed by the Insurance Company naming the District and others listed above shall be utilized.

C. The insurance contract should state that it is intended for the transferee’s policy to apply on a

primary basis, as would standard ISO form CG 00 01 10 01, on behalf of the additional insured and that it will be modified, if necessary, to provide coverage in this manner.

D. Require all deductibles be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, including the deductible for

any builders risk insurance policy procured by the District.

E. Not be canceled, reduced in coverage or limits until thirty (30) days after receipt by the District of a written notice of such cancellation including a ten (10) day notice for non-payment of premium, as evidenced by receipt of a registered letter

F. Otherwise be in form satisfactory to District.


G. Any and all losses connected with the insurance policies in force for the District shall

require cooperation of the Contractor in determining the cause of loss, the repair process, and the securing of information to determine settlement of said claim. Failure to comply with the adjuster’s request or insurance carriers requests to settlement in a timely manner, will result in breach of contract.

The Contractor and his subcontractors shall take out and maintain the following policies of "occurrence form"-type insurance with coverage acceptable to the District:

H. Workers’ Compensation Insurance. In accordance with the provisions of Section 3700 of

the Labor Code of the State of California, Contractor shall secure, at all times during the life of this contract, the payment of compensation to his employees; and the Contractor shall require all subcontractors similarly to provide such compensation insurance for all of the latter's employees. Such policy shall contain an endorsement which waives all right of subrogation against those persons and entities designated in the policy.

I. Commercial Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall procure and maintain at all times

during the life of this contract, Commercial Liability Insurance in amounts not less than the following amounts unless otherwise specified in the Special Conditions:

$2,000,000 per each occurrence $5,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $5,000,000 Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Personal & Advertising injury limit

THE POLICY IS TO BE ENDORSED FOR THE AGGREGATE LIMIT TO APPLY TO THIS PROJECT by utilizing endorsement form “CG 25 03 03 97” (or similar), executed by the insurance carrier. An aggregate limit (cap) is not allowed.

Where excess liability insurance is used in connection with primary liability insurance, the combination of such must allow total limits of liability to be in amounts not less than the above-specified amount.

J. Automobile Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall procure and maintain at all times

during the life of this contract, Automobile Liability insurance in amount not less than the following amount unless otherwise specified in the Special Conditions:

$2,000,000 combined single limit

K. Installation Floater. The Contractor shall maintain or cause to be maintained at all times

during the life of this contract, an Installation Floater in the amount of the total contract value.

The installation floater policy shall not contain a deductible higher than $1,000.00 per claim unless first approved by the District.


F-7

L. Contractors Equipment Floater (aka Commercial Inland Marine). The Contractor shall maintain or cause to be maintained at all times during the life of this contract, an equipment floater to cover all tools, equipment, supplies and materials on the jobsite.

If specified in the Special Conditions, the Contractor shall provide the following coverage(s):

M. Builders Risk, Flood and Earthquake Insurance. The Contractor and his subcontractors

shall maintain or cause to be maintained at all times during the life of this contract, builders' risk "All Risk" completed value insurance, to include, at the option of the District, loss or damage caused by fire, earthquake and/or flood, insuring completed work, work in progress, material, supplies and equipment of the work site, in storage or in transit, in an amount equal to the full replacement cost thereof. Such insurance shall include the interests of the District, Contractor, all tiers of subcontractors, suppliers and materialmen, with deductible amounts, if any, for the sole account of and payable by Contractor. Loss under such insurance shall be adjusted with and payable to the District for the interest of all parties. The amount of property insurance shall be sufficient to protect against such loss or damage in full until the work is accepted by the District. EMWD must be named as “loss payee” on the certificate for Builder’s Risk policy.

Builder’s “All Risk” insurance policy, if obtained by the Contractor, shall contain a deductible not higher than $1,000 unless otherwise approved by the District.

Flood Insurance policy, if obtained by the Contractor, shall contain a deductible not higher than $100,000.00 unless otherwise approved by the District.

Earthquake insurance policy, if obtained by the Contractor, shall contain a deductible not higher than 10% of the total insurable value unless otherwise approved by the District.

Builder’s Risk, Flood and Earthquake Insurance by District. If specified in the Special Conditions, Builder’s “All Risk” Insurance may be provided by the District. The Contractor is responsible for any and all deductibles per Section F-04 subsection D. Financial considerations to determine viability of such deductible remains at the District’s discretion. Deductibles will be fully disclosed at the time of issuance of the Builder’s Risk contract.

F-05. ADDITIONAL SURETY If during the continuance of the contract any of the sureties upon the faithful performance bond is no longer sufficient under Code of Civil Procedure section 995.660(b), District may require additional sureties which the Contractor shall furnish to the satisfaction of the District within fifteen (15) days after notice, and in default thereof the contract may be suspended and the work completed as provided in section titled Right of the District to Terminate Contract.


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

F-06. AUTHORITY OF THE DISTRICT

The District shall give all orders, lines, grades, and directions contemplated under the contract; shalldetermine the adequacy of the Contractor's methods, plant, and appurtenances; shall determine in allcases the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the several kinds of work and materials which areto be incorporated in the work; and shall decide in all cases every question which may arise relative tothe fulfillment of this contract on the part of the Contractor.

Should any discrepancy appear or any misunderstanding arise as to the import of anything containedin the specifications or plans, the matter shall be referred to the District, which shall decide the samein accordance with the true intent and meaning as construed by the District, and the District’s decisionshall be binding on the Contractor. Any difference or conflict which may arise between the Contractorand any other contractors of the District in regard to their work shall be adjusted and determined bythe District. The District’s estimates and decisions shall be final and conclusive, except as hereinotherwise expressly provided.

F-07. PROTESTS

If the Contractor considers any work demanded of him to be outside the requirements of the contract,or if he considers any record or ruling of the District to be unfair, he shall immediately upon such workbeing demanded or such record or ruling being made, ask for written instructions or decisions, upon thereceipt of which he shall proceed without delay to perform the work or conform to the record or ruling.In the event the Contractor finds such instructions or decisions unsatisfactory, he shall, within ten (10)days after receipt of same, file a written protest with the District, stating clearly and in detail hisobjections and the reasons therefore. Except for such grounds of protest or objections as made of recordin the manner specified and within the time stated herein, the Contractor hereby waives all grounds ofprotest or objections to the records, rulings, instructions, or decisions of the District, and hereby agreesthat as to all matters not included in such protests the records, instructions, and decisions of the Districtshall be final and conclusive.

F-08. REPORTS, RECORDS AND DATA

A. General. The Contractor shall submit to the District such of his schedules and schedulesof each of his subcontractors as the District may request concerning work performedor to be performed under this contract, including schedules of quantities and costs,progress schedules, payrolls, reports, estimates, records, and other data.


F-9

Before proceeding with construction, the Contractor shall furnish the District with information, plans and prints for all structures, articles, machinery or fabricated materials to be entered into permanent construction which are by these specifications and/or plans to be furnished by the Contractor and of which detailed plans are not furnished by the District. Such information, plans and prints shall be submitted to the District for approval and shall become the property of the District.

B. Asbuilt Project Record Documents. The Contractor shall maintain, at the job site, onecomplete set of Contract Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other directions,approved submittals, including one set of full size plans marked to show any deviationswhich have been made from the plans or approved shop drawings, including buried orconcealed construction and utility features which are revealed during the course ofconstruction. Special attention shall be given to recording the horizontal and verticallocation of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were notindicated on the plans. Said record drawings shall be supplemented by any detailedsketches as necessary or directed, to indicate fully the work as actually constructed.

Current Asbuilt record drawings shall be accessible to the District at all times during theconstruction period. They shall be reviewed with the District at regular intervals.

Asbuilt Record Plans and Specifications shall be clearly and correctly annotated by theContractor to show all changes made during the construction process at the time thechanged Work is installed.

Upon completion and prior to final inspection of the Work, the Contractor shall submit theRecord Plans and Specifications to the District for review, and shall make such revisions orcorrections as may be necessary for them to be a true, complete, and accurate record ofthe Work in the opinion of the District. When approved, the Contractor shall deliver theAsbuilt Record Drawings and Specifications to the District. If requested by the District,transparencies shall be furnished for record drawings of piping, electrical, andinstrumentation information.

F-09. TIME AND ORDER OF WORK

Immediately upon receipt of Notice of Acceptance of his Proposal, the Contractor shall schedulematerial orders for all material required under the contract, and notify the District of the anticipateddates of the availability of that material.

The contract time and construction period shall be as indicated in the Notice Inviting Bids except asotherwise superseded by Addendum or Change Order, or as otherwise defined in the Special Conditions.


No extension of time shall be made for ordinary delays and accidents and the occurrence of such shall notrelieve the Contractor from the necessity of maintaining the required progress. In case of an extensionby the District of the time for the completion of the contract, as hereinafter provided, a revisedConstruction Progress Schedule and/or Project Control Schedule may be required in accordance with suchextension of time.

The time in which the various portions and the whole of the contract are to be performed, and thework is to be completed, is of the essence of this contract.

F-10. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PERIODIC ESTIMATES

A. Required Forms. The Contractor shall deliver to the District at the Pre-ConstructionConference or within such additional time as may be allowed by the District, the following:(Additional forms may be required as called out in Standard form EN-48)

Forms supplied by the District

1. Insurance Certificate(s);

2. EN-29 or Schedule of Values: Breakdown of the Contract Price showing sizes andquantities of equipment items;

3. EN-61: Satisfactory evidence of placement of orders for all materials;

4. EN-57: Shoring Plan, including Cal OSHA form 421-2 Activity Notification;

5. Contractor’s Financial Qualification form;

6. Authorized Signatures;

7. C-11: Workers’ Compensation Certificate;

8. EN-183: Verification of pre-approved materials list;

9. EN-84: Specific Operating Safety Procedure - Exhibit “B” of Section 01000- GeneralSafety Requirements;

10. EN-2: 24-hour emergency telephone numbers;

11. EN-146: Certified Payroll Form;

12. Prevailing Wage Rate;

13. C-13: Certificate by Single Instrument Supplier (if applicable)


F-11

14. Employee Safety & Health Training Records

15. Subcontractors List/Worker Classification of all subcontractors, including tieredsubcontractors, performing work on the project.

16. Contractor’s Financial Qualification Form

17. Maintenance Bond for Pumping Equipment (if applicable)

Contractor's Forms

1. Project Control Schedule

2. DOSH Permit (copy); (Dept. of Occupational Safety & Health)

3. Injury & Illness Prevention Program;

4. Other documentation, as required

The costs provided in the EN-29, Breakdown of Contract Price will be used only for determining the basis of partial payments and will not be considered as fixing a basis for additions to or deductions from the contract price. In lieu of the EN-29, the Schedule of Values (refer to Section 01026) shall be the basis for payment of contract work and will be used to establish payment for any “extra work” i.e., work requested which is beyond the scope of the original contract.

The Contractor shall, prior to mobilizing or commencing any contract work, submit and receive District approval of Proof of Insurance, Injury and Illness Prevention Program, and EN-84, Specific Operating Safety Procedure.

The Contractor shall be responsible to submit and receive District approval of the EN-29 Breakdown of Contract Price or Schedule of Values (see Section 01026, if applicable) by the 10th of the month for processing of the monthly pay estimate. Submittal and approval of the EN-29 or Schedule of Values beyond the 10th of the month will result in the pay estimate to be processed the following month.

The Contractor shall revise and update the Project Control Schedule as scheduling changes occur, and shall supply the District and his subcontractors with copies of the Project Control Schedule and its updates. District acceptance of revised Project Control Schedules shall be subject to the conditions of paragraph below.


B. Contractor’s Project Control Schedule. The Contractor’s Project Schedule shall consist ofa simple Critical Path Method analysis in chart form reflecting workable logic, and showingproper duration, expected methods, and mile posts, and shall conform to the work andtime set forth in the contract. It shall clearly indicate all construction activities, sub-activities, and mile posts on a time-oriented basis, with the critical path fully identified.The following minimum information shall be included for each activity and critical pathitem:

1. Date of initial submittal, as applicable.2. Ordering dates for long lead-time items.3. Dates for materials on the site.4. Start-work dates.5. Complete-work dates.6. Testing and clean-up dates.7. Final contract completion date.

The schedule shall show a maximum of three critical paths, with only enough points or items to present the above information. Partial schedules will not be accepted without the approval of the District. The Contractor to submit a CD with 4 copies of each submitted schedule, using Primavera P6 (or later version) or Suretrak Project Manager.

Treatment plant, lift station and pump station charts shall be updated and resubmitted monthly; pipeline and other projects shall be updated and resubmitted monthly or as necessary to reflect changes in scheduling. All slippages and missed mile posts shall be flagged, with a narrative attached describing proposed corrective actions.

Payment Withheld. Payments due the Contractor shall be withheld until the Project Control Schedule is submitted by the Contractor and accepted by the District. Acceptance by the District of the baseline schedule submission shall be recognition of the Contractor’s good faith submission, and is solely for the purpose of releasing these monies. The District shall not unreasonably withhold its’ acceptance, however, acceptance shall not constitute approval. The District shall accept the Project Control Schedule only after all corrections and other issues have been fully resolved.

The applicable monies listed in the following table shall be withheld from that owed the Contractor each and every month an updated progress control schedule submission is not timely received in a condition acceptable to the District and conforming to the contract documents.


F-13

CONTRACT VALUE AMOUNT WITHHELD PER MONTH

$0 to $50,000 $1,000

$50,000 to $100,000 $1,500

$100,000 to $500,000 $2,500

$500,000 to $1,000,000 $5,000

$1,000,000 to $5,000,000 $7,500

$5,000,000 to $10,000,000 $10,000 F-11. LEGAL ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR

The address given in the Contractor's proposal on which the contract is founded is hereby designated as the place to which all notices, letters, and other communications to the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered.

Nothing herein contained shall be deemed to preclude or render inoperative the service of any notice, letter, or other communication upon the Contractor personally.

F-12. MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS

If, through acts of neglect on the part of the Contractor, any other contractor or any subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, the Contractor agrees to settle with such other contractor or subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other contractor or subcontractor will so settle. If such other contractor or subcontractor shall assert any claim against the District on account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the District shall notify the Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the District against any such claim, and he shall assume the defense of, and indemnify and save harmless the District from all liability and claims of any kind.

F-13. GENERAL GUARANTEE

A. Acceptance and Repair. Neither the final certificate of payment nor and provision in the contract documents nor partial or entire occupancy by the District shall constitute an acceptance of work not done in strict compliance with the contract documents or relieve the Contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom.


The Contractor's warranty and guarantee shall include the entire Work and all parts thereof, including that performed and constructed by Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and others employed directly or indirectly on and for the Work, against faulty or defective materials, equipment, or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of the District's written final acceptance of the Work or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any special guarantee or warranty required by the Contract Documents, or by law. The only exception to this guarantee shall be the equipment, which shall be guaranteed for one (1) year from the date each item of equipment, itself, is placed in service. The District will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.

F-14. OBLIGATIONS OF CONTRACTOR

A. Percentage of Work by Contractor. The Contractor shall perform, with his own organization, contract work amounting to at least 50 percent of the contract. When an entire item is subcontracted, the value of work subcontracted will be based on the contract unit price. When a portion of an item is subcontracted, the value of work subcontracted will be based on the estimated percentage of the contract unit price. This will be determined from information submitted by the Contractor and subject to approval by the District.

B. General. The Contractor at his sole cost and expense shall perform all labor and services

and furnish all the materials, tools and appliances, except as hereinafter otherwise specifically provided, necessary or proper for performing and completing the work required by these specifications, in the manner and within the time stipulated in the Special Conditions and Detailed Provisions. He shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove the construction plant and such temporary works as may be required. If at any time before the commencement or during the progress of the work or any part of it, the Contractor's methods or appliances appear to the District to be unsafe, or inadequate for securing the safety of the workers, or the quality of work required, the District may notify the Contractor to correct any deficiencies. The Contractor shall respond to such notifications at his own expense, but the making of such notifications shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations to secure the safe conduct of the work, the quality of work required and the rate of progress stipulated in the contract.

The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency, and adequacy of his plant, appliances, and methods, and for any damage, which may result from their failure or their improper construction, maintenance, or operation. All the labor, services, and materials shall be performed and furnished strictly pursuant to, and in conformity with the contract documents. The Contractor shall complete the entire work to the satisfaction of the District, and in accordance with the contract documents herein mentioned and with approved changes in the work.


F-15

1. Contractor’s Responsibility for the Work and Materials. Until the acceptance of the contract, the Contractor shall have the charge and care of the work and of the materials to be used therein (including materials for which the Contractor has received partial payment or materials which have been furnished by the District) and shall bear the risk of injury, loss or damage to any part thereof by the action of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or from the non-execution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good all injuries; losses or damages to any portion of the work or the materials occasioned by any cause before its completion and acceptance and shall bear the expense thereof. Where necessary to protect the work or materials from damage, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s expense, provide suitable drainage of the roadway and erect those temporary structures that are necessary to protect the work or materials from damage. The suspension of the work from any cause whatever shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the work and materials as herein specified.

If ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor’s expense, properly store materials, which have been partially paid for by the District or which have been furnished by the District. Storage by the Contractor shall be on behalf of the District and the District shall at all times be entitled to the possession of the materials, and the Contractor shall promptly return the materials to the site of the work when requested. The Contractor shall not dispose of any of the materials so stored except on written authorization from the Engineer.

2. Disposal of Excavated Materials. All materials removed from the excavations in

excess of that stored temporarily as above specified shall be immediately hauled away and used in backfilling elsewhere, or, if not used, shall be disposed of by the Contractor. The disposal area shall be acquired by the Contractor. No materials shall be disposed of either temporarily or permanently on privately or publicly owned property unless the Contractor shall first obtain permission therefore from the owner or agency concerned. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages and claims that may arise in connection therewith. The Contractor shall provide a release form obtained from the property owner(s) releasing the District from any liability. Said written release shall be submitted and approved by the District prior to Contractor moving materials onto said property.

C. Temporary Facilities. The Contractor shall provide all temporary facilities and utilities

required for prosecution of the work, protection of employees and the public, protection of the work from damage by fire, weather or vandalism and such other facilities as may be specified or required by any legally applicable law, ordinance, rule or regulation.


1. Electricity. The Contractor shall arrange with the local utility to provide adequate temporary electrical service at a mutually agreeable location. The Contractor shall then provide adequate job site distribution facilities conforming to applicable codes and safety regulations. The Contractor shall provide at his own cost all electric power required for construction, testing, general and security lighting, and all other purposes whether supplied through temporary or permanent facilities, until the substantial completion of the project.

2. Lighting. The Contractor shall provide temporary lighting in all work areas sufficient

to maintain a lighting level during working hour’s not less than lighting level required by California OSHA standards. As permanent lighting facilities are completed they may be used in lieu of temporary facilities, provided however, that any facilities so used shall be re-lamped prior to substantial completion. The temporary lighting surrounding the facility shall be designed, arranged and installed so as to confine direct rays onto the premises.

D. Equipment Testing. All items of mechanical equipment, including equipment

furnished by the District, shall be tested by the Contractor after installation for proper operation, efficiency and capacity. The Contractor shall furnish all personnel, power, water, chemicals, fuel, oil, grease, and all other necessary facilities for conducting the Contractor's test operations.

E. Preconstruction Safety Meeting. Safety of all activities in connection with the work is of

paramount and overriding importance to the District. A safety conference shall be scheduled prior to the preconstruction conference to review the respective safety requirements and to discuss implementation of all health and safety provisions to the project.

F. Preconstruction Conference and Progress Meetings. The District shall arrange for a

preconstruction conference to be attended by the Contractor's Superintendent and representatives of utilities, permit agencies, major subcontractors, and others whose input may be desired.

The purpose of this conference shall be to establish a working understanding between the parties and to discuss the construction schedule, shop drawing submittals and approvals, cost breakdown of major lump sum items, applications for payment and their processing, and such other subjects and submittals as may be pertinent to the project.

The District shall arrange and conduct periodic progress meetings as required. These meetings shall be attended by the Contractor's Superintendent, the District, and representatives of all subcontractors, utilities, etc., that are active on the project site. The purpose of these meetings shall be to resolve conflicts, ensure that the Contractor is monitoring the work progress, and coordinating and expediting the operation of all organizations active at the project site.


F-17

G. Project Site Maintenance. Daily throughout all phases of construction until finalacceptance of project work, the contractor shall keep the work-site clean and free ofgraffiti, rubbish, and debris. The Contractor shall abate dust nuisance by spraying water,sweeping, or other means as necessary to the satisfaction of the District.

H. Defense and Indemnity. Contractor will defend, indemnify, and hold and save Districtharmless from any and all actions, claims, damages to persons or property, penalties,obligations, or liabilities that may be asserted or claimed by any person, firm, entity,corporation, political subdivision or other organization arising out of or in connection withthe work, operation, or activities of Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors, orinvitees provided for herein, whether or not caused in part by any act or omission ( passiveor comparative negligence included) of the District, excepting the active negligence of theDistrict.

1. Contractor will defend any action or actions filed in connection with any of saidclaims, damages, penalties, obligations or liabilities and will pay all costs andexpenses, including attorneys' fees incurred in connection therewith.

2. Contractor will promptly pay any judgment rendered against Contractor or Districtcovering such claims, damages, penalties, obligations and liabilities arising out ofor in connection with such work, operations, or activities of Contractor hereunderand Contractor agrees to save and hold District harmless therefrom.

3. In the event District, without the fault of District, is made a party to any action orproceeding filed or prosecuted against Contractor for damages or other claimsarising out of or in connection with the work, operation or activities of Contractorhereunder, Contractor agrees to pay to District any and all costs and expensesincurred by District in such action or proceeding together with the reasonableattorneys' fees.

So much of the money due to the Contractor under and by virtue of the Contractas shall be considered necessary by the District may be retained by the District untildisposition has been made of such actions or claims for damages as aforesaid.

The Contractor shall not be responsible for actions, claims, damages to persons orproperty, penalties, obligations or liabilities arising from the sole negligence orwillful misconduct of District.


F-15. PERSONAL ATTENTION The Contractor shall give his personal attention constantly to the faithful prosecution of the work, and shall be present continually, either in person or by a duly authorized and competent representative, on the site of the work, during its progress, to give directions or receive instructions from the District Inspector. This duly authorized representative shall not be replaced without ten days written notice to the District except under extraordinary circumstances. The Contractor's representative at the site shall have the authority to act on behalf of the Contractor. All communications, instructions, and directions given to the representative shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Whenever the Contractor or the representative is not present on a part of the Work where the District wishes to give orders or directions, the orders or directions shall be received and obeyed by the foreman in charge of that part of the Work the same as if the order or direction had been given to the Contractor or to his representative. Any order or direction given by the District not otherwise required to be in writing will be given or confirmed in writing upon request of the Contractor.

F-16. ASSIGNMENT OF RIGHTS. PURSUANT TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF CALIFORNIA GOVERNMENT CODE SECTION 4552: In submitting a bid to the District, the Contractor offers and agrees that if the bid is accepted, he will assign to the District all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action he may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. Sec. 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 16700) of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from purchases of goods, services, or materials pursuant to the bid. Such assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the District tenders final payment to the Contractor.

The Contractor shall not assign, transfer, convey, sublet, or otherwise dispose of this contract, or of his right, title or interest in or to the same or any part thereof, to other than the District without previous consent in writing. He shall not assign, by power of attorney or otherwise, any of the monies to become due and payable under the contract, unless by and with the like consent signified in like manner. If the Contractor shall without some previous written consent, assign, transfer, convey, sublet, or otherwise dispose of the contract, or of his right, title or interest therein, or of any of the monies to become due under the contract, to any other person, company, or other corporation, the contract may at the option of the District, be terminated, revoked and annulled. In such case, the District shall thereupon be relieved and discharged from any and all liability and obligations growing out of the contract, and no right to any money to become due hereunder, shall be asserted against the District in law or equity by reason of any so-called assignment of any monies to become due hereunder, unless authorized as aforesaid by the written consent of the District.

In case the Contractor assigns all or any part of any monies due or to become due under this contract, the instrument of assignment shall contain a clause substantially to the effect that it is agreed that the right of the assignee in and to any monies due or to become due to the Contractor shall be subject to prior claims of all persons, firms and corporations for services rendered or materials supplied for the performance of the work called for in this contract.


F-19 F-17. SUBCONTRACTS

A. Extent. At the discretion of the District, and subject to the provisions of subsection c. hereof, subcontracts may be permitted to such extent, and only to such extent, as shall be shown to be necessary or definitely advantageous to the principal contractor in the prosecution of the work, and without injury to the interests of the District. The re-subletting of work by a subcontractor shall be subject to the same limitations as an original subletting. In general, the brokering of work will not be favored, and the subletting of the entire contract, or of substantial complete units of it, will be permitted only upon adequate showing of necessity, involving some new condition not reasonably foreseeable at the time of proposal. No subcontract will be permitted which has the effect of avoiding the residence or wage requirements or any other provisions of the main contract. Individual subcontractors, or members of contracting or subcontracting organizations, personally engaged upon the work, shall be subject to all the requirements of the paragraphs of the General Provisions of this specification, and to all other conditions of these specifications applicable to employees working for wages.

B. Subcontractors Listing; Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act.

Reference is hereby made to the provisions of Public Contract 4100, et. seq. As required by these provisions, each bidder shall set forth in his proposal the name, the location of the place of business, and the California contractor license number of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the general contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement in an amount in excess of one-half of one per cent (1/2 of 1%) of the general contractor's total bid, as well as the portion of the work which will be done by each subcontractor.

Each subcontractor shall possess, both at the time the bid is submitted and at all times when work is performed, a valid contractor's license for the appropriate classification necessary to perform the work for which that subcontractor is listed.

Each subcontractor shall be registered with the Department of Industrial Relations at time of bid and during the performance of the Contract.

Any information requested by the District concerning any subcontractor who the prime contractor is required to list, other than the subcontractor’s name and location of business, may be submitted by the general contractor up to 24 hours after the deadline established by the District for receipt of bids.

C. Contract Provisions. Before the work of any subcontractor is started, the

Contractor shall submit, at the preconstruction conference, a Subcontractors List and Worker Classification form giving the name, business, license number, email address, and worker classification for each subcontractor who will perform work on the project. Contractor shall update and resubmit the Subcontractors List and Worker Classification as required.


Each subcontract shall provide for its annulment by the Contractor at the order of the District if in the District’s opinion the subcontractor fails to comply with the requirements of the principal contract insofar as the same may be applicable to his work. Nothing herein contained shall create any contractual relation between any subcontractor and the District, or relieve the Contractor of any liability or obligation hereunder.

The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the work to bind subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the Specifications and other Contract Documents insofar as applicable to the work of subcontractors and to give the Contractor the same power as regards to terminating any subcontract that the District may exercise over the Contractor under any provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the District for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him.

F-18. PATENTS The Contractor shall hold and save harmless the District from liability of any nature or kinds, including costs and expenses, for, or on account of any patented or unpatented invention, process, article, or appliance manufactured or used in the performance of the contract, including its use by the District, unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the Contract Documents.

If the Contractor uses any design, device or materials covered by letters, patent or copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable agreement with the Owner of such patented or copyrighted design, device or material. It is mutually agreed and understood that, without exception, the contract prices shall include all royalties or costs arising from the use of such design, device or materials, in any way involved in the work.

The Contractor and/or his sureties shall indemnify and save harmless the District from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use of such patented or copyrighted design, device or materials or any trademark or copyright in connection with work agreed to be performed under this contract, and shall indemnify the District for any cost, expense or damage which it may be obliged to pay by reason of such infringement at any time during the prosecution of the work or after completion of the work.

F-19. PERMITS

All required permits, easements, land and rights-of-way necessary for the work under this specification will be acquired by the District insofar as the District may acquire these permits.


F-21

All provisions of any permit included as a part of these specifications by incorporation in the Contract Documents shall be assumed by the Contractor as if written in these specifications. In the event the Contractor, subsequent to issuance of such permit, to perform work in a manner approved by the District but different than anticipated by the permit, he shall assume any and all costs or permit fees that result from that departure from the permit provisions. (For example, if the Contractor elects to slope his trench walls when the encroachment permit has been issued for a vertical wall trench, the permit fee for pavement replacement could increase.) In the event a performance bond is required by the provisions of a permit, a Dual Obligee Rider to the District Performance Bond, naming also the Permitting Agency, will be acceptable to the District.

F-20. ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE

The contractor shall comply with all requirements of applicable Federal, State and localenvironmental rules and regulations. Any infractions of said rules and regulations by theContractor during the term of the contract, which result in penalties, will be the responsibilityof the Contractor.

The District operates under a number of environmental permits issued by various agencies. Ifdue to an action, inaction or negligence by the Contractor the District becomes subject to noncompliance penalties, the cost of such penalties shall be borne by the Contractor.

F-21. ADDITIONAL RIGHTS-OF-WAY

Should the Contractor find it advantageous to use any land in addition to that provided by theDistrict for his construction yard or for other purposes during the construction of the work, heshall provide the use of such lands at his own expense and shall be solely responsible foracquisition of the appropriate title or other interest for said land.

F-22. PROTECTION AND PRESERVATION OF CULTURAL RESOURCES

In accordance with the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966, as amended through 2000 (16U.S.C. 470) and PPM 75-27, the following procedures are implemented to insure historicpreservation and fair compensation to the Contractor for delays attendant to cultural resourcesinvestigations.

In the event potential historical, architectural, archaeological, or cultural resources (hereinaftercultural resources) are discovered during subsurface excavation at the site of construction, thefollowing procedures shall be instituted:

A. The District shall issue a "Stop Work Order" directing the Contractor to cease allconstruction operations at the location of such potential cultural resources find.

B. Such "Stop Work Order" shall be effective until such time as a qualifiedarchaeologist designated by the District has been able to assess the value of thesepotential cultural resources and make recommendations. Any "Stop Work Order"shall contain the following:


1. A clear description of the work to be suspended;

2. Any instructions regarding issuance of further orders by the Contractor formaterial services;

3. Guidance as to action to be taken on subcontracts;

4. Any suggestions to the Contractor as to minimization of this cost;

5. Estimated duration of the temporary suspension.

If the archaeologist determines that the potential find is a bona fide cultural resource, the District shall extend the duration of the "Stop Work Order" in writing, and the Contractor shall suspend work at all locations of the find.

Equitable adjustments of the construction contract shall be made in the following manner:

A. Time Extension. If the work temporarily suspended is on the "critical path", thetotal number of days for which the suspension is in effect shall be added to thenumber of allowable contract days.

B. Additional Compensation. If, as a result of a suspension of the work, theContractor sustains a loss which could not have been avoided by his judicioushandling of forces, equipment, or redirection of forces or equipment to performother work on the contract, the District shall provide for a fair and reasonablecompensation for the Contractor's actual loss in accordance with Sectionpertaining to Changes in Work and Extras.

F-23. RIGHT OF THE DISTRICT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT

A. Contract Termination for Breach/Default. In the event that any of the provisions ofthis contract are violated by the Contractor or by any of his subcontractors, theDistrict may serve written notice upon the Contractor and the Surety of its intentionto terminate the contract. Such notice to contain the reasons for such intention toterminate the contract, and unless within ten (10) days after the serving of suchnotice upon the Contractor, such violation or delay shall cease and satisfactoryarrangement of correction is made, the contract shall, upon the expiration of saidten (10) days, cease and terminate.

In the event of any such termination, the District shall immediately serve notice thereof upon the Surety and the Contractor, and the Surety shall have the right to take over and perform the contract.


F-23

If the Surety does not commence performance thereof within five (5) days from the date of mailing to such Surety of notice of termination, the District may take over the work and prosecute the same to completion by contract or by force account for the account and at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and his surety shall be liable to the District for any excess cost occasioned the District thereby, and in such event the District may take possession of and utilize in completing the work, such materials, appliances, and plant as may be on the site of the work and necessary therefore.

B. Contract Termination Based on the Best Interests of the District. The District reserves theright to terminate this contract at any time upon a determination by the District, in its soleand absolute discretion, that termination of this contract is in the best interests of theDistrict. If the District elects to terminate this contract, the termination of the contract andthe total compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be determined by the Followingprocedure:

1. The District shall deliver to the Contractor a written notice stating that the contractis to be terminated, the terms and conditions for said termination, and the date tobe deemed the termination date. Said notice shall also include an explanation orother reference to the determination that has been made by the District that thebest interests of the District will require termination under this section.

2. On or before the termination date, the Contractor shall complete or perform, to thesatisfaction of the District in its discretion, the actions required of the Contractor asset forth in the notice.

3. Acceptance of the termination of this contract as herein specified shall not relievethe Contractor of responsibility for damage, usefulness, or other warranties inregard to materials. The Contractor shall continue to be responsible fordamage/warranty of materials after issuance of the notice of termination.

4. When the District determines that the Contractor has completed the work underthis contract directed to be completed prior to termination, the District will acceptthe work.

5. The total compensation to be paid to the Contractor shall be as follows: TheContractor shall be paid his actual costs for that portion of the work performed priorto the termination date and for costs of termination, including demobilization andany termination charges by vendors and subcontractors, plus four percent (4%) of allsuch costs for overhead and profit.

F-24. NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF

Any notice to the Contractor from the District relative to any part of this contract shall be in writingand considered delivered and the service thereof completed, when said notice is posted byregistered mail, to the Contractor at his last given address, or delivered in person to the Contractoror his authorized representative on the work.

00064 General Conditions Section F - Labor & Construction F-24 F-25. UTILITIES AND SUBSTRUCTURES

A. Locating. The indication of the type and approximate location of existing utilities and substructures in the Contract Documents represents a diligent search of known records, but the accuracy and completeness of such indications are not warranted by the District and utility structures and services not so indicated may exist.

Before commencing any excavations, the Contractor shall notify Underground Service Alert (USA) at (800) 227-2600, and all permit agencies. The Contractor shall verify in the field all utilities and substructures indicated on the plans. The cost for this verification shall be included in the bid items and no additional compensation will be due. If the Contractor encounters utilities and/or underground structures which are not shown on the plans or which are in substantially different locations and these utilities and/or substructures materially affect the Work and/or the Contractor’s operation, the Contractor shall be compensated for the extra work, unless the Contractor has failed to exercise reasonable care. If the unmarked or mismarked utilities or underground structures cause a change in the critical path as shown on the schedule submitted by the Contractor, the Contractor shall be entitled to additional time as verified by the Contractor and the District.

B. Unforeseen Conditions Related to Hazardous Waste. In the event the Contractor

encounters on the site materials he reasonably believes to be hazardous material or hazardous waste, the Contractor shall immediately cease work in the area affected, cordon off the area, and report the condition to the District in writing.

The definition of hazardous material and hazardous waste shall include, but not be limited to, heavy metals, asbestos, or any other material or waste where liability and removal is governed by the applicable Federal or State law.

The District will promptly investigate the reported condition, and if applicable will notify the appropriate Federal, State or local agency.

If the District finds that the reported condition will have a material effect on the cost and/or the duration of the contract, the District shall issue a change order.

The change order may instruct the Contractor to remediate the problem, setting price and time therefore. Alternatively, if the District determines that the reported condition will have a substantial effect on the contract, the change order may remove the problem area from the contract, to be dealt with as a separate issue under a different contract.


F-25

The District shall be responsible for any hazardous material or waste uncovered or revealed at the work site which was not shown or indicated in the contract documents to be within the scope of the work. The District shall not be responsible for any such material or waste brought to the work site by the Contractor, subcontractors, or anyone else for whom the Contractor is responsible.

C. Maintenance of Facilities. Insofar as practical during the progress of the work theproperty of any owner of a public utility pipeline or conduit, sewer, culvert, stormdrain, drainage ditch, flood control channel, overhead wires or cables, orunderground wires or cables, or any other structure or facility shall not bedisturbed but shall be supported and protected against injury and maintained ingood operating condition at the expense of the Contractor. In no case shall anysuch property be disturbed or removed without the consent of the owner andapproval of the District.

The Contractor shall install temporary pipes of adequate size to carry off sewagefrom any sewer facilities cut off by construction operations.

Installation of temporary pipes shall be made immediately upon cutting of anexisting sewer facility, and no sewage shall be allowed to flow from any severedfacility upon the ground surface or in the trench excavation. Pipe used intemporary sewers may be clay, metal, concrete, or plastic. Before completion ofWork, the Contractor shall replace all severed connections and restore tooperating order the existing sanitary facilities with matching materials andconstruction.

D. Rights-of-Way and Private Properties. Coordination with other companies andprivate parties is generally provided elsewhere in the Special Conditions and/orthe technical provisions. The Contractor shall be responsible for making good alldamage due to his operations.

F-26. USE OF MATERIALS FOUND ON WORK SITE

The Contractor may be permitted to use soil, stone, or other natural materials discovered on thework site upon prior written consent of the District if said materials meet the requirements ofthese specifications. Ownership of all such materials shall remain with the District throughout anyuse or installation thereof.


WORK F-27. LINES, GRADES AND MEASUREMENTS All lines and grades will be given by the District, and the Contractor shall provide such materials and give such assistance as may be required. The Contractor shall carefully preserve all bench marks, monuments, survey markers, and stakes, so far as possible. SHOULD ANY STAKES OR POINTS BE REMOVED OR DESTROYED UNNECESSARILY BY ANY ACT OF THE CONTRACTOR OR HIS EMPLOYEES THEY SHALL BE RESET AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. The Contractor shall inform the District within 48 hours in advance of the times and places at which he intends to work in order that lines and grades may be furnished, that inspection may be provided, and that necessary measurements for records and payments may be made with minimum inconvenience.

All work shall conform to lines, elevations and grades shown on the construction plans. Three consecutive points set on the same slope shall be used together so that any variation from a straight grade can be detected. Any such variations shall be reported to the District Engineer or Inspector. In the absence of such report, the contractor shall be responsible for any error in the grade of the finished work.

No direct payment shall be made for the cost to the Contractor of any of the work for delay occasioned by giving lines and grades, or making other necessary measurements, or by inspection.

F-28. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The Contractor shall keep on the work site a copy of the plans and specifications and shall at all times give the District access thereto. The Contractor shall check all dimensions and quantities on the drawings or schedules herein contained or given to him by the District, and shall notify the District of all errors therein which may be discovered. He shall not take advantage of any error or omission in these specifications or in the plans or schedules, because full instructions will be furnished by the District should such error or omission be discovered, and the Contractor shall carry out such instructions as if originally specified.

Where bore holes are shown pictorially on the plans, they are for the convenience of the Contractor, reflecting the information contained in the soils report of borings obtained and on file in the District office. The District assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented as it may affect the project at other than those specific locations, and directs the Contractor to investigate the soils conditions independently, as required for his use.


F-27 F-29. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL ITEMS

A. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Requirements. Per Title 22 Chapter 16 of the California Code of Regulations, any and all materials (pipe, valves, tanks, etc.) that come into contact with potable drinking water, either directly or indirectly, shall be certified by NSF in accordance with NSF/ANSI Standard 61 for potable water contact. Contractor shall include documentation with material submittals demonstrating conformance with NSF 61 certification as required.

B. Listed on Proposal. Equipment and material items to be furnished which are

required to be listed on the Proposal, with the name of the manufacturer, shall be new items of new manufacture unless specified otherwise. Award of a contract under this proposal (bid) will not imply approval by the District of a manufacturer listed by the bidder. However, if a manufacturer is acceptable to the District, the successful bidder shall furnish the items from the manufacturer indicated. Any manufacturer listed in the contract may be substituted, changed, or omitted by the successful bidder, subject to the approval of the District, without subjecting the District to any liability for the substitution, change or omission.

The listing of any manufacturer in the contract does not, and is not intended to, grant any right, title or interest in the contract for the benefit of the named manufacturer. Each contracting bidder shall inform in writing each named manufacturer that the so named is listed for information purposes only and may be substituted, changed, or omitted by the successful bidder, subject to the approval of the District, without subjecting the District to any liability for the substitution, change or omission.

The successful bidder shall reimburse the District for any expenses incurred by the District as a result of the successful bidder's failure to so notify each named manufacturer or supplier.

C. Requests for Substitutions or Equals. References in the Contract Documents to

any material, item of equipment, or type of construction by manufacturer's name, make, catalog number, or other proprietary identification shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition in those instances where "or approved equal" is specified. Bids shall be based on the products or types of construction so referred to and identified in the Contract Documents, or, in those instances allowing "approved equal", on substitute or equal items approved by the District prior to the receipt of bids. Bidders wishing to propose substitute or equal materials, equipment items, or types of construction shall, not later than the tenth day preceding the date set for receipt of bids, submit a written request fully and technically describing each proposed item and its intended use, and setting forth all variations in costs pertaining to the application. Manufacturers may use the same procedure. Bidders will be notified of approved substitute or equal items by Addendum only.


After receipt of bids, if the Contractor wishes to propose a substitute or equal item for any specified use by brand or trade name, he shall, as soon as this intent is known, furnish his written request and all required data to substantiate the proposed substitution or equal, and setting forth all variations in costs pertaining to the application. If, in the opinion of the District, there is sufficient time to review the submitted data, it will decide if the item is in fact equal in quality and utility to the specified item. No proposed substitute or equal shall be ordered or installed without the written approval of the District, and it shall be understood and agreed that the decision of the District in this matter shall be final and binding.

D. Submittals

1. General. Unless otherwise specified or directed by the District, the

Contractor shall submit to the District for its review and approval all shop drawings, samples, materials lists, equipment data, instructions manuals, record documents, manufacturers' equipment manuals, and other submittals required by the Contract Documents. Submittals and their contents shall be properly prepared, identified, and transmitted as provided herein. Except for record documents and instructional manuals for operation and maintenance, submittals shall be reviewed and accepted before the material or equipment covered by the submittal is delivered to the site.

The Project Control Schedule required under section titled Construction Schedule and Periodic Estimates shall be coordinated to this requirement.

2. Method of Submittal. The Contractor shall deliver submittals by means of

dated and signed “Contractor’s Submittal Transmittal Form” (EN-50) identifying as to initial or resubmittal status, and fully describing the submittal contents. Submittals are not acceptable directly from subcontractors, suppliers or manufacturers. Submittals shall be numbered as prescribed by the District at the preconstruction conference. In each transmittal the Contractor shall state the Drawing Numbers and Specification Sections, Articles, and paragraphs to which the submittal pertains. Accompanying data sheets, catalogs, and brochures shall be identified in the same manner. Where several types or models are included the Contractor shall delete non-applicable portions or specifically indicate which portions are intended and applicable.

Each submittal shall include 4 sets of black-line printed copies and 4 CDs in the latest version of Adobe Acrobat, consolidated to one portable document file (PDF) format, searchable from Table of Contents and Bookmarks. No copies shall be returned to the contractor, only the EN-14 Shop Drawing Transmittal form noting review comments and submittal status.


F-29 3. Deviations. The Contractor shall verify on the “Contractor’s Submittal

Transmittal Form” (EN-50) either that the submittal meets all the requirements specified, or that the submittal deviates from the requirements specified. The deviation shall be clearly indicated or described including all other changes required to correlate the Work. The Contractor shall state in writing all variation in costs. The Contractor shall be liable for any such deviation not so submitted, and for any deviation not approved by the District in writing.

4. Schedule of Submittals. The Project Control Schedule required under section

titled Construction Schedule and Periodic Estimates shall allow not less than fifteen (15) working days for the review of submittals, not including the time necessary for delivery or mailing of the printed copies and CDs, and shall cause no delay in the Work or the work of any other contractor. Extension of the Contract Time will not be granted because of the Contractor's failure to make timely and correctly prepared and presented submittals with allowance for the checking and review periods.

The Contractor shall include the submittal process in the Project Control Schedule.

5. Contractor's Review and Approval. Every submittal of shop drawings,

samples, materials lists, equipment data, instruction manuals and other submittals upon which the proper execution of the Work is dependent shall bear the Contractor's review and approval stamp meaning that the Contractor: a) has reviewed, checked and approved the submittal and has

coordinated the contents with requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents including related work;

b) has determined and verified all quantities, field measurements, field

construction criteria, materials, equipment catalog numbers, and similar data;

c) has verified the Work covered by the submittal and guarantees

that the intent of the contract documents will fully apply thereto. The Contractor's stamp shall be dated and signed by the Contractor in every case.

6. Incomplete Submittals. Incomplete submittals, including those not

correctly transmitted, not correctly titled and identified, or not bearing the Contractor's review and approval stamp, may be returned to the Contractor without review.


7. Corrections and Resubmittals. The Contractor shall make all required corrections and shall resubmit 4 copies and 4 CDs in the latest version of Adobe Acrobat, consolidated to one portable document file (Smart PDF) format, searchable from Table of Contents and Bookmarks of each submittal until found in conformance with design concept of the project and in general compliance with the plans and specifications. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than corrections called for on previous submittals, and shall state in writing all variations in costs and his assumption of the cost of related changes the same as is required for in subsection titled Method of Transmittal.

Costs incurred by the District as a result of additional reviews of a particular submittal after the second time it has been reviewed shall be borne by the Contractor. Reimbursement to the District will be made by deducting such costs from the Contractor’s subsequent partial payments. This reimbursement will be calculated based on a flat work rate of $120/hour.

8. Check of Reviewed Comments. The Contractor shall check and review the

EN-14 Shop Drawing Transmittal form for correction and ascertain if the corrections result in extra cost to him above that included under the Contract Documents and shall give written notice to the District within five days if, in his opinion, such extra costs result from corrections. By failing to so notify the District or by starting any Work covered by a submittal, the Contractor waives all claims for extra costs resulting from required corrections.

9. Review and Acceptance. Submittals will be reviewed only for conformance

with the design concept of the Project and with the information given in the Contract Documents. Shop drawings and submittals shall be provided, at the Contractor’s expense, when required by the plans or specification, or requested by the District.

Materials shall not be furnished or fabricated, nor any work done for which shop drawings or submittals are required, before those shop drawings or submittals have been reviewed. Neither review nor approval of shop drawings or submittals by the District shall relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for errors, omissions, or deviations from the Contract Documents, unless such deviations were specifically called to the attention of the District in the letter of transmittal. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of the submittals and shop drawings, including shop fits, field connections, and results obtained by use of such drawings.

10. Conformance. Work shall conform to the accepted submittals and all other

requirements of the Contract Documents unless subsequently revised by an appropriate modification, in which case the Contractor shall prepare and submit revised submittals as may be required.

The Contractor shall not proceed with any related Work which may be


F-31affected by the Work covered under submittals until the applicable submittals have been submitted and reviewed, particularly where piping, machinery, and equipment and the required arrangements and clearances are involved.

11. Interrelated Submittals. Except where the preparation of a submittal isdependent upon the acceptance of a prior submittal, all submittals pertainingto the same class or portion of the Work shall be submitted simultaneously.

12. Shop Drawings

a) Complete Data. Shop drawings shall contain details and informationfully outlining the pertinent Contract Document requirements and suchother information as may be specified or required for review. Eachsubmittal shall be complete with respect to dimensions, design criteria,materials, connections, bases, foundations, anchors, and the like, andshall be accompanied by technical and performance data as necessaryto fully illustrate the information in the shop drawings. Unless therequired data are included in instruction manuals or equipment datasubmitted prior to or with the shop drawings, the Contractor shallsubmit with the shop drawings complete catalog and technical data forall manufactured products, materials, machinery, and equipmentcovered by the shop drawing submittal. The following informationshall be included:

(i) Manufacturer's specifications and details.

(ii) Applicable technical data and performance curves.

(iii) Preparation, assembly, and installation instructions withallowable tolerances.

(iv) Connection requirements.

(v) Pre-startup servicing and operating methods.

(vi) Other data and information necessary to demonstrate thatthe proposed items conform to the Contract Documents.

b) Title Block and Identification. On each shop drawing submittal,the Contractor shall provide a space for the District's representative's acceptance or correction stamp and a title block showing:

(i) Name and address of the Work.

(ii) Name and address of Contractor.


(iii) Name and address of subcontractor manufacturer, supplier, or distributor, as applicable.

(iv) Name and address of District. (v) Date, scale of drawings, and identification number. (vi) Contractor's review and approval stamp.

13. Samples.

a) General. When specified or otherwise required for clarity, each submittal shall include two sets of samples. One set of accepted samples and all unaccepted samples will be returned to the Contractor. Samples of value retained by the District will be returned to the Contractor after completion of the Work if the Contractor's first transmittal for the sample requests its return.

b) Paints and Coatings. Submit samples of field-applied paint and coating

finishes, colors, and covering at least 60 days prior to start of such finishing operations.

14. Materials Furnished Under Approved Materials List. The Contractor may

provide materials listed on EMWD’s Approved Materials List by listing the materials by description, manufacturer and model number. The description must be the same as listed in the Approved Materials List included in the appendix section of the Specifications and must include paragraph number and page number on which the item appears on the List.

The Contractor would not be required to make a formal submittal on any

material listed in this manner with the exception of pipe. The District requires a formal submittal on pipe whether or not it is on EMWD’s Approved Materials List.

15. Operations and Maintenance.

a) General. The Contractor shall obtain data from the various manufacturers and submit 1 hard copy plus 3 CDs (in Smart PDF format) in the form of instruction and mechanical systems manuals covering all mechanical equipment and machinery installed in the Work. These submittals will be reviewed by the District and revised and resubmitted as deemed necessary.

b) Contents. Each manual shall have an index listing the contents.

Information in the manuals shall include but not be limited to:


F-33 (i) general, introduction and overall equipment description,

purpose, functions, and simplified theory of system operation; specifications;

(ii) installation instructions, procedures, sequences, and

precautions including tolerances for level, horizontal, and vertical alignment;

(iii) grouting requirement including grout spaces and materials;

(iv) list showing lubricants for each item of mechanical equipment, approximate quantities needed per year, and recommended lubrication intervals; where possible, types of lubricants shall be consolidated with equipment manufacturers' approval to minimize the number of different lubricants required for plant maintenance;

(v) startup and beginning operation

procedures; (vi) operational procedures;

(vii) shut down procedures; (viii) short and long term inactivation procedures; (ix) maintenance, calibration, and repair

instruction; (x) parts lists and spare parts recommendations; (xi) lists of all special tools, instruments, accessories, and special

lifting and handling devices required for periodic maintenance, repair, adjustment, and calibration;

(xii) MSDS for each item as appropriate; and (xiii) other information as may be specified or required for

approval.

c) Format and Organization (i) Use drawings and pictorials to illustrate the printed text

as necessary to fully present the information.


(ii) Where information covers a family of similar items ofequipment, identify the applicable portions by heavyweighted arrows, boxes or circles, or strike-out theinapplicable information.

Nonconforming data are not acceptable and will be returned for rework and resubmittal.

(iii) Contractor shall incorporate into books all Manufacturers'Equipment Manuals including those specified in pertinentSections of the Specifications. The books shall be organized byEquipment Class in same manner and sequence as theSpecifications, i.e., Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation,etc.

(iv) Within each book or manual, provide a Table of Content

d) Manual Binding. Bind all books in sturdy hard covers fastened toprovide full view of contents on each page, and ease of makingcontent additions or replacements. No book shall be more than fourinches thick.

Permanently label face of cover and bound edge of each book"MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTION MANUAL," and indicate Class ofEquipment, i.e., Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation, etc., orname specific equipment unit, number books consecutively BOOK I,BOOK II, etc. If more than one Class of Equipment is contained in abook, separate each class with a tabbed stiff divider insert page.

e) Manual Submittals. Contractor shall submit 1 copy of each manualplus 3 CDs in Smart PDF format. The EN-14 Shop Drawing submittaltransmittal shall provide the required corrections, or acceptance.

When accepted, the Contractor shall deliver final manuals; 1 hardcopy plus 3 CDs in Smart PDF format to the District, unless otherwisespecified, bound in 3-ring binders to make a complete manual.Individual manuals shall be inserted into each binder chronologicallyby Specification Section Number. Each binder or Volume of the finalmanual shall have a complete table of contents.


F-35F-30. CHANGES IN WORK AND EXTRAS

A. Authority. No changes in the Work covered by the approved Contract Documentsshall be made without having prior written approval of the District, unlessotherwise directed through field orders. Without invalidating the ContractAgreement and without notice to sureties or insurers, the District may, at any timeor from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. TheContractor shall comply promptly with requirements of all executed ChangeOrders, Proceed Change Orders, or responses to Requests for Information. If anydirective causes an increase or decrease in the Contract Price or an extension orshortening of the Contract Time, an equitable adjustment will be made andincluded in a Change Order.

Additional or extra Work performed by the Contractor without authorization, will not entitle the Contractor to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time.

Charges or credits for the work covered by the approved change shall be determined by one or more, or a combination of the following methods:

1. Unit bid prices previously approved. The performance of any extra work orfurnishing of any extra material which is of like character to and susceptibleof classification under the items of the Contract as specified shall, if the orderof the District so provides, be paid for at the unit price named for such workin the Bidding Sheet.

The District may change the plans and specifications, character of the work,or quantity of work provided the total arithmetic dollar value of all suchchanges, both additive and deductive, does not exceed 25 percent of thecontract price. Should it become necessary to exceed this limitation, thechange shall be by written supplemental agreement between the Contractorand District, unless both parties agree to proceed with the change by ChangeOrder.

If a change is ordered in an item of work covered by a contract unit price, andsuch change does not involve a substantial change in character of the workfrom that shown on the plans or included in the specifications, then anadjustment in payment will be made. This adjustment will be based uponthe increase or decrease in quantity and the contract unit price.


In case of such an increase or decrease in a major bid item, the use of this basis for the adjustment of payment will be limited to that portion of the change, which together with all previous changes to that item, is not in excess of 25 percent of the total cost of such item based on the original quantity and contract unit price. If a change is ordered in an item of work covered by a contract unit price, and such change does involve a substantial change in the character of the work from that shown on the plans or included in the specifications, an adjustment in payment will be made between the Contractor and District. If unable to reach agreement, the District may direct the Contractor to proceed on the basis of Extra Work.

Should any contract item be deleted in its entirety, payment will be made only for actual costs incurred prior to notification of such deletion.

2. An agreed lump sum. Extra work and material will ordinarily be paid for at alump sum or unit price agreed on in writing by the Contractor and Districtbefore the extra work shall be authorized. If the estimated cost of such extrawork shall be more than that previously authorized by the Board, such extrawork shall be approved by the Board.

3. Time and Material. When extra work is to be paid for on a time and materialbasis, the labor, materials and equipment used in the performance of suchwork shall be subject to the approval of the District and compensation will bedetermined as specified in the State of California, Department ofTransportation Standard Specifications Section 9-1.03, “Force AccountPayment”. The direct costs shall not include any labor or office costspertaining to the Contractor, his superintendents, his office staff and officefacilities, nor insurance nor the cost or rental of small tools as all such indirectcosts form a part of the Contractor's overhead expense.

4. Daily Record of Extra Work. The Contractors Field Representative shall on adaily basis complete a District Form, EN-73 as to the hours for personnel,listed by craft, equipment listed by make and model per Cal Trans LaborSurcharge and Equipment Rental Rates, and any materials used. TheContractors Representative and the Districts Inspector shall both sign the EN-73 noting agreement or disagreement of the indicated information. TheContractor shall then extend the costs on the EN-73 per section titledChanges in Work and Extras, paragraph a., and provide any invoices formaterial or equipment and submit to the District for review.


F-37

5. Idle Time Resulting From Suspension in Work Ordered by District shall becompensated as follows.

a) Idle Time of Equipment. Compensation for equipment idle time willbe determined on a force account (time and materials) basis, and shallinclude the cost of extra moving of equipment and rental loss. Theright-of-way delay factor for each classification of equipment shownin the California Department of Transportation publication entitledEquipment Rental Rates and the California Department of IndustrialRelations General Prevailing Wage Rates, will be applied to anyequipment rental rates.

b) Idle Time of Labor. Compensation for idle time of workers will bedetermined by the District as "Labor" less an actual productivityfactor of this portion of the work force.

c) Increased Costs of Labor and Materials. Increased costs of labor andmaterials will be compensated only to the extent such increase wasin fact caused by the suspension, as determined by the District.

Compensation for actual loss due to idle time of either equipmentor labor shall not include markup for profit.

The hours for which compensation will be paid will be the actual normalworking time during which such delay condition exists, but will in nocase exceed eight hours per day. The days for which compensation willbe paid shall be full or partial calendar days excluding Saturdays,Sundays, and Legal Holidays.

B. Extra Work. Any extra work performed hereunder shall be subject to all of theprovisions of the contract and the Contractor's sureties shall be bound with referencethereto as under the original contract.

The Contractor shall notify his sureties and the carriers of the insurance furnished andmaintained by him of any changes affecting the general scope of the Work or change inthe Contract Price, and the amount of the applicable Bonds and the coverage of theinsurance shall be adjusted accordingly. The Contractor shall furnish proof of suchadjustments to the District.


C. Forms. District forms to be utilized in the contract administration which may or may

not result in changes as aforesaid shall consist of the following:

1. Request for Information (RFI) - to be initiated by the Contractor as far in advance as possible to avoid delays in receiving answers and processing the required additional documents. RFI’s shall be submitted electronically in Word and PDF format, including 1 hard copy. RFI’s may be initiated by the District to transmit clarifying information to the Contractor or Inspector. The District shall allow not more than 15 working days for responding to RFI’s, not including the time necessary for delivery or mailing.

2. Change Order - a formal written order to the Contractor signed by the District

ordering and authorizing an addition, deletion, or revision in the work, or an adjustment in the contract price or the contract time.

3. Proceed Change Order - an informal written order signed by the District ordering and

authorizing change order work when there is insufficient time to process a formal Change Order, or when costs aren't known.

Interim payments will be made for work done under a Proceed Change Order. Work ordered by time and material will require extra work tickets (see section titled Changes of Work and Extras, paragraph a., 4.) and invoices approved by District before any payment made. Time and material work will be based on an estimated dollar value; actual costs may be reconciled through a formal Change Order if required. Negotiated sums will be paid on a percentage basis for the work completed.

4. Change Order Proposal - It is initiated by the District, and may result in a Change

Order, if the proposal is acceptable. A Change Order Proposal, in itself, authorizes no work, revision or adjustment to the contract, nor does it imply that a formal Change Order will be written.

5. Change Order Request – It is initiated by the Contractor, and may result in a Change

Order, if the request is acceptable. A Change Order Request, in itself, authorizes no work, revision or adjustment to the contract, nor does it imply that a formal Change Order will be written

6. Field Orders - Emergency actions or minor changes consistent with the overall intent

of the Contract Documents that do not involve any adjustment in the contract price or an extension of the contract time may be authorized by the District inspector. Such orders may be written or verbal (confirmed in writing), and shall be binding on the Contractor, who shall carry out such orders promptly. In the event the Contractor believes a field order entitles him to an increase in contract price or an extension of contract time, he may make a claim therefore as herein provided.


F-39 7. Periodic Estimate for Partial Payment – will be initiated by the District after the

Contractor's representative and the District inspector have met on the jobsite to determine the items and quantities for payment purposes. After its execution by both the Contractor and the District, payment to the Contractor will be processed by the District.

F-31. MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP AND TESTS All work shall be done and completed in conformance with these plans and specifications.

A. Contractor to Furnish. The Contractor shall submit samples, specimens, or test

pieces of such materials to be furnished or used in the work as the District may require. All materials must be of the specified quality and equal to approve sample, if samples have been submitted.

The Contractor shall furnish without cost to the District such quantities of concrete, concrete aggregates, and other construction materials as may be required for test purposes, and shall place at the District's disposal all available facilities for and cooperate in the sampling and testing of all materials and workmanship. A temporary concrete test cylinder curing cabinet conforming to ASTM C31 shall be furnished and located as directed by the District. EN-29 Breakdown of Contract Price or Schedule of Values (from section 01026), whichever is required, shall be submitted and approved by the District prior to the tenth (10th) of the month for a monthly pay estimate to be processed.

B. Overloading. No part of the Work on new and existing structures, scaffolding,

shoring, sheeting, construction machinery and equipment, or other permanent and temporary facilities shall be loaded with weights or subjected to stresses or pressures that result in an overloading condition. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting damage caused by overloading or excessive stresses or pressures.

C. Use of Explosives. The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances,

regulations, codes, and orders governing the transportation, storage and use of explosives. The Contractor shall exercise extreme care not to endanger life or property, and shall be responsible for all injury or damage resulting from the use of explosives for or on the Work.

No blasting shall be done in the vicinity of existing structures above or below the ground without prior written consent of the owner thereof and the District. This consent shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for injury or damage resulting from the use of explosives for or on the Work.


D. Verification of Installed Work. The Contractor shall correct all defects in installed Work of

the Contract before subsequent related or connected Work is applied or installed. Where the Contract Documents require a material or item of equipment to be applied or installed under the supervision, inspection, or direction of the supplier or manufacturer, or his representative, the supplier, manufacturer, or his representative shall inspect the applicable installed Work and issue a letter to the District stating the corrections required to or approval of the installed Work.

E. Manufacturers' Instructions. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the

Contractor shall apply, install, erect, connect, use, clean, condition, and operate manufactured articles, materials, and equipment in accordance with the various manufacturers' instructions including those in the instruction manuals. The Contractor shall compare the requirements of the various manufacturers' instructions with the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall promptly notify the District in writing of any difference between such requirements, and shall not proceed with any of the Work affected by such differences until an interpretation or clarification is issued. The Contractor shall bear all costs for any error in the Work resulting from his failure to so compare the various requirements and notify the District of any such differences.

F. Field Office for Use by District. If called for in the Special Conditions, Contractor shall

furnish and maintain a field office of minimum 200 sq. ft. floor area, located as directed, and furnish and pay for utilities and services for the office. In addition to any requirements set forth in the Special Conditions, the office shall contain the following. The office shall be of finished weather-tight insulated construction and have at least 3 screened windows, lockable doors, resilient tile flooring, uniform lighting, grounded duplex convenience receptacles, heating, and an air conditioner. The office shall be equipped with not less than one standard office desk, one desk chair, three office chairs, one 6-slot vertical plan rack, one 36 in. by 72 in. reference table, one full height nominal 9 sq. ft. closet with six adjustable shelves and lockable door, and one 4-drawer legal size lockable metal file cabinet. A telephone shall be furnished with outside telephone bell. Bottled drinking water and adequate sanitary facilities shall be furnished and maintained. All foregoing facilities and equipment shall be installed and connected before work on site is started, at the sole cost and expense of the Contractor.

G. Mechanical Equipment and Testing. After all equipment is installed and all facilities

are ready to operate, all equipment shall be tested for a period not to exceed seven (7) days by operating either under actual or simulated operating conditions before final acceptance is given. All defects of material or workmanship which appear during this test period shall be corrected by the Contractor. After such corrections are made, the 7-day test may be run again before final acceptance, required by the District.


F-41

The Contractor will supply all power, oil, grease, and auxiliaries required for this final test operation. The District will supply water and operating personnel. On certain items of equipment, the final adjustments and inspections shall be made by factory-trained service personnel other than sales representatives, who shall also supervise the test operation.

This requirement will be stated under the Detailed Specifications for the particular piece or pieces of equipment in these Specifications. The District shall provide the service of factory-trained service personnel for equipment furnished by it; however, the Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of all equipment testing and total system testing. Each manufacturer who furnishes any piece of equipment calling for factory trained service personnel shall supply, and the Contractor shall include in his bid allowance for, factory-trained service personnel as described above to adjust all of the said equipment supplied by him until this equipment has been tested by the Contractor and the results of these tests have been approved by the District.

The Contractor shall not install any item of machinery or process equipment until he has delivered to the District a copy of the manufacturer's installation instructions. This includes equipment furnished by the District. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the District six complete bound sets of Operating Instructions, Maintenance Instructions, and Parts Lists for all such equipment.

After all acceptance tests have been completed by the Contractor and District, including existing equipment and equipment furnished by the District, but prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall recheck all equipment for proper alignment and adjustment, check oil levels, re-lubricate all bearings and wearing points, and in general, assure that all equipment is in proper condition for regular continuous operation.

F-32. DELAYS

A. General. If delays are caused by unforeseen events beyond the control of the Contractor, such delays will entitle the Contractor to an extension of time as provided herein, but the contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment due to such delays, except as provided for in paragraph c. Such unforeseen events may include: war, government regulations, labor disputes, strikes, fires, floods, adverse weather or elements necessitating cessation of work, inability to obtain specific events as may be further described in the specifications. No extension of time will be granted for a delay caused by the Contractor’s inability to obtain materials unless the Contractor furnishes to the District documentary proof. The proof must be provided in a timely manner in accordance with the sequence of the contractor’s operations and the approved construction schedule. Delays in obtaining materials due to priority of filling orders will not constitute a shortage of materials.


If delays beyond the Contractor’s control are caused by events other than those mentioned above, the District may grant an extension of time. The contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment due to such delays, except as provided for in paragraph c.

B. Time Extensions. Extensions of time, when granted, will be based upon the effect of delays

to the Work. Time extensions will not be granted for delays which do not affect the project’s critical path; a delay that was concurrent with a contractor– caused delay or a delay that could have been absorbed by float. Permitting the Contractor to continue and finish the Work, or any part of it, after the date to which the time fixed for its completion may have been extended, shall under no circumstances operate as a waiver on the part of the District of any of its rights under this contract.

C. Payment for Delays to Contractor. The Contractor will be compensated for damages

incurred due to delays for which the District is responsible. Such actual costs will be determined by the District. The District will not be liable for damages which the Contractor could have avoided by any reasonable means, such as judicious handling of forces, equipment, or plant. The determination of what damages the Contractor could have avoided will be made by the District.

D. Written Notice of Delay. In order to have the best opportunity to mitigate cost and time

impacts of delays, it is necessary for the District to have knowledge of potential delays as early as possible. Therefore the Contractor shall provide written notice to the District as soon as the potential delay is identified, but in no case later than three work days after identification of the potential delay. Said written notice shall be labeled “Notice of Delay” in the reference line and shall describe the nature and cause of the delay Any request for additional compensation and/or extension of contract time as a result of the delay shall be made within 30 calendar days of the date of the Notice of Delay and shall include a detailed calculation of claimed time and cost, and all supporting documentation. Failure to provide notice of any delay within the time and in the manner specified above shall constitute a waiver of any claim arising out of that delay.

E. Liquidated Damages. Failure of the Contractor to complete the Work within the time

allowed will result in damages being sustained by the District. Such damages are, and will continue to be, impracticable and extremely difficult to determine. For each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time specified for the completion of Work, the Contractor shall pay to the District, or have withheld from monies due him, a sum specified in the Specifications as liquidated damages, unless otherwise provided in the Special Conditions. The District shall maintain on file information to substantiate the calculation of the specified sum. Said substantiation may include, but is not limited to, data regarding extended staffing costs and the cost of potential regulatory fines and penalties.

Execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement by the District and the Contractor that the specified daily sum of liquidated damages is the minimum value of the costs and actual damage caused by the failure of the Contractor to complete the Work within the allotted time. Such sum is liquidated damages and shall not be construed as a penalty, and may be deducted from payment due the Contractor if such delay occurs.


F-43 Liquidated damages may also be applied to compensate the District for undue delays in the completion of punch list items, site clean-up, demobilization, and miscellaneous contract obligations after a notice of Substantial Completion has been filed. The cost to the District for administration, inspection, mileage, and other similar items would be extremely difficult to determine and, for that reason, additional liquidated damages, known as Administrative Delay Liquidated Damages, in the amount of $100 per day shall be imposed, effective following 30 days, unless otherwise specified in the Special Conditions, after filing of the notice of Substantial Completion until notice of a Final Completion is issued.

F-33. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF MATERIALS

A. Accepted Standards. All materials and equipment used in construction of the project shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with these contract documents. The laboratory or inspection agency shall be selected by the District. The District will pay for all laboratory inspection service direct and not as a part of the Contract.

B. Inspection. All materials furnished and all work done under these specifications shall be

subject to inspection. Work done in the absence of prescribed inspection may be required to be torn out and replaced under the proper inspection, and the entire cost of tearing out and replacement, including the cost of all materials furnished by the District and used in the work torn out, shall be borne by the Contractor, whether the work torn out is found to be defective or not.

F-34. DEFECTIVE WORK OR MATERIAL The inspection of the work shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations to fulfill his contract as herein prescribed. If the work, or any part thereof, shall be found defective at any time before the final acceptance of the whole work, the Contractor shall forthwith make good such defect without compensation in a manner satisfactory to the District.

If any materials furnished and brought to the work site by the Contractor for use in the work or selected for the same by him, are not in conformity with the specifications, the Contractor shall remove them from the job site.

If the Contractor shall fail or neglect to make ordered repairs of defective work or to remove unsuitable materials from the work within ten (10) days after service by the District of any order to do such repair work or remove such materials, the District may make the ordered repairs or remove the unsuitable materials and deduct the cost thereof from any monies due the Contractor.

The District may accept defective Work instead of requiring its correction or removal and replacement. In such case, if acceptance occurs prior to the making of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents, including appropriate reduction in the Contract Price covering the value of such accepted defective Work and the additional costs the District may incur on account of such defective Work.


F-35. ACCESS TO WORK The District shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefore. The District shall, at all times, have access to all places of manufacture where machinery or materials are being manufactured, produced, or fabricated for use under these specifications. The Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the District access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, etc., and shall provide scales and assistance for weighing, or assistance for measuring any of the materials.

F-36. TIME FOR COMPLETION AND FOR DAMAGES FOR LATE COMPLETION

A. General. It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between the Contractor and the District, that the date of beginning, rate of progress, and the time for completion of the work to be done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this Contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the Work embraced in the Contract shall be commenced on the date specified in the Notice of Acceptance of Proposal.

The Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will insure full completion thereof within the time specified.

B. Repair of Damage by "Acts of God". The Contractor shall not be responsible for the cost of repairing or restoring damage to the Work, which damage is determined to have been proximately caused by an act of God, in excess of five percent (5%) of the contracted amount, provided, that the work damaged is built in accordance with accepted and applicable building standards and the Contract Plans and Specifications.

In the event damage for said act of God exceeds 5%, the District shall be allowed, at its sole discretion, to terminate the Contract.

"Acts of God" shall include only the following occurrences or conditions and effects: earthquakes in excess of a magnitude of 3.5 on the Richter Scale with its epicenter within five (5) miles of the project site.

PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR F-37. QUANTITIES OF ESTIMATE

A. The estimated quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished under this Contract shown in any of the documents including the Proposal, are given only for use in comparing bids and to indicate approximately the total amount of the Contract. The right is reserved except as herein otherwise specifically limited to increase or decrease the estimated quantities as may be deemed reasonably necessary or desirable by the District to complete the Work. Any such increase or decrease shall not give cause for claims or liability for damages.


F-45

The Contractor shall furnish an itemized breakdown of the Contract price of all lump sum bid items for the District’s approval. The breakdown shall include quantities, unit prices and any other information required, in sufficient detail, to enable it to be used by the District in preparing monthly progress estimates.

Unit prices for pipelines may be broken down as allowed by the specification section for the installation of the pipeline. All other costs not specifically shown by an item shall be prorated among the applicable items listed. No progress payments will be made until this breakdown is submitted by the Contractor pursuant to section titled Construction Schedule and Periodic Estimates and approved by the District. EN-29, Breakdown of Contract Price or Schedule of Values (from Section 01026), whichever is required, shall be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the District by the tenth (10th) of the month to allow processing of the monthly pay estimate. Submittal and approval of EN-29 or Schedule of Values beyond the tenth (10th) of the month will result in the pay estimate being processed the following month. Payment for pipe delivery shall be based on submitted verifiable invoices for the pipe from the pipe manufacturer.

B. No Payment for Temporary Works. Compensation for all temporary works and/orservices, facilities, equipment, or material necessary or required to execute the work inaccordance with the provisions of the Contract shall be considered as having beenincluded in the prices stipulated for the appropriate items of work.

F-38. CLAIMS

The Contractor shall not be entitled to the payment of any additional compensation for any act, or failure to act, by the District, including failure or refusal to issue a change order, or for the happening of any event, thing, occurrence, or other cause, unless the Contractor shall have given the District due written notice of potential claim as hereinafter specified.

The written notice of potential claim shall be submitted to the District prior to the time that the Contractor performs the work giving rise to the potential claim for additional compensation, if based on an act or failure to act by the District, or in all other cases within 3 days after the happening of the event, thing, occurrence, or other cause, giving rise to the potential claim.

The notice shall set forth the facts and contractual basis for which the Contractor believes additional compensation will or may be due and the nature of the costs involved. Unless the amount of the potential claim has been stated in the written notice, the Contractor shall, within 7 days of submitting the notice, furnish an estimate of the cost of the affected work and impacts, if any, on project completion. The estimate of costs may be changed or updated by the Contractor when conditions have changed. When the affected work is completed, the Contractor shall submit substantiation of the Contractor’s actual costs. Failure to provide the District with the information as detailed above and within the timeframes described shall be sufficient cause for denial of any claim subsequently filed on the basis of the notice of potential claim.


It is the intention of this section that differences between the parties arising under and by virtue of the contract be brought to the attention of the District at the earliest possible time in order that the matters may be settled, if possible, or other appropriate action promptly taken. The Contractor hereby agrees that the Contractor shall have no right to additional compensation for any claim that may be based on any act, failure to act, event, thing or occurrence for which no written notice of potential claim as herein required was filed.

Should the District require the Contractor’s records of the project, as deemed by the District to be pertinent to the potential claim, all documents requested shall be made available to the District for inspection and copying upon immediate request.

Disputes of Construction Claims.

A. Upon receipt by District of a claim by Contractor for a time extension or payment, sent by registered mail or certified mail with return receipt requested, District shall, within 45 days, review the claim and provide Contractor a written statement indicating what portion of the claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed. Contractor shall furnish reasonable documentation to support the claim, and, upon mutual agreement, this time period may be extended. If District requires Board approval to issue its written statement to Contractor, and the Board does not meet within the 45 days or mutually agreed upon time extension, District shall have 3 days after its next regular Board meeting following the expiration of the 45-day period or extension to provide Contractor with its written statement. Any payments owed Contractor on undisputed portions of its claim shall be made by District within 60 days of issuance of its written statement. If Contractor disputes District’s written response, or if District fails to provide a written response, Contractor may demand an informal settlement conference. Such demand shall be made in writing, sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, and District shall schedule the settlement conference within 30 days of receiving demand. Within 10 days following any settlement conference, District shall issue a second written statement indicating which portions of the claim are disputed and which portions are undisputed. Any payments owed for undisputed portions of the claim shall be made within 60 days of District’s written statement. Any remaining disputed portions of the claim shall be submitted to non-binding arbitration. If the Parties cannot agree on a mediator within 10 days after the disputed portion has been identified, each Party shall select a mediator, and those mediators shall select a neutral to conduct the mediation. If mediation is unsuccessful, the portions of the claim remaining in dispute shall be subject to applicable procedures provided by law. If the matter is litigated, the mediation conducted pursuant to this provision shall satisfy the Parties’ obligations under section 20104.4 to mediate after litigation has commenced. Failure by District to comply with this provision shall result in the claim being denied in its entirety.


F-47The procedures set forth in this provision shall apply to subcontractors and lower tier subcontractors, who may request that Contractor submit a claim to District on their behalf. If such a request is made, Contractor shall notify the requesting subcontractor within 45 days whether Contractor submitted the claim to District, and if not, the reasons therefor.”

B. Pursuant to Section 20104, et seq. of the Public Contract Code, this article applies to all public worksclaims of three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000) or less which arise between aContractor and the District. This article shall not apply to any claims resulting from this contractwhen the District has elected to resolve any disputes pursuant to the arbitration procedures setforth in section titled Arbitration.

“Claim” means a separate demand by the contractor for (A) a time extension, (B) payment of moneyor damages arising from work done by, or on behalf of the Contractor, pursuant to the contract fora public work and payment of which is not otherwise expressly provided for, or the Contractor is nototherwise entitled to, or (C) an amount the payment of which is disputed by the District.

The claim shall be in writing and include the documents necessary to substantiate the claim. Claimsmust be filed on or before the date of final payment. Nothing in this subdivision is intended toextend the time limit or supersede notice requirements otherwise provided by contract for the filingof claims.

For claims of less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000), the District shall respond in writing to anywritten claim within 45 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days ofreceipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses tothe claim the District may have against the Contractor.

If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to thissubdivision, upon mutual agreement of the District and the Contractor.

The District’s written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to theContractor within 15 days after receipt of further documentation or within a period of time nogreater than that taken by the Contractor in producing the additional information, whichever isgreater.

For claims greater than or equal to fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) and less than or equal to threehundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000), the District shall respond in writing to all writtenclaims within 60 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt ofthe claim any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claimthe District may have against the Contractor. If additional information is thereafter required, it shallbe requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the District andthe Contractor.

The District’s written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to theContractor within 30 days after receipt of further documentation or within a period of time nogreater than that taken by the Contractor in producing the additional information, whichever isgreater.


If the Contractor disputes the District’s written response, or the District fails to respond within the time prescribed, the Contractor may so notify the District, in writing, either within 15 days of receipt of the District’s response or within 15 days of the District’s failure to respond within the time prescribed, respectively, and demand an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon a demand, the District shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute.

Following the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion remains in dispute, the Contractor may file a claim as provided in Section 900 et seq., and Section 910 et seq. of the Government Code. For purposes of those provisions, the running of the period of time within which a claim must be filed shall be tolled from the time the Contractor submits his written claim pursuant to subdivision (a) until the time that claim is denied as a result of the meet and confer process, including any period of time utilized by the meet and confer process. These provisions of the Public Contract Code do not apply to tort claims and nothing in this article is intended nor shall be construed to change the time periods for filing tort claims or actions specified by Section 900 et seq. and Section 910 et seq. of the Government Code.

Following the meet and confer conference and the applicable claims procedure, any civil action filed to resolve such a claim shall be subject to the following procedures. Within 60 days, but no earlier than 30 days, following the filing or responsive pleadings, the court shall submit the matter to nonbinding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation of both parties. The mediation process shall provide for the selection within 15 days by both parties of a disinterested third person as mediator, shall be commenced within 30 days of the submittal, and shall be concluded within 15 days from the commencement of the mediation unless a time requirement is extended upon a good cause showing to the court or by stipulation of both parties. If the parties fail to select a mediator within the 15 day period, any party may petition the court to appoint the mediator.

If the matter remains in dispute, the case shall be submitted to judicial arbitration pursuant to Section 1141.10 et seq, of the Code of Civil Procedure, notwithstanding Section 1141.11 of that code. Section 2016, et seq. of the Code of Civil Procedure shall apply to any proceeding brought under this subdivision consistent with the rules pertaining to judicial arbitration.

Notwithstanding any other provision of law, upon stipulation of the parties, arbitrators appointed for purposes of this article shall be experienced in construction law, and, upon stipulation of the parties, mediators and arbitrators shall be paid necessary and reasonable hourly rates of pay not to exceed their customary rate, and such fees and expenses shall be paid equally by the parties, except in the case of arbitration where the arbitrator, for good cause, determines a different division. In no event shall these fees or expenses be paid by state or county funds.

In addition to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.10) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, any party who after receiving an arbitration award requests a trial de novo but does not obtain a more favorable judgment shall, in addition to payment of costs and fees under that chapter, pay the attorney’s fees of the other party arising out of the trial de novo.

The court may, upon request by any party, order any witnesses to participate in the mediation or arbitration process.


F-49

F-39. ARBITRATION

Any controversy or claim arising out or relating to this Contract, or the breach thereof, may upon priorwritten agreement by all parties, be submitted to and settled by arbitration in accordance with theConstruction Industry Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon theaward rendered by the Arbitrator(s) may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof. Either party,upon agreeing to arbitration, shall have the right to require continuous sessions.

The Arbitrator's fee and scope of work shall be agreed upon in writing by all parties to the arbitrationand fixed prior to the appointment of the Arbitrator(s). Either party shall have the right to require inwriting from the Arbitrator(s) the reasons for the decision rendered by the Arbitrator(s) in the formof a “conclusions of law/written decision/Findings of Fact” with the elements set forth below.

An award against the District reached through an arbitrated settlement must be presented in writingand include the following elements:

A. Legal "Findings of Fact" established by the Arbitrator.

B. A specific breakdown of the dollar amounts allocated for each issue underarbitration.

C. The Arbitrator's "Conclusions of Law." D.

A summary of the evidence.

D. Reasons underlying the Arbitrator's award.

F-40. RETENTION

Not later than fifteen (15) calendar days following receipt from the Contractor of a duly certified andapproved periodic estimate of the work performed prior to the twentieth (20th) day of the precedingcalendar month, the District will make a partial payment to the Contractor on the basis of that estimate.To ensure the proper performance of this Contract from each progress estimate, 5 percent will bededucted and retained by the District, and payment of the remainder less the amount of all previouspayments will be made. No progress payment made to the Contractor or its sureties will constitute awaiver of liquidated damages or any other damages or legal remedies that may arise under this Contract.

A. Substitution of Securities

1. Escrow Agreement. If Contractor, pursuant to Public Contract Code Sec.22300, elects to deposit securities with an Escrow Agent as a substitute for contractretention required, he shall enter into an Escrow Agreement in the following formper attached Exhibit A entitled Escrow Agreement for Security Deposits.


2. Eligible Securities. Securities eligible for investment under this section shall includethose listed in Section 16430 of the Government Code, bank or savings and loancertificates of deposit, interest bearing demand deposit accounts, standby letters ofcredit, or any other security mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the District.

F-41. PAYMENT FOR EQUIPMENT

In preparing estimates the material delivered on the site and preparatory work done may be taken intoconsideration. Payment in advance of installation for materials or equipment received at the site andproperly stored and protected for future installation under the contract will be made only on majoritems, as determined by the District.

F-42. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Payment shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligations under the contract; nor shall such paymentbe construed as the transfer of ownership of any equipment or materials to the District. Responsibility ofownership shall remain with the Contractor who shall be obligated to store any fully or partially completedwork or structure for which payment has been made; or replace any materials or equipment required tobe provided under the contract which may be damaged, lost, stolen or otherwise degraded in any wayprior to acceptance of the Work.

Payment for safety, sanitary and medical requirements shall be considered in the contract unit or lumpsum prices paid for various items of work, and no additional allowance will be made therefore, unless aseparate bid item for this work is included in the proposal.

Payment for maintenance of traffic and detours and for conforming to all of the provisions of theseSpecifications shall be considered to be included in the Contract unit or lump sum prices paid for variousitems of work where maintenance of traffic and detours is required, and no additional allowance will bemade therefore, unless a separate bid item for this work is included in the proposal.

Preset Bid Item No. 1. A pre-determined lump sum bid item is included in the Proposal form forsupplying Bonds, Insurance, Breakdown of Contract Price or Schedule of Values, and a PreliminaryProject Schedule which is subject to the conditions and limitations in the Specifications.

Mobilization payment shall be paid on the first periodic estimate, provided that the bonds, insurance,EN-29, Breakdown of Contract Bid Items or Schedule of Values, and the Preliminary Project Schedule havebeen approved by the District.

F-43. DISTRICT'S RIGHT TO WITHHOLD CERTAIN AMOUNTS AND MAKE APPLICATION THEREOF

The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the District harmless from all claims growingout of the lawful demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, andfurnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies, incurred in thefurtherance of the performance of this Contract.


F-51

The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If the Contractor fails to do so then the District may, after having served written notice on the said Contractor, either pay unpaid bills, of which the District has written notice, direct, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to the Contractor shall be resumed, in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Contractor or his surety.

In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the District shall be deemed the agent of the Contractor, and any payment so made by the District shall be considered as a payment made under the Contract by the District to the Contractor, and the District shall not be liable to the Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. At the option of the District, monies may be retained to cover properly executed claims from subcontractors, materialmen or suppliers indicating lack of payment by the Contractor for subcontracts, materials or equipment for which the Contractor has previously been paid by the District.

Implementation of this provision shall only be in accordance with the intent of the District to protect sufficient monies to complete the Contract and/or secure equipment warranties in the event of default of the Contract by the Contractor.

If, within the time fixed by law, a properly executed notice to stop payment is filed with the District, due to the Contractor’s failure to pay for labor or materials used in the Work, 125% of all money due for such labor or materials will be withheld from payment to the Contractor in accordance with the applicable laws.

After the date of acceptance of the Work, or as prescribed by law, the amount deducted from the final estimate and retained by the District will be paid to the Contractor except such amounts as are required by law to be withheld by properly executed and filed notices to stop payment, or as may be authorized by the contract to be further retained.

F-44. FINAL ESTIMATE AND PAYMENT

Whenever, in the opinion of the District, the Contractor shall have completely performed the Workrequired in the Contract Documents, the District shall cause to be filed, a Notice of Acceptance of theWork in the County Recorder’s office. After the filing of the Notice of Acceptance of the Work, theDistrict shall pay to the Contractor the amount remaining net of all outstanding disputes, claims or liens.All prior certificates, upon which partial payments may have been made, being merely estimates, shallbe subject to correction in the final certificate.

The requirements set forth in Section 7107 of the Public Contract Code shall be applicable to theproject in regard to disbursement of retention proceeds withheld from any payment to the primecontractor.


F-45. PAYROLLS OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS

The regulations of the Secretary of Labor applicable to contractors and subcontractors (29 CFR Part 3),made pursuant to the Copeland Act, as amended (40 U.S.C. 276c) and to aid in the endorsement of theAnti-Kickback Act (18 U.S.C. 874) are made a part of this Contract by reference. The Contractor and eachof his subcontractors shall prepare his payrolls on forms prescribed and in accordance with instructionsto be furnished by the District. Within ten (10) days after regular payment date of the payroll, theContractor shall deliver to the District a certified legible copy or copies of each such payroll.

Each payroll shall be sworn to in accordance with the Federal Regulations made pursuant to the "Kick-Back Statute." In the event of noncompliance with this requirement following ten (10) days specificwritten notice, the Contractor shall, pursuant to Section 1776 of the California Labor Code, forfeit as apenalty one hundred dollars ($100.00) for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker, untilstrict compliance is effectuated. Upon request of the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the Divisionof Labor Standards Enforcement, these penalties shall be withheld from the progress payments due.Responsibility for compliance shall rest with the prime Contractor. A Contractor is not subject to a penaltyassessment pursuant to this section due to the failure of a subcontractor to comply with this section.

Each Contractor or subcontractor shall preserve his weekly payroll records for a period of three (3) yearsfrom the date of completion of the Contract. The payroll records shall set out accurately and completelythe name, occupational classification, and hourly wage rate of each employee, hours worked by himduring the payroll period, and full weekly wages earned by him, any deductions made from such weeklywages, and the actual weekly wages paid to him. Such payroll records shall be submitted to theDepartment of Industrial Relations Electronic Certified Payroll Records system, be made available forinspection by the District or its authorized representatives, and shall be furnished to the District or othersupon request, pursuant to the provisions of the California Labor Code.

F-46. PREVAILING RATES OF WAGES

In accordance with the provisions of the California Labor Code, the Director of Industrial Relations hasascertained the general prevailing wage rates in the locality in which the work is to be performed, foreach craft or type of workman needed to execute the contract, and said wage rates are on file at theDistrict office and will be made available to any interested party on request. The Contractor must payprevailing wages.

The Contractor shall comply with the applicable provisions of the Labor Code including, but not limitedto, the following.

The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the District two-hundred dollars ($200.00) for each calendarday, or portion thereof, for each workman paid less than the said stipulated prevailing rates for any workdone under the contract by him, or by any subcontractor under him, in violation of the provisions of theCalifornia Labor Code, for transmittal to the State Treasurer ninety (90) days after acceptance of thework. This penalty shall be in addition to any shortfall in wages paid.


F-53There shall be paid each laborer or mechanic of the Contractor or subcontractor engaged in work on the project under this contract in the trade or occupation listed by the Director of the California Department of Industrial Relations, not less than the hourly wage rate or holidays or overtime wage rate for the same, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the Contractor or any subcontractor and such laborers and mechanics.

The foregoing specified wage rates are minimum rates only, and the District will not consider any claims for additional compensation made by the Contractor because of payment by the Contractor of any wage rate in excess of the applicable rate contained in this contract. Increased costs resulting from increases in ascertained wage rates subsequent to the contract advertisement or award shall be borne solely by the Contractor.

Upon request of the Division of Apprenticeship Standards or the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, penalties shall be withheld from progress payments due. The Contractor agrees that, in case of underpayment of wages to any worker on the project under this Contract by the Contractor or any subcontractor, the District shall withhold from the Contractor out of payments due, an amount sufficient to pay such worker the difference between the wages required to be paid under this Contract and the wages actually paid such worker for the total number of hours worked and that the District may disburse such amount so withheld by it for and on account of the Contractor to the employee to whom such amount is due. The Contractor further agrees that the amount to be withheld pursuant to this paragraph may be in addition to the percentages to be retained by the District pursuant to other provisions of this Contract.

F-47. COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE

The Work will be inspected by the District for acceptance upon receipt of the Contractor’s writtenrepresentation that the Work has been completed.

If, in the District’s judgment, the Work has been completed and is ready for acceptance, it will so certifythe completion of the work.

All work shall be guaranteed by the Contractor against defective workmanship and materials furnishedby the Contractor for a period of 1 year from the date the Work was completed. The Contractor shallreplace or repair any such defective work in a manner satisfactory to the District, after notice to do sofrom the District, and within the time specified in the notice. If the Contractor fails to make suchreplacement or repairs within the time specified in the notice, the District may perform this work andthe Contractor’s sureties shall be liable for the cost thereof.

F-48. FINAL PAYMENT DECLARATION

Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall provide a declaration certifying that all labor and materialhas been paid for, together with releases from all subcontractors and materialmen, or documenting alloutstanding obligations. Contractor shall also, in writing, waive all claims by the Contractor against theDistrict, or document all outstanding claims.


F-49. PAYMENT ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH CONTRACT

The Contractor shall not demand nor be entitled to receive payment for the Work or materials, nor any portion thereof, except in the manner set forth in the Contract.

F-50. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

At the discretion of the District, part or all of the project may be placed into operation prior to full completion of the work. If applicable, the District may not assess liquidated damages to that portion of the work, after the date of substantial completion.

F-51. MONIES MAY BE RETAINED

The District may retain any monies which would otherwise be payable at any time hereunder, and apply the same, or so much as may be necessary therefore, to the payment of any expenses, losses, or damages, as determined by the District, incurred by the District, for which the Contractor is liable under the Contract.

F-52. UNPAID CLAIMS Persons providing labor, equipment, materials or services toward performance of this Contract, and who claim to have not been paid for work done or items furnished, shall comply with the applicable provisions of California Civil Code for the filing of a Preliminary Notice and Stop Notice. In the discretion of the District, the Contractor may be permitted to file a bond, pursuant to Civil Code section 3196. The filing of such a bond will result in no further withholding on account of the stop notice.

F-53. EIGHT HOUR LAW Pursuant to the provisions of the California Labor Code, including Section 1810 to Section 1815 inclusive, eight (8) hours labor shall constitute a legal day's work and the time of service of any worker employed on the work shall be limited and restricted to eight (8) hours during any one calendar day, except in cases of extraordinary emergency, caused by fire, flood, or danger to life or property. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the District twenty-five dollars ($25.00) for each worker employed in the execution of this Contract by him or by any subcontractor under him, for each calendar day during which such worker is required or permitted to labor more than eight (8) hours in any one calendar day and forty (40) hours in any one calendar week in violation of the provisions of said Labor Code.

The Contractor shall be bound by and comply with applicable provisions of the Labor Code and Federal, State, and local laws related to labor. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the provisions of the Labor Code regarding minimum wages; the 8 hour day and 40 hour work week; overtime; Saturday, Sunday, and holiday work.


F-55

F-54. OVERTIME - NO EXTRA COMPENSATION

Overtime work, i.e., work in excess of forty (40) hours in any work week, or work performed on a Sundayor other legal holiday shall not entitle the Contractor to any compensation for any contract items inaddition to that stipulated in the Contract for the kind of work performed, even though such overtime orlegal holiday work may be required under emergency conditions, and may be ordered by the District inwriting. In case of extra work ordered by the District under the provisions of paragraph titled Changes inWork and Extras hereof, no additional payment will be made to the Contractor because of the paymentby him of overtime or legal holiday rates for such work unless the use of overtime or legal holiday work inconnection with such extra work is specifically ordered in writing by the District, and then only to suchextent as extra payment is regularly being made by the Contractor to his employees for overtime or legalholiday work of a similar nature in the same locality.

F-55. POSTING MINIMUM WAGE RATES

The Contractor shall post at appropriate conspicuous points at the site of the project a copy of theapplicable state wage rates, in addition to Federal Wage Determinations when specifically required, forthe various classes of laborers and mechanics to be engaged in work on the project under this Contractand all deductions, if any, required by law to be made from unpaid wages actually earned by thelaborers and mechanics so engaged.

PERSONNEL

F-56. ACCIDENT PREVENTION - PUBLIC SAFETY

Precaution shall be exercised at all times for the protection of persons (including employees) andproperty, and hazardous conditions shall be guarded against or eliminated. The Contractor shall makeadequate provisions, subject to the approval of the District, to protect the project and the Contractor'sfacilities from fire, flooding, theft, and vandalism, and the public from exposure to injury.

During the performance of the Work the Contractor shall erect and maintain temporary fences, bridges,railings, and barriers and shall take all other necessary precautions and place proper guards for theprevention of accidents; shall put up and keep suitable and sufficient lights and other signals. TheContractor shall indemnify and save harmless the District from all damages and costs to which it may beput by reason of injury to person or property resulting from the Contractor's negligence or carelessnessin the performance of the work, or in guarding the same, or from any improper materials, implements,or appliances used in its construction, or by or on account of any act or omission of the Contractor or hisagents.

Nothing in this section shall be construed to impose tort liability on the District.


F-57. CHARACTER OF WORKERS

None but skilled workers shall be employed on work requiring special qualifications. When required inwriting by the District, the Contractor or any subcontractor shall discharge any person who is, in theopinion of the District, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly or otherwise unsatisfactory, and shall notagain employ such discharged person on the Work except with the consent of the District. Such dischargeshall not be the basis of any claim for compensation or damages against the District.

F-58. EMPLOYMENT

No convict labor shall be directly employed by the Contractor or any subcontractor in theperformance of any work done under this Contract.

In the employment of labor in the performance of this contract, the District desires that the Contractorand all subcontractors shall, wherever possible, give first consideration to residents of the District.

F-59. NONDISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT

Pursuant to the requirements of Federal and State law, including, but not limited to, California LaborCode Section 1735 and 29 U.S.C. 623, the Contractor shall not discriminate in the employment ofpersons because of the race, religious creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical handicap, medicalcondition, marital status, sex or age of such persons.

F-60. ENFORCEMENT OF ORDER

The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining good order at all locations where work isperformed under this contract and to that end shall employ such guards or other persons as may berequired. Unauthorized persons shall be excluded from the site of the Work. The Contractor shall notsell, nor shall he permit the introduction or use of, intoxicating liquors or narcotics upon the worksdescribed in these specifications or upon any of the grounds occupied or controlled by him inconnection with such works.

F-61. SAFETY, SANITARY AND MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. General. The Contractor shall abide by Labor Code Section 6401.7 which requires him toestablish, implement and maintain an Injury and Illness Protection Program. TheContractor and his subcontractors and employees shall promptly and fully carry out thesafety, sanitary, and medical requirements as hereinafter stated or as may from time totime be prescribed by the District, to the end that proper work shall be done, and thesafety and health of the employees and of the local communities may be preserved andsafeguarded. The Contractor shall dismiss and shall not engage except with the writtenconsent of the District any employee who violates the safety, or medical requirements.


F-57

B. Trench Shoring. Pursuant to the provisions of Section 6500, et . seq. of the California LaborCode, the Contractor planning excavation or trench work is required to obtain a permit forsuch work from the Division of Occupational Safety and Health. The Contractor is requiredto submit a detailed plan, which shall be accepted by the District, in advance of anyexcavation. The detailed plan must show the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or otherprovisions to be made for worker protection from the hazard of caving ground during theexcavation of such trench or trenches. If such plan varies from the shoring systemstandards, the plan shall be prepared by a registered civil or structural engineer.

C. Safety Officer. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization atthe site whose duty shall be the prevention of hazards and accidents. This person shall bethe Contractor's Superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractorto the District.

D. Representatives for Emergencies. The Contractor shall file with the District a written listgiving the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of a least two of his representativeswho can be contacted at any time in case of emergency, not limited to working hours.The representatives shall be fully authorized and equipped to correct unsafe orinconvenient conditions on short notice. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Districtof all changes in the listing.

F-62. SANITATION

All parts of the Work shall be maintained in a neat, clean and sanitary condition. Fixed and portable toiletsshall be provided wherever needed for use of employees and their use shall be strictly enforced. All wasteand refuse from sanitary facilities provided by the Contractor or from any other source related to theContractor's operations shall be taken care of in a sanitary manner satisfactory to the District and inaccordance with the laws and regulations pertaining thereto. The Contractor shall furnish all the facilitiesand means for the proper sanitation of the work and shall protect and save harmless the District.

F-63. FIRST AID AND PROTECTIVE FACILITIES

First Aid facilities and supplies shall be kept on the Work and instructions in first aid shall be given asrequired by the State Regulations, and the Contractor shall provide and maintain all measures requiredby said regulations for the safety and protection of employees.

End of Section F

Rev: 04/2018 00064 Exhibit A

1

Exhibit A

ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS

IN LIEU OF RETENTION

Pursuant to Section 22300, payment of retentions earned shall be deposited in a trust account with a federally chartered bank or savings association.

THIS ESCROW AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between EASTERN MUNICIPAL WATER

DISTRICT, whose address is P.O. Box 8300, Perris, California 92572-8300 (hereinafter called

"DISTRICT");

whose address is

(hereinafter

called CONTRACTOR"); and whose address is

(hereinafter called

"escrow agent").

FOR CONSIDERATION HEREINAFTER SET FORTH, THE DISTRICT,

CONTRACTOR, AND ESCROW AGENT AGREE AS FOLLOWS:

1. Pursuant to Section 22300 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, the

CONTRACTOR has the option to deposit securities with the escrow agent as a substitute for

retention earnings required to be withheld by the DISTRICT pursuant to the Construction Contract

entered into between the DISTRICT and CONTRACTOR for

in the amount of dated (hereinafter

referred to as the "Contract"). Alternatively, on written request of the CONTRACTOR, the DISTRICT

shall make payments of the retention earnings directly to the escrow agent.

00065 Exhibit A

2

When the CONTRACTOR deposits the securities as a substitute for Contract earnings, the escrow

agent shall notify the DISTRICT within ten days of the deposit. The market value of the securities

at the time of the substitution shall be at least equal to the cash amount then required to be

withheld as retention under the terms of the Contract between the DISTRICT and the

CONTRACTOR. Securities shall be held in the name of EASTERN MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT, and

shall designate the CONTRACTOR as the beneficial owner.

2. The DISTRICT shall make progress payments to the CONTRACTOR for those funds which

otherwise would be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provisions,

provided that the escrow agent holds securities in the form and amount specified above.

3. When the DISTRICT makes payment of retentions earned directly to the escrow agent, the

escrow agent shall hold them for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR until such time as the escrow

created under this contract is terminated. The CONTRACTOR may direct the investment of the

payments into securities. All terms and conditions of this agreement and the rights and

responsibilities of the parties shall be equally applicable and binding when the DISTRICT pays the

escrow agent directly.

4. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for paying all fees for the expenses incurred by

escrow agent in administering the Escrow Account and all expenses of the DISTRICT. These

expenses and payment terms shall be determined by the DISTRICT, the CONTRACTOR and escrow

agent.

5. The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all

interest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of CONTRACTOR and shall be subject

to withdrawal by CONTRACTOR at any time and from time to time without notice to the DISTRICT.

00065 Exhibit A

3

6. The CONTRACTOR shall have the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal in the

Escrow Account only by written notice to the Escrow Agent accompanied by written authorization

from the DISTRICT to the Escrow Agent that the DISTRICT consents to the withdrawal of the

amount sought to be withdrawn by CONTRACTOR.

7. The DISTRICT shall have a right to draw upon the securities in the event of default by the

CONTRACTOR. Upon seven days' written notice to the escrow agent from the DISTRICT of the

default, the escrow agent shall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute the

cash as instructed by the DISTRICT.

8. Upon receipt of written notification from the DISTRICT certifying that the Contract is final

and complete, and that the CONTRACTOR has complied with all requirements and procedures

applicable to the Contract, the escrow agent shall release to the CONTRACTOR all securities and

interest on deposit less escrow fees and charges of the Escrow Account. The escrow shall be

closed immediately upon disbursement of all monies and securities on deposit and payments of

fees and charges.

9. The escrow agent shall rely on the written notifications from the DISTRICT and the

CONTRACTOR pursuant to Sections (5) to (8), inclusive, of this Agreement and the DISTRICT and

CONTRACTOR shall hold escrow agent harmless from escrow agent's release, conversion and

disbursement of the securities and interest as set forth above.

10. The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notice or to receive written

notice on behalf of the DISTRICT and on behalf of CONTRACTOR in connection with the foregoing,

and exemplars of their respective signatures are as follows:

00065 Exhibit A

4

On behalf of District: On behalf of Contractor:

Director of Finance Title Title

Charles Turner Name Name

Signature Signature

P.O. Box 8300, Perris, CA 92572 Address Address

OR

Controller Title

Wilma T. Garriz, CPA Name

Signature

P.O. Box 8300, Perris, CA 92572 Address

On behalf of escrow agent:

Title

Name Signature

At the time the Escrow Account is opened, the DISTRICT and CONTRACTOR shall deliver to

the escrow agent a fully executed counterpart of this Agreement.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers

on the date first set forth above.

00065 Exhibit A

5

DISTRICT CONTRACTOR

Title Title

Name Name

Signature Signature

00065 Exhibit A

6


H-1 00066 Section H - Permits



SECTION H - PERMITS

The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses; the District will reimburse the Contractor of all charges, fees and taxes; and the Contractor shall give all notices necessary and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the work; except as follows:

Permit(s) applied for by the District and shall be provided at a later date:

PERMITS/LICENSE AGENCY Standard by Generator at TVRWRF SCAQMD Standard by Generator at SJVRWRF SCAQMD

The District is the main point of contact for District acquired permits. If required by the permitting agency, Contractor shall pull a duplicate permit.

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to contact the above agency and to make himself knowledgeable and responsible to all of their approval and construction requirements. Contractor shall, at no additional charge to the District, construct the work in strict accordance with the above listed agencies.

The Contractor shall coordinate with all jurisdictions to protect and replace, if necessary, survey monuments, property corners, TBM’s, etc. encountered during construction. A subsequent corner record shall be filed appropriately for the replacement of any damaged monument that has been destroyed, damaged, covered, obscured, or otherwise obliterated by construction.

The liability insurance required under Section F-04 under General Conditions and stated in the Special Conditions shall include as additional insureds EMWD and the above listed agencies.

H-2 00066 Section H - Permits


SC-1 00100 Special Conditions



SECTION SC - SPECIAL CONDITIONS SPECIAL PROVISIONS

SC-01. Safety. Safety of all activities in connection with the work is of paramount and overriding importance. See Section 01000 - General Safety Requirements for details.

A preconstruction safety conference shall be scheduled prior to the preconstruction conference to review the respective safety requirements and to discuss implementation of all health and safety provisions related to this project. The Contractor and District representatives shall be present.

Please note that the District reserves the right to suspend the work wholly or in part, for any time period as the District representative deems necessary, due to unresolved safety disputes. See Section 01000 - 1.04.

No additional compensation or contract time will be allowed for the period the work is wholly or in part suspended.

Should the contractor continue with the disputed work after having received a written notice of suspension, any work performed by the Contractor during the suspension shall be considered as having been done by the Contractor at the Contractor's own risk as a volunteer, and shall not entitle the Contractor to compensation or any other rights under the contract.

The Contractor shall submit an Injury and Illness Prevention Program and a Project Specific Safety Plan to the District at the pre-construction conference. The Contractor shall not begin work until the above referenced documents have been accepted by the District.

The Contractor shall conform to all applicable occupational safety and health standards, rules, regulations and orders established by local agencies, State of California, and California Division of Occupational Safety and Health Construction Safety Regulations (Cal Osha), including obtaining permits required by California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Sections 341 and 341 (a).


The Contractor’s on-site superintendent shall be responsible for keeping a daily log, updated continuously, of the workers on-site each day and posting the log in a location acceptable to the Plant Managers. The log shall clearly identify check-in and check-out times for each person employed by the Contractor, his sub-contractors, and/or suppliers. SC-02. Scope of Work. The work comprises construction to relocate and recondition one existing high efficiency electric turbo blower from TVRWRF to MVRWRF, and install it and install new master control panel and programming at MVRWRF; install one high efficiency electric turbo blower, one standby generator and fuel storage tank, modify existing master control panel and programming at the SJVRWRF; install three high efficiency electric turbo blowers to replace existing engine-driven blowers, new redundant master control panel, one standby generator and fuel storage tank, modify existing master control panel and programming at the TVRWRF. The work shall include, but not be limited to, all labor, materials, and supplies needed to replace existing engine-driven blowers, install blowers, new generator and fuel storage tanks, provide new or modify existing piping, electrical, and control systems; and demolition and properly disposal of existing equipment, piping, electrical, controls, and associated appurtenances, in accordance with these specifications and the contract drawings. SC-03. Construction Period and Requirements. The contract time is set forth in the Notice Inviting Bids. The following documents shall be accepted by the District prior to any construction: A. Insurance Certificate(s) and all required endorsements B. Injury and Illness Prevention Program C. EN-84: Specific Operating Safety Procedure (see section 01000) D. Best Management Practices (BMP) E. CPM Schedule. Before any work of any subcontractor is started, the Contractor shall submit, at the preconstruction conference, a Subcontractors List and Worker Classification form giving the name, business, license number, email address, and worker classification for each subcontractor who will perform work on the project. Contractor shall update and resubmit the Subcontractors List and Worker Classification as required. (see Section F-General Conditions, F-17, Subcontracts, c. Contract Provisions). Schedule of Values. The Contractor shall be responsible to submit and receive District approval of the Schedule of Values (see Section 01026) by the tenth (10th) of the month for processing of the monthly pay estimate. Submittal and approval of Schedule of Values beyond the 10th of the month will result in the pay estimate processed the following month (pay period ends on the 20th of each month).


SC-04. Performance and Payment Bonds. Pursuant to Section 995.660(a) of the Code of Civil Procedure, the Contractor shall submit the following documents with the performance and payment bonds: (1) The original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney,

bylaws, or other instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so;

(2) A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the State of

California’s Insurance Commissioner; and (3) Copies of the insurer's most recent annual and quarterly statements filed with the

Department of Insurance. NO PAYMENT SHALL BE MADE UNTIL THE BONDS ARE APPROVED SC-05. Location of Contract Work Site. The contract work site is at three locations. MVRWRF is located at 17140 Kitching Street, Moreno Valley, Riverside County, California 92551. SJVRWRF is located at 770 N. Sanderson Avenue, San Jacinto, Riverside County, California 92583. TVRWRF is located at 42565 Avenida Alvarado, Temecula, Riverside County, CA 92590. Refer to Pre-Bid Walk-Directions. SC-06. Liquidated Damages. The project has completion milestones as noted in the following table. The completion schedules for each milestone are independent of each other.

Milestones Description Construction

Duration (Calendar Days)

Liquidated Damages

($/Calendar Day)

Milestone 1

Complete the installation of high efficiency electric turbo blowers to replace existing engine-driven blowers at TVRWRF. The turbo blowers shall be operational and have backup power.

300 $2,000

Project Completion Complete all project work 360 $1,000

Liquidated damages shall be assessed at the amount shown for each calendar day of unauthorized delay in the completion of the work. For this purpose, “substantial completion” as defined in the General Condition, Section F-50, shall be used to determine whether or not liquidated damages are applicable.


Liquidated damages for each milestone will be calculated independent of the other completion milestones. Fines from regulatory agencies for late completion will not be passed on to the Contractor since it is impossible to know the amount of any such fines. Administrative Delay Liquidated Damages. Liquidated damages may also be applied to compensate the District for undue delays in the completion of punch list items, site clean-up, demobilization, and miscellaneous contract obligations after a notice of Substantial Completion has been filed. The cost to the District for administration, inspection, mileage, and other similar items would be extremely difficult to determine. For that reason, additional liquidated damages, known as Administrative Delay Liquidated Damages shall be imposed in the amount of $500 per day, effective 60 days after the Substantial Completion date is filed or the Revised Completion date is reached, whichever is later. Charges will be assessed until the Final Completion date is issued by the Inspector. SC-07. Construction Water. For work under this specification, the Contractor can obtain water, free of charge, upon proper arrangements for metering its use from the Districts Resident Inspector at MVRWRF, SJVRWRF and TVRWRF. Contractor shall provide all necessary piping and appurtenances, including pumps, to convey water to the work site. Arrangements for water from sources other than EMWD shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, and no additional compensation will be allowed. District must certify that all equipment, including but not limited to, water trucks and overhead tanks have been adequately disinfected, prior to release of final retention payment on the project. Arrangements must be made with DISTRICT designated treatment plant a minimum of 48 hours in advance. All equipment must be brought to the designated treatment plant and disinfected under DISTRICT supervision. The Contractor shall identify water trucks, hoses, drop tanks, etc., as containing reclaimed water and not suitable for human consumption. Signs shall be painted or otherwise permanently affixed to equipment. Trucks and other equipment used for reclaimed water shall not be later used for purposes involving human consumption of water. The recycled water shall not be used for concrete. Contractor shall use potable water for all concrete activities. At TVRWRF, a potable water fire hydrant is located outside the gate along Avenida Alvarado. Contractor shall obtain a permit from Rancho California Water District (RCWD) to use this fire hydrant and supply all necessary appurtenances and RCWD approved flowmeter to supply the potable water needed for all concrete activities.


All the costs for permit, appurtenances, and water consumption shall be included in the Contractor’s bid price. Reclaimed water must not be introduced into any domestic water piping system and no connection shall be made between equipment containing reclaimed water and any part of a domestic water system. Tanks and other equipment shall be cleaned and disinfected after the project is completed. All wastes shall be disposed of in compliance with all applicable Federal, State, District and local regulations. Contractor shall complete disinfection procedures under the supervision of the appropriate EMWD personnel. At a minimum the tank/equipment shall be filled with potable water. Specified quantity of chlorine, as supplied by EMWD shall be added through the fill line. Remaining chlorine shall be added through top opening. Chlorinated water shall stand in tank/equipment for a minimum of ninety (90) minutes. Chlorinated water shall be flushed through all outlets and disposed of as directed by EMWD personnel. EMWD personnel shall record vehicle/equipment identification and notify EMWD Customer Service Department that disinfection has been completed. SC-08. Insurance. At all times during the life of this contract, Contractor and his subcontractors shall procure and maintain Commercial Liability, Automobile Liability, Workers Compensation, Equipment Floater and Installation Floater per Section F – General Conditions, F-04. Contractor’s and Subcontractor's Insurance. Refer to Section F-04 for complete details, including required insurance limits, deductibles, and endorsements. Note: An Aggregate limit (cap), Professional Employer Organization (PEO), or Self Insurance Plan is not acceptable. In addition to the requirements noted above and found in Section F-04, the following shall apply to this project: Commercial Liability Insurance. Limits of insurance specified in section F-04.B, shall be changed to amounts not less than the following: $5,000,000 per each occurrence $10,000,000 General Aggregate Limit; $10,000,000 Products-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit;

$5,000,000 Personal & Advertising injury limit; Automobile Liability Insurance . Limits of insurance specified in section F-04.C, shall be changed to an amount not less than: $5,000,000 combined single limit.


Additional Insureds. The liability insurance required under Section F-04 under General Conditions shall include EMWD, SCAQMD, and all agencies listed in Section H-Permits as additional insured. Refer to Section F-04 for additional requirements pertaining to this section Builders Risk, including Insurance. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall maintain or cause to be maintained at all times during the life of this contract, builders' risk "All Risk" completed value insurance, to include, at the option of the District, loss or damage caused by fire, insuring completed work, work in progress, material, supplies and equipment of the work site, in storage or in transit, in an amount equal to the full replacement cost thereof. Such insurance shall include the interests of the District, Contractor, all tiers of subcontractors, suppliers and materialmen, with deductible amounts, if any, for the sole account of and payable by Contractor. Loss under such insurance shall be adjusted with and payable to the District for the interest of all parties. The amount of property insurance shall be sufficient to protect against such loss or damage in full until the work is accepted by the District. EMWD must be named as “loss payee” on the certificate for Builder’s Risk policy.

Builder’s “All Risk” insurance policy shall contain a deductible not higher than $1,000 unless otherwise approved by the District. SC-09. Compliance with Storm Water Regulations (NPDES) for Discharge of Storm Water Runoff Associated with Construction Activity Order No. 2009-0009 DWQ (NPDES General Permit No. CAS000002). Construction projects under 1 acre do not require coverage under the General Permit or preparation of a Storm Water Pollution Protection Plan (SWPPP), but will require Best Management Practices (BMPs) to control and reduce discharges of pollutants associated with construction into storm drains and receiving waters. The contractor shall prepare, implement and maintain a BMP Plan showing location and type of BMPs to be implemented for the project. The contractor shall alter the plan, implementation and maintenance as necessary for the duration of the project. SC-10. Preconstruction Conference. A Pre-job conference shall be scheduled prior to the start of the project. District representatives, Permit agencies, and the Contractor shall be present. SC-11. Preconstruction Audio Video Recording (DVD). The Contractor shall make arrangements with a professional photographer, approved by the District, to prepare a full color pre-construction audio video recording on DVD of the project site with the Inspector present prior to mobilizing (refer to Section 01380 or 01381, whichever is applicable to these specifications) and provide the District with a copy.


SC-12. Submission of Documents In Electronic Media Format. Unless otherwise specified by the District, Contractor shall submit all documents (ie: RFIs, Contract Documents, Design Submittals, and Materials and Equipment Submittals) electronically via EMWD’s web-portal, Project Manager Interface (PMI). The District shall provide the Contractor with one (1) web-service license to access PMI. Additional web-services can be obtained by the Contractor at their own expense. The Contractor shall be prepared to submit the following:

1. Correspondence and Change Order Requests: Electronic submission in WORD and PDF format, plus 1 hard copy.

2. Request for Information (RFI’s): Refer to Section F, F-30 Changes in Work and

Extras.

3. Shop Drawing Submittals: Refer to Section F, F-29 Equipment and Material Items. SC-13. Or Equal Substitutions. Products of manufacturers listed as equals to those specified must be submitted for review and approval by the District not later than the tenth (10th) day preceding the date for receipt of bids.

Specified Equipment with No Equal Substitution. For the purposes of standardization within the DISTRICT, the following table of specification sections lists approved manufacturers and no equals. Manufacturers not named in these listed specifications will not be considered or approved. See Technical Specification Section for additional details.

Section Application Manufacturer/Provider

11183-11185 Blower Startup and Support Services

APG-Neuros, Inc.

16620 Packaged Engine Generator Systems

TBD

16346 Medium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breaker Switchgear – 15kV

General Electric/ABB

17000 Process Control and Integration Service

Beavens and Associates,

South Coast, and TriMax


SC-14. Notification. Public outreach may be required, as determined by EMWD Public & Governmental Affairs staff. That outreach may include attendance at community presentations, distribution of door hangers, distribution of letters or other like forms of community engagement. Any printed materials will be provided by EMWD Public & Governmental Affairs staff.

If the District receives complaints from individuals or agency affected by the project; Contractor shall take immediate action to correct the situation as directed by the District. If Contractor receives complaints directly, Contractor shall forward complaint directly to EMWD Public & Governmental Affairs staff at (951) 928-3777 ext. 3430 and immediately notify the District Inspector. Thereafter, Contractor shall take immediate action to correct the situation as directed by the District.

SC-15. Markups for Negotiated Change Order Work.

NEGOTIATED CHANGE ORDER WORK:

Labor Markup = 20% Material Markup = 15% Equipment Markup = 15% Contractor Markup for Subcontractor Work = 5% or $250 (Whichever is greater) Bonds = Actual premium (Separate Line Item) Contractor shall provide backup

documentation of the actual rate Note: The cost associated with the project superintendent and pricing of the proposal shall be considered part of the Overhead and Profit percentages previously noted. SC-16. Methods of Work. Disposal of waste coating and abrasives shall be at the Contractor’s expense and in strict compliance with State and Federal statutes. The District shall be furnished with all documentation related to spent abrasives and waste paint debris, including analytical results of concentrations for the metals zinc, cadmium, chromium, and lead. The District has sampled the existing interior coatings of the subject reservoir, and the results of the analyses are included as part of this specification. The cost of this item including the permits acquisition shall be included in the appropriate bid item. SC-17. Reference to District’s Standard Drawings and Detailed Provisions. Any and all referenced Standard Drawings and Detailed Provisions shall be considered part of the contract drawings and specifications. All referenced Standard Drawings and Detailed Provisions of the District are available from the District upon request. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation due to referenced documents not included in the Specifications and Contract Drawings.


SC-18. Shutdown Requirements, Work Restrictions and Operations Coordination. Contractor shall coordinate the shutdown operation of existing systems with the District, to include the Inspector and Operations and Maintenance personnel per the Shutdown Coordination Table on contract drawing. No work shall be performed without 2 week prior notice followed by forty-eight (48) hour prior and twenty-four (24) hour confirmation notices to the District. No work shall be done without a District representative present. Detailed shutdown coordination table is provided on contract drawing D-57360. The Contractor shall plan all needed shutdown schedules and furnish adequate labor, material, equipment, and all necessary resources to complete work within approved shutdown duration. The minimum time interval between two requested and approved shutdowns shall be one week. SC-19. Construction Survey. District will provide temporary benchmarks and basis of bearing. Contractor is responsible for all other survey. SC-20. Soils Tests. Upon Contractor's request, District will provide soil/compaction testing for the project. However, any cost of re-compaction due to the Contractor's negligence will be at the Contractor's expense. A 48-hour notice is required for soil services. SC-21. Noise Control Requirements. Noise suppression shall be practiced at all times to minimize disturbance to persons living or working nearby, and to the general public. The measures to be used in effecting noise suppression shall include, but are not limited to, equipping all internal combustion engines with critical residential silencers (mufflers), sound blankets shielding noise-producing equipment from nearest areas of human occupancy by locating in such positions as to direct greatest noise emissions away from such areas, and conducting operations in the most effective manner to minimize noise generation consistent with the execution of the contract in a timely and economic manner. Noise control barrier walls and equipment shall be installed as needed to achieve a noise level of 65 db or less at the property lines. Noise levels in excess of 65 db shall be allowed only during critical operations for brief periods of time. Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to minimize levels during nighttime operations. Barrier walls installed shall consist of fiberglass-filled curtains and shall have adequate transmission loss and a minimum wall height of 24 feet. The noise control barrier walls shall be designed to preclude structural failure due to such factors as winds, shear, shallow soil failure, earthquakes, and erosion. The length, height, and location of noise control barrier walls shall be adequate to assure proper acoustical performance.


SC-22. Coordination. The Contractor should take note that other work may be taking place simultaneously at the jobsite. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate his activities with all the other contractors performing work in the project area and to cooperate with all other contractors within reasonable and professional norms so that all construction may be completed in a timely manner. In the event a scheduling conflict arises between contractors performing work on the job site and if both parties are unable to reach an agreement, the District shall be the final authority in resolving said scheduling conflict. No additional compensation will be allowed due to conflicts with other construction in the area.

The Contractor is notified that other projects including, but not limited to, the following projects will occur on the same site:

TVRWRF Site:

TVRWRF 23 MGD Expansion Project (Complete July, 2019) TVRWRF Plant 2 Air Piping Replacement Project (Complete November, 2019)

MVRWRF Site: MVRWRF TEP’s MCC Replacement Project (Start May, 2019 - Complete June, 2020) MVRWRF Tertiary Equalization Project (Start June, 2019 – Complete August, 2020)

SJVRWRF Site: SJVRWRF Centrate Equalization Project (Start October, 2019 – Complete December, 2020)

The Contractor shall work corporately with other contractors to minimize conflicts.

SC-23. Existing Underground Utilities and Potholing for Existing Utilities. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans or directly by the utility owner, all utilities shall be protected in place and service maintained as described in Section 02201 Part 1.02 of the Specifications. Utilities crossing the proposed water pipeline alignment are plotted on the plan view of the plans. The utilities were plotted based on information provided from the respective utility owners. The accuracy of plotted utilities is not guaranteed as indicted in Section F-25 of the General Conditions.

Existing utilities have been identified and located on the plans based on the best information available. The Contractor is responsible for performing exploratory excavations (potholing) along the alignment of the project to confirm location of existing utilities and to establish connection requirements to existing pipelines.


All Contractors under contract with EMWD are hereby granted permission to use vacuum excavation on EMWD facilities. Vacuum excavations may not be used on any other facilities unless written permission is obtained from the owner of the facility in accordance with State Law 4216. The Contractor shall field survey the elevation and location of utilities, including tie-in points, and provide the information to the District’s inspector a minimum of two weeks ahead of construction to permit design revisions should a conflict arise. All associated costs with potholing shall be included in the unit bid price per lineal foot of pipe stated in the Schedule of Values and no additional compensation will be allowed. SC-24. Passivation of Stainless Steel. The Contractor shall pickle and passivate or have vendors pickle and passivate all fabricated stainless steel parts including pipe sections, straight spools, fittings, piping components, pipe supports, nuts, bolts, washers, cover plates, equipment and equipment parts and sub components. Stainless steel electrical panels and enclosures manufactured by regular commodity enclosure manufacturers are exempt from the submittal requirements, but will be subject to inspection upon delivery as described below. The Contractor shall submit the pickling and passivation method for each fabricated stainless steel component to the District for approval prior to pickling and passivation. At a minimum the Contractor shall pickle and passivate stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 380. Finish requirement: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale, and other impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface.

The District shall have the right to inspect stainless steel parts upon delivery for proper finish. The District reserves the right to reject deliveries of stainless steel parts with visible signs of improper passivation at the Contractor’s expense. The standard for rejection of stainless steel parts will be the presence of free iron, rust, heat tint oxides, and/or weld scale that is visible. The Contractor shall protect stainless steels parts during delivery to minimize the occurrence of nicks and burs. Free iron and or rust in nicks and burs caused by improper protection during delivery shall also be a reason for rejection and replacement at the Contractor’s expense.” SC-25. Special Notifications of Hazards. This project includes work near existing facilities which can release methane gas and natural gas. The Contractor shall perform the following:

1. Submit a work safety plan identifying hazards as they relate to the Contractor’s means and methods.

2. Obtain a Hot Work Permit for all sparking activities including cutting and grinding.


3. Obtain a confined permit and perform work in accordance with the District’s confined space program.

4. Work cooperatively with District operations to make sure all facilities and piping are properly decommissioned for modifications or returning to active service. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide nitrogen and equipment for purging

5. Provide safety tape and barricades around work area.

6. The areas of the existing digester gas compression facility and storage sphere may be classified as Class 1 Division 1 hazardous area. It is the Contractor’s responsibilities to verify the extent of classified hazardous area according to the latest National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) Standard 820 for Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities during the entire construction period and provide construction material applied to these areas shall meet classified hazardous areas’ requirement as necessary.

SC-26. Pavement Removal. Contractor may grind trench pavement in lieu of sawcutting and removing existing pavement. After grinding, Contractor shall remove excess pavement grindings and place temporary asphalt concrete pavement (2-inch minimum thickness) in all trenches. If Contractor sawcuts and removes existing pavement, Contractor shall place temporary asphalt concrete pavement (2-inch minimum thickness) in all trenches. SC-27. Control Density Fill (CDF). The Contractor will be required to use CDF, in accordance with Section 02252 as backfill in areas under and around existing mainline utilities, such as waterlines, sewerlines, low and high pressure gas mains, storm drain, and all utility crossings of the proposed underground piping and appurtenances. CDF shall be placed from the bottom of the excavation to the center grade of the utility, and shall extend five feet each side of the existing utility. All costs associated with furnishing and placing CDF shall be included in the respective bid item. SC-28. Regulatory Requirements. The Contractor shall not complete any Work in a manner, which causes the MVRWRF, the PVRWRF, or the SJVRWRF to violate its existing permits or regulatory requirements. Discharge Regulations and South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) permits and requirements are available for inspection by the Contractor at the MVRWRF, the PVRWRF, and the SJVRWRF.


Compliance with Environmental Regulatory Requirements Contractor shall comply with all current federal, state, and local environmental laws and regulations including, but not limited to the laws and regulations of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA), the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and the SCAQMD. SC-29. Excess Soil. Excess soil, if any, from excavation on the jobsite shall be removed and disposed of off-site by the Contractor in accordance with Federal, State, and local requirements at the Contractor’s sole expense. SC-30. Protection of Existing Items. The Contractor shall protect all existing structures, equipment, above and underground utilities piping, and other items on the project site, by substantial barricades or other devices commensurate with the hazard, from injury or destruction by vehicles, equipment, workmen, or other agents. SC-31. Working Hours. Contractor shall perform all work Monday through Friday between the hours of 7:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. Work at other times and work on District observed holidays will be permitted only with the prior approval or direction of the District’s representative. Contractor may be required to construct connections outside normal work hours, or on weekends or holidays, as directed by the District, all at no additional cost to the District. SC-32. Site Security. The Contractor shall only perform work during working hours specified in SC-31. The District will retain the services of a Security Service to allow access to the site. Security Protocol. All full or part-time construction personnel under the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be required to undergo background investigations prior to work on the project. All background investigations shall be “nationwide” and include civil litigation. The Contractor shall supply the District with written proof that individuals have passed the background screening process. File documentation shall be kept onsite and available for reviewing upon request. All part-time personnel, upper management, vendors, and/or suppliers are not required to undergo background investigations, but must be accompanied by a representative of the Contractor as a requirement to enter the project site/treatment plant. The guard at the entrance shall be provided a list of all employees permitted to enter the site. SC-33. Emergency Evacuation Procedure. The Contractor shall be familiar with the Emergency Evacuation Procedures for the MVRWRF, the SJVRWRF, and the TVRWRF. A pre-construction meeting will be required on each site to discuss prior to any work performed.


SC-34. Safety and Evacuation Drills. The Contractor’s foreman and site superintendent shall coordinate with the TVRWRF plant manager for the Safety and Evacuation Drills. All the Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s staff will be required to participate in these drills. These drills will be performed at least twice in a calendar year and the duration of each drill shall not exceed 1 hour. The drills shall be scheduled with the Contractor’s superintendent to avoid conflict with major time sensitive work items, such as large concrete placements or major piping tie-in. The Contractor shall include in their bid all costs associated with performing these drills. All personnel on-site must attend the Safety and Evacuation Drills. SC-35. Site Clean-up. The Contractor is required to maintain the cleanliness of the work area. All construction debris shall be promptly removed and disposed in accordance with the specifications. Any debris left on the work area that poses a safety hazard or hampers access the site shall be removed immediately. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with Site Clean-up. Failure to clean up will result in withholding $100,000 per month from the monthly periodic pay estimate. SC-36. Speed Limit. The speed limit within the facility is 10 miles per hour. Vehicles exceeding this limit whether owned by the Contractor or owned by persons working for the Contractor under this project shall not be allowed on the site for the remainder of the project. SC-37. Project Schedule. Any changes to the approved project schedule shall require the approval of the District. No changes in the project schedule shall be recognized unless approved by the District. No additional time extensions shall be granted for work that is not critical path on the approved project schedule. SC-38. Use of Controlled Substances and Alcohol. The use of controlled substances and alcohol is prohibited. Any person found using or under the influence of controlled substances or alcohol while on the facility shall not be allowed back into the facility for remainder of the project. SC-39. Lockout/Tagout Procedures. For lockout/tagout, the Contractor shall perform all lockout/tagouts on this project. The Contractor is to install their own locks in accordance with the District’s procedures. The Contractor is to provide a minimum of 48-hour notice for all lockout/tagout events. SC-40. Contractor Locks on Gates. The Contractor shall coordinate with the District regarding any locks that the Contractor supplies during construction.


SC-41. Construction Laydown Area. The District provided construction laydown area for each facility are generally noted on project site plan. At each facility, the Contractor shall confirm the specific location of the construction laydown area with the District’s Facility Manager prior to occupying the area. The Contractor may be required to build a temporary access road and gate. After construction is completed, the Contractor shall restore the area to the original condition. The construction laydown area may also be used by other Contractors at the same time. The Contractors shall coordinate with each other. The Contractor shall include all costs associated to secure, access, and maintain the construction laydown area into their bid. No additional reimbursement will be granted during the construction. SC-42. Indemnification.

A) To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless District, Engineer, Engineer’s Consultants, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and Subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relative to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage:

1) Is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting there from; and

2) Is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of an individual or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such individual or entity.

B) In any and all claims against District or Engineer or any of their respective

consultants, agents, officers, directors, partners, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under paragraph “A” shall be not limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.


C) The indemnification obligations of Contractor under paragraph “A” shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s Consultants or to the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them arising out of:

1) The preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage.

SC-43. Work Allowed Prior to Acceptance of Baseline Schedule. Prior to acceptance of the Baseline Schedule the only physical work activities the Contractor will be allowed to perform at the construction site are potholing, construction of temporary field offices, and other mobilization activities specifically approved, in writing, by the District. SC-44. Cost of Owner Supplied Items. For this project, the District is providing APG Neuros Blowers, associated control panels, piping, accessories, and appurtenances to the Contractor for installation and startup. Refer to proposal and shop drawing submittals by APG Neuros provided in Appendix A & B for more details. The Contractor shall provide items shown in drawings and specifications if they are not part of APG Neuros Blower provided items. The Contractor shall carefully review the applicable procurement proposal and submittal because the procurement proposal and submittal does not include all the items required per specifications and drawings. The Contractor shall also carefully review the terms and conditions outlined in each proposal. In addition to the cost indicated for the applicable bid item in the bidding sheet, procurement proposal and submittal, the Contractor shall include all cost of associated control panels, piping, accessories, and appurtenances, process control and integration to complete an operational process air system at each site in their bid. SC-45. Cost of Pre-negotiated Items. Costs for some items have been pre-negotiated with specified manufactures or service providers and are included in the bidding sheet. Refer to the bidding sheet and applicable pre-negotiated proposal included in Appendices for more details. The Contractor shall carefully review the applicable pre-negotiated proposal because the pre-negotiated proposal does not include all the items required per specifications and drawings. The Contractor shall also carefully review the terms and conditions outlined in each proposal. In addition to the cost indicated for the applicable bid item in the bidding sheet, the Contractor shall include in their bid the cost for the following:

1. All items not specifically mentioned in the scope of supply of the pre-negotiated proposal but required per specifications and drawings and required to complete the installation to provide an operational system.


2. All other items indicated in the pre-negotiated proposal or shop drawing submittals to be provided by others, by client, by customer, by owner or any other similar designation.

3. All applicable freight and taxes, unless specifically included in pre-negotiated proposal.

4. All labor, materials, and all other associated costs not included in the pre-negotiated proposal but required per specifications and drawings and required to complete the installation to provide an operational system.

5. Extended warranty if necessary to meet the project warranty requirements.

6. Any additions or revisions to the terms and conditions included in the pre-negotiated proposal.

7. Liquidated damage listed in the specifications and proposals for pre-negotiated items are provided for the use of the Contractor in administering the associated purchase orders and are to be enforced by the Contractor.

The District will enforce the liquidated damages listed in SC-06.

8. The Contractor shall only collect liquidated damages on pre-negotiated equipment items if a delay, which is on the critical path of the schedule, in construction is caused by the vendor. The Contractor shall make reasonable allowance in construction schedule changes that do not materially impact the Contractor and/or District.

The Contractor shall minimize the duration of onsite storage of the pre-negotiated equipment prior to mechanical installation. The Contractor shall coordinate equipment delivery with manufactures to limit the duration of on-site storage of pre-negotiated equipment to six months or less based on construction schedule. SC-46. Pre-negotiated Technical Support for APG Neuros Blower. The District pre-negotiated the price for technical support for APG Neuros blowers for new and reconditioned Neuros blower by APG Neuros. The cost for technical support is preset. A proposal of technical support for blowers’ startup, testing and training is provided in Appendix C. The Contractor shall use APG Neuros to perform the work proposed by them and complete the work as shown on the plans and specification. SC-47. Pre-negotiated Existing Neuros Blower Reconditioning. The Contractor is required to remove one existing APG Neuros Blower at TVRWRF, ship it to APG Neuros for reconditioning and install it at MVRWRF after reconditioning. The District pre-negotiated the price for reconditioning the existing Neuros blower by APG Neuros. The cost for the Contractor to perform the reconditioning is preset. A proposal existing APG Neuros reconditioning is provided in Appendix D. The Contractor shall use APG Neuros to perform the work proposed by them and complete the work as shown on the plans and specification.


SC-48. Pre-negotiated Arc Flash/ Short Circuit Coordination Study. The District pre-negotiated the price for Arc Flash/ Short Circuit Coordination Study for MVRWRF, SJVRWRF, and TVRWRF by Power Engineering Services, Inc. (PES). The cost for the Contractor to perform the Arc Flash/ Short Circuit Coordination Study is preset as in the Bidding Sheet and Schedule of Values. A proposal of the Arc Flash/Short Circuit Coordination Study by PES is included in Appendix E. The Contractor shall use PES to perform the work proposed by them and complete the work as shown on the plans and specification. SC-49. Heavy Metal Surface and Coating Demolition. The District performed Paint Sample Heavy Metal Analysis Test for existing piping shown on demolition drawings at TVRWRF. The test results indicated lead is present. Test report is provided in Appendix G. The Contractor shall demolish and dispose of coated piping and debris in compliance with applicable federal, state and local requirements. All cost shall be included in the Contractor’s bid. SC-50. Process Control and Integration Service. The Contractor shall include the service of the process control and integration as identified in Section 17000. The Contractor shall be limited to the following pre-qualified providers to obtain the service:

1) Beavens and Associates, Torrance, CA. 2) South Coast Control, Anaheim, CA 3) TriMax Systems Inc. Brea, CA 4) No “or-equals”

P-1 00200 Section P Contract Drawings



SECTION P - CONTRACT DRAWINGS P-01. General. The location of the work, its general nature and extent, the outline of the land owned or controlled by the District and the form and general dimensions of the facilities (ie. pipelines, appurtenances, etc.) are as shown on the drawings attached and made a part of this Specification as listed below. P-02. Construction Drawings. Drawing Number Drawing Title General D-57357 Title Sheet, Location and Vicinity Map D-57358 Sheet Index and General Notes D-57359 Symbols and Abbreviations D-57360 Shutdown Coordination Table D-57361 HVAC Notes, Symbols, and Abbreviations D-57362 Structural Notes Sheet 1 of 2 D-57363 Structural Notes Sheet 2 of 2 D-57364 Electrical Legend and Symbols D-57365 Electrical Notes and Abbreviations D-57366 Instrumentation Symbols TVRWRF Civil D-57367 TVRWRF Site Plan and Staging Mechanical D-57368 Demolition Floor Plan D-57369 Demolition Section 1 D-57370 Demolition Detail 1 D-57371 Demolition Detail 2 D-57372 Demolition Detail 3 D-57373 Plant 1 and 2 Blower Building Mechanical Plan D-57374 Plant 1 and 2 Blower Building Mechanical Section 1 D-57375 HVAC Schedules and Schematic D-57376 HVAC Floor Plan D-57377 HVAC Demo Roof Plan D-57378 HVAC Roof Plan


Architectural D-57379 Architectural Plan Structural D-57380 Plant 1 and Plant 2 Blower Building Demolition Plan D-57381 Plant 1 and Plant 2 Blower Building Bottom Plan D-57382 Plant 1 and Plant 2 Blower Building Roof Plans D-57383 Plant 1 and Plant 2 Blower Building Sections and Details D-57384 Plant 1 and Plant 2 Blower Building Steel Pipe Support

Structure D-57385 Plant 1 and Plant 2 Blower Building Details D-57386 Plant 1 and Plant 2 Blower Building Sections and Details Electrical D-57387 Overall Site Plan D-57388 Partial Site Plan 1 D-57389 Partial Site Plan 2 D-57390 Conduit and Wire Schedules and Ductbank Sections D-57391 Overall Single Line Diagram D-57392 Blower Building Power Plan D-57393 Blower Building Lighting Plan D-57394 Blower Building Roof Plan D-57395 Panel Schedules and Riser Diagrams D-57396 Control One Line Diagrams and Control Schematic D-57397 Conduit and Wire Schedules D-57398 MCC-12A Electrical Building Plan D-57399 Switchboard MSB-5 Single Line Diagram and Elevation D-57400 Control One Line Diagram and Conduit and Wire Schedules Instrumentation D-57401 Blower System SCADA Architecture D-57402 Plant SCADA Architecture D-57403 Aeration Blowers No.1 P & ID D-57404 Aeration Blowers No.2 P & ID D-57405 Aeration Blowers No.3 P & ID D-57406 Generator Set P & ID


SJVRWRF Civil D-57407 SJVRWRF Site Plan and Staging Mechanical D-57408 Plant 2 Blower Building Plan D-57409 Plant 2 Blower Building Section D-57410 Mechanical Schedules and Schematics D-57411 Mechanical Floor Plan D-57412 Mechanical Roof Plan D-57413 Mechanical Section D-57414 Fuel Soil Storage Plan and Section Structural D-57415 Plant 2 Blower Building Demolition Plan D-57416 Plant 2 Blower Building Bottom Plan D-57417 Plant 2 Blower Building Roof Plan and Sections D-57418 Main Power Building Demolition Plan D-57419 Main Power Building Bottom Plan D-57420 Main Power Building Partial Roof Plan D-57421 Main Power Building Sections and Details D-57422 Main Power Building Sections and Details Electrical D-57423 Overall Site Plan D-57424 Blower Building Electrical Plan D-57425 Switchgear SGB Single Line Diagram and Elevation D-57426 MCC-24 Single Line Diagram D-57427 Riser Diagram and Conduit Schedules D-57427 Overall Single Line Diagram and Elevation D-57428 Main Power Building Plan D-57429 Main Power Building Roof Plan D-57430 Main Power Building Fuel Storage D-57431 Switchgear MS Single Line Diagram D-57432 Switchgear MS Elevation D-57433 MCC-18 Single Line Diagram and Elevation D-57434 Control Schematic and Panel Schedules D-57435 Riser Diagram and Conduit and Wire Schedule Instrumentation D-57436 Aeration Blower No. 3 & 4 P & ID D-57437 Generator Set P & ID


D-57438 Fuel Oil Storage Tank P &ID MVRWRF Civil D-57439 MVRWRF Site Plan and Staging Mechanical D-57440 Power and Blower Building Room Plan and Section D-57441 HVAC Schedules and Schematic D-57442 HVAC Floor Plan D-57443 HVAC Demo Roof Plan D-57444 HVAC Roof Plan Structural D-57445 Power and Blower Building Roof Plan D-57446 Power and Blower Building Sections and Details Electrical D-57447 Power and Blower Building Electrical Plan D-57448 Power and Blower Building Roof Plan D-57449 MCC-3MA Single Line Diagram D-57450 MCC-3MA Elevation D-57451 MCC-13M Single Line Diagram-Demolition D-57452 MCC-13M Single Line Diagram-Modified D-57453 MCC-13M Elevation D-57454 Control One Line, Panel Schedule, and Riser Diagrams D-57455 Conduit and Wire Schedules Instrumentation D-57456 Aeration Blower No. 4 & 5 P & ID D-57457 Aeration Blower No. 6 P & ID Standard Details D-57458 HVAC Details D-57459 Structural Details 1 D-57460 Structural Details 2 D-57461 Structural Details 3 D-57462 Electrical Details 1 D-57463 Electrical Details 2

Rev:10/08/13

SPECIFICATIONS - DETAILED PROVISIONS Section 01000 - General Safety Requirements

C O N T E N T S

1.01 RESPONSIBILITY ......................................................................................................................... 1 1.01A SAFETY AND HEALTH ................................................................................................................. 1 1.02 OTHER CODES AND STATUTES .................................................................................................. 2 1.03 SUBCONTRACTS ........................................................................................................................ 2 1.04 DIFFERING OPINIONS ................................................................................................................ 3 1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION SAFETY MEETING ..................................................................................... 3 1.06 SAFETY PROGRAMS ................................................................................................................... 4 1.07 SAFETY PROGRAM REVIEW ....................................................................................................... 4 1.08 JOINT SAFETY POLICY MEETING ................................................................................................ 4 1.09 SAFETY PERSONNEL .................................................................................................................. 4 1.10 SAFETY INSPECTION .................................................................................................................. 5 1.11 ACCIDENT/INJURY/ILLNESS INVESTIGATION AND REPORTING ................................................ 5 1.12 INVESTIGATION/REPORTING .................................................................................................... 6 1.13 MONTHLY ACCIDENT STATISTICAL REPORT .............................................................................. 6 1.14 HOUSEKEEPING ......................................................................................................................... 7 1.15 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND HAZARDOUS WASTE ................................................................ 7 1.16 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 7 1.17 CERTIFICATION .......................................................................................................................... 7 1.18 EMWD LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURE .................................................................................. 7 1.19 EXPERIENCE MODIFICATION RATING ....................................................................................... 7 1.20 WORKERS COMPENSATION RECORDS ...................................................................................... 8 1.21 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 8 ATTACHMENTS ..................................................................................................................................... 8 • EXHIBIT “A” – (EN-87) NOTICE OF UNSAFE CONDITION • EXHIBIT “B” – (EN-84) SPECIFIC OPERATING SAFETY PROCEDURE • EXHIBIT “C” – (EN-85) REPORT OF INJURY • EXHIBIT “D” – (EN-89) CONTRACTOR MONTHLY SUMMARY OF OCCUPATIONAL

INJURIES/ILLNESSES EXPENSE • EXHIBIT “E” - EMWD CONFINED SPACE ENTRY POLICY

General Safety Requirements Section 01000 – 1

SECTION 01000

GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

1.01 RESPONSIBILITY

The contractor is responsible for ensuring that all activities in connection with the work including, but not limited to, labor, materials, and equipment, conform fully with the standards referenced herein. This requirement applies to all activities performed, operated, maintained or constructed by the contractor, sub-contractor, supplier, or any other agent of the contractor performing work. Further, the contractor, his subcontractor, suppliers, and any other agents shall not require any employee, or other worker in connection with the performance of the contract, to engage in work under conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, dangerous to an employee’s health or safety or otherwise in violation of any applicable federal, state, or local law or regulation in regard to occupational safety.

1.01A SAFETY AND HEALTH

The Contractor shall conform to all applicable occupational safety and health standards, rules, regulations and orders established by local agencies, State of California, and California Division of Occupational Safety and Health Construction Safety Regulations (Cal OSHA), including obtaining permits required by California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 341 and 341 (a). §1527. Washing Facilities, Food Handling, and Temporary Sleeping Quarters. WASHING FACILITIES

A. GENERAL. Washing facilities shall be provided as follows: A minimum of one washing station shall be provided for each twenty employees or fraction thereof. Washing stations provided to comply with this requirement shall at all times: 1. Be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition;

2. Have an adequate supply of water for effective washing;

3. Have a readily available supply of soap or other suitable cleansing agent;

4. Have a readily available supply of single-use towels or a warm-air blower;

5. Be located and arranged so that any time a toilet is used, the user can readily

wash; 6. When provided in association with a nonwater carriage toilet facility in

accordance with Section 1526(c),


7. Provide a sign or equivalent method of notice indicating that the water is intended for washing; and

8. Be located outside of the toilet facility and not attached to it.

B. EXCEPTION to subsection (a)(1)(F)(2.): Where there are less than 5 employees, and only one toilet facility is provided, the required washing facility may be located inside of the toilet facility.

C. EXCEPTION to subsection (a)(1): Mobile crews having readily available transportation to a nearby toilet and washing facility.

D. WASHING FACILITIES FOR HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES. Where employees are engaging in the application of paints, or coatings, or in other operations involving substances which may be harmful to the employees, washing facilities shall be provided in near proximity to the worksite and shall be so equipped as to enable employees to remove such substances. Facilities provided to comply with this requirement shall at all times: 1. Be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition;

2. Have an adequate supply of water sufficient for effective removal of the

hazardous substance from skin surfaces; and

3. Have a readily available supply of soap, and where necessary to effect removal, special cleansing compounds designed specifically for removal of the hazardous substance from skin surfaces; and

4. Have a readily available supply of single use towels or a warm-air blower.

1.02 OTHER CODES AND STATUTES

In addition to the standards and requirements detailed herein, contractors and subcontractors shall comply with applicable provisions of Federal, State, and municipal safety, health, and sanitation statutes and codes. In the event there is a conflict between the provisions of the Safety and Health Regulations for Construction promulgated by the U.S. Department of Labor in Title 29 CFR Part 1926, Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), or the California Occupational Safety and Health Act regulations in the California Labor Code Section 6300 et seq. (Cal. OSHA), the more stringent provision shall prevail.

1.03 SUBCONTRACTS

Contractors shall include provisions for compliance with the health and safety requirements, as referenced in this Section 01000, in the terms and conditions of all contracts, subcontracts, supply contracts, and all other contractor arrangements for performance of the work.


1.04 DIFFERING OPINIONS

Differing opinions between the contractor and District on adequacy of existing or proposed protective measures, equipment, procedures, or devices shall be resolved as follows:

A. Upon receipt of a written notice from the District regarding an issue in question, (see

Standard Form Exhibit “A”), the contractor shall not start or continue the measure, procedure, equipment, or devices, or expose employees to associated hazards until the differences have been resolved.

B. Upon resolution of the differing opinions, either with or without input from an independent professional safety engineer, Certified Safety Professional (CSP), or other safety expert, the questionable measure, procedure, equipment, or device shall be brought into conformance with the written agreed-upon solution. Only personnel required to complete remedial work shall be exposed to the associated hazard, and then only in a manner conforming to all safety requirements.

C. Obtaining engineering data or retaining the services of an independent professional engineer to assist in resolving the issue(s) remains a contractor responsibility.

1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION SAFETY MEETING

Representatives of the contractor shall meet with the District prior to the start of construction to review the respective safety requirements and to discuss implementation of all health and safety provisions pertinent to the work under contract, including safety training status of equipment operators, etc. The contractor shall be prepared to discuss, in detail, the measures he intends to take to control the possible hazards incident to the major phases of the work under contract and to comply with contractual obligations. This meeting will be devoted to discussing the manner in which the contractor intends to administer his health and safety program and delegate the responsibilities for implementing the program. A Specific Operating Safety Procedure (EN-84) and an Injury & Illness Prevention Program must be submitted to the District at the Pre-Construction conference for acceptance by the District prior to the start of construction. The Contractor shall identify any safety organization, safety team, or safety person within the Contractor’s organization, complete with contact name and telephone number. For assistance in preparing your Injury and Illness Prevention Program, go to http://www.dir.ca.gov/dosh/etools/09-031/index.htm The Injury & Illness Prevention Program shall be submitted in Electronic Format as follows: Provide all information on a CD in searchable PDF format; PC compatible using Windows XP operating system. All information provided shall be consolidated to one portable document file (PDF) in the latest version of Adobe Acrobat, with a Table of Contents and Bookmarks for each major section.

http://www.dir.ca.gov/dosh/etools/09-031/index.htm


1.06 SAFETY PROGRAMS The prime contractor shall prepare a comprehensive written safety program covering all aspects of onsite construction operations and activities associated with each respective contract. Further, unless adequately covered in the original plan, a supplementary detailed plan will be submitted prior to start of each major phase of work or when requested by the District. In no case will onsite work commence until the program or appropriate supplementary submittals have been approved by the District. Initial and supplementary submittals shall include a timetable for completing the required, detailed, and specific operating procedures with hazard analysis. Approval by the District of initial and supplementary programs submitted by contractor only signifies that the submittals generally conform to the requirements contained and referenced herein, and shall not constitute any acceptance or other obligation of the District for the contractor’s responsibilities for said programs. Said approval does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of providing employees with a safe and healthful work environment, or complying fully with all the above requirements. For a project- specific safety plan outline for Contractor’s use, see Exhibit “B” (Specific Operating Procedure - including Hazard Analysis).

1.07 SAFETY PROGRAM REVIEW

Following the above preconstruction safety meeting and development of the Safety Program, a second meeting shall be held to review the contractor’s written safety program. The contractor’s principal onsite representative, the general superintendent, and his safety representative shall attend this meeting.

1.08 JOINT SAFETY POLICY MEETING

The District, the contractor’s principal onsite representative, and designated staff members shall participate in scheduled monthly safety meetings. These meetings shall be used to review the effectiveness of the contractor’s safety effort, to resolve health and safety problems relating to current operations, and to provide a forum for planning safe future construction activities. Meeting minutes shall be prepared by the Contractor and maintained in a manner prescribed by the District.

1.09 SAFETY PERSONNEL

When the contract does not require the services of a full-time safety engineer, the contractor shall designate a competent and dependable supervisory employee, acceptable to the District, to administer this safety program. However, should the contractor’s safety effort be considered inadequate, the District has the option to require the contractor to employ a full-time qualified safety engineer in lieu of a safety representative. The hiring of a full-time safety engineer shall be at the sole cost and expense of contractor and said hiring shall not entitle contractor to additional compensation.


1.10 SAFETY INSPECTION

The contractor shall provide for weekly safety inspections of the worksites, materials, and equipment by competent employees. Detailed written inspection records shall be maintained and available for review by the District. Prior to the use of any gauges which monitor atmospheric hazards, the contractor’s competent person will verify that the gauge is in current calibration. This will be documented on the District’s resident inspector’s daily report form.

1.11 ACCIDENT/INJURY/ILLNESS INVESTIGATION AND REPORTING

DEFINITIONS:

A. Serious Accidents/Incidents Any occurrence of a job-related nature including, but not limited to, suicide or homicide attempts, heart attacks, and occupational injuries or diseases which result in: 1. An employee or agent of District, contractor, subcontractor, or supplier suffering

death, permanent total disability, complete and/or permanent loss of an eye, hand, foot, or major organ.

2. Hospitalization for five or more days of an employee or agent of District and/or contractor, subcontractor, or supplier, or one or more employees in critical condition.

3. Fires or property damage resulting in a loss of $25,000 or more.

4. Third party injuries, death, or substantial property losses that result or could result in claims against the District.

B. Nonserious Accidents/Incidents All other personal and/or property damage accidents/incidents except first aid cases and property damage losses below $2,500.

C. Potential Serious Accidents/Incidents Accidental occurrences or near misses with the potential to be a serious accident/incident such as major equipment failures, contact with high voltage lines, spills of or personal contacts with excessive amounts of toxic or hazardous materials, slides, cave-ins, etc.


1.12 INVESTIGATION/REPORTING

A. Serious accident/incidents shall be reported immediately to the District and appropriate contractor field supervisor. Providing or obtaining appropriate medical and emergency assistance and notification of coroner, safety, and law enforcement agencies, and family members remain a contractor responsibility. Except for rescue and emergency measures, the scene of the accident/incident shall not be disturbed or the operation resumed until authorized by District. The contractor shall assist and cooperate fully with the District in conducting the investigations of the accident/incident and assure availability of all information, personnel, and data pertinent to the investigation. The contractor shall, when ordered by the District, conduct or have conducted a separate and complete independent investigation of the accident/incident, and submit a comprehensive report of findings and recommendations to the District. The contractor shall arrange and be financially responsible for the independent investigation and any equipment or material inspections or tests, or diagnostic studies required by the District or contractor investigators. Further, Contractor’s Report of Recordable Injury/Illness (See Exhibit “C”) shall be completed and submitted to the District for each injured person.

B. Nonserious accident/incidents will be reported immediately to the contractor’s supervisor delegated authority to arrange for medical assistance and/or investigate the accident/incidents. Immediately following arrangements for required medical assistance, the responsible supervisor will investigate the accident/incident. Within three working days following the accident/incident, the contractor will submit to the District, a completed Contractor’s Report of Recordable Injury/Illness (see Exhibit “C”) for all personal injuries, and a comprehensive narrative report for property damage accidents.

C. Potentially serious accident/incidents shall be reported immediately to the District. The contractor’s involved equipment and/or worksite shall remain secured until the contractor has completed an acceptable comprehensive investigation. Within five days following the investigation, a detailed written investigation report will be submitted to the District.

1.13 MONTHLY ACCIDENT STATISTICAL REPORT

The contractor shall submit by the first day of each month a completed standard form entitled Contractor Monthly Summary of Occupational Injuries/Illnesses Experience (See Exhibit “D”) or equivalent form acceptable to the District. Statistical cutoff dates can coincide with pay periods as long as the ending date of the current report is the beginning date of the following report.


1.14 HOUSEKEEPING

Good housekeeping, including provision and facilities for routine scrap removal, shall be maintained in all areas within the contractor’s scope of operation.

1.15 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND HAZARDOUS WASTE

The Contractor shall supply a Safety Data Sheet (SDS) for each chemical to be used in or during construction. Handling, storage, use, and disposal of toxic materials of any nature shall be carried out in a manner so as not to contaminate or pollute water supplies, rivers, lakes, reservoirs, streams, or the atmosphere. Handling, storage, use and disposal of all such materials, including waste, garbage, and sewage, shall comply with Federal, State, and local regulations.

1.16 GENERAL

Intoxicating beverages and narcotics shall not be permitted or used on construction sites. Persons under the influence of alcohol of narcotics shall not be permitted on the site. Firearms shall not be permitted on the construction site without prior approval of the District.

1.17 CERTIFICATION

Design of major critical facilities, equipment, support structures, or systems, embankments, shoring systems, formwork (falsework) built or provided by the contractor for his use shall be certified as structurally suitable for the use intended under the specifications. This certification shall be made in writing by the manufacturer or a registered professional engineer competent in these fields and shall be submitted to the District prior to erection or use of such facilities, equipment or support systems.

1.18 EMWD LOCKOUT/TAGOUT PROCEDURE

The Contractor shall make himself familiar with the District’s lockout/tagout procedure to isolate energy sources (mechanical, pneumatic, electrical, hydraulic, physical or chemical). The Contractor MUST coordinate through a qualified District representative (Inspector) a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours prior to requiring a lockout/tagout. The District Representative (Inspector) will arrange to have any energy source as described above locked out by an authorized employee in accordance with the District’s procedure. In case there is any violation of the District’s lockout/tagout procedure the Contractor will be directed to cease operations related to the unsafe condition, measure, procedure, equipment or device and will be issued a Notice of Unsafe Condition.

1.19 EXPERIENCE MODIFICATION RATING

The Contractor shall, prior to the Pre-Construction Safety Meeting, submit a current copy of the Experience Modification Rating for himself and any listed sub-contractor. This information will be reviewed at the Pre-Construction Safety Meeting.


1.20 WORKERS COMPENSATION RECORDS

The Contractor shall submit Workers Compensation Records for the past 2 years (Log and Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses). This information will be reviewed at the Pre-Construction Safety Meeting.

1.21 CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS

When working in, or connecting to existing systems in operation, the required safety provisions for work in an operating system will be enforced, including provisions for working in confined air spaces. Contractor shall comply with EMWD’s Confined space Entry Policy attached hereto (see Exhibit E).

END OF SECTION 01000

ATTACHMENTS

• EXHIBIT “A” – (EN-87) NOTICE OF UNSAFE CONDITION

• EXHIBIT “B” – (EN-84) SPECIFIC OPERATING SAFETY PROCEDURE

• EXHIBIT “C” – (EN-85) REPORT OF INJURY

• EXHIBIT “D” – (EN-89) CONTRACTOR MONTHLY SUMMARY OF OCCUPATIONAL INJURIES/ILLNESSES EXPENSE

• EXHIBIT “E” – EMWD CONFINED SPACE ENTRY POLICY

EN-87

Exhibit “A”

NOTICE OF UNSAFE CONDITION

TO CONTRACTOR OF EMWD PROJECT: Spec. Number C.O. Number As set forth in Section 01000 - General Safety Requirements, Eastern Municipal Water District standards require compliance with all applicable laws, ordinances and regulations, including orders pertaining to safety. Your attention is directed to the unsafe condition prevailing at the following described site and your responsibility to utilize procedures in accordance with the applicable federal and state Construction Safety Orders, laws, and regulations. Site and/or condition:

You are again directed to comply with all safety orders by making an immediate and proper response or correction.

You are directed to immediately cease operations related to the unsafe condition, measure, procedure, equipment or device(s). Furthermore, you shall not expose employees to associated hazards until a solution to these safety issues has been agreed upon (see Section 01000-1.04).

Issued by: Date: Name and Title Time: cc: Construction Administrator Project File

EN-8

4

Ex

hibi

t “B”

SPEC

IFIC

OPE

RATI

NG

SAF

ETY

PRO

CEDU

RE

(INCL

UDI

NG

HAZA

RD A

NAL

YSIS

)

PRO

JECT

:

SPEC

. NO

.

SPEC

IFIC

OPE

RATI

NG

PRO

CEDU

RE N

O.

OPE

RATI

ON

:

PAGE

OF

GEN

ERAL

INST

RUCT

ION

S:

DATE

:

PERS

ON

NEL

REQ

UIR

ED:

NO

TE: S

EE R

EVER

SE S

IDE

FOR

ADDI

TIO

NAL

INFO

RMAT

ION

SAFE

TY E

QU

IPM

ENT

AND

APPA

REL:

PRO

CEDU

RE D

EVEL

OPE

D BY

:

APPO

VED

BY:

OPE

RATI

ON

SEQ

UEN

CE

ASSO

CIAT

ED

HAZA

RD

EQU

IPM

ENT,

TO

OLS

O

R FA

CILI

TIES

SP

ECIA

L IN

STRU

CTIO

NS

OR

LIM

ITAT

ION

S RE

FERE

NCE

EN-84

1. GENERAL: Specific operating procedures (SOP) are designed as a planning tool. They are most

effective when developed jointly by the supervisor and employees engaged in the specific activity and/or operation. They provide excellent reference material for toolbox meetings and for instructing new employees on respective assignments and responsibility.

Their effectiveness in reducing accidents and improving job performance is directly related to the efforts expended in their development and timely revision.

2. ASSOCIATED HAZARDS: For each job step, ask yourself what accidents could happen to the

person doing the job step. You can get the answer by (1) observing the job, (2) discussing it with the operator, (3) recalling past accidents, or (4) a combination of the three. Ask yourself: can he be struck by or contacted by anything? can he strike against or come in contact with anything? can he be caught in, on, or between anything? can he fall? can he overexert? is he exposed to anything injurious, such as gas, radiation, welding rays, etc? (for example, acid, burns, fumes, dust).

3. EQUIPMENT, TOOLS, AIDS, OR FACILITIES: List type and number of tools and materials to be

used, i.e., two jack hammers, one compressor, two 2" diameter hoses, 100 feet in length, etc. 4. SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS OR LIMITATIONS: For each potential accident or hazard, ask yourself

how should the worker do the job step to avoid the potential accident, or what should he do or not do to avoid the accident. You can get your answers by (1) observing the job for leads, (2) discussing precautions with experienced job operators, (3) drawing on your experience, or (4) a combination of the three. Be sure to describe specifically the precautions a man must take. Don’t leave out important details. Number each separate recommended precaution with the same number you gave the potential accident (see appropriate column) that the precaution seeks to avoid. Use simple do or don’t statements to explain recommended precautions as if you were talking to the person.

For example: Only wirecore lifelines shall be used in highscaling operations. Block cable supported crane booms before removing section pins. Avoid such generalities as “Be careful,” “Be alert,” “Take caution,” etc.

5. REFERENCES: Reference specific material i.e., a SOP on highscaling should reference “Safety

Belts and Hardware,” and “Lifelines,” describe how to use a “Scaler’s Hitch,” etc.

6. SAFETY EQUIPMENT AND APPAREL: Specifically required safety equipment, devices, and apparel need to be listed, i.e., hard hat, eye and face protection, respirator protection, safety shoes, wearing apparel, hoist safety devices, air hose safety devices, etc.

EN-8

4

SAM

PLE

OF

PIPE

LIN

E SP

ECIF

IC O

PERA

TIN

G SA

FETY

PRO

CEDU

RE

SPEC

IFIC

OPE

RATI

NG

SAF

ETY

PRO

CEDU

RE

(INCL

UDI

NG

HAZA

RD A

NAL

YSIS

)

PRO

JECT

: (P

roje

ct T

itle)

SP

EC. N

O.

XXX

SPEC

IFIC

OPE

RATI

NG

PRO

CEDU

RE N

O.

(Spe

cify

)

OPE

RATI

ON

: (S

peci

fy)

PAGE

OF

GEN

ERAL

INST

RUCT

ION

S:

(Con

trac

tor’s

Nam

e) w

ill su

perv

ise

and

be re

spon

sibl

e fo

r pre

vent

ing

cont

act w

ith ra

w

Sew

er o

r any

oth

er h

azar

dous

mat

eria

l and

will

als

o m

onito

r and

con

firm

min

imum

requ

ired

tren

ch sl

opes

per

OSH

A

Requ

irem

ents

. Al

l soi

l typ

es a

nd tr

ench

slop

es w

ill b

e de

cide

d by

our

fiel

d fo

rem

an w

ho is

ons

ite c

ompe

tent

per

son.

DATE

: (T

oday

’s D

ate)

PE

RSO

NN

EL R

EQU

IRED

: (S

peci

fy H

ere)

NO

TE: S

EE R

EVER

SE S

IDE

FOR

ADDI

TIO

NAL

INFO

RMAT

ION

SAFE

TY E

QU

IPM

ENT

AND

APPA

REL:

(Sp

ecify

)

PRO

CEDU

RE D

EVEL

OPE

D BY

: (S

igna

ture

) AR

RPO

VED

BY:

(Sig

natu

re)

SAM

PLE

OF

PIPE

LIN

E SP

ECIF

IC O

PERA

TIN

G SA

FETY

PRO

CEDU

RE

OPE

RATI

ON

SEQ

UEN

CE

ASSO

CIAT

ED

HAZA

RD

EQU

IPM

ENT,

TO

OLS

O

R FA

CILI

TIES

SP

ECIA

L IN

STRU

CTIO

NS

OR

LIM

ITAT

ION

S RE

FERE

NCE

1.Ex

cava

tion,

Pipe

Inst

alla

tion,

ba

ckfil

l & c

ompa

ct

Pote

ntia

l uns

tabl

e ex

istin

g so

il co

nditi

ons

Tren

ches

will

be

slope

d or

sh

ored

per

OSH

A re

quire

men

ts

Hard

hat

s mus

t be

utili

zed

by

all f

ield

per

sonn

el.

Acce

ss

ladd

ers p

lace

d pe

r OSH

A re

quire

men

ts fo

r acc

ess i

n an

d ou

t of t

renc

hes.

Tre

nche

s bl

ocke

d an

d/or

bar

ricad

es a

s ne

eded

for p

ublic

safe

ty.

2. M

orta

ring

& B

itchm

astic

Co

atin

gs

Poss

ible

skin

con

tact

Sa

fety

Equ

ipm

ent t

o be

ut

ilize

d pe

r req

uire

men

ts

to m

eet f

ield

con

ditio

ns.

SDS

will

be

avai

labl

e on

site

to

revi

ew e

xpos

ure

effe

cts a

nd

follo

w fi

rst a

id in

stru

ctio

n.

3. T

raffi

c Co

ntro

l and

lane

cl

osur

es

Publ

ic &

Em

ploy

ee

Safe

ty

Arro

w b

oard

s, F

enci

ng,

Traf

fic p

late

s, p

rope

r co

nstr

uctio

n sig

nage

.

Per r

equi

rem

ents

of O

SHA

and

Cal-T

rans

traf

fic m

anua

l.

Safe

ty v

ests

/ora

nge

shirt

s to

be w

orn

in a

ll tr

affic

are

as.

4. R

emov

e Co

ncre

te

Flyi

ng c

oncr

ete

debr

is du

ring

dem

oliti

on

Hard

Hat

s, sa

fety

gog

gles

an

d du

st m

ask.

Pr

oper

ven

tilat

ion

mus

t be

mai

ntai

ned

durin

g sa

w c

uttin

g ex

istin

g co

ncre

te.

5. H

ydro

stat

ic P

ress

ure

Test

ing

High

pre

ssur

e te

stin

g eq

uipm

ent

Safe

ty e

quip

men

t to

be

utili

zed

per r

equi

rem

ents

to

mee

t fie

ld c

ondi

tions

.

SDS

will

be

avai

labl

e on

site

to

revi

ew e

xpos

ure

effe

cts a

nd

follo

w fi

rst a

id in

stru

ctio

n.

EN-8

4

OPE

RATI

ON

SEQ

UEN

CE

ASSO

CIAT

ED

HAZA

RD

EQU

IPM

ENT,

TO

OLS

O

R FA

CILI

TIES

SP

ECIA

L IN

STRU

CTIO

NS

OR

LIM

ITAT

ION

S RE

FERE

NCE

6. C

hlor

inat

ion

Poss

ible

skin

con

tact

Sa

fety

equ

ipm

ent t

o be

ut

ilize

d pe

r req

uire

men

ts

to m

eet f

ield

con

ditio

ns.

SDS

will

be

avai

labl

e on

site

to

revi

ew e

xpos

ure

effe

cts a

nd

follo

w fi

rst a

id in

stru

ctio

n.

Mai

ntai

n ad

equa

te v

entil

atio

n.

7. A

spha

lt Pa

ving

Bu

rns

Safe

ty e

quip

men

t to

be

utili

zed

per r

equi

rem

ents

to

mee

t fie

ld c

ondi

tions

.

SDS

will

be

avai

labl

e on

site

to

revi

ew e

xpos

ure

effe

cts a

nd

follo

w fi

rst a

id in

stru

ctio

n.

Mon

itor a

ll pa

ving

act

iviti

es

and

impl

emen

t saf

ety

requ

irem

ent p

er fi

eld

cond

ition

s for

bot

h em

ploy

ees

and

publ

ic sa

fety

.

8. C

oncr

ete

repa

ir Po

ssib

le sk

in c

onta

ct

& a

ir bo

rne

conc

rete

w

hile

chi

ppin

g

Safe

ty e

quip

men

t to

be

utili

zed

per r

equi

rem

ents

to

mee

t fie

ld c

ondi

tions

.

SDS

will

be

on si

te to

revi

ew

expo

sure

effe

cts a

nd fo

llow

fir

st a

id in

stru

ctio

n. M

aint

ain

adeq

uate

ven

tilat

ion.

9. D

ust c

ontr

ol &

saw

cut

ting

Visio

n Im

paire

d Ho

ses &

cor

ds k

ept t

o a

min

imum

leng

th.

Wea

r du

st m

asks

and

safe

ty

glas

ses.

SDS

will

be

avai

labl

e on

site

to

revi

ew e

xpos

ure

effe

cts a

nd

follo

w fi

rst a

id in

stru

ctio

n.

Mai

ntai

n ad

equa

te v

entil

atio

n.

10.

Cutt

ing

torc

hes

Expl

osiv

e/Ga

ses/

Fire

Fi

re E

xtin

guish

er

Fire

wat

ch/L

abor

er

OPE

RATI

ON

SEQ

UEN

CE

ASSO

CIAT

ED

HAZA

RD

EQU

IPM

ENT,

TO

OLS

O

R FA

CILI

TIES

SP

ECIA

L IN

STRU

CTIO

NS

OR

LIM

ITAT

ION

S RE

FERE

NCE

11.

Site

Cle

anne

ss

Trip

ping

Ke

ep to

ols o

rgan

ized

and

conc

entr

ated

En

d of

wor

k da

y pi

ck u

p ev

eryt

hing

12.

Emer

genc

y Ve

hicl

es

Gett

ing

to lo

catio

ns

Not

ify e

mer

genc

y se

rvic

es p

rior t

o co

nstr

uctio

n

Inst

ruct

all

empl

oyee

s on

proc

edur

es fo

r em

erge

ncy

traf

fic.

EN-85

Exhibit “C”

REPORT OF INJURY CONTRACTOR’S REPORT OF RECORDABLE INJURY/ILLNESS

Each work related fatality, injury/illness, first aid cases accepted, shall be reported on this form. The completed form will be submitted to the District within 3 working days from the date of the incident or onset of illness. Responsibility for completion and submission of this form for all onsite injury/illness to contractor, subcontractor, or supplier forces rests with the general contractor. All form terms are as defined on the reverse side.

CONTRACT SPECIFICATION (Number and Title) DATE OF THIS REPORT

EMPLOYER

EMWD Resident Inspector

INJURED EMPLOYEE’S NAME OCCUPATION

AGE DATE EMPLOYED DATES OF PREVIOUS INJURIES

DESCRIBE INJURY/ILLNESS

DATE OF INJURY TIME ATTENDING PHYSICIAN INJURY CLASSIFICATION

STARTED LOSING TIME (Never Date of Injury)

DID INJURY RESULT IN DEATH OR PROBABLY PERMANENT DISABILITY?

RETURN TO WORK (Date)* DATE OF DEATH

WORKDAYS LOST TIME* DAYS OF RESTRICTED WORK OR TRANSFER TO OTHER JOB

* Estimate date of return to full duty to avoid delay in submitting report (See reverse side for estimating instructions).

DESCRIBE ACCIDENT (Include Who, What, Where, & How)

EN-85

SUPERVISORY

OPINION

HOW COULD ACCIDENT HAVE BEEN PREVENTED?

(Signature) FOREMAN OR IMMEDIATE SUPERVISOR

NOTE: Information in this report is to be used for the prevention of accidents and is not intended as a basis for injury claims. Recordable injuries/illnesses and workdays lost and injury classification shall be as defined on reverse side of this form. Information in this report shall also be recorded on CAL-OSHA form 200.

EN-85

Work-related Injury/Illness: All injuries/illnesses to contractor, subcontractor, or supplier employees that result from an event or exposure on any contractor controlled worksite associated with the respective contract. Medical Cases: Injuries/illnesses are defined as medical cases if: (1) they can be treated only by a physician or licensed medical personnel, (2) they result in damage or harm to physical structure of a nonsuperficial nature (e.g., hairline fractures), (3) they impair bodily functions (i.e., normal use of senses, limbs, etc.), (4) they involve complications requiring follow-up medical treatment. The following are generally considered medical treatment: • Treatment of INFECTION • Application of ANTISEPTICS during second

or subsequent visits to medical personnel • Treatment of SECOND OR THIRD DEGREE

BURN(S) • Application of BUTTERFLY ADHESIVE

DRESSING(S) or STERISTRIPS in lieu of sutures

• Application of SUTURES (stitches) • Removal of FOREIGN BODIES EMBEDDED

IN EYE • Removal of FOREIGN BODIES from wound;

if procedure is COMPLICATED because of depth of embedment, size, or location

• Use of PRESCRIPTION MEDICATIONS (except a single dose administered on first visit for minor injury or discomfort)

• Use of hot or cold SOAKING THERAPY during second or subsequent visit to medical personnel

• Application of hot or cold COMPRESS(ES) during second or subsequent visit to medical personnel

• CUTTING AWAY DEAD SKIN (surgical debridement)

• Application of HEAT THERAPY during second or subsequent visit of medical personnel

• Use of WHIRLPOOL BATH THERAPY during second or subsequent visit of medical personnel

• POSITIVE X-RAY DIAGNOSIS (fractures, broken bones, etc.)

ADMISSION TO A HOSPITAL or equivalent medical facility for treatment or prolonged observation First Aid Cases: Cases (1) limited to one-time treatment and subsequent observation and (2) involve treatment of only minor injuries, not emergency treatment of serious injuries. Further, any one-time treatment and follow up visit for the sole purpose of observation of minor scratches, cuts, burns, splinters and so forth which do not ordinarily require medical care are classified as first aid treatment. Such one-time treatment and follow up visit for the purpose of observation is considered first aid even though provided by a physician or registered professional personnel. Visits to a doctor for an examination or other diagnostic procedure to determine whether the employee has an injury is classified as a first aid case if no injury is discovered or medical treatment is rendered. Conversely, if treatment is described and medical care is provided even by someone other than a physician or registered medical personnel, injury is classified as medical.

DEFINITION OF TERMS

EN-85

Other examples of first aid cases not requiring reporting unless they result in loss of consciousness, restriction of work, or motion, or transfer to another job are: • Application of ANTISEPTICS during first visit

to medical personnel • Treatment of FIRST DEGREE BURN(S) • Application of BANDAGE(S) during first visit

to medical personnel • Use of ELASTIC BANDAGES during first visit

to medical personnel • Removal of FOREIGN BODIES NOT

EMBEDDED IN EYE if only irrigation is required

• Removal of FOREIGN BODIES from wound, if procedure is UNCOMPLICATED, and is, for example, by tweezers or other simple technique

• Use of NONPRESCRIPTION MEDICATIONS AND administration of single dose of PRESCRIPTION MEDICATION on first visit for minor injury or discomfort

• SOAKING THERAPY ON INITIAL VISIT to medical personnel or removal of bandages by SOAKING

• Application of hot or cold COMPRESS(ES) during first visit to medical personnel

• Application of OINTMENTS to abrasions to prevent drying or cracking

• Application of HEAT THERAPY during first visit to medical personnel

• Use of WHIRLPOOL BATH THERAPY during first visit to medical personnel

• NEGATIVE X-RAY DIAGNOSIS • BRIEF OBSERVATION of injury during visit

to medical personnel Note: The administration of a TETANUS SHOT or BOOSTER, by itself, is not considered medical treatment. However, these shot are often given in conjunction with the more serious injuries. Therefore, injuries requiring

tetanus shots may be reportable for other reasons. Illness Cases: Occupational illness of an employee is any abnormal condition or disorder, other than one resulting from an occupational injury caused by exposure to environmental factors associated with employment. It includes acute and chronic illnesses or diseases which may be caused by inhalation, absorption, ingestion, or direct contact. Some conditions may be classified as either an injury or illness (but not both), depending upon the nature of the event that produced the condition. For example, a loss of hearing resulting from an explosion (an instantaneous event) is classified as an injury; the same condition arising from exposure to industrial noise over a period of time would be classified as an occupational illness. Similarly, irritation of the throat from exposure to chlorine fumes would be classified as an injury if it resulted from a ruptured tank and an illness if the exposure occurred over a period of time. The determination of illness or injury is based on the original event. Adverse reaction to a tetanus shot given for a laceration would be classified as an injury. Back cases should always be recorded as an injury. It should be noted that all occupational illnesses are reportable and recordable incidents regardless of the type of treatment provided. Fatalities: Work-related fatalities are reportable and recordable regardless of the time between the injury and the death or the length of the illness. Lost workdays attributable to the incident are not counted and any charged should be removed from the record.

EN-85

Lost Workdays: Lost workdays are defined as the number of workdays (consecutive or not), beyond the day of injury or onset of illness, the employee was away from work or limited to restricted work activity. The number of days away from work or days of restricted work activity does not include the day of injury or onset of illness or any days on which the employee would not have worked even though able to work, e.g., vacation days, days off, or holidays are not counted. Termination of employment may stop the count of lost workdays if unrelated to the employee’s injury or illness. If termination is related to injury/illness, an estimate of actual workdays lost shall be made. Retirements unrelated to injury or illness stop the count of lost workdays. Otherwise days lost are estimated. Lost workday counts cease when injury or illness is determined as totally disabling. Lost workday count stops when position employee was in when injured is abolished due to work completion, e.g., a dozer operator lost workdays count would not continue beyond last day of dozer operations on the project even if the operator still could not perform the operator functions. Restricted work: The number of workdays on which because of injury or illness: (1) the employee was assigned to another job on a temporary basis; or (2) the employee worked at a permanent job less than full time; Or (3) the employee worked at a permanently assigned job but could not perform all duties normally connected with it. Lost workday count stops when employee is permanently transferred to another permanently established position.

Contractor Controlled Worksite Associated with the Contract. The following and similar locations are considered contractor controlled worksites: All areas within the boundaries of the construction site including shops, plants, storage areas, haul roads, borrow and fill areas. All offsite locations (plants, shops, rock quarries, borrow areas, erection sites, etc.) used exclusively for supporting construction activities. All roads where traffic control is a contractor responsibility.

EN-8

9

Exhi

bit “

D”

CON

TRAC

TOR

MO

NTH

LY S

UM

MAR

Y O

F O

CCU

PATI

ON

AL IN

JURI

ES/I

LLN

ESSE

S EX

PEN

SE

The

cont

ract

or w

ill s

ubm

it th

is co

mpl

eted

form

to th

e Di

stric

t by

the

first

day

of e

ach

mon

th.

Incl

uded

on

the

form

will

be

the

cont

ract

ors,

subc

ontr

acto

rs, a

nd su

pplie

rs o

nsite

inju

ry/il

lnes

s exp

erie

nce

for t

he p

revi

ous r

epor

ting

perio

d. R

epor

ting

perio

d cu

t off

date

s can

coi

ncid

e w

ith a

ppro

pria

te p

ay p

erio

ds a

s lo

ng a

s th

e en

ding

dat

e of

this

curr

ent r

epor

t is

the

begi

nnin

g da

te o

f the

nex

t rep

ort.

All

form

term

s ar

e de

fined

on

the

back

of t

his f

orm

.

REPO

RTIN

G PE

RIO

D ST

ARTI

NG

ENDI

NG

CON

TRAC

TOR

SUBC

ON

TRAC

TOR

SUPP

LIER

– S

PEC.

NO

TY

PE O

F CO

NST

RUCT

ION

N

O.

EMPL

OYE

ES

MAN

-HO

URS

EX

POSU

RE

LOST

W

ORK

DAYS

RE

CORD

ABLE

CA

SES

INCI

DEN

T RA

TES

TOTA

L DE

ATHS

LOST

W

ORK

DAY

CASE

S TO

TAL

CASE

S

DEAT

H AN

D LO

ST

WO

RKDA

Y CA

SES

LOST

W

ORK

DAY

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

11

GEN

ERAL

CO

NTR

ACTO

R

NAM

E

SPEC

. NO

.

SUBC

ON

TRAC

TORS

SUPP

LIER

S

TOTA

L

CUM

MU

LATI

VE T

OTA

L

EN-8

9

[PAG

E LE

FT IN

TEN

TIO

NAL

LY B

LAN

K]

Column 1. Name of General Contractor and General Specification No. only. Combine all

subcontractor and/or supplier data under respective headings. Cumulative totals start from first day of onsite work under the specification.

Column 2. Major classification or type of work for contractor (Water pipeline, sewer pipeline, pump station, treatment plant, lift station, etc.). Minor classification for supplier or subcontractor (concrete work, earthwork, repair work, etc.).

Column 3. Average number of employees during reporting period. Include only onsite personnel. Number of subcontractor or supplier employees can be estimated by dividing number of estimated man-hours by 8 x number days of reporting period.

(Number of man-hours) (8 x number days of reporting period)

Column 4. Actual man-hours of onsite exposure. Do not include vacation time, holidays, down periods, etc.

Column 5. Lost workdays include actual days from work, restricted work days and days worked in another assigned position. (For detailed explanation of lost workdays and restricted work, see back of Exhibit “C”).

Column 6. Total of fatalities, lost workday cases, restricted work cases or transfer to other job cases, and medical cases reported on all forms “Contractor’s Report of Recordable Injury/Illness,” submitted during the reporting period covered by this form.

Column 7. Fatalities are charged to date of injury or onset of illness regardless of date of death.

Column 8. Includes all cases submitted during this reporting period of form “Contractors Report of Recordable Injury/Illness,” that show figures under headings entitled, “lost time, or restricted work or transfer to other job.” (see back of Exhibit “C”).

Columns 9, 10, 11

Incident rates are define as the number of injuries/illnesses or lost workdays related to a common exposure base-100 full-time workers or 200,000 man-hours (100 workmen x 40 hrs/week x 50 weeks/year = 200,000). These rates are calculated as follows:

Total Cases (column 9) = Total cases (column 6) x 200,000

Man-hours of Exposure (column 4)

Death and lost workday cases (column 10) =

Deaths (column 7) and lost workday cases (column 8) x 200,000

Man-hours of Exposure (column 4)

Lost workdays = Lost workdays (column 5) x 200,000

Man workdays of exposure (column 4)

EN-89


Confined Space Entry Procedure

Prepared By:

Safety, Risk and Emergency Management

Revision Date:

12/01/2017

Reviewed By:

Safety Committee


12/1/2017 2

Table of Contents

1 Purpose .................................................................................................................................. 3

2 Scope and Application ........................................................................................................... 3

3 Definitions .............................................................................................................................. 3

4 Program Requirements .......................................................................................................... 9

5 Entry Instructions ................................................................................................................. 16

6 Duties And Responsibilities .................................................................................................. 18

7 Ventilation Requirements .................................................................................................... 20

8 Safety Equipment ................................................................................................................. 23

9 Permit Classification System ................................................................................................ 24

Appendix A Checklist of Requirements For Entry, Working in and Exiting Confined Spaces ....... 27

Appendix B Confined Space Entry Permit Decision Diagram ....................................................... 28

Appendix C Confined Space Evaluation Form……………………………………………………………………………29

Appendix D Confined Space Permit .............................................................................................. 30

Appendix E Record Of Gas Analysis .............................................................................................. 31

Appendix F Riverside County Fire Department Facilities with Confined Space Rescue

Equipment and Training ....................................................................................................... 32

Appendix G Confined Space Inventory and Labeling .................................................................... 33

Appendix H Gas Detector (Monitor) Manufacturer’s Requirements ........................................... 35


12/1/2017 3

1 Purpose

1.1 To establish a safe working procedure for District workers that meets or exceeds federal,

state, or local rules and regulations. This program was developed in accordance with

Cal/OSHA VPP Best Practices philosophy.

1.2 This Program is based on the regulatory requirements of the California Occupational

Safety and Health Administration Title 8 California Code of Regulations (CCR) Article 108,

Confined Space. The focus is to protect workers from exposure to hazards in confined

spaces.

NOTE: This EMWD procedure meets and exceeds the requirements of Title 8 General

Industry Safety Orders (GISO) and those of Title 8 Construction Safety Orders regarding

Confined Spaces.

2 Scope and Application

2.1 This procedure contains specific requirements for work practices to protect workers from

those hazards of entry into and work within a confined space. This procedure establishes

that all confined spaces must be evaluated to determine whether it is permit or non-

permit required prior to every entry.

3 Definitions

1 Attendant – An individual stationed outside the confined space who is trained as

required by this procedure and who monitors the authorized entrants inside the

permit required confined space. An attendant may not monitor more entrants or

more permit spaces than the entry permit specifically authorizes.

2 Authorized Entrant – Any worker who is authorized by the District to enter a confined

space to perform an assigned task. Authorized entrants may rotate duties, serving as

attendants. Only trained persons may enter the confined space during the term of the

permit.

3 Blanking or Blinding – The absolute closure of a pipe, line or duct, by fastening across

its bore a solid plate or “cap” which completely covers the bore; which extends to at

least the outer edge of the flange at which it is attached; and which is capable of

withstanding the maximum upstream pressure.


12/1/2017 4

4 Biological Hazards – Microbial agents presenting a risk or potential risk to the

wellbeing of humans through inhalation, ingestion, skin absorption, or injection.

5 Bump Test – Testing an atmospheric monitoring device with a known concentration

of gases that the monitor is intended to test. The test is used to verify that the monitor

is within calibration parameters.

6 Calibration – A manual or electronic adjustment of an atmospheric monitoring device

to ensure testing parameter requirements of the manufacturer are met or exceeded.

7 Confined Space – A location must have all three of the following definitions to be a

“Confined Space.”

Is large enough and so configured that an worker can bodily enter and perform

assigned work; and

Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit for example but not limited to:

tanks, vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, vaults, pits, and ladder entry into

pumping plants or subgrade facilities are spaces that may have limited means of

entry; and

Is not designed for continuous worker occupancy. (Its primary function is other

than human occupancy.)

8 Double Block And Bleed – A method used to isolate a confined space from a line, duct

or pipe by physically closing two main valves on a piping system, and opening a

“vented to atmosphere” valve between them.

9 Emergency – Any occurrence, including a failure of monitoring device or hazard

control, internal or external to the confined space, which could endanger the entrant

or other workers.

10 Engulfment – The surrounding and effective capture of a person by a liquid or solid

substance.

11 Entry – An act by which a person intentionally passes through an opening into a

confined space. The entrant is considered to have entered as soon as any part of the

entrant’s body breaks the plane of an opening into the space.

12 Entry Permit – A document established by the District, the content of which is based

on the District’s hazard identification and evaluation for a confined space and is the

instrument by which the District can verify that all precautions have been met prior

to entry.


12/1/2017 5

13 Entry Permit System – The written or printed document established by EMWD. The

permit will be signed by the Entry Supervisor and posted at the entrance to the

confined space.

The entry permit will include the name of the Attendant(s), the authorized Entrant(s),

the work to be performed, the tools and equipment being taken into the confined

space, the specific types of personal protective equipment to be used by the Entrants,

air monitoring readings, the date of entry, time of entry, time the permit is issued and

time the permit is scheduled to expire and be closed. Other information that the

Attendant and/or Entry Supervisor deems to be necessary will be written on the

permit.

14 Entry Supervisor – An appropriately trained worker who has been assigned the

responsibility of ensuring a safe confined space entry. (An entry supervisor shall not

enter the confined space as an entrant to perform work.)

15 Evacuation – An unaided emergency exit out of a confined space. This action may

result from the entrant’s own decision or by a command from outside the space by

the Attendant.

16 Fall Arrest/Rescue Device – A winch-type device that will quickly arrest a worker’s fall

and absorb much of the free fall energy. The fallen worker may then be winched to

safety using the hand crank system of the device. The cable from this device will attach

to the safety harness. The type(s) of fall protection equipment, including personnel

winches, will be determined by the Attendant and Entry Supervisor. The entrants will

use the fall protection equipment when there is an exposure of a worker falling during

entry or while exiting the confined space.

17 Gas Detector (Monitor) – Direct reading, four-gas monitor which measures oxygen

content, LEL, carbon monoxide, and hydrogen sulfide. This also includes specialty

monitors used to measure specific hazards (photo ionization detectors, metal oxide

probes, radiation detectors, etc.).

18 Hazardous Atmosphere – An atmosphere which exposes workers above established

exposure guidelines, to risk of death, incapacitation, injury or acute illness from one

or more of the following causes:

A flammable gas, vapor, or mist in excess of 10% of its lower explosive limit (LEL).

Atmospheres that read >0% LEL up to 10% can still present a hazard and the source

of the atmospheric reading must be determined and addressed;


12/1/2017 6

An airborne combustible dust at a concentration over the permissible exposure

limit or that presents an explosion hazard by being above the minimum explosible

concentration (estimated by visual observation as completely obscuring vision at

a distance of 5 feet or less);

An atmospheric oxygen concentration below 19.5% or above 23.5%;

Carbon monoxide in excess of 25 PPM;

Hydrogen sulfide in excess of 10 PPM;

An atmospheric concentration of any substance for which a Cal OSHA permissible

exposure limit is exceeded and could result in worker exposure in excess of the

permissible exposure limit. When an air contaminant for which OSHA or Cal/OSHA

has not determined a permissible exposure limit which may be present in the

permit space atmosphere, the District shall consult other sources of information,

such as Safety Data Sheets which comply with the Hazard Communication

Standard guidance in establishing the acceptable environmental conditions for

entry by their workers; and

Any atmospheric condition recognized as immediately dangerous to life or health

(IDLH).

19 Hot Work Permit – The District’s written authorization to perform operations which

could produce a source of ignition, such as riveting, welding, cutting, use of abrasive

tools, burning, or heating.

20 Immediately Dangerous To Life or Health (IDLH) – Immediately dangerous to life or

health (IDLH) means any condition which poses an immediate threat of loss of life;

may result in irreversible injury and/or immediate-severe health effects; may result in

eye damage; irritation or other conditions which could impair escape from the permit

space.

21 Immediate-Severe Health Effects – Any acute clinical sign(s) of a serious, exposure-

related reaction manifested immediately or within 72 hours after exposure.

22 Large Enough And So Configured That A Worker Can Bodily Enter – The entryway

and space is large enough for any part of the worker’s body to enter in a manner that

could cause harm. The entire body of a worker does not need to enter for harm to

occur.

23 LEL – UEL – LEL: Lower Explosive Limit. Minimum concentration of a particular gas or

vapor necessary to support its combustion in air.


12/1/2017 7

UEL: Upper Explosive Limit. Maximum concentration of a particular gas or vapor

necessary to support its combustion in air.

24 Non-Entry Condition – Any condition or set of conditions whose hazard potential

exceeds the limits stated in the entry permit.

25 Non-Entry Rescue Team – A group of two or more workers designated and trained to

perform non-entry rescues at confined spaces within the District.

26 Non-Permit Confined Space (NPCS) – A confined space that does not contain or, with

respect to atmospheric hazards, would not normally contain any hazard capable of

causing death or physical harm, and where all other serious hazards have been

controlled.

Before declaring a confined space, a NPCS, the confined space is to be treated as a

Permit Required Confined Space, including testing of the atmosphere in the confined

space.

27 Oxygen Deficient Atmosphere – An atmosphere containing less than 19.5% oxygen

by volume.

28 Oxygen Enriched Atmosphere – An atmosphere containing more than 23.5% oxygen

by volume.

29 Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) – PELs are the allowable 8-hour time-weighted

average air contaminant concentrations established by the U.S. Department of Labor,

Occupational Safety and Health Administration, and Cal/OSHA regulations, or

adopted by Cal OSHA

30 Permit Required Confined Spaces (PRCS) – A confined space which must include one

or more of the following conditions:

Contains or has a known potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere;

Contains a material with the potential for engulfment of an entrant;

Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated

by inwardly converging walls, or a floor, which slopes downward and tapers to a

smaller cross-section; and/or

Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.

31 Rescue Service – Third party personnel designated to rescue workers from permit

spaces. It may include rescuer entry into the confined space. District personnel shall

not perform entry rescue.


12/1/2017 8

32 Retrieval – Aided assistance in exiting the confined space not requiring entry by a

rescuer or attendant. Non-entry rescue.

33 Retrieval Line – An approved line or rope secured at one end of the worker by a full-

body harness, and with its other end secured to either a lifting (or other retrieval)

device, or to an anchor point located outside the entry portal.

34 Safety Line – A line secured at one end of the worker by a full-body harness with the

other end secured to a “fall arrest” device. The main function is to prevent injury in

the event of a fall.

35 Shall – Denotes a mandatory requirement.

36 Supervisor – An individual who has the job title as an EMWD Manager or Supervisor.

Or, an individual who is assigned to work with the Attendant during a confined space

entry and has the authority to authorize a confined space entry or terminate a

confined space entry.

37 Threshold Limit Values (TLV) – TLVs are the worker exposure levels of chemical and

physical agents to which it is believed an average worker may be exposed day after

day for a working lifetime and result in no adverse effect. TLVS are set adopted by the

American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH). The TLVs are

based on an 8-hour Time Weight Average (TWA) of 5-day 40-hour work week.

38 Toxic Atmosphere – An atmosphere containing a concentration of a substance above

the published or otherwise known safe levels that is capable of causing harm to a

worker.

39 Vertical Rescue – Methodology to move the entrant to safety while all or a portion of

the entrant’s weight is supported by life-safety rope or wire. This methodology would

include Diagonal Rescue where a portion of the entrant’s weight is supported by a

surface within the space.

40 Warning Barriers – A physical system that prevents or provides adequate notice that

entry into area is prohibited by non-authorized workers or members of the public.

Acceptable barriers include cones, saw horses, delineators, temporary fencing, etc.


12/1/2017 9

4 Program Requirements

4.1 Pre-Entry Evaluation To Determine Confined Space Status

The Entry Supervisor shall evaluate all structures and openings that meet confined space

criteria, and identify and record the potential hazards associated with each one prior to

all entry operations. This information will be made available to affected workers, their

representatives and supervisors. Appendix B is the Confined Space Evaluation Form that

may be used at the discretion of a particular department.

4.2 Hazard Identification and Basic Requirements

The District has established an entry permit program to ensure that entrants are

protected from confined space hazards. Under the entry permit program, each

department that issues entry permits shall:

4.2.1 Hazard Identification

Identify and evaluate each hazard of the permit space(s), including determination of

severity.

4.2.2 Hazard Control

Implement the means, procedures and practices by which the confined spaces can be

entered safely according to this procedure.

4.2.3 Worker Training

Ensure that workers attend required training prior to performing confined space entries.

4.2.4 Equipment

Provide, maintain, and ensure the proper use of the equipment necessary for safe entry,

including testing, monitoring, communication, rescue, and personnel protective

equipment.

4.2.5 Non-Entry Rescue

Ensure that the procedures and equipment necessary to perform non-entry rescues from

confined spaces are implemented and provided.

4.2.6 Protection from External Hazards

Ensure that all pedestrians, vehicles or other barriers necessary to protect entrants from

external hazards are provided.


12/1/2017 10

4.3 Permit System

The District shall use a permit(s) in a standardized form through which the issuing

department identifies all conditions that must be evaluated to ensure safe entry into any

confined space. Departments who authorize entry into a permit space shall include the

following information on the checklist portion of the permit:

4.3.1 Actual or potential hazards of the permit space;

4.3.2 Methods for isolation, lock-out/block-out, purging, blocking or blinding, inerting,

ventilating, cooling, and flushing to remove or control hazards;

4.3.3 Maintenance of acceptable environmental conditions by the entry supervisor through

verification, testing and monitoring equipment, and procedures;

4.3.4 Non-Entry Rescue equipment to be provided on-site which includes: communication

procedures, equipment, and personal protective equipment such as harnesses, safety

lines, and retrieval device.

4.3.5 The identity of permit space, location, purpose, date of entry, and duration.

4.3.6 A list of authorized entrants, eligible attendants, and individuals eligible to be in charge

of entry along with an entry supervisor’s signature, verifying that all actions or conditions

for safe entry have been met.

4.3.7 Upon completion of the entry covered by the permit, and after all entrants have exited,

the permit space and all work has been performed, the permit shall be signed off as

complete and further entry closed out.

4.3.8 All hot work in confined spaces will require a hot work permit before an entry permit is

issued. The hot work permit is a part of the WELDING AND CUTTING SAFETY PROCEDURE.

4.4 Department Requirements

Each affected Department shall be required to become familiar with this procedure and

ensure all aspects of the procedure are implemented and followed by their workers. The

following items are found in the District’s procedure and shall be implemented by the

individual departments to fit each specific application:

4.4.1 Evaluation of each facility within the department’s jurisdiction for the purpose of

establishing its confined space designation prior to every entry.


12/1/2017 11

4.4.2 Document each pre-entry evaluation. Documentation shall include a site description,

location, configuration, initial gas detector readings, and initial classification (i.e., permit

required or non-permit required confined space). Please see Appendix B for the Confined

Space Evaluation Form;

4.4.3 Prepare and maintain an inventory of confined spaces using the format in Appendix F.

4.4.4 Determine site/type specific confined space entry and rescue procedures for each type of

confined space without regard to confined space classification; and

4.4.5 Ensure that each worker required to work within the procedure is thoroughly trained as

required.

4.5 Entering and Inspection of Confined Spaces

These precautions must be reviewed by workers working in confined spaces to ensure

safe entry:

4.5.1 Always test atmosphere with gas detector prior to opening or removing access cover.

4.5.2 Use appropriate tools or hoist when removing access covers to confined spaces to avoid

injury from lifting heavy covers in awkward postures.

4.5.3 Prevent injuries by following written procedures.

4.5.4 Ensure proper PPE is identified and available for personnel working in confined space.

4.5.5 Always clean sand and dirt from the edge of access cover rim so it does not accidentally

fall and enter the eyes of entrants and allows for ease in replacing the cover after work is

complete.

4.5.6 Before entering a confined space, always visually inspect the condition of the steps or

rungs (if applicable).

4.5.7 Set up tripod/fall retrieval device.

4.5.8 Enter the confined space slowly and cautiously.

4.5.9 Test each step or rung with a gradual application of weight.

4.5.10 Do not carry tools or other objects when entering or exiting a confined space.

4.5.11 Always be careful not to look up.


12/1/2017 12

4.5.12 Never drop tools or supplies into a confined space. Pass by hand if possible, or tie object

to a hand line, or place in a bucket. Use half hitches to prevent objects from falling from

bucket.

4.5.13 Never clutter access area to prevent objects from falling, bouncing, being pushed, or

dragged into opening.

4.6 Contractors Entry Into Confined Spaces

When contractor workers (not under the District’s direct supervision) enter PRCS, ensure

the following:

4.6.1 Inform the contractor that the workplace contains confined spaces and that confined

space entry must be in compliance with EMWD Confined Space Entry Procedure as well

as that of the contractor.

4.6.2 Apprise the contractor of the characteristics of the confined space, including the known

hazards, access/egress, and any experiences with the space;

4.6.3 Coordinate entry operations with the contractor, when both District personnel and

contractor personnel will be working in or near a confined space (the contractor shall

have procedures for coordinating such entry operations, to prevent endangerment of the

workers of any other employer); and

4.6.4 Debrief the contractor at the conclusion of the entry operations regarding any hazards

confronted or created in the confined space during entry operations.

4.7 Recordkeeping

4.7.1 A written record must be made of the results of each atmospheric test performed. Utilize

the form in Appendix D.

4.7.2 If used, Confined Space Evaluation form (Appendix B) shall be kept at the site for the

duration of the work, and made accessible to entrants, attendants, supervisors, other

affected workers, and their representatives.

4.7.3 A copy of the Confined Space Entry Permit shall be posted or readily available at the job

site during confined space operations.

4.7.4 The above documentation must be kept on file by respective departments for a minimum

of three years.


12/1/2017 13

4.8 Training

4.8.1 All workers involved in confined space operations (including entrants, attendants, and

confined space entry supervisors) must receive training in the appropriate procedures

and requirements described in this program. No person shall enter a confined space

unless trained and qualified to do so.

4.8.2 Supervisors shall also be trained in the following:

The possible toxic materials, lockout block out, flammable atmosphere conditions,

oxygen deficiencies or enrichment, and other actual or potential hazards in confined

spaces into which personnel must enter;

Be knowledgeable of the type of operations workers will be performing in a confined

space and of their impact on air quality, flammability, and/or availability of oxygen,

and ensure that workers take appropriate precautions;

Provide appropriate approved equipment; and

Ensure necessary forms are available to record the confined space activities; review

completed records; ensure the records are filed; and provide affected workers and/or

their representatives access to review them and record testing results.

4.9 Joint Use Facilities

Prior to entry by District personnel into confined spaces, such as manholes which may be

jointly owned or shared with another entity, the entry supervisor shall coordinate entry

operations with other affected users or owners so that workers or operations of one

employer do not endanger another employer’s personnel.

4.10 Entry Supervisor Review

NOTE: Entry Supervisors may contact Safety and Risk Management during the planning

phase of such operations to provide guidance on safe entry conditions, hazard control,

and personal protective equipment.

Before the start of work, the supervisor must:

4.10.1 Review the work assignment with workers, indicating any potential hazards involving the

confined space(s);

4.10.2 Describe the scope of work, equipment and materials needed, and any operating

instructions required to complete the job.


12/1/2017 14

4.10.3 Identify any potential health risks and/or physical hazards or conditions, such as the

history of spills, fall hazard, the use of solvents, welding operations or flooding within the

work area, and methods to control those hazards;

4.10.4 Coordinate confined space entry activities with other employers, such as contractors or

sub-contractors so that no workers of any employer will be endangered during confined

space operations.

NOTE: Examples of methods to control hazards are lockout and blockout points, clearance

points, fall protection or ventilation.

4.11 Attendant/Entrant Review

An attendant and entrant is responsible for:

4.11.1 Understanding the nature of all actual or potential hazards that may be encountered

during entry into a confined space. If anything is not clearly understood, an

attendant/entrant shall ask questions;

4.11.2 Inspecting the safety equipment for confined space entry to ensure that it is in

operational condition;

4.11.3 Ensure that the atmospheric monitoring instruments (e.g., for oxygen, LEL, carbon

monoxide, hydrogen sulfide) are maintained in an operational status. Instruments shall

be tested and calibrated according to the manufacturer’s specifications or more

frequently. A daily bump test shall be performed against all gases or vapors for which an

instrument is configured

4.11.4 When the space is located such that work may encroach upon a public street or highway,

establish a safe work area by erecting barricades, cones, warning signs and wearing

appropriate reflective clothing;

4.11.5 The communication system between the Attendants and the facility, and between the

Attendants and the authorized Entrants must be checked prior to entry;

4.11.6 Energy sources (except for those necessary to perform the work at hand) that could

present a hazard to those in a confined space shall be locked out and blocked out in

accordance with the EMWD Lockout/Blockout Procedure.

4.11.7 The space shall be isolated and ventilated to prevent dangerous gases or chemical

substances from entering the confined space; and


12/1/2017 15

4.11.8 All non-permit required, and permit-required confined spaces shall be considered to have

unacceptable atmospheres until proven safe by atmospheric testing. Ventilation must be

maintained at all times.

4.12 Atmospheric Testing

4.12.1 Prior to any confined space entry, the atmosphere shall be tested with an appropriate,

tested / calibrated direct reading instrument in accordance with the manufacturer’s

requirements, see Appendix G.

Testing for atmospheric hazards shall be in the following order:

Oxygen content;

Flammable gases & vapors; and

Potential toxic air contaminants.

4.12.2 Testing of Manholes and Other Spaces Prior to Opening

Prior to fully opening a confined space, insert the probe into an available opening and

draw a sample of the atmosphere into the meter, allowing sufficient time to obtain a

representative sample.

If the space opening has no hole, open the space only enough to insert a non-sparking

item, such as a piece of wood or brass, then insert the probe.

If atmospheric conditions are acceptable, then fully opening the confined space.

4.12.3 Test Atmosphere from Top to Bottom of Space:

Testing of the confirmed or potential confined spaces shall be conducted throughout

the entire portion of the space to be occupied. Some airborne contaminants may be

heavier or lighter than air and can collect at the bottom or top of spaces. It is required

that testing shall be done before ventilation and after the prescribed ventilation

period. Testing shall continue for the duration of the entry.

4.13 Sampling

4.13.1 For testing, insert the probe into the top of the confirmed, potential, or non-permit

confined space, and draw a sample of the atmosphere into the meter allowing sufficient

time to allow the meter to register and analyze. This may vary depending upon the type

of meter and length of sample tubing. Sample collection procedures shall follow the

manufacturer’s recommended procedure that is summarized in Appendix G


12/1/2017 16

4.13.2 When monitoring for entries involving a descent into atmospheres which may be

stratified, the atmospheric envelope should be tested a distance of approximately four

(4) feet in the direction of travel and to each side.

4.13.3 If a sampling probe is used, the entrant’s rate of progress shall be slowed to accommodate

the sampling speed and detector response time.

4.14 Acceptable Atmosphere

If testing indicates an acceptable atmosphere, continuous ventilation is required prior to

and during any entry. Be sure to place the blower where fresh uncontaminated air is

drawn into the structure. The ventilation shall remain in operation during the complete

entry.

4.15 Unacceptable Atmosphere

If after any needed ventilation, testing continues to indicate atmospheric contaminants

outside of acceptable entry levels, the space shall not be entered. Refer to Permit

Required Confined Space Entry Procedure section for additional information.

4.16 Guarding The Opening

When covers are removed, a railing, temporary cover, or temporary barrier that will

prevent an accidental fall through the opening and protect each worker working in the

space from foreign objects entering the space shall guard the opening.

5 Entry Instructions

5.1 When operations are to be conducted which may impact air quality (such as welding,

spray coating, abrasive blasting, or use of chemicals), additional precautions are to be

taken. Consideration shall be given to safe entry conditions, hazard control and personal

protective equipment during the planning phase of such operations.

5.2 Prior to any entry into a PRCS, the Entry Supervisor shall assure that all provisions of a

Confined Space Permit (Appendix C) have been completed and the following specific

provisions have been met:

5.2.1 Supervisor Review of Hazards

5.2.2 Equipment Inspection


12/1/2017 17

5.2.3 Instrument Bump Test and Calibration

5.2.4 Work Area Preparation

5.2.5 Lockout and Isolation

5.2.6 Atmospheric Testing

5.2.7 Ventilation

5.2.8 Check “List of Requirements for Entry, Working In, and Exiting Confined Space” (Appendix

A)

NOTE: The supervisor of the workers may be the Entry Supervisor, or the responsibility of

the Entry Supervisor may be delegated.

5.2.9 Assemble and test the retrieval equipment before entry into a PRCS.

5.2.10 The Entry Supervisor is to check that the appropriate entries have been made on the

Permit, that the Permit specified tests have been conducted, and that the specified

procedures and equipment are in place before endorsing the Permit and allowing entry

to begin.

5.2.11 When the Permit is signed, the authorized entrant(s) may enter the PRCS.

NOTE: Following the information specified in the Entry Permit, the Attendant

continuously maintains an accurate count of authorized entrants in the confined space.

5.2.12 If the PRCS poses no actual or potential atmospheric hazards, and if all serious safety and

health hazards within the space are eliminated without entry into the space, the Permit

Required Confined Space (PRCS) may be re-classified as a Non-Permit Confined Space

(NPCS) for as long as the hazards remain eliminated. Reclassification of a space requires

use of the evaluation form in *Appendix B. Ventilation is still required.

NOTE: Control of atmospheric hazards through forced air ventilation does not constitute

elimination of the hazards. For example, carbon monoxide may still be generated in a

space while being controlled by ventilation.

5.2.13 The Entry Supervisor shall document the basis for determining that all hazards in a permit

space have been eliminated, through a certification on the permit that contains the date,

the location of the space, and the signature of the person making the determination. The

permit will then remain posted for the duration of the entry.


12/1/2017 18

5.2.14 If hazards arise within a PRCS that has been reclassified as an NPCS, each worker in the

space shall exit the space. The Entry Supervisor shall then reclassify the entry as a PRCS

and a new permit shall be initiated.

6 Duties and Responsibilities

6.1 Authorized Entrants

The authorized entrants are required to:

6.1.1 Understand the hazards that may be encountered during entry, including information on

the mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of exposure. Know methods of hazard

mitigation

6.1.2 Properly inspect and use equipment as required by the permit.

6.1.3 Follow responsibilities identified in entry instructions.

6.1.4 Maintain communications with the Attendant.

6.1.5 Alert the Attendant whenever:

The entrant recognizes any warning sign or symptom of exposure; or

A prohibited condition is detected.

6.1.6 Exit the permit space whenever:

An order to evacuate is given by the Attendant;

There is a warning sign or symptom of exposure;

A prohibited condition is detected; or

An alarm is activated.

6.2 Attendants

The Attendants are required to:

6.2.1 Know the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode,

signs or symptoms, and consequences of the exposure.

6.2.2 Be aware of possible behavioral effects of hazard exposure on authorized entrants.


12/1/2017 19

6.2.3 Continuously maintain an accurate count of authorized entrants in the permit space and

ensure that the permit accurately identifies who is in the permit space.

6.2.4 Remain immediately outside the permit space during entry operations until relieved by

another attendant.

6.2.5 Communicate with authorized entrants as necessary to monitor entrant status and alert

entrants of the need to evacuate the space.

6.2.6 Monitor activities inside and outside the space to determine if it is safe for entrants to

remain in the space and order the authorized entrants to evacuate the permit space

immediately under any of the following conditions:

If the Attendant detects a prohibited condition;

If the Attendant detects the behavioral effects of hazard exposure in an authorized

entrant;

If the Attendant detects a situation outside the space that could endanger the

authorized entrants; or

If the Attendant cannot effectively and safely perform all the duties required under

the permit.

6.2.7 Summon rescue and other emergency services as soon as the Attendant determines that

authorized entrants may need egress assistance from permit spaces.

Perform non-entry rescues as determined during pre-job planning; and

Perform no duties that might interfere with the Attendant’s primary duty to monitor

and protect the authorized entrants.

6.3 Entry Supervisors

The Entry Supervisors are required to:

6.3.1 Understand the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the

mode, signs or symptoms, and consequences of exposure to hazardous conditions,

materials or atmospheres;

6.3.2 Determine when to terminate the entry and cancel the permit;

6.3.3 Determine, whenever responsibility for a permit space entry operation is transferred and

at intervals dictated by the hazards and operations performed within the space, that entry


12/1/2017 20

operations remain consistent with terms of the entry permit and that acceptable entry

conditions are maintained;

6.3.4 Verify, by checking that the appropriate entries have been made on the permit, that all

tests specified by the permit have been conducted and that all procedures and equipment

specified by the permit are in place before endorsing the permit and allowing entry to

begin;

6.3.5 Verify for high hazard confined space entries that rescue services—other than self-rescue

or non-entry rescue—are available and that the means for summoning them are

operable; and

6.3.6 Remove unauthorized individuals who enter or who attempt to enter the permit space

during entry operations.

6.4 Rescue Duties

Departments are responsible to ensure that these procedures are followed when workers

are working in a confined space:

6.4.1 Recognition of actual or potential emergencies;

6.4.2 Notification of EMS and/or Central Control/IOC of rescues;

6.4.3 Request for additional workers if needed. NOTE: Workers may come from any

department;

6.4.4 Proper use of safety equipment;

6.4.5 Required First Aid/CPR training; and

6.4.6 Non-Entry Rescue Methods.

6.4.7 High hazard permit required confined space entries may require the use of a standby

rescue team at the site. Contact Safety, Risk and Emergency Management for all high

hazard entries.

7 Ventilation Requirements

Ventilation is one of the most important rules of safety concerning confined space entry.

Though ventilation can provide good quality make up air, it cannot reduce other hazards


12/1/2017 21

that are associated with permit space(s). The ventilation requirements that must be met

prior to entry are as follows:

7.1 Pre-Entry Requirements

7.1.1 Various sizes of permit spaces are located through the District. When initial air sampling

determines a hazardous atmosphere is present, forced air ventilation shall be performed

until the hazard within the space has been eliminated. A continuous supply of fresh air

shall be provided while entrant(s) is/are in the confined space. The confined space must

have ten (10) complete air changes before sampling the air inside the confined space

again.

To determine how long it will take to achieve ten (10) complete air changes in the

confined space, the following information must be known:

The cubic feet of space inside the confined space; and

The cubic feet per minute (CFM) the ventilator is rated for.

NOTE: Multiple bends in the ventilation hose will reduce the actual CFM capacity of the

ventilating blower (each 90º bend reduces the rated CFM capacity of a ventilation blower

by up to 50%).

To determine the cubic feet of space inside the confined space for square or rectangular

spaces:

Multiply the Length x Width x Height. EXAMPLE: A confined space is 20’ x 15’ x 30’.

20’ x 15’ x 30’ = 9,000 cubic feet

The rating of the ventilator shows the cubic feet of air the blower will discharge.

For this example, let’s assume the ventilator has a rating of 1,500 CFM.

To find out how long it will take to make one complete air change inside the

confined space, divide 9,000 cubic feet by 1,500 CFM. The answer is 6. Therefore,

it will take 6 minutes to make one complete air change inside the confined space.

Ten (10) air changes are required. Multiply 6 minutes by 10, the required number

of air changes in the confined space:

10 x 6 = 60. It will take 60 minutes to achieve 10 complete air changes.


12/1/2017 22

If the confined space is round, multiply π (3.14) times the radius squared, times the length

of the cylinder (pipe, tunnel, etc.) = cubic feet of space. 𝜋r2h=volume

EXAMPLE: 𝜋 (3.14) x radius2 x length of cylinder or height of tank (pipe, tunnel,

etc.) = cubic feet of space. Assume a pipe has a 3’ diameter and is 30’ long. One-

half of the 3’ diameter is 1.5 feet (the radius). 1.52 (1.5 x 1.5) = 2.25 square feet.

To simplify: 3.14 x 2.25 = 7.07 square feet. (The actual number is 7.0686, but we

rounded up.)

7.07 square feet x 30’ (the length of the cylinder) = 212 cubic feet.

To find out how long it will take to make one complete air change inside the

confined space, divide 212 cubic feet by 1,500 cfm. The answer is, 0.14 minutes

for one complete air change.

Ten (10) complete air changes are required. Therefore, 10 x 0.14 minutes per air

change = 1.4 minutes.

Round up and let the ventilator push fresh air into the confined space for 2

minutes before testing the atmosphere inside the confined space again.

To achieve a greater efficiency of air exchanges, when it is possible, move the end

of the hose around by using a rope. Pull the end to the hose up into the upper

corners of the confined space. Also move the end of the hose around near the

bottom of the confined space to move the gases or air around so it will be diluted

or exhausted out of the confined space.

After 10 complete (or near complete) air changes have been made, lower the hose

on the air monitor into the confined space and sample the air at different levels.

The end of the air monitor hose shall be lowered 2 to 4 feet each time to sample

the air at different levels inside the confined space.

A continuous supply of fresh air shall be provided while entrant(s) is/are in the

confined space.

7.2 Work in Progress

7.2.1 A continuous supply of fresh air shall be provided while entrant(s) is/are in the confined

space.

7.2.2 Entrant must exit confined space if blower stops.


12/1/2017 23

7.2.3 All blowers shall be at a minimum of 1,500 cfm.

7.2.4 Five (5) air exchanges per hour for a permit space are suggested.

7.3 Recordkeeping

The Entry Supervisor shall document the time that the blower was started and when the

blower was shut-off on the permit.

8 Safety Equipment

No worker shall perform or order to be performed, any work in a permit space unless all the

necessary safety equipment is available and all proper safety procedures are followed.

Requirements for safety equipment and use are as follows:

8.1 Fall / Retrieval Device and Approved Support Device

A fall/retrieval device and tripod or other adequate anchorage shall be required for all

top-opening entries into a permit space.

8.1.1 Tripod

The tripod shall be capable of set-up on surfaces that are not level.

The tripod shall be capable of locking in place with safety chains attached to base of

legs.

Non-slip feet on legs of tripod.

It is recommended that tripods are adjustable up to 9 feet tall.

8.1.2 Other anchorage points used shall be capable of supporting a 5000 pound static load and

the means of attachment shall be rated for fall protection and retrieval hoist loads.

8.1.3 Fall/Retrieval Device

Fall/retrieval device may have a “fall-arrest” capability.

Additional block to tackle hoist may be added for retrieval purposes.

Self-Retracting Lifelines (SRL) shall be the required fall protection device used in

conjunction with permit required confined space entry. Certain spaces may require

the use of a winch type retrieval device as a primary means of extraction with an SRL

as a secondary means of retrieval.


12/1/2017 24

8.2 Personal Protective Equipment

8.2.1 A hard hat shall be worn at all times in a confined space.

8.2.2 To provide as much body protection as possible, coverall or uniforms shall be worn when

working in a confined space.

8.2.3 Special safety equipment such as boots, waders, dry suit, gloves, safety goggles/glasses

and ear protection shall be worn as needed.

8.2.4 A fall/retrieval device or other approved devices shall be provided for lifting worker(s) out

of top opening confined spaces.

8.2.5 Rescue lifelines or wristlets may be utilized in certain permit required confined spaces

where the use of a fall retrieval device is not possible.

8.2.6 A full body harness will be required with this program. This harness must meet ANSI

Standard A10.14 and EMWD Fall Protection Procedure guidelines.

8.2.7 Intrinsically safe electrical equipment is required for confined spaces.

8.2.8 Respiratory protection equipment will be required as necessary based on an evaluation

of potential contaminants in the space.

8.3 Equipment Inspection

8.3.1 All equipment needed for working in a permit space shall be periodically inspected and

repaired or replaced if necessary. It must also be inspected prior to each entry into a

confined space by both the Entry Supervisor and the Entrant(s).

8.3.2 If a necessary piece of equipment is in questionable condition, work shall halt until the

equipment is repaired or replaced.

8.3.3 Manufacturer recommendations shall be followed for all equipment.

9 Permit Classification System

The “permit classification system” is based on existing or potential hazards relative to the

confined space. The classification is based upon the characteristics and configuration of

the space, oxygen level, flammability, and toxicity. The classification shall be determined


12/1/2017 25

by the most hazardous condition of entering, working in, and exiting a confined space.

Refer to checklist of requirements for entry.

9.1 Permit Required Confined Space

Permit Required Confined Space (PRCS) is one that presents a situation that may be

immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) or may cause serious injury or illness to an

entrant.

9.1.1 These include, but are not limited to, oxygen deficiency, explosive or flammable

atmospheres, physical hazards, and/or concentrations of toxic substances.

9.1.2 Special requirements for PRCS are as follows:

Two (2) Attendants required outside PRCS at all times. The Entry Supervisor may act

as the second attendant.

One (1) Attendant must maintain communication with entrant at all times (i.e., at

manhole, hatch, opening, etc.);

Second Attendant must remain onsite in the area of the permit required confined

space entry; and

Entrant shall utilize approved safety harness and lifeline/retrieval device.

Common types of PRCS are sewer manholes, sewer lines, Lift Station wells, junction

structures, valve vaults, meter vaults, pumping plant wet wells, vats, pits, large pipe and

ducts, and various types of storage tanks. Situations may arise that make Non-Permit

Confined Space (NPCS) a PRCS.

9.2 Non-Permit Required Confined Space

A Non-Permit Required Confined Space (low hazard) is one in which the potential hazard

would not require any special modification of the work procedure except for the

following:

9.2.1 If no Attendant is used, Central Control will be notified of location, entry time, estimated

working time, and interval for safety checks. They will also be notified when work is

completed.

9.2.2 Entrant will have constant and reliable communications with Central Control (via hand-

held radio).

9.2.3 Entrant will have safe, a stable means of entry and exit (ladder, etc.).


12/1/2017 26

9.2.4 Atmospheric testing, monitoring and ventilation are required.

9.3 Special Consideration Spaces

9.3.1 Any below grade facility or area with restricted access (i.e., ladder access, entry

configuration hazard) that is ventilated full time, has the potential to become a confined

space and shall be entered after a worksite hazard analysis has been conducted. These

sites shall be treated as confined spaces until the hazard has been removed or mitigated

via a JSA conducted by a qualified person.

9.3.2 Trenches and other earthworks are normally not considered confined spaces. Situations

can arise, however, which would make these structures confined spaces. A broken gas

main, force main or sewer main may need to be classified as a confined space if a

determination has been made that atmospheric hazards are present.

9.3.3 Any confined space that cannot be entered according to the strict provisions and

requirements of this procedure can only be entered once a site-specific written

procedure has been developed. This procedure shall include the development of a JSA

and must identify all hazards and the alternative measures of personal protection that

will be utilized to protect the entrants in the confined space. The written procedure

must be reviewed and approved by the Safety, Risk and Emergency Management

Department prior to entry operations.

9.3.4 All sewer manholes within the District’s boundaries shall be considered permit required

confined spaces and entered based off an evaluation of all hazards present.

Facilities with an engineered means of ingress/egress (stairwell into lower levels, entry

points that would allow self-rescue) which may be ventilated full time are to be

considered workplaces with the potential for a hazardous atmosphere. Examples of these

sites would be sewer lift station drywells and wet wells with engineered stairwells and

influent pump station/head works buildings with multiple entry/exit points. These

facilities shall not be considered confined spaces, but shall be evaluated for worker

exposures through a worksite hazard analysis (JSA, SOP) conducted by the department

seeking access.


12/1/2017 27

APPENDIX A

CHECKLIST OF REQUIREMENTS FOR ENTRY,

WORKING IN AND EXITING CONFINED SPACES

CHECK PRCS NPCS

PRE-ENTRY EVALUATION X X

PERMIT X O

ATMOSPHERIC MONITORING X X

MONITORING X X

TRAINING OF PERSONNEL X X

LABELING AND POSTING X X

ISOLATE / LOCK-OUT/BLOCK-OUT X O

PURGE / VENTILATE X X

CLEANING PROCESSES O O

SPECIAL EQUIPMENT / TOOLS X O

SITE SAFETY BRIEFING X X

ATTENDANT X O

COMMUNICATIONS / OBSERVATION X X

NON-ENTRY RESCUE PLAN X X

HEAD PROTECTION X X

HEARING PROTECTION O O

HAND PROTECTION O O

FOOT PROTECTION O O

BODY PROTECTION O O

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION O N/A

TRIPOD X O

HARNESS X O

LIFELINE X O

RESCUE EQUIPMENT X O

RECORDKEEPING X X

X = REQUIRED

O = OPTIONAL – Determination to be made based on entry requirements.


12/1/2017 28

APPENDIX B

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY PERMIT DECISION DIAGRAM


12/1/2017 29

APPENDIX C CONFINED SPACE EVALUATION FORM


12/1/2017 30

APPENDIX D

CONFINED SPACE PERMIT


12/1/2017 31

APPENDIX E

RECORD OF GAS ANALYSIS

Location Date

Gas Read Time (15 Min. Increments)

Worker Taking Read O2 Lel H2s Co

Entrant(S) Name And Employee Number

Time In

Time Out


12/1/2017 32

APPENDIX F

RIVERSIDE COUNTY FIRE DEPARTMENT FACILITIES WITH CONFINED

SPACE RESCUE EQUIPMENT AND TRAINING

Station #2 – Moreno Valley 24935 Hemlock Moreno Valley CA, 92557 (951) 242-3101 Hazardous Materials Station

Station #34 – Winchester

32655 Haddock Street Winchester, CA 92596

(951) 926-6430

Station #73 – Rancho California

27415 Enterprise Circle West

Temecula, CA 92590

(951) 699-0351

Station #76 – Menifee Lakes

29950 Menifee Road

Menifee, CA 92584

(951) 679-2241

Station #97 – Rosetta Canyon

41725 Rosetta Canyon Drive

Lake Elsinore, CA 92530

(951) 245-0420


12/1/2017 33

APPENDIX G

CONFINED SPACE INVENTORY AND LABELING

Inventory

Each department having responsibilities over a District facility shall develop and maintain a

confined space inventory that includes at least the information shown in the table below. Area

refers to the general unit or section of a plant or facility. Location is the specific place where the

confined spaces entry point is located. It may be designated on a map, using Maximo asset

numbers, P&ID reference numbers, name of equipment, or any other specific method.

Description is the type of opening such as manway, manhole, duct, ladder, hatchway, tank top,

etc.

The hazards of each space shall be described by as many of the Hazard Code designations as exist

and/or for which there is a potential to exist in the confined space. The confined space evaluation

form (Appendix B) shall be used as reference and/or this inventory used to aid in filling the

evaluation form in Appendix B. Hazard code 4 has several categories which shall be used as 4a,

4b, 4c, etc.

The Special Considerations column may be used as needed for notes or to describe issues related

to the space, its entry or hazards.

To be included in the inventory:

Tanks, sewers, basins, pits, electrical vaults, piping/valve vaults, large diameter pipe or duct, vats,

vessels, silos, storage bins, hoppers, and ladder entry into pumping plants or subgrade facilities

or other spaces that may have limited means of entry,

# AREA LOCATION DESCRIPTION HAZARD CODE SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS

1 East of Chlorine Contact

West of Fence Line Manhole - Drain 1, 2, & 4c,b

2 Contact Basin Contact Basin Contact Basin # 3 1, 2, & 4c,b

3 Contact Basin Contact Basin Contact Basin # 2 1, 2, & 4c,b

Hazard Codes

1 Contains or has the potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere—toxic or oxygen <19.5%

or > 23.5%.


12/1/2017 34

2 Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant including cave-in of

excavations.

3 Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by

inwardly converging walls or by a floor that slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross-

section.

4 Contains any other recognized serious safety or health hazard.

a Electrical

b Moving parts

c Surface chemical

d Hot temperature or hot surface

e Biological hazard (including microbiological, insect, or animal)

Labeling and Signage

Confined spaces shall be labeled to provide a reasonable warning for workers to keep out unless they have a permit. A sign reading “DANGER -- PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO NOT ENTER” and using an additional sign with similar language when appropriate would satisfy the requirement for a sign. In areas such as aeration basins where confined spaces exist in sub-walking surface in a large area, perimeter signs may be used as well as designated access point such as hatchways or ladder swing gates. Perimeter sign wording shall be considered for each area and shall describe the access point of confined space entry. Example: “All basins below pedestrian grating are considered confined spaces—DO NOT ENTER.” Signs shall be legible and maintained to address weathering or work environments that cause deterioration. Signs shall be placed so they remain visible while confined space operations are under way. Sign placement on the entry doors, covers or hatchways shall be avoided since they would no longer be visible when the doors, covers or hatchways are removed during confined space operations.


12/1/2017 35

APPENDIX H

GAS DETECTOR (MONITOR) MANUFACTURER’S REQUIREMENTS

Industrial Scientific

Ventis MX4

Zero, Calibration, and, Bump testing

Gas detection instruments are potentially life-saving devices. When completed regularly, the

procedures defined below help to maintain proper instrument functionality and enhance

operator safety.

Procedures

Configuration – The configuration process allows qualified personnel to review and adjust a

unit’s settings.

Bump Test – (or “functional test”). Bump testing checks for sensor and alarm functionality. The

installed sensors are briefly exposed to expected concentrations of calibration gases that are

greater than the sensors’ low alarm set points. When one or more sensors “pass” the test, they

are “functional” and the unit will alarm. Each sensor’s “pass” or “fail” result is indicated on the

unit’s display.

Note: a bump test does not measure for sensor accuracy (see “Calibration”).

Zero – Zeroing sets each installed sensor to recognize the ambient air as clean air. If the ambient

air is not truly clean air, any gasses that are present and relevant to the installed sensor types will

be measured and displayed as zero. Readings will be inaccurate until the unit is correctly zeroed

in truly fresh air or with a zero-air cylinder.

Calibration – All sensors gradually degrade over time. This diminishes a sensor’s ability to

measure gas concentrations accurately; however, regular calibrations adjust the instrument to

compensate for this decline in sensitivity. During calibration, the installed sensors are exposed to

expected concentrations of calibration gases and, when needed, the instrument will self-adjust

to ensure the accurate measurement and display of gas concentration values.

Note: When a sensor has degraded beyond an acceptable level, no further adjustment is possible

and the sensor will no longer pass calibration.

Peak Readings – The instrument stores the highest detected gas readings, the “peak readings”

or “peaks”. Bump testing and calibration will often register new peak readings. Therefore, the

clearing of the peak readings should follow each calibration. The instrument operator may also


12/1/2017 36

wish to clear the peak readings after a bump test, before a change in location, or after an alarm

is addressed and cleared.

Note: The peak readings and the data log readings are stored independently of one another;

therefore, clearing the peak reading does not affect the data log. Powering the instrument off or

changing its battery does not affect the peak reading. These checks and balances help promote

operator safety, and serve to contain the peak readings in a “black-box” manner. In the event of

a gas- related incident, this black-box record can be useful to the safety team or a prospective

investigator.

Recommendations

Industrial Scientific Corporation (ISC) minimum frequency recommendations for each procedure

are summarized in the table below. These recommendations are based on field data, safe work

procedures, industry best practices, and regulatory standards to help ensure worker safety.

Industrial Scientific is not responsible for setting safety practices and policies. These policies may

be affected by the directives and recommendations of regulatory groups, environmental

conditions, operating conditions, instrument use patterns and exposure to gas, and other factors.

Procedure ISC Recommended minimum frequency

Configuration Before first use and as needed thereafter.

Calibration Before first use and monthly thereafter.

Bump test Prior to each day’s use.

Between regular calibrations, ISC also recommends a calibration be performed immediately

following each of these incidences: the unit falls, is dropped, or experiences another significant

impact; is exposed to water; fails a bump test; or has been repeatedly

Remote Sampling

Aspirated monitor

In confined space, an air sample should be taken in four-foot (1.22 m) intervals.

Guidelines for using a motorized pump and sampling line

When sampling with a motorized pump and sampling line, Industrial Scientific recommends the

following:

Choose the tubing type based on the target gases. If the target gases are known, use Teflon-

lined tubing when sampling for these gases: chlorine (Cl2), chlorine dioxide (ClO2), hydrogen

chloride (HCl), and volatile organic compounds (VOCs). For other known target gases,

urethane tubing or Teflon-lined tubing may be used.


12/1/2017 37

When the target gases are unknown, use Teflon-lined tubing.

Know the length of the sample line as it is a factor in determining sampling time. A sample

line may consist of tubing, a probe, or a probe and tubing. It should also have a dust filter–

water stop installed at the line’s end that will extend into the sample area. Sample-line length

is defined as the distance from the dust filter–water stop will extend into the sample area.

Sample-line length is defined as the distance from the dust filter–water stop opening to the

point where the line connects to the pump’s inlet. Ensure sample-line length does not exceed

the pump’s maximum draw.

Before and after each air sample, perform a test of the full sampling line.

Use a thumb to block the end of the sampling line at the water-stop opening. This should

cause a pump-fault alarm.

Remove the thumb from the water-stop opening. After the alarm cycle completes, the pump

should resume normal operation.

Note: If a pump fault does not occur, check and correct for cracks or other damage, debris, and

proper installation in these areas: all sampling line connections, the pump’s inlet cap and inlet

barrel, and the dust filter- water stop items at the end of the sampling line and inside the pump

inlet barrel.

Based on sample-line length, calculate the minimum time recommended for the air sample

to reach the instrument’s sensors. As shown below, use a base time of 2 minutes, and add 2

seconds for each 30 cm (1 ‘) of line length. Watch the display screen for gas readings and, if

present, allow them to stabilize to determine the reading.

Minimum sample time for common sample-line lengths

Sample-line length Base time (minutes) + Sample-line-length factor (seconds) = Minimum sample time (mm:ss)

3.05 m (10 ‘)

6.10 m (20 ‘)

2 min

2 min

+

+

(10 x 2 s)

(20 x 2 s)

=

=

02:20

02:40

9.14 m (30 ‘) 2 min + (30 x 2 s) = 03:00

12.10 m (40 ‘) 2 min + (40 x 2 s) = 03:20

15.24 m (50 ‘) 2 min + (50 x 2 s) = 03:40

18.29 m (60 ‘) 2 min + (60 x 2 s) = 04:00

21.34 m (70 ‘) 2 min + (70 x 2 s) = 04:20

24.38 m (80 ‘) 2 min + (80 x 2 s) = 04:40

27.43 m (90 ‘) 2 min + (90 x 2 s) = 05:00

30.48 m (100 ‘) 2 min + (100 x 2 s) = 05:20

Rev:10/23/14

SPECIFICATIONS - DETAILED PROVISIONS

Section 01026 - Schedule of Values

TABLE OF C O N T E N T S

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 1 1.01 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................. 1 1.02 PREPARATION ........................................................................................................................... 1 1.03 SUBMITTAL ................................................................................................................................ 1

PART 2 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 2 2.01 SAMPLE SCHEDULE OF VALUES ................................................................................................ 2

Schedule of Values 01026-1

SECTION 01026

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Preparation, format, and submittal of Schedule of Values.

B. The Schedule of Values will establish unit prices for individual items of work.

C. The Schedule of Values will be the basis for payment of contract work and will be used to establish payment for any “extra work” i.e., work requested which is beyond the scope of the original contract.

1.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare satisfactory Schedule of Values identifying costs of items of work shown in sample included at the end of the Section.

B. Assign unit prices to items of work and calculate total prices, which aggregate the Contract Price. Base unit prices on costs associated with scheduled activities for each item of work. For any bid item broken down into unit prices, Contractor shall verify that the unit cost of the items does not extend beyond two decimal places and that the unit cost when multiplied by the unit quantity equals the exact bid item value with no remainder.

1.03 SUBMITTAL

A. Submit preliminary Schedule of Values at the preconstruction meeting to the District for review and approval. DO NOT SUBMIT THE SCHEDULE OF VALUES WITH YOUR BID PACKAGE.

B. Submit corrected Schedule of Values within ten (10) days upon receipt of reviewed or rejected Schedule of Values for approval by the District.

C. Upon request, support prices with data which will substantiate their correctness.


PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.01 SAMPLE SCHEDULE OF VALUES The following is a sample and acceptable form for Schedule of Values. The District may request additional detail as necessary to adequately represent the Scope of Work. The contractor may provide an additional breakdown of any of the items listed below. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL QUANTITIES AND ITEMS OF WORK PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL.

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

Item No. Qty Unit Description Unit Cost Total Cost

1 1 LS Mobilization and Approved: Bonds, Insurance, Schedule of Values,

Preset $250,000

2 1 LS Provide technical support service for APG Neuros Blowers at MVRWRF, SJVRWRF and TVRWRF

Preset $90,000

MVRWRF Site

3 1 LS Remove, recondition and relocate existing blower NX300 from TVRWRF to MVRWRF and install it at MVRWRF in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum

4 1 LS Install new MCP and programing for blowers control

Lump Sum

5 1 LS Demolish existing exhaust fans, install new exhaust fans and add exhaust louvers in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum

6 1 LS Upgrade existing blower PLC, modify process air control system and make connection to MCC 3MA in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum

7 1 LS Provide Process control and integration service

Lump Sum

8 1 LS Provide Arc Flash/Short Circuit Coordination Study

Preset $63,200



SJVRWRF Site


Preset $60,350

10 1 LS Install one blower and associated piping, valve, appurtenance and control system in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum

11 1 LS Modify existing MCP and programing to all control all blowers

Lump Sum

12 1 LS Install one generator, associated appurtenance and control system in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum

13 1 LS Install one bulk fuel storage tank, piping and control system in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum

14 1 LS Install new generator circuit breaker section and connect new breaker section to existing MS Bus B. Modify MCC 18 and make connections in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum

15 1 LS All associated civil work to install the blower, generator and storage tank.

Lump Sum


Lump Sum

TVRWRF Site


Preset $26,000

18 1 LS Remove three of existing blowers, install three new blowers and associated piping and appurtenance in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum



19 1 LS Install new redundant MCP and modify existing MCP, upgrade PLC hardware

Lump Sum

20 1 LS Install generator, control and appurtenance in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum

21 1 LS Install bulk fuel storage tank, piping and appurtenance in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum

22 1 LS Install 12kV conductors in existing spare conduit in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum

23 1 LS Install new and modify existing process air control system for new blowers, generator and fuel storage system in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum

24 1 LS Demolish existing heating loops system in Blower Building No. 1, piping, appurtenance in accordance with contract drawings and specifications.

Lump Sum

25 1 LS Civil work to install blower, generator, fuel storage, all project components.

Lump Sum


Lump Sum

27 1 LS Recondition existing APG Neuros blower Preset $75,500

TOTAL (MUST EQUAL BID AMOUNT)

DO NOT SUBMIT THE SCHEDULE OF VALUES

WITH YOUR PROPOSAL PACKAGE


01140-1

SECTION 01140

WORK RESTRICTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Construction Requirements and Submittals.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01000 - General Safety Requirements.

1.02 GENERAL CONSTRAINTS ON SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK

A. Contractor shall perform work in a manner that will not impair the operational capabilities of essential elements of the treatment process or reduce the capacity of the entire treatment plant below levels sufficient to treat the quantity of raw wastewater to the quality limitations specified in the discharge permit. Impairing the operational capabilities of the treatment facilities will result in facility discharge permit violations and incur severe environment damages and monetary fines.

B. Operations of process air systems that comply with the facility permit requirements must be maintained at all times.

C. All shutdowns of the existing engine, blower, generator and control systems and they shall conform to the Shutdown Coordination Table on contract drawing.

D. Include costs in bid price for compliance with the specific sequencing limitations and all the constraints, temporary facilities, and the related general factors pertaining to maintain the full operational capacity of the treatment facilities and all the systems.

E. schedule outlining all steps required to assure complete and satisfactory construction, testing, and startup of work in such a manner as to result in the least possible disruption to the operations and staff of the treatment facility and to allow the facility to achieve the finished water quality requirements established by regulations at all times. Address all work sequence and constraints described in this Section.

1.03 INTERRUPTION OF OPERATION

A. Execute the Work while the existing facilities are in operation.

01140-2

B. Indicate required shutdowns of existing facilities or interruptions of existing operations on Progress Schedule. Shutdowns will be permitted to the extent that existing operations of the treatment facilities will not be jeopardized and identified constraints are satisfied, and in conformance with the Shutdown Coordination Table

on contract drawing.

C. Unless specified otherwise in the Shutdown Coordination Table, submit notification of required shutdowns of existing facilities at least 30 days prior to the planned date of shutdown.

D. Contractor shall minimize shutdown durations by thorough advanced planning and coordination with the District. Contractor shall have required equipment, materials, and labor on hand to complete all work within the allowed shutdown durations.

1.04 COMPLIANCE WITH PERMIT

A. Bear the cost of penalties imposed on the District for all discharge violations caused by actions of the Contractor.

B. The TVRWRF is operating under the terms of a Title V air quality permit. The digester gas engines for existing Plant 1 and 2 blowers shall be decommissioned prior to December 31, 2019 to comply Rule 1110.2.

1.05 WORK SEQUENCE AND SHUTDOWN CONSTRAINTS

A. Work sequence and constraints presented do not include all items affecting completion of the Work, but are intended to describe some of the critical events necessary to minimize disruption of the existing facilities and to ensure compliance with permit requirements. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to identify any additional constraints for completion of the Work, and to keep the existing systems fully operational.

B. Comply with shutdown constraints to keep the existing facilities operational as required by the District.

C. Prior to any pipe fabrication or construction, the Contractor shall field verify all dimensions and piping connections. If necessary, the Contractor shall revise the plans or dimensions in order to meet the tie-in time constraint without violating the intent of the design. All the Contractor’s revisions shall be approved by the District prior to any work.

01140-3

D. The Contractor shall complete all possible portions of new construction and/or modifications to existing facilities including testing prior to making any connection to existing facilities. All parts, fabrications, and other components necessary to complete the work during the shutdown and startup must be on the job site prior to final scheduling of the shutdown unless otherwise authorized herein or by the District.

E. The Contractor will be responsible for completion of construction and testing prior to placing into service each item. This shall include all structural, electrical, mechanical, site, and instrumentation components of a process. Testing requirements are identified in the Drawings and Specifications.

F. Process air system will be required to maintain operation during the work. All shutdowns shall be coordinated with District operations staff and performed by the District. The Contractor shall submit a detailed work plan and sequencing for each shutdown and receive the District’s approval at least 30 days prior to the planned date of shutdown. For each approved shutdown, the Contractor shall submit a written confirmation notification 14 days in advance of the proposed shutdown to the District. The Contractor shall have all materials required for the shutdown on-site, and notify the District at least 48-hours in advance before the scheduled shutdown. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, shutdowns shall only occur during low-flow periods between the hours of 1:00 a.m. and 6:00 a.m. Where working hours conflict with hours allowed for construction activities, the Contractor shall submit a request for approval from the District for modified construction activity hours. The types of plant shutdowns are described herein and similarly shown in the shutdown coordination table included in the contract drawings and Special Condition SC-19.

G. General Construction Sequence, Shutdown Constraints, and Time Limitations: The Contractor‘s CPM schedule shall describe the sequence of construction and shall comply with all constraints and limitations described in this Section. The Contractor shall identify potential impacts to operations and submit to the District details regarding the method of construction and construction sequence for approval.

H. The Contractor shall be responsible for any fines/penalties from regulatory agencies resulting from the Contractor’s activities.

1.06 UTILITIES

A. Maintain electrical, water, sanitary facilities, and other utilities within existing facilities in service. Provide temporary utilities when necessary.

01140-4

B. Provide advance notice to and use services of Underground Services Alert (U.S.A.) for location and marking of underground utilities operated by utility agencies other than the District.

1.07 OTHER CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS

Contractor shall conduct the Work so as to cause minimum of interference with the work of other contractors, and shall cooperate with other contractors to allow continued safe access to their respective portions of the site, as required to perform work under their respective Contracts. The Contractor shall maintain lay down areas and construction areas such that they do not interfere with nearby projects. Periodic redirection of the Contractor’s traffic routes and lay down areas by the District may be required to facilitate operations or maintenance activities.

A. The following lists current District projects that may be in construction concurrently with this project: 1. MVRWRF Site:

a. TEPS MCC Replacement 2. TVRWRF Site

a. Plant 1 and Plant 2 Air Line Replacement

The TVRWRF Plant 1 and Plant 2 Air Line Replacement project will replace existing aeration connected to the Blower Building No.1 and connect new Plant 3 process air system to existing Plant 1 and Plant 2 process air system. Prior to completion of TVRWRF Plant 1 and Plant 2 Air Line Replacement, no construction work that will reduce process air supply by existing Plant 1 and Plant 2 Blowers shall be allowed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. Maintain overall coordination of execution of work.

B. Obtain schedules from subcontractors and suppliers and assume responsibility for correctness.

C. Incorporate schedules from subcontractors and suppliers into Progress Schedule to plan for and comply with work, sequencing, and shutdown constraints.

01140-5

3.02 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Where proper execution of the Work depends upon work by others, inspect and promptly report discrepancies and defects.

3.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EXECUTION OF WORK

A. Locate temporary facilities in a manner that minimizes interference to District's operation and maintenance personnel.

B. Provide submittals on proposed temporary electrical and instrumentation components necessary to maintain existing facility and process operations.

3.04 WORK SEQUENCE

A. General sequence of work for construction of the Blower Electrification project is provided below. This is one possible sequence of construction and shall be the basis for the Contractor’s bid. The general sequence of work does not include all steps or activities that the Contractor must perform for a complete, tested, ready to operate process air system at the MVRWRF, the SJVRWRF, and the TVRWRF.

The Contractor shall develop a detailed sequence of work that incorporates the general sequence of work provided. The Contractor may propose modifications to the general sequence of work. Contractor shall submit to the District the detailed sequence of work for review and approval at a minimum of 30 calendar days prior to commencing the Work. The District will have the option to alter or modify the Contractor’s proposed sequence of work. The Contractor shall be responsible for the means and methods of construction and conform to the approved detailed sequence of work.

B. The District‘s general sequence of construction is as follows:

1. Ensure that all submittals have been approved and all materials for the Work are on site and verified by the District.

2. For work to be completed at the MVRWRF: a) Construct, modify, and replace piping, equipment parts, and

appurtenance which will not interfere with plant operation and do not require shutdown.

b) Modify and make connections to MCC-3MA as indicated on contract drawings and as required.

c) Modify and make connections to MCC-13M as indicated on contract drawings and as required.

01140-6

d) Upgrade the PLC as indicated on tract drawings and as required in the existing Plant 2 Blower Master Control Panel (MCP).

e) Install the third NX300 at the Plant Blower Building (Relocated from TVRWRF and refurbished) and tie in of the plant process air system.

f) Demonstrate that the process air system is fully functional as required per Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

3. For work to be completed at SJVRWRF:

a) Install, modify, and replace equipment, parts, piping, and appurtenance which will not interfere with plant operation and do not require plant shutdown.

b) Install one new blower and tie in of the new blower to existing plant process air system.

c) Install new generator circuit breaker section and connect new breaker section to existing MS Bus B. Connect new generator conductors to new generator circuit breaker.

d) Modify MCC-18 and make connections as indicated on contract drawings and as required.

e) Connect new bulk storage fuel tank and day tank to existing fuel piping system.

f) Install a new circuit breaker in existing Switchgear SGB and connect new conductors from new Aeration Blower No. 4 to new breaker.

g) Demonstrate that the new blower and generator fully functional per Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

4. For work to be completed at the TVRWRF:

a) Prior to the completion of plant 1 and Plant 2 Air Line Replacement Project, no work causing reduction in process air supply shall be allowed.

b) Install, modify, and replace equipment, parts, piping, and appurtenance which will not interfere with plant operation and do not require plant shutdown.

c) Remove existing blower No. 3 and install first new Neuros NX600 in east bay and tie in of plant process air system to provide air to Plant 1 and Plant 2 aeration basins.

d) Remove existing blower No. 1, install second new Neuros NX600 in west bay and tie in of plant process air system to provide air to Plant 1 and Plant 2 aeration basins.

01140-7

e) Remove existing blower No. 2, install third new Neuros NX600 in middle bay/commission and tie in of plant process air system to provide air to Plant 1 and Plant 2.

f) Installation of new 12kV conductors in existing spare conduit and connect new 12kV conductors to connect new 12kV conductors between the existing PMH-10 switch and the new pad mounted switch to supply the new Plant 1/2 Blower System (MSB-5).

g) Connect the new 12kV conductors to the existing (Spare) circuit breaker identified to supply the new Plant 1/2 Blower System (MSB-5).

h) Connect new bulk storage fuel tank and day tank to existing fuel piping system.

i) Demonstrate that the new blowers and generator fully functional per Equipment Testing and Facility Startup.

5. Complete all remaining contracted work, any punch-list items, and

demobilize.

END OF SECTION

01140-8


Rev: 01/28/10


Section 01381 - Pre-Construction Audio Video Recording Above Ground Facilities

C O N T E N T S

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 1

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK ....................................................................................................................... 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................... 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 1

3.01 COLOR AUDIO VIDEO SURVEY .................................................................................................. 1 3.02 AUDIO AND VIDEO .................................................................................................................... 2

Pre-Construction Audio Video Recording Section 01381 – 1

SECTION 01381

PRE-CONSTRUCTION AUDIO VIDEO RECORDING ABOVE GROUND FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment to furnish color audio video recording of the project site as specified herein.

B. Furnish to the DISTRICT an original and one copy of a continuous color audio video recording of the entire area within fifty (50) feet of the construction area. The recording shall be taken prior to any construction activity.

C. The DISTRICT reserves the right to reject the audio video recording because of poor quality, unintelligible audio, or uncontrolled pan or zoom. Any recording rejected by the DISTRICT shall be rerecorded at no cost to the DISTRICT. Under no circumstances shall construction begin until the DISTRICT has received and accepted the audio video DVD(s).

D. The recording shall be performed by a qualified, established audio video recording firm knowledgeable in construction practices which has a minimum of one year of experience in the implementation of established inspection procedures.

E. The audio video recording firm shall submit three letters of recommendation from municipalities, and/or engineering firms indicating previous experience and ability to perform the work described in this contract. Data substantiating qualifications must be submitted and accepted prior to performing the survey.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(NONE THIS SECTION)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 COLOR AUDIO VIDEO SURVEY

A. Furnish a continuous color audio-video recording of the entire area within fifty (50) feet of construction.

Pre-construction Audio Video Recording Section 01381 – 2

B. Complete coverage shall include all surface features within 50' of the work area to be utilized by CONTRACTOR and shall be supported by appropriate audio description made simultaneously with video coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, all existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, ditches, roadways, landscaping, trees, culverts, headwalls, and retaining walls, equipment, structures, pavements, manholes, vaults, handrails, etc. located within the aforementioned work zone. Video coverage shall extend to the maximum height of all structures within this zone.

C. All recording shall be done during times of good visibility. No recording shall be done during periods of visible precipitation, or when more than ten percent of the ground area is covered with standing water, unless otherwise authorized by Owner.

3.02 AUDIO AND VIDEO

A. Contractor shall furnish continuous color, audio-video DVD(s) of professional quality.

B. Each DVD shall begin with the Owner's name, Contract name and number, CONTRACTOR's name, date and location information such as street name, direction of travel, viewing side, etc.

C. Information appearing on the DVD must be continuous and run simultaneously by computer generated transparent digital information. No editing or overlaying of information at a later date will be acceptable.

D. Digital information to appear in the upper left corner shall be as follows: 1. Name of CONTRACTOR

2. Day, date and time

3. Name of Project & Specification Number

E. Time must be accurate and continuously generated.

F. Written documentation must coincide with the information on the DVD so as to make easy retrieval of locations sought for at a later date.

G. The video system shall have the capability to transfer individual frames of video electronically into hard copy prints or photographic negatives.

H. Audio shall be recorded at the same time as the video recording and shall have the same information as on the viewing screen. Special commentary shall be given for unusual conditions of buildings, sidewalks and curbing, foundations, trees and shrubbery, structures, equipment, pavement, etc.

Pre-Construction Audio Video Recording Section 01381 – 3

I. All DVDs and boxes shall bear labels with the following information:

1. DVD Number

2. Owner's Name

3. Date of Recording

4. Project Name and Number

5. Location and Standing Limit of DVD

J. Prior to commencement of audio video recording, CONTRACTOR shall notify the Engineer in writing when and where the audio video recording will begin. The Engineer may provide a designated representative to accompany and oversee coverage of all recording operations. Audio video recording completed without an Engineering representative present will be unacceptable unless specifically authorized by the Engineer.


Pre-construction Audio Video Recording Section 01381 – 4


Rev: 12/09/13

SPECIFICATIONS - DETAILED PROVISIONS Section 01430 - Maintenance Manual Requirement Section

C O N T E N T S

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 1

1.01 DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................................. 1 1.02 MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................... 1 1.03 MAINTENANCE MANUAL - GENERAL ........................................................................................ 1 1.04 MANUALS FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS ............................................................................. 4 1.05 MANUALS FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES ............................................................................... 6 1.06 MANUAL SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................... 7 1.07 SCHEDULE OF MANUALS .......................................................................................................... 8 1.08 MAINTENANCE SUMMARY ....................................................................................................... 9

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) ..................................................................................................... 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) .................................................................................................... 10 MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM

Maintenance Manual Requirement Section Section 01430 – 1

SECTION 01430

MAINTENANCE MANUAL REQUIREMENT SECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Maintenance Operation: As used in the Maintenance Summary Form is defined to mean any routine operation required to ensure satisfactory performance and longevity of equipment. Examples of typical maintenance operations are lubrication, belt tensioning, adjustment of pump packing glands, and routine adjustments.

1.02 MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS

A. Maintenance Manuals shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Parts books

2. Service / Shop manuals

3. Performance curve

4. Specifications

5. Warranty info

B. Manuals for equipment and systems shall be prepared by equipment or system manufacturer only.

1.03 MAINTENANCE MANUAL - GENERAL

A. Prepare data in the form and format of an instructional manual for use by DISTRICT's personnel.

B. Manual Format: 1. Size: 8½ inches by 11 inches.

2. Paper: 20-pound minimum, white for typed pages.

3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten.


4. Drawings:

a) Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b) Reduced to 8½ inches by 11 inches, or 11 inches by 17 inches folded to 8½

inches by 11 inches. c) Where reduction is impractical, fold and place in 8½ inches by 11 inches

envelopes bound in text. d) Suitably identify Specification section, product type Drawings, and

envelopes.

5. Three-hole punch data for binding and composition; arrange printing so that punched holes do not obliterate data.

6. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment and provide with heavy section dividers with numbered plastic index tabs.

7. Provide each manual with title page, and typed table of contents with consecutive page numbers. Place contents of entire set, identified by volume number, in each binder.

8. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, VOLUME NO.," if applicable, and list: a) Project title. b) Designate the system or equipment for which it is intended. c) Identity of separate structure as applicable. d) Identity of equipment number and Specification section.

9. Assemble and bind material in same order as specified, as much as possible.

10. Prepare material in manuals suitable for reproduction, copy clarity, and quality equal to original. Photocopying of material will be acceptable, except for material containing photographs.

C. Binders:

1. Preliminary Manuals: Heavy paper covers.

2. Final Manuals: Commercial quality, substantial, permanent, three-ring binders

with durable, cleanable, plastic binders.

D. Table of contents neatly typewritten, arranged in a systematic order:


1. CONTRACTOR, name of responsible principal, address, and telephone number.

2. List of each product required to be included, indexed to content of each volume.

3. List with Each Product: Name, address, and telephone number of Subcontractor,

Supplier, installer, and maintenance contractor, as appropriate. a) Identify area of responsibility of each. b) Provide local source of supply for parts and replacement.

4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying numbers or symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.

E. Product Data:

1. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to specific product.

2. Clearly annotate each sheet to:

a) Identify specific product or part installed. b) Identify data applicable to installation. c) Delete references to inapplicable information.

F. Drawings: Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:

1. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.

2. Control and flow diagrams.

3. Coordinate drawings with Project record documents to assure correct illustration

of completed installation.

4. Do not use Project record documents as maintenance manual drawings.

G. Instructions and Procedures: Within text, as required to supplement product data. 1. Handling, storage, maintenance during storage, assembly, erection, installation,

adjusting, testing, operating, shutdown in emergency, troubleshooting, maintenance, interface, and as may otherwise be required.

2. Organize in a consistent format under separate heading for each different procedure.


3. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.

4. Provide information sheet for DISTRICT's personnel, including: a) Proper procedures in the event of failure. b) Instances that might affect the validity of warranties or Bonds.

H. Electronic Format:

1. CD in Smart PDF format

1.04 MANUALS FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. Provide an operation and maintenance manual for each item of equipment or system as specified in the individual Specification sections in the quantity listed in Article MANUAL SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS.

B. Content for each unit (or common units) and system, as appropriate, complete including controls, accessories, and appurtenances. 1. Description of Unit and Component Parts:

a) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b) Performance curves, engineering data, nameplate data, and tests. c) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

2. Operating Procedures: a) Startup, break-in, routine, and normal operating instructions. b) Test procedures and results of factory tests where required. c) Regulation, control, stopping, and emergency instructions. d) Shutdown instructions for both short and extended durations. e) Summer and winter operating instructions, as applicable. f) Safety precautions. g) Special operating instructions. h) Installation instructions.

3. Maintenance and Overhaul Procedures: a) Final Maintenance Summaries as accepted by ENGINEER for respective unit

or system. b) Routine operations. c) Guide to troubleshooting. d) Disassembly, repair, and reassembly. e) Alignment, adjusting, and checking.


4. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, detailed assembly drawings

showing each part with part numbers and sequentially numbered parts list, and diagrams required for maintenance. Preventive maintenance and overhaul instructions. a) Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts and ordering instructions.

5. Service and Lubrication Schedule: a) Instructions and diagrams showing grease/oil points. b) Recommended type, grade, and temperature range of lubricants and

frequency of lubrication. c) Include list of lubricants required.

6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.

7. Description of operation sequence by control manufacturer.

8. List of electrical relay settings, and control and alarm contact settings.

9. Electrical interconnection wiring diagram, including control and lighting systems.

10. As-installed control diagrams by control manufacturer.

11. Results of field functional and performance tests as required.

12. As-installed, color-coded piping diagrams.

13. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve.

14. Original manufacturer's recommended spare parts list, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

15. Other data as required under individual Specification sections.

C. Content for each electric or electronic item or system, as appropriate: 1. Description of Unit and Component Parts:

a) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b) Performance curves, engineering data, nameplate data, and tests. c) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.


d) Interconnection wiring diagrams, including all control and lighting systems.

2. Circuit Directories of Panelboards: a) Electrical service. b) Controls. c) Communications.

3. As-installed, color-coded, wiring diagrams.

4. Operating Procedures: a) Routine and normal operating instructions. b) Sequences required. c) Safety precautions. d) Special operating instructions.

5. Maintenance Procedures: a) Routine operations. b) Guide to troubleshooting. c) Adjustment and checking. d) List of relay settings, control and alarm contact settings.

6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions.

7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the Specifications. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of DISTRICT's personnel.

D. Additional Requirements for Operating and Maintenance Data: See individual

Specification sections.

1.05 MANUALS FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Provide an operation and maintenance manual for materials and finishes as specified in the individual Specification sections in quantity listed in Article MANUAL SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS herein.


B. Content for Architectural Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products:

a) Catalog number, size, and composition. b) Color and texture designations. c) Information required for reordering special-manufactured products.

2. Instruction for Care and Maintenance: a) Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b) Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to

product. c) Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Content for Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products:

1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products:

a) Applicable standards. b) Chemical composition. c) Details of installation.

2. Instructions for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

1.06 MANUAL SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Manuals for Equipment and Systems 1. Preliminary Manuals: Deliver 1 hard copy plus 3 CD’s in Smart PDF format at the

same time or prior to the date equipment, system subsystem, or component arrives at Project site or offsite storage. Include copy of warranties, Bonds, and service agreements if specified. No partial payments will be made for equipment or systems on hand or installed until preliminary manuals have been submitted. a) ENGINEER will review and determine adequacy of content, organization,

quality, and fulfillment of requirements of the Contract Documents. b) Disposition: In accordance with Section F-29, Equipment and Material

Items, under General Conditions. (i) The EN-14 Shop Drawing submittal transmittal shall provide the

required corrections needed, or acceptance.


c) If unacceptable, resubmit 1 hard copy plus 3 CD’s in Smart PDF format for ENGINEER’s review.

d) The preliminary O&M Manual must be accepted with no comments not less than 30 days prior to equipment or system field testing or startup.

2. Final Manuals: Submit 1 hard copy plus 3 CDs in Smart PDF format.

a) ENGINEER will compare final manuals with accepted preliminary manuals.

(i) If identical, or otherwise acceptable, CONTRACTOR will be so notified. (ii) If rejected, the hard copy will be returned to CONTRACTOR for

revision; or the hard copy will be retained by DISTRICT and the necessary revision data will be requested from CONTRACTOR, at DISTRICT’s option. 3 CDs shall be revised and resubmitted.

b) The final manual shall include the following information: (i) Field functional and performance test results, if required, signed by

manufacturer's authorized representative. (ii) Final Maintenance Summary Forms as accepted by ENGINEER. (iii) Manufacturer Field Service Report complete and certified by

manufacturer's authorized representative. (iv) Any revisions found desirable during instruction of DISTRICT'S

personnel. (v) Revised table of contents, as applicable.

c) The final manual shall be bound in 3-ring binders. It shall include each individual manual and as many 3-ring binders as required to make a complete manual. Individual manuals shall be inserted into each binder chronologically by Specification Section Number. Each binder, or Volume of the final manual, shall have a complete table of contents.

1.07 SCHEDULE OF MANUALS

A. Prepare equipment and system operation and maintenance manuals for each of the following:

Specification Section

Type of Equipment or System

11183 Dual Core High Speed Direct-Drive Centrifugal Blower 11184 Single Core High Speed Direct-Drive Centrifugal Blower 15101 Butterfly Valves 15106 Valve Operators and Electric Valve Actuators 15170 Low Voltage Electric Motors 15590 Fans 16322 Medium Voltage Transformers – Liquid Filled Pad Mounted 16346 Medium Voltage Vacuum Circuit Breaker Switchgear – 15kV 16360 Medium Voltage Pad Mounted Switchgear – 15kV 16426 Low Voltage Switchboards


16440 Disconnect and Manual Transfer Switches 16461 Dry Type Distribution Transformers 16470 Panelboards 16481 Individual Motor Controllers 16500 Lighting 16620 Packaged Engine Generator Systems 17670 Level Switches (Suspended Float Type) 17740 Ultrasonic Liquid Level Measurement Systems 17760 Pressure Indicating Transmitters 17770 Temperate Indicating Transmitters

1.08 MAINTENANCE SUMMARY

A. Fill out and complete in the order and format of the Maintenance Summary Form bound at the end of this section and described below. 1. Each Maintenance Summary may take as many pages as required.

2. Use only 8½ inches by 11 inches size paper.

3. Use typewriter or electronic printing.

B. Compile an individual Maintenance Summary for each equipment item, respective unit or system, and for components or subunits. 1. Include detailed lubrication instructions and diagrams showing points to be

greased or oiled; recommend type, grade, and temperature range of lubricants and frequency of lubrication.

2. All spare parts data to be consistent with manufacturer's Bill of Materials/Parts List furnished in O&M manuals. "Unit" is the unit of measure for ordering the part, e.g., each, lot of 3, box of 100, etc. The term "Quantity" is the number of units recommended. The term "Unit Cost" is the purchase price of a unit at the time the Equipment Data Form is completed.

C. Preliminary Summaries: Submit 1 hard copy plus 3 CDs in Smart PDF format with, but as

a separate submission from, respective operation and maintenance manual. 1. ENGINEER will review and provide EN-14 Shop Drawing Submittal Transmittal with

comments whether accepted or rejected.

2. The manufacturer's standard form will not be an acceptable substitute.

D. Final Summaries: Final copies shall be included in the preliminary O&M Manual; refer to part 1.06.A.2).


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)


MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM

PROJECT CONTRACT NO. 1. EQUIPMENT ITEM 2. MANUFACTURER 3. EQUIPMENT/TAG NUMBER(S) 4. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS) 5. NAMEPLATE DATA (hp, voltage, speed, etc.) 6. MANUFACTURER'S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE

a. Name Telephone No.

b. Address 7. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

Maintenance Operation Comments

Lubricant Frequency

(If Applicable)

List briefly each maintenance operation required and refer to specific information in manufacturer's standard maintenance manual, if applicable. (Reference to manufacturer's catalog or sales literature is not acceptable.)

List required frequency of each maintenance operation.

Refer by symbol to lubricant list required.

8. LUBRICANT LIST

Reference Symbol Shell

Standard Oil Gulf Arco

Or Equal

List symbols used in No. 7 above.

List equivalent lubricants, as distributed by each manufacturer for the specific use recommended.

9 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS FOR OWNER'S INVENTORY

Part No. Description Unit Qty

Unit Cost

Note: Identify parts provided by this contract with two asterisks.

Rev: 07/94

SPECIFICATIONS - DETAILED PROVISIONS Section 02050 - Demolition and Salvage

C O N T E N T S

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 1

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK ....................................................................................................................... 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................... 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 1

3.01 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION ......................................................................................................... 1 3.02 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT DEMOLITION .................................................................................... 1 3.03 SITEWORK DEMOLITION. .......................................................................................................... 1 3.04 SALVAGE .................................................................................................................................... 1

Demolition and Salvage Section 02050 – 1

SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION AND SALVAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section covers the demolition of existing structures, equipment and sitework, and the salvage of existing materials and equipment as set forth herein.

B. All areas and facilities within the boundaries of the property described in the Notice Inviting Bids are to be demolished as described in Section 3, following. Contractor's work shall not create inconvenience to adjacent property owners, nor shall any adjacent property be disturbed during this contract. Blasting will not be permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(NONE FOR THIS SECTION)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 STRUCTURE DEMOLITION All structures within the boundaries of District-owned property shall be demolished and the debris shall be removed from the jobsite.

3.02 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT DEMOLITION All piping and equipment on the user's side of the respective utility purveyor's meters shall be removed and shall become the property of the Contractor. Contractor is responsible to make proper arrangements with each affected utility prior to disconnection.

3.03 SITEWORK DEMOLITION. Sitework demolition shall include the removal of all concrete, slabs on grade, driveways, sheds, trees and shrubs within the property boundary.

3.04 SALVAGE

A. All existing materials and equipment shall be removed by the Contractor, shall become the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed from the jobsite.

Demolition and Salvage Section 02050 – 2

B. Removal and salvage of any item of equipment or facility shall include removal and salvage of all accessories, piping, wiring, supports and all other appurtenances.

C. Equipment need to be salvaged at TVRWRF: 1) All EIM actuators and the one Limitorque 2) Air intake flow meters and display 1, 2 and 3 3) Any foxboro meters 4) Air Intake filter housings


Rev: 04/22/15


Section 02221 - Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting

C O N T E N T S PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 1

1.01 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................. 1 1.02 STRUCTURE PROTECTION ......................................................................................................... 2 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS ....................................................................................................................... 2 1.04 GUARANTEE .............................................................................................................................. 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................... 3 2.01 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................ 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 4 3.01 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................................ 4 3.02 PREPARATION ........................................................................................................................... 4 3.03 CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................................ 4 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .......................................................................................................... 9

Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting Section 02221 – 1

SECTION 02221

TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Trench, backfill, and compact as specified herein and as needed for installation of underground utilities associated with the work.

B. Verification of Existing Conditions. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine the site of the work and to make all investigation necessary, both surface and sub-surface, to determine the character of materials to be encountered and all other existing conditions affecting the work.

C. Lines, Grades and Measures. All lines and grades will be established by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall provide him with such assistance and materials as may be required. The Contractor shall carefully preserve all survey stakes and reference points. SHOULD ANY STAKES OR POINTS BE REMOVED OR DESTROYED BY ANY ACT OF THE CONTRACTOR OR HIS EMPLOYEES THEY MAY BE RESET AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.

D. Compliance with Regulations. The Contractor shall familiarize himself, and comply with all applicable federal, state, county and municipal rules and regulations pertaining to sanitation, fire protection, and safety.

E. Contractor's Equipment. The Contractor shall provide such modern plant and equipment as may be necessary in the opinion of the Engineer to perform in a satisfactory and acceptable manner, and in accordance with the specifications, all the work required of the Contractor.

F. Representatives for Emergencies. The Contractor shall file with the District a written list giving the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of at least two (2) of his representatives who can be contacted at any time in case of emergency. The representatives shall be fully authorized and equipped to correct unsafe or inconvenient conditions on short notice. The Contractor shall promptly notify the District of all changes in the listing.

G. Water Supply. The Contractor may obtain water for work under this specification from the sources as stated in the Special Provisions and Requirements of this specification.


1.02 STRUCTURE PROTECTION

A. Contract Drawings. The drawings identify the various pipes, conduits, and other existing utility structures as they are supposed to exist in construction areas, but no error or omission on said drawings shall be construed to relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of protecting any such pipe, conduit, or other existing utility structures. When deemed necessary by the Engineer, revisions of the contract drawings and additional detailed drawings will be issued to the Contractor during the progress of the work.

B. Notification of Underground Service Alert of Southern California. When performing underground work, the Contractor shall call Underground Service Alert (USA), the one-call underground facility locating service two (2) working days prior to making an excavation. Contractor shall be responsible for such notification of sub-contractor's work, or shall require sub-contractor to assume this responsibility.

C. Operation of Utilities. No District valves, or appurtenances of other utility facilities shall be operated by the Contractor without approval and/or instruction from the District or the utility, as appropriate.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Safeguarding Excavations and Property. Excavations shall be adequately shored and braced so that the earth will not slide or settle and so that all existing improvements of any kind will be fully protected from damage. Any damage resulting from a lack of adequate shoring and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall affect all necessary repairs or reconstructions at the Contractor's own expense as directed by the Engineer and shall bear all other expenses resulting from such damage.

B. Safety Measures. Each bid proposal submitted under these specifications for the construction of a pipeline, sewer, sewage disposal system, boring and jacking pits, or similar trenches or open excavations, or the use of such a trench or open excavation, shall include in appropriate bid items for such work the costs necessary to provide adequate sheeting, shoring, and bracing, or equivalent method for the protection of life or limb, which shall conform to applicable safety orders, including the Construction Safety Orders of the California Division of Industrial Safety, in accordance with the requirements of the California Occupational Safety and Health Act.


1.04 GUARANTEE The Contractor hereby guarantees that the entire work constructed by him under the contract will fully meet all the requirements thereof as to quality of workmanship, and of materials furnished by him.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Select Backfill Material, and Special Bedding and Backfill. Select backfill material shall be selected from the excavated material or imported when not available from the excavated material. In either case, it shall be provided at the Contractor's expense, and shall be included in the costs proposed for pipeline installation on the bidding sheets. Provide soil materials free from organic matter and deleterious substances, containing no rocks over 3" in greatest dimension, and with no more than 15% of the rocks over 2" in their greatest dimension. Where called for on the plans or in these specifications, and not covered by a separate bid item, special bedding or backfill shall be included in pipeline construction costs on the bidding sheets. Where required by the governing agency or by the District to meet compaction requirements of these specifications, or requirements of these specifications for bedding or for select granular backfill, special bedding or imported backfill and disposal of excavated spoil shall be provided at the Contractor's expense. The requirements for special bedding and backfill at the Contractor's expense as described herein as a part of the Special Conditions or as shown on the Contract Drawings shall supersede and take precedence over any and all other requirements for measurement and/or payment for special bedding or backfill found elsewhere in these specifications. Bedding is defined herein to include sand, rock or concrete base, cradle, or encasement. Backfill material is defined herein to include backfill for both trench backfill and pipe bedding (or pipe zone backfill). Special bedding or backfill not called for on the plans or in these specifications, but required by the Engineer over and above the requirements of this specification, shall be constructed at additional cost, at prices reflecting current material costs as evidenced by paid vouchers, plus 50% to cover all costs of installation and overhead.


The encounter of ground water not anticipated in engineering reports made available for this contract, and the required over-excavation and construction of a stable base as determined necessary by the Engineer shall be considered over and above the requirements of this specification, and the required base shall be paid for at the above stipulated prices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WEATHER LIMITATIONS Excavating and grading shall be performed only when the weather conditions do not adversely affect the quality of the finished product. Any graded or excavated areas that are damaged by the effect of rain, or other weather conditions, during any phase of the construction, shall be re-excavated, regraded, and recompacted to conform to the herein specified requirements, without additional cost to the District.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Control of Water. The Contractor shall acquire such permits and take such measures as may be required, and shall furnish, install, and operate such pumps or other devices as may be necessary to remove any seepage, storm water, or sewage that may be found or may accumulate in the excavations during the progress of the work. The Contractor shall keep all excavations entirely free from water at all times during the construction of the work and until the Engineer gives permission to cease pumping. He shall keep the complete work reasonably free from accumulations of water and sewage, and shall free it entirely at such times as may be required by the Engineer for inspection or other purposes. Any accumulated water or sewage thus pumped shall be disposed of in accordance with good practice and local ordinances. The Contractor shall provide an adequate dewatering system for the control of surface and groundwater seepage into the excavations as may be required during the construction period. The proposed plan of this dewatering system shall be submitted to the Engineer for concept approval prior to the installation of the system.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Excavation. The Contractor shall perform all excavation necessary or required for the construction of the facilities covered by these specifications. Excavations may be performed by either hand or machine methods and shall be of sufficient size to provide adequate space for working in accordance with safety regulations


and practice and the Contract Drawings. Excavations shall include the removal and disposal of all materials of whatever nature and quantity including water, rock, decomposed granite, or any other type of soil or material, subsurface obstructions and also overhead obstructions which may interfere with the operation of equipment used on the work, for no additional compensation. Excavation for foundations shall be made only after construction of subgrade, as hereinafter described, has been completed. Over excavation for foundations shall be filled with concrete. 1. Trench Excavation. Unless otherwise specified in the Special Conditions or on the

Contract Drawings, pipeline trenches and clearances shall be per Standard Drawing SB-158 for sewer pipeline installations and B-286B for water pipeline installations. The sides of the trench shall be parallel to and at equal distance on each side of the centerline of the pipe The maximum length of trench which shall be opened or partially opened at any one time shall be limited to 500' for sewer lines and one-half mile for water pipelines, except where governed by other agencies or approved by the Engineer. Bell holes or depressions shall be dug by hand at the proper locations of sufficient size to adequately work the joints, but no larger than is required. When the trench is excavated to the line and grade as shown on the drawings, and the bedding material encountered is rock, the trench shall be excavated an additional depth of at least 4" below the grade for the bottom of the pipe, and the bottom of the trench shall be refilled with approved material, moistened and compacted by tamping or by other approved method to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Where ground water is encountered and the native material does not afford a solid foundation for pipe subgrade as specified above, the Contractor shall excavate to such depth below subgrade as determined necessary by the Engineer and shall construct a stable base by placing crushed rock bedding upon which subgrade can be prepared. Crushed rock for bedding shall be one and one-half inch (1 1/2") maximum size. When the trench has been inadvertently excavated below the designed grade, at the Contractor's expense, the bottom of the trench shall be refilled with approved material, well compacted into place in an approved manner and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond the limits of normal excavation lines in order to remove boulders or other interfering objects, backfill the voids remaining, as directed by the engineer but not less than 90% of maximum compaction. This work is to be done at no extra cost to owner.


Where trenching occurs in existing turf areas, remove turf in sections and keep roots damp. Replace turf upon completion of backfilling.

2. Cover. Provide minimum trench depth indicated below to maintain a minimum cover over the top of each listed utility, unless otherwise indicated in specifications or on the drawings. a) 1. Water lines: 48" b) 2. Gas lines: 24" c) 3. Electrical lines: 36"

3. Excavated Materials. Shall be piled neatly along the side of the trench and adjacent to manhole excavations in such a manner as to be of as little inconvenience as possible to the public traffic or the occupants of the adjacent property. Through all cultivated areas, topsoil removed from excavations shall be replaced as backfill in the uppermost part of the excavation to a depth as it existed previous to excavation, not exceeding 18". Where topsoil replacement is required, excavated topsoil shall be stored separately from other materials and in general shall be replaced as backfill in the same parcel of land from which it came.

4. Disposal of Excavated Materials. Insofar as space is available in the right-of-way, such space may be used for temporary storage of excavated material, to be used for backfill, provided that no material shall be stored or deposited in violation of any ordinance or regulation prohibiting the filling or obstructing of water courses in drainage channels. All materials removed from the excavations in excess of that stored temporarily as above specified shall be immediately hauled away and used in backfilling elsewhere, or, if not used, shall be disposed of by the Contractor. The disposal area shall be acquired by the Contractor. No materials shall be disposed of either temporarily or permanently on privately or publicly owned property unless the Contractor shall first obtain permission therefore from the owner or agency concerned. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence to the Engineer that such consent has been obtained and shall be responsible for all damages and claims that may arise in connection therewith.

5. Bracing and Shoring. The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain such bracing and shoring as may be required to support the side of the excavations for the proper protection of workmen, to facilitate the work and prevent damage to the pipes and manholes being constructed, and to prevent damage to adjacent structures or facilities. Upon completion of the work, all bracing and shoring shall be removed unless otherwise directed or permitted by the Engineer.


B. Fill, Backfill and Grading shall include all scarifying, moistening, compacting, and other

manipulations of the soil necessary to obtain the required densities, cross sections, lines, grades and surface finish indicated or specified. Backfill shall not be placed in trenches or excavations until the pipelines and structures in the particular section involved have been inspected and approved for backfilling by the Engineer. All excavations outside the completed pipelines and structures shall be backfilled with compacted material to the level of the original ground surface unless otherwise shown on the drawings or ordered by the Engineer. The materials used for backfill shall be imported, selected material, or approved selected excavated materials and shall be placed as directed by the Engineer. All materials placed within 6" of the pipe or structure shall be free from rocks or boulders larger than 1 1/2" maximum dimension, and from unbroken masses of earthy materials which might lodge and thereby cause unfilled pockets in the excavation. Unsuitable material encountered at the surface upon which the bedding material is to be placed shall be removed to a depth as determined in the field by the Engineer. Unsuitable material shall be as determined by the Engineer. If not otherwise specified, removal of material and additional bedding so ordered over and above the amount required will be paid for in accordance with the specifications unless, however, the necessity for such additional bedding materials has been occasioned by an act or failure to act on the part of the Contractor, in which event the Contractor shall bear the expense of the additional excavation and backfill to the required depth. The Contractor's attention is called to “dewatering" procedures to ensure that an otherwise stable foundation will not be rendered unfit due to accumulation of water in the trench excavation. Imported materials (if any) required for fill or backfill shall be provided by the Contractor from areas outside the site at his own expense. Such material shall be as herein specified and must be approved by the District before delivery to the site. 1. Structure Backfill. The Contractor shall place all backfill about structures to the

original ground level, or to the lines shown on the drawings or prescribed by the Engineer. Fill materials shall be of earth only, and be free from debris, vegetation, alkali, or other deleterious substances. All backfill about structures shall be placed in layers not more than 6" thick prior to compaction, which shall be obtained by moistening to optimum moisture content prior to placing and compacting to maximum compaction by use of suitable equipment approved by the Engineer.


The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the structure and underground facilities during the placement, compacting or consolidating, and grading of backfill.

2. Pipeline Backfill. Full-time observation and testing will be required during all backfill and compaction activities on pipelines by a District approved soils firm. Except as otherwise required by the construction plans or the standard drawings, the material used in backfilling to 1' above the pipe shall be cohesionless, sandy, or sandy gravel material obtained from required excavation or from approved borrow areas, as shown on the Contract Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. This material shall be carefully placed and compacted to provide a firm continuous bedding and encasement for the pipe. Pipe shall be shaded the same day it is laid to protect it from possible damage and/or thermal expansion. Pipe zone backfill shall be consolidated by mechanical tamping. Deposit approved backfill and bedding material, in the lower portion of the trench, in layers of 6" maximum thickness, and compact with suitable mechanical tampers to a density not less than 85%, or grade as specified in special conditions of contract, until there is a cover of not less than 24" for sewer lines and 12" over other utility lines. Care must be taken to not damage the pipe. The remaining trench backfill shall consist of select backfill material from the excavation, when available, free from stones or lumps exceeding 3" in greatest dimension, and free from vegetable matter or other unsatisfactory material. This select material as defined herein and elsewhere in these specifications, shall be placed in layers not exceeding 2’ in depth, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Each lift shall be consolidated in such a manner that the backfill will meet the requirements of compaction to 90% maximum density per ASTM D1557-09. Care shall be taken not to disturb the backfill previously placed, and the Contractor shall at all times protect the pipe against flotation. All material from failed test to successful test shall be removed, recompacted and retested.

3. Compacting and Surfacing. Except as otherwise specifically required by the encroachment permit or elsewhere in these specifications, the following requirements will apply: The upper portion of the final lift will be backfilled with selected material from the excavation, moistened to optimum moisture content and compacted by mechanical tamping to meet the requirements of the District standards, of 95% maximum compaction. All backfill in public roads shall be consolidated and surfacing shall be placed to meet State of California and Riverside County requirements as stated in the respective permit, whether or not required by the inspector for that particular agency - unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.


Where backfill is in areas not within public roads, it shall be consolidated and tested to meet the requirements of these specifications, except as otherwise approved by the Engineer. Minimum acceptable field densities specified in District standards shall be determined in accordance with the testing procedures set forth elsewhere in these specifications. Where sand material of an approved grade is used for backfilling, mechanical compaction may be eliminated and compaction obtained by jetting. Except as otherwise directed by the Engineer, after a period of not less than 30 days or more than 60 days, any settlement shall be filled with decomposed granite.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor's Responsibility for Safety. The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. This requirement will apply continuously 24 hours a day every day until final acceptance of the work and shall not be limited to normal working hours.

B. Warnings and Barricades. The Contractor shall provide and maintain barricades, guards, temporary bridges and walkways, watchmen, night lights and danger signals illuminated from sunset to sunrise, and all other necessary appliances and safeguards to protect the work, life, property, the public, excavations, equipment, and materials. Barricades shall be of substantial construction and shall be painted such as to increase their visibility at night. Suitable warning signs shall be so placed and illuminated at night as to show in advance where construction, barricades, or detours exist. Guard rails shall be provided for bridges and walkways over or adjoining excavations, shafts, and other openings and locations where injury may occur.

C. Compaction Tests. All compaction tests required by either the governing agency having jurisdiction over the right-of-way or by the District shall be performed by the District or its agent at District expense. However, in the event these tests prove the compaction to be unacceptable to either the governing agency or the District, all subsequent tests required by the governing agency or the District shall be performed at the Contractor's expense.


Tests will be scheduled within 24 hours of the Contractor's request for tests, at locations to be selected by the District and/or the governing agency. However, tests shall not be scheduled until a minimum 4-hours work is available for the testing laboratory, as determined by the Engineer. Results of these tests shall then be available within 48 hours. In-place soil densities shall be determined by the sand cone method of test in accordance with ASTM Standard D-1556-64, or by the nuclear method of test in accordance with ASTM Standard D-2922-071. In accordance with provisions for guarantee of the work, the Contractor shall return at his expense to correct any backfill conditions subsequently found to be substandard by either failure or more extensive testing. The Contractor shall provide all labor and equipment necessary to prepare for all tests and to assist the soils engineer in taking the tests, as directed by the Engineer. In unimproved areas the finish surfaces over pipelines shall be graded to drain surface water away from the center line of the actual trench and provide drainage away from all the structures. No ponding of surface water will be allowed within the construction right-of-way. Contractor shall complete total trench restoration (original condition or better) within 1,320 feet of trench heading or within 10 working days of construction, whichever represents the least amount of time. Failure of the contractor to comply with the Engineer's cleanup orders may result in an order to suspend work until the condition is corrected. No additional compensation will be allowed as a result of such suspension.


Rev: 02/95

SPECIFICATIONS - DETAILED PROVISIONS Section 02242 - Cement Stabilized Sand Bedding/Backfill

C O N T E N T S

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 1

1.01 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................. 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................... 1

2.01 Cement ...................................................................................................................................... 1 2.02 Sand ........................................................................................................................................... 1 2.03 Water ........................................................................................................................................ 2 2.04 Sand-Cement Mixture Product ................................................................................................. 2 2.05 Mix Design ................................................................................................................................. 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 2 3.01 PLACEMENT .............................................................................................................................. 2 3.02 PERFORMANCE ......................................................................................................................... 2 3.03 TESTING ..................................................................................................................................... 2 3.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ............................................................................................... 2

Cement Stabilized Sand Bedding/Backfill Section 02242 – 1

SECTION 02242 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND BEDDING/BACKFILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION Cement stabilized sand shall be used for backfill and bedding as called for by the plans and specifications, or as directed by the Engineer. This section provides for the use of cement-sand as bedding material around gravity sewer pipes constructed in open cut installations; for backfilling material around sewer pipes constructed in open cut installations, manholes, inlets, and drainage structures (if required), and for backfill in pavement sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CEMENT Cement shall consist of Type I, II or V Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150.

2.02 SAND Clean, durable sand containing not more than the following:

A. Deleterious Materials

1. Clay lumps, ASTM C 142; less than 0.5 percent.

2. Lightweight pieces, ASTM C 123; less than 5.0 percent.

3. Organic impurities, ASTM C 40; shall not show a color darker than the standard

color.

B. Plasticity Index Plasticity index shall be six (6) or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.

C. Gradation Requirements

ASTM C-33 Concrete Sand

100% Passing - 3/8" Sieve Less than 5% Passing - No. 200 Sieve MINIMUM SAND EQUIVALENT OF 30

Cement Stabilized Sand Bedding/Backfill Section 02242 – 2

2.03 WATER Water shall be free of oils, acids, alkalies, organic matter or other deleterious substances.

2.04 SAND-CEMENT MIXTURE PRODUCT Sand-cement mixture shall consist of the proper percentage of cement per cubic yard or per ton of sand with sufficient water to hydrate the cement. A minimum of one and one-half (1.5) sacks of cement per ton of sand will be required.

2.05 MIX DESIGN Contractor shall provide a sample of the proposed dry mix to the Engineer for testing and approval prior to construction. These tests will be used to derive the Proctor curve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PLACEMENT Cement stabilized sand shall be placed around HDPE pipelines where depth of cover exceeds 20 feet in a manhole reach unless otherwise stated. The cement stabilized sand bedding shall surround 42" and smaller HDPE pipe by a minimum of 12" on top and both sides and by 6" on the bottom. The cement stabilized sand bedding shall surround HDPE pipe larger than 42" by a minimum of 18" on top and both sides and by 12" on the bottom. Bedding shall be placed in 6" to 8" lifts with 3% moisture or less, and compacted mechanically to achieve ninety-five (95%) Standard Proctor Test (ASTM D 698). Sand cement mixture shall be brought to the level required by the plans if different than the aforesaid minimums.

3.02 PERFORMANCE Sand-cement mixture shall produce a minimum unconfined compressive strength of one hundred pounds per square inch (100 psi) in forty-eight (48) hours when compacted to ninety-five (95%) Standard Proctor Test (ASTM D 698) without additional moisture control, cured (ASTM C 31, Item 9), and tested in accordance with ASTM C 31.

3.03 TESTING Random samples of the product will be taken in the field by the Engineer and tested.

3.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Cost of cement stabilized sand will not be paid directly, but shall be considered incidental to various bid items offered in the proposal.


Rev: 05/23/16

SPECIFICATIONS - DETAILED PROVISIONS Section 02252 - Control Density Fill

C O N T E N T S

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 1

1.01 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................. 1 1.02 UTILITY TRENCH CDF MIX DESIGN ............................................................................................ 1

PART 2 - PRODUCT ............................................................................................................................ 1 2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT .................................................................................................................. 1 2.02 AGGREGATES ............................................................................................................................ 2 2.03 WATER ....................................................................................................................................... 2 2.04 ADMIXTURES ............................................................................................................................. 2 2.05 FLY ASH...................................................................................................................................... 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION ......................................................................................................................... 2 3.01 MIXING ...................................................................................................................................... 2 3.02 TESTING ..................................................................................................................................... 2 3.03 PLACEMENT .............................................................................................................................. 3

Control Density Fill Section 02252 – 1

SECTION 02252

CONTROL DENSITY FILL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION Control Density Fill (CDF) is used as a low strength, self consolidating fill material for confined spaces which can be easily excavatable at a later time. CDF is characterized by a high maximum slump of 8 inches. CDF is not a structural concrete and should not be used in such applications. CDF may be used as a trench backfill, structural backfill, pipe bedding, or pipe filling for abandonment in place. CDF shall consist of Portland cement, aggregates, water and fly ash. Chemical admixtures and other mineral admixtures may be used. The actual mix proportions and flow characteristics shall be determined by the producer of the CDF to meet site conditions. Mix designs and performance tests shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

1.02 UTILITY TRENCH CDF MIX DESIGN (PER CUBIC YARD)

A. Cement 50 – max lbs B. Fly Ash (Type F) 50 - 150 lbs C. Total Mix Water 35 gallons Max. D. Stable Air Content 20 - 30%

CDF shall be hand excavatable and shall contain aggregate no larger than 3/8 inch and the 3/8 inch aggregate shall comprise no more than 20 percent of the total aggregate content.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of Section 03300, Part 2.01 A of the EMWD Specifications.


2.02 AGGREGATES Aggregates shall conform to the requirements of Section 03300, Part 2.01 B of the EMWD Specifications, except as follows. Aggregates shall be pretested in CDF mixtures similar to those anticipated for the work, confirming their ability to perform as required for the specific application. Aggregates not in conformance with Section 03300 may be used when approved by the Engineer, providing the material has a minimum sand equivalent of 20, the percentage passing the No. 200 sieve does not exceed 12 percent, and the fines are non-plastic.

2.03 WATER Water shall be free of oils, acids, alkalies, organic matter or other deleterious substances.

2.04 ADMIXTURES Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of Section 03300, Part 2.01 C of the EMWD Specifications.

2.05 FLY ASH Fly ash shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 618, Class F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MIXING Mixing shall conform to the requirements of Section 03300, Part 2.03 of the EMWD Specifications, except for the one and one-half hour time limit specified in Paragraph B of Part 2.03. Unless otherwise specified, under conditions contributing to quick setting, the Engineer may specify a time limit, not to exceed two and one-half hours. When CDF is used underneath a paved public right-of-way, the mixture shall contain a minimum of 25 pounds per cubic yard of cement when using washed concrete sand. Adjustment of the mixture to achieve improved placement characteristics shall be through the use of chemical admixtures. No increase in water content or water to cement ratio will be allowed.

3.02 TESTING CDF shall be tested for plastic unit weight. Plastic unit weight shall not deviate more than +10 percent of theoretical unit weight shown on the approved mix design. Unit weight shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C138. CDF’s consistency shall be tested by the slump method. The slump shall be measured in accordance with ASTM C143.


3.03 PLACEMENT CDF may be placed by chutes, conveyors, buckets or pumps depending upon the application and accessibility. For trench backfill, CDF shall be placed continuously. To contain CDF when filling long open trenches or open ended structures in stages, the end points shall be adequately bulkheaded to prevent movement. Methods may include bulkheading with sandbags, earth dams, forms or stiffer mixtures of CDF. CDF shall be placed from the centerline of mainline utilities to the bottom of the excavation. For bedding, CDF shall be placed in a manner to prevent flotation or displacement of the embedded item. Methods of preventing flotation or displacement may include placement of CDF in lifts, faster setting CDF or lower slump CDF over the embedded item. For backfilling of pipelines to be abandoned in place, CDF shall be pumped into the pipeline to be abandoned. It is intended that the disconnected ends of the pipeline shall be the primary means for injecting CDF into the pipeline. The Contractor may excavate for additional injection points along the pipeline. The pipeline shall be filled uniformly to within 90 percent of the pipe soffit. The lack of voids (other than the top 10 percent) shall be demonstrated to the Engineer by breaking out small sections of pipeline in various critical locations. Pavement may be placed directly upon the CDF as soon as the surface will withstand the paving process without displacement or disruption. If the placement of the CDF is not completed in time to allow permanent paving to be completed the same day, the Contractor shall prevent traffic contact with the CDF until paving is completed.


Rev: 08/92

SPECIFICATIONS - DETAILED PROVISIONS Section 02505 - Roadway Base Course

C O N T E N T S

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................................................. 1

1.01 REQUIREMENT .......................................................................................................................... 1 1.02 CONSTRUCTION WORK AND METHODS ................................................................................... 1 1.03 CONSTRUCTION WORK ............................................................................................................. 1 1.04 COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS........................................................................................... 1 1.05 DUST ABATEMENT .................................................................................................................... 2 1.06 LINES, GRADES AND MEASURES ............................................................................................... 2 1.07 RIGHT TO OCCUPY COMPLETED PORTIONS OF WORK ............................................................. 2 1.08 MAINTENANCE OF UTILITIES .................................................................................................... 2 1.09 SAFEGUARDING EXCAVATIONS AND PROTECTING PROPERTY ................................................ 3 1.10 WASTE WATER .......................................................................................................................... 3 1.11 CLEANING UP DURING THE PROGRESS OF WORK .................................................................... 3 1.12 BLASTING .................................................................................................................................. 4 1.13 GUARANTEE .............................................................................................................................. 4 1.14 SUPERVISION BY ENGINEER ...................................................................................................... 4

Roadway Base Course Section 02505 – 1

SECTION 02505 ROADWAY BASE COURSE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENT Work included under this specification shall include furnishing all labor, equipment and tools required for the complete construction of roadway base course as shown on the Bidding Sheets, shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein, all within the time stated in the Special Requirements of this specification. Included in the work of roadway base course construction is all clearing, stripping, excavating, scarifying, compacting, haul and overhaul, trimming and placing, as specified on plans or in Detailed Provisions. The Contractor shall furnish all material not specifically called for as furnished by the District.

1.02 CONSTRUCTION WORK AND METHODS Rights of Way and Land. The District will provide the rights-of-way and acquire the land necessary for the construction of the work under this specification. Neither the terms hereof nor anything shown on the drawings shall be construed to entitle the Contractor to conduct operations in violation of any public agency ordinance or regulation restricting interference with water courses, drainage channels, roads, alleys or streets, until he had obtained permits therefore from the proper authorities. In all the streets in which his work may interfere with ingress or egress of the occupants of the abutting property or of their vehicles, the Contractor shall maintain temporary practicable means of ingress and egress, or shall make satisfactory arrangements with the occupants for the obstructing of ways to their properties for the duration of the interference. Nothing herein shall be construed to entitle the Contractor to the exclusive use of any public street or way during performance of the contract work, and he shall so conduct his operations as not to interfere unnecessarily with the authorized work of other agencies in such streets and ways.

1.03 CONSTRUCTION WORK It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to meet with the Engineer regarding the equipment and methods to be used in the construction of the work, and for approval of the order and schedule of the work.

1.04 COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS The Contractor shall familiarize himself and comply with all applicable state, county and municipal rules and regulations pertaining to sanitation, fire protection, barriers, warning lights and signs.


1.05 DUST ABATEMENT The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and means required and shall carry out protective measures wherever and as often as necessary in the opinion of the Engineer to prevent his operations from producing dust in amounts damaging to property or causing nuisance. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from dust originating from his operations. The dust abatement measures shall be continued until all required resurfacing is completed or until the Contractor has completed arrangements with the proper authorities whereby he is relieved of further responsibility. Such arrangements shall be approved by the Engineer prior to their completion. All compensation to be received for dust abatement shall be included in the prices named for appropriate items of the bidding sheet.

1.06 LINES, GRADES AND MEASURES All lines and grades will be established by the Engineer and the Contractor shall provide him with such assistance and materials as may be required. The Contractor shall carefully preserve all survey stakes and reference points as far as possible. Should any stakes or points be removed or destroyed unnecessarily by any act of the Contractor or his employees, they may be reset at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer a reasonable length of time in advance of the times and places at which he intends to work in order that lines and grades may be furnished, that inspection may be provided, and that necessary measurements for records and payments may be made with minimum inconvenience.

1.07 RIGHT TO OCCUPY COMPLETED PORTIONS OF WORK The District may wish to occupy or place in service portions of the completed work before final completion of the contract work and shall be at liberty to do so, but such occupancy or placing in service of any completed portion of the work shall not void the contract nor relieve the Contractor of his responsibility of protection and care of all work until final completion and acceptance of the entire work, provided, however, that expense directly attributable to operation and placing in service the portions of the work shall not be chargeable to the Contractor.

1.08 MAINTENANCE OF UTILITIES Insofar as practical during the progress of the work the property of any owner of a public utility pipeline or conduit, sewer, culvert, storm drain, drainage ditch, flood control channel, overhead wires or cables, or underground wires or cables, or any other structure of facility shall not be disturbed but shall be supported and protected against injury and maintained in good operating condition at the expense of the Contractor. In no case shall any such property be disturbed or removed without the consent of the owner and approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for making good all damage due to his operations and the provisions of this section shall not be abated even in the event such damage occurs after backfilling, or is not discovered until after completion of backfilling.


The drawings show the position of various pipes and conduits and other structures as they are supposed to exist in construction areas, but the Contractor before commencing excavation shall ascertain from records and otherwise the existence, position and ownership of such facilities and no error or omission on said drawings shall be construed to relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of protecting any such pipe, conduit, or other structure.

1.09 SAFEGUARDING EXCAVATIONS AND PROTECTING PROPERTY Excavations shall be adequately shored and braced so that the earth will not slide or settle and so that all existing improvements of any kind will be fully protected from damage. Any damage resulting from a lack of adequate shoring and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall effect all necessary repairs or reconstruction at the Contractor's own expense as directed by the Engineer and shall bear all other expense resulting from such damage.

1.10 WASTE WATER The Contractor shall take care of drainage water on construction operations and of storm water and waste water reaching the right of way from any source so that no damage will be done to the materials or work under construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to persons or property on or off the right of way due to such diversion of storm or waste water on account of his operations. Adequate flumes shall be provided for conveying storm water around the work wherever runoff from tributary drainage areas exists.

1.11 CLEANING UP DURING THE PROGRESS OF WORK The Contractor shall keep the premises occupied by him in a neat and clean condition, and free from unsightly accumulation of rubbish. Upon completion of the work and before the final estimate is submitted, the Contractor shall, at his own cost and expense, satisfactorily dispose of or remove from the vicinity of the work all plants, buildings rubbish, unused materials, concrete forms, and other equipment and materials belonging to him or used under his direction during the construction, and in the event of his failure to do so, the same may be removed and disposed of by the District at the Contractor's expense. Fences on the right of way shall be removed by the Contractor where necessary for the performance of the work and where required shall be rebuilt in as good condition as found. Where designated, fences shall be maintained until the work is completed or their removal is authorized. Where the Contractor removes existing fences to facilitate the work, temporary fence protection for lands adjacent to the right of way shall be provided at all times during the continuation of the Contract. Such temporary fence protection shall be adequate to prevent livestock from straying from or onto adjacent lands and shall be constructed complete with gates and/or cattle guards. The cost of all work described in this paragraph shall be included in the prices bid in this schedule or other items of work.


Through all cultivated areas where trench backfill is required, topsoil removed from excavations shall be replaced as backfill in the uppermost part of the excavation to a depth as it existed previous to excavations, not exceeding 18 inches. Where topsoil replacement is required, excavated topsoil shall be stored separately from other materials and in general shall be replaced as backfill in the same parcel of land from which it came. Any damage to crops outside the right of way or land acquired for the work shall be paid for by the Contractor.

1.12 BLASTING The use of explosives on the work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. All operations involving the handling and storage and use of explosives shall be conducted with every precaution prescribed by the Construction Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety of the State of California and by local laws and regulations. Only competent, reliable persons, working under experienced supervisors shall be permitted to use explosives. The Contractor will be held responsible for and shall make good any damage caused by blasting or otherwise resulting from disposition or use of explosives on the work.

1.13 GUARANTEE The Contractor hereby guarantees that the entire work constructed by them under this specification will fully meet all requirements thereof as to quality of workmanship and conformance to plans and specifications. The Contractor hereby agrees to make, at his own expense, any repairs or reconstruction made necessary by defective workmanship supplied by him, which may become evident within one year after the date of notice of completion and acceptance of the work is filed, and to restore to full compliance with the requirements of these specifications any part of the work which during said one year period is found to be defective or deficient with respect to any provision of these specifications. The Contractor shall make all such repairs or reconstruction promptly upon receipt of written orders for same from the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to make the repair or reconstruction promptly, the District may do the work, and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable to the District for the cost thereof.

1.14 SUPERVISION BY ENGINEER The grading operations will be under the direct supervision of an Engineer employed by the District. The exact nature of the soils as they are disclosed will be evaluated by the Engineer, and he will make all final determinations as to the adequacy of work performed on the site. The Engineer will make such tests as are necessary to assure proper performance of the work.


Rev: 08/25/08

SPECIFICATIONS - DETAILED PROVISIONS Section 02513 - Asphalt Concrete Paving

C O N T E N T S

PART 1 - GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 1

1.01 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................... 1 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................................................................... 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................................... 1 2.01 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE ........................................................................................... 1 2.02 ASPHALT CONCRETE ..................................................................................................... 2 2.03 ASPHALT BINDER ......................................................................................................... 2 2.04 PRIME COAT ................................................................................................................ 2 2.05 PAINT BINDER .............................................................................................................. 2 2.06 TACK COAT .................................................................................................................. 2 2.07 SEAL COAT ................................................................................................................... 2 2.08 DIKES OR BERMS IN PLANT-MIXED SURFACING ............................................................... 2 2.09 WOODEN HEADERS ...................................................................................................... 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION .................................................................................................................... 3 3.01 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................... 3 3.02 PLACEMENT ................................................................................................................ 3 3.03 TEMPORARY PAVING .................................................................................................... 3 3.04 PRIME COAT ................................................................................................................ 3 3.05 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING ......................................................................................... 3 3.06 TACK COAT .................................................................................................................. 3 3.07 WOODEN HEADERS ...................................................................................................... 4 3.08 SEAL COAT ................................................................................................................... 4

Asphalt Concrete Paving Section 02513 – 1

SECTION 02513

Asphalt Concrete Paving

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION The Contractor shall furnish all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and shall perform all labor necessary for the furnishing, placing, and compacting of asphalt concrete work and base to the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on the drawings and as specified herein. Conform to applicable requirements of Conditions of Contract.

A. Work Included. Principal items are:

1. Class 2 base. 2. Wooden headers. 3. Fine grading. 4. All asphalt concrete pavement including dikes or berms. 5. All incidental asphaltic prime coats and tack coats. 6. Coal tar sealer.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Quality assurance includes the requirements of this specification and/or as otherwise shown on the drawings; the entire work shall be in compliance with the provisions of the latest California Department of Transportation Caltrans Standard Specifications and, where appropriate, the Riverside County Transportation Department. In case of conflict between any requirements set forth in this section and any provisions of said standard specifications, the most stringent requirement will govern. Where otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or on the drawings, those requirements shall govern.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE Aggregate Base Course shall be Class II aggregate base. The aggregate base course shall be the thickness shown on the plans and shall be placed in maximum 4” lifts. Aggregate base course shall be compacted to 95% of maximum compaction, as specified by ASTM D-1557. Aggregate base course shall be furnished, spread and compacted, as specified for Class II Aggregate Base Course in the Standard Specifications, State of California, Department of Transportation, latest edition. A spreader box will not be required but care shall be taken to prevent segregation during placement.


2.02 ASPHALT CONCRETE Asphalt concrete shall conform to the requirements of Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 39, for Type "B". Aggregate will conform to a grading for 1/2" maximum aggregate with paving grade asphalt PG 64-10 (Section 92) unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

2.03 ASPHALT BINDER Asphalt binder to be mixed with aggregate shall be paving asphalt PG 70-10 or liquid asphalt (Section 93) in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications 39, 92, and 93. Paving asphalt to be mixed with aggregate shall be steam-refined asphalts.

2.04 PRIME COAT When indicated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, a prime coat consisting of Grade SC-250 liquid asphalt shall be applied in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specification Sections 39 and 93.

2.05 PAINT BINDER Liquid asphalt for paint binder shall conform to the provision of Caltrans Standard Specification Section 93.

2.06 TACK COAT Tack coat shall be Type SS1H grade Anionic Asphaltic Emulsion as per Caltrans Standard Specification Section 94.

2.07 SEAL COAT Seal coat shall be a Bituminous Fog Seal in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specification Section 37.

2.08 DIKES OR BERMS IN PLANT-MIXED SURFACING Where shown on the contract drawings, dikes or berms shall be constructed along the edges of the pavement.

2.09 WOODEN HEADERS Where indicated at edges of asphalt concrete pavement, 2" x 4" redwood headers shall be construction grade as per California Redwood conforming to the requirements of Caltrans Standard Specification Sections 57 and 58.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL Asphalt concrete paving shall conform to the latest Caltrans Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified.

3.02 PLACEMENT Included in the placement of the asphalt concrete paving is all fine grading for paving; placement of header boards; subgrade preparation; trimming and preparation of adjoining pavement; prime coat, asphalt concrete paving materials; placing, spreading, and rolling; seal-coating; and clean-up. No ponding of water on finish surface will be permitted.

3.03 TEMPORARY PAVING When temporary paving is required the paving shall be spread either with a District approved spreader or a grader and compacted so there is a smooth transition from the undisturbed paving and the temporary paving. The temporary paving shall be maintained to provide a smooth transition as described above until such time that the permanent paving is placed. Prior to placing the temporary paving, the Contractor shall level and compact the backfill on which the temporary paving is to be placed. Temporary paving shall be placed as soon as the condition of the backfill is suitable to receive it and shall remain in place until the condition of the backfill is suitable for permanent paving. The grade of the backfill on which the temporary paving is to placed shall be such as to provide a full thickness of temporary paving specified.

3.04 PRIME COAT The prime coat shall be uniformly applied over areas designated at the applicable rate of 0.25 gallons per square yard, unless the Engineer specifies a different application rate at the time of the work.

3.05 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING Asphalt concrete paving, as shown on the drawings, shall be constructed over a completed and primed subgrade; construction shall conform to the applicable requirements of Caltrans Standard Specification Section 39. When more than 1 lift of asphalt paving is required the Contractor may place the first (1st) lift with a District approved spreader box or a self propelled paving machine meeting the requirements of Caltrans Standard Specification Section 39.

3.06 TACK COAT Application of tack coat shall be in conformance with the applicable requirements specified in Caltrans Standard Specification Section 94. Tack coat shall be applied to all vertical surfaces of walls, headers, concrete slabs, pavement joints, and similar faces against which asphalt concrete pavement is to be placed. Tack coat to be applied at rate of 0.1 gallons per square yard.


3.07 WOODEN HEADERS Wooden headers shall be 2" x 4" construction grade California Redwood, with redwood side stakes 12" -- 2" x 4" set at a maximum of 6' on centers, at all locations where the vertical edges of the proposed asphalt pavement are not in contact with an existing pavement or permanent structures. Headers shall remain in place upon completion of work.

3.08 SEAL COAT Seal coat shall be applied 6 to 10 weeks after the asphalt is laid. One application of 0.05 to 0.10 gallons per square yard will be required. All other conditions and/or methods of application shall be in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specification Section 37.


Bid Set 01350-1 Blower Electrification Project January, 2019

SECTION 01350

SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING

PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and services required to design and provide seismic restraint and bracing for all nonstructural architectural, mechanical, electrical, and plumbing components and their supports and attachments permanently attached to the primary structure in which the components are to be installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the seismic restraint requirements of Chapter 13 in ASCE 7.

B. Furnish mechanical, electrical, and plumbing equipment manufacturer certifications

showing seismic compliance in accordance with Chapter 13 of ASCE 7 for equipment designated as an essential component or to remain operational following a seismic event.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 05010 – Metal Materials

B. Section 05050 – Metal Fastening

C. Section 05061 – Stainless Steel

D. Section 05120 – Structural Steel

E. Section 06610 – Glass Fiber and Resin Fabrications

F. Section 15000 – Basic Mechanical Requirements

G. Section 15020 – Pipe Supports

H. Section 15500 – HVAC Requirements

I. Section 16000 – Basic Electrical Requirements J. Division 17 – Control and Information Systems

K. Further requirements for seismic anchorage and bracing may be included in other

Sections of the Specifications. See section for the specific item in question. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

03

12

13

BR


A. Nonstructural components: All architectural, mechanical, electrical or plumbing elements or systems and their supports or attachments provided under this contract which are permanently attached to the floors, roof, walls, columns and beams of newly constructed buildings, building additions, existing buildings or non-building structures. 1. Architectural nonstructural components include, but are not limited to, interior

nonstructural walls and partitions, exterior wall panels and glazing elements, glass curtain walls, skylights, cabinets, suspended ceilings, fascias, and cladding.

2. Mechanical nonstructural components include, but are not limited to, HVAC units,

fans, water and wastewater treatment process equipment, instrumentation cabinets, piping and ductwork.

3. Electrical nonstructural components include, but are not limited to, conduit

systems, cable tray systems, boxes, transformers, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, busway, individual motor controllers, motor control centers, variable frequency drives, automatic transfer switches, and lighting systems.

4. Plumbing nonstructural components include, but are not limited to, sprinkler

systems and associated piping, and sump pumps. B. Seismic Restraint: Attachments and supports, including braces, frames, legs, hangers,

saddles, and struts which anchor and brace nonstructural components to minimize their displacement during an earthquake and transmit loads between non-structural components and their attachments to the structure or building.

C. Attachment: Elements including anchor bolts, welded connections, and mechanical

fasteners which secure non-structural components or supports to the structure. D. Hazardous: Toxic, flammable, explosive or corrosive materials in excess of building code

mandated threshold quantities for non-hazardous condition. E. Essential Components: Nonstructural components considered necessary to public

safety for which the importance factor Ip = 1.5 applies, including:

1. Life safety systems which must function following an earthquake, including but not limited to, sprinklers for fire protection, emergency lighting, egress corridors and stairways, and smoke purge systems.

2. Components which contain, convey or support hazardous materials. 3. Components which are within or attached to an Occupancy or Risk Category IV

structure as defined in ASCE 7 Chapter 1. 4. Process systems and elements designated below:

a. Water storage facilities and water pumping systems required to maintain

water pressure used for fire suppression.


F. Nonbuilding Structures: All self-supporting structures which are supported by an independent foundation or by other structures which include, but are not limited to, storage tanks, silos, exhaust stacks, storage racks, and towers.

G. Delegated Design: Design of a structure or structural element(s) which has been

deferred by the contract documents to be performed during the project construction stage, by a registered design professional retained by the contractor and with the design submitted as a shop drawing to the Engineer.

1.04 EXEMPTIONS

A. The following nonstructural components are exempt from requiring seismic anchorage

and bracing: (See paragraph 1.07.C herein for Seismic Design Category)

1. All architectural, mechanical, electrical and plumbing nonstructural components in Seismic Design Category A.

2. All mechanical, electrical and plumbing nonstructural components in Seismic

Design Category B. 3. All architectural nonstructural components in Seismic Design Category B

provided Ip = 1.0, except parapets supported by bearing or shear walls.

4. All mechanical, electrical and plumbing nonstructural components in Seismic Design Category C provided Ip = 1.0.

5. All mechanical, electrical and plumbing nonstructural components in Seismic

Design Category D, E or F provided all the following apply: a. Ip = 1.0.

b. Components are positively attached to the structure without consideration

of frictional resistance and have flexible connections between the components and associated ductwork, piping and conduit.

c. Either of the following:

i. Component center of mass is 4 ft or less above a floor level and

weighs 400 lbs or less.

ii. Component weighs 20 lbs or less or 5 plf or less for distribution systems.

6. Other exemptions as allowed by the Specifications, Codes and Standards

referenced herein. 1.05 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS


A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the following documents. The building code shall be the version in effect at the time of Bid within the jurisdiction where the Work is located. All other referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the version as referenced by the building code. If no version is referenced by the building code, then the most current issue available at the time of Bid shall be used.

1. California Building Code 2. ASCE/SEI 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 3. NFPA 13 Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems 4. FEMA 412 Installing Seismic Restraints for Mechanical Equipment 5. FEMA 413 Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical Equipment 6. FEMA 414 Installing Seismic Restraints for Duct and Pipe 7. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’ National

Association, Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems

8. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and

Commentary 9. ACI 355.2 Qualifications of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete 10. ACI 355.4 Qualifications of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following as required for submittals.

1. Seismic anchorage and bracing shop drawings for all architectural, mechanical, electrical, and plumbing nonstructural components, elements and systems not meeting any of the exemptions in paragraph 1.4 above and do not have a design for seismic anchorage and bracing provided within the contract documents. Submittals shall include the following:

a. Component manufacturer’s cut sheets and fabrication details for

equipment bases and foundations, including dimensions, structural member sizes, support point locations and equipment operational loads. Equipment anchorage details shall clearly indicate anchor size, pattern, embedment and edge distance requirements to satisfy operational and seismic forces. Details shall also indicate grout, bearing pads, isolators, etc required for complete installation.


b. Design calculations, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of California confirming the proposed seismic restraints and attachment will provide sufficient strength and stiffness to resist the design earthquake and limit damage to nonstructural components and the entire support is sufficient to resist the combined gravity and seismic loads. Separate calculation submittals for vertical and lateral load support systems shall not be allowed.

c. Detailed Shop Drawings, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer

registered in the State of California, showing specific details of the support design including material, installation, attachments, connection hardware, etc, and the restraint layout and location of all hangers and supports (resisting both gravity and seismic loads), including restraint orientation and direction of force(s) to be resisted. Within each submittal, the Contractor shall include a cumulative set of hanger and support location drawings (one cumulative ‘living drawing for each building structure) containing all proposed mechanical, electrical and plumbing support locations submitted to date showing the locations of all support attachments to the primary structure. Load magnitudes shall be indicated at attachments to the structure where the sum of the reaction loads on a single member exceeds 1000 pounds vertically or exceeds 500 pounds horizontally. Unless requested by the Engineer, load magnitudes need not be submitted for load values less than these stated values. Separate shop drawing submittals for vertical and lateral load support systems shall not be allowed.

d. For components required to be certified as seismically qualified in

accordance with paragraph 1.06.A.2 below, submit installation guidelines provided by the equipment manufacturer for proper seismic mounting of the equipment.

2. For each mechanical, electrical and plumbing nonstructural components and

systems furnished, including associated equipment appurtenances and attachments, designated as essential components in Seismic Design Categories C through F, provide Manufacturer’s Certification signed and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer in the State of California to show the component is seismically qualified in accordance with the Specifications, Codes, and Standards requirements referenced herein. The following requirements shall be met:

a. Seismic qualification shall be substantiated either by approved shake

table testing or experience data, with the evidence of such qualification testing or experience data submitted to the Engineer along with the manufacturer’s statement certifying the equipment shall remain operable following the design seismic event.

b. Components with hazardous contents shall also be certified by the

manufacturer to maintain containment following the design seismic event


based on analysis, approved shake table testing, or experience data. Evidence demonstrating compliance shall be submitted to the Engineer.

c. Seismic qualification testing shall be based on ASCE 7 and on a

nationally recognized testing standard procedure such as ICC-ES AC 156.

1.07 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic restraints systems for nonstructural components shall be subject to the most current local Building Code in conjunction with the seismic provisions of the International Building Code (IBC) Section 1613 and referenced ASCE 7 Chapter 13.

B. Seismic restraints systems for nonbuilding structures shall be subject to the most current

local Building Code in conjunction with the seismic provisions of the International Building Code (IBC) Section 1613 and referenced ASCE 7 Chapter 15,

C. Nonstructural components shall be assigned to the same Seismic Design Category as

the structure they occupy or to which they are attached. Design of seismic support system and anchorage shall follow the site-specific seismic criteria noted on the drawings. Criteria shall include site-specific spectral response coefficients, site class, seismic design category, and risk category.

D. Component Importance Factor Ip shall be 1.5 for all essential nonstructural components

noted in item 1.03.E above. All other nonstructural components shall utilize Ip = 1.0 unless noted otherwise.

E. Components shall be restrained and braced for earthquake forces both in the vertical

and each orthogonal direction. Seismic restraint systems shall limit deflections of components per ASCE 7 and the displacements shall not impede component functionally and containment.

F. Anchorage shall be designed in accordance with ASCE 7. Mechanical fasteners used to

secure nonstructural architectural, mechanical, electrical and plumbing components shall meet the requirements of Specification Section 05050. All mechanical fasteners used to anchor essential components and other elements so designated in Specification Section 05050 shall be considered Structural Anchors.

G. Avoid crossing structural expansion joints with seismic supports or bracing.

Nonstructural components shall not be attached to multiple structure elements which may respond differently in an earthquake without provisions to accommodate independent movement. Flexible expansion loops or offsets, flexible joints, bellows type pipe expansion joints, couplings, etc shall be provided at structure expansion joints to allow for independent structure movement and thermal movement of piping, ductwork and conduit. Minimum movement capability in the vertical and each orthogonal direction shall equal the width of the joint.

H. Provide flexible connections, piping, conduit, etc at foundation levels where below grade


utilities enter into the structure. I. Design of support system for components with multiple attachments shall take into

account the stiffness and ductility of the supporting members. Equipment designed as free-standing shall only be attached at its base. Use of non-free standing equipment requiring both vertical and lateral attachment is contingent upon loads applied to the structure and requires approval by the Engineer.

J. The seismic restraint design shall be based on actual equipment data (dimensions,

weight, center of gravity, etc) obtained from the specifications or the approved equipment manufacturer. The equipment manufacturer shall verify the attachment points on the equipment can safely withstand the combination of seismic, self-weight and other loads imposed.

K. Attachments of nonstructural component supports and seismic restraints causing the

building structure slabs, beams, walls, columns, etc. to be overstressed shall not be permitted.

L. Where the weight of a nonstructural component is greater than or equal to 25 percent of

the effective seismic weight (as defined by ASCE 7) of the structure it is attached to, the component shall be classified as a nonbuilding structure and its support designed in accordance with ASCE 7 Chapter 15.

M. No reaction loads (either vertical or lateral) from nonstructural component supports and

seismic restraints shall be allowed on any element where design has been delegated unless the additional loads on the element have been coordinated with the delegated designer and the submittal is accompanied by a sealed letter from the delegated designer indicating the element has been designed to support the reaction loads.

N. Reaction loads from nonstructural component supports and seismic restraints shall be

transferred directly to the primary structural members, with no components supported from secondary members unless otherwise approved.

O. No holes shall be drilled into any structural steel for attachment of component supports

without prior approval of the Engineer. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Seismic restraints and braces shall be constructed of appropriate materials and connecting hardware to provide a continuous load path between the component and supporting structure of sufficient strength and stiffness to resist the calculated design seismic forces and displacements.

B. Component restraint, bracing and connection materials shall be compatible with and in

general match the component and component gravity support materials. Contact


between dissimilar metals shall be prevented. See Section 15020 – Pipe Supports for additional details.

C. Post-installed concrete anchors used for seismic restraint and bracing anchorage shall

be considered structural anchors per Section 05050 and shall be prequalified for use in seismic applications.

D. Powder actuated fasteners in steel or concrete shall not be used for sustained tension

loads in Seismic Design Categories D, E or F unless approved for seismic loading or specifically exempted by ASCE 7. Powder actuated fasteners in masonry shall not be used unless approved for seismic loading regardless of Seismic Design Category.

E. Friction clips shall not be used in Seismic Design Categories D, E or F for supporting

sustained tension loads in combination with resisting seismic forces. C-type and large flange clamps may be used for hanger attachments provided restraining straps meeting NFPA 13 requirements are utilized and loosening of threaded connections is prevented by lock nuts, burred threads, etc.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC RESTRAINTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. No components, seismic anchorages or restraints shall be installed prior to review and acceptance by the Engineer and permitting agency.

B. Seismic certified equipment shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Fasteners shall meet manufacturer’s requirements. C. Following installation, all seismic restraints, bracing and seismically qualified equipment

shall be inspected. See Chapter 17 of California Building Code for Special Inspection requirements.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 03100

CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Provide materials, labor, and equipment required for the design and construction of all concrete formwork, bracing, shoring and supports in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents.


A. Section 03200 - Reinforcing Steel

B. Section 03250 - Concrete Accessories

C. Section 03290 - Joints in Concrete

D. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid.

1. California Building Code

2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

3. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings

4. ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork

5. U.S. Product Standard for Concrete Forms, Class I, PS 1

6. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and

Materials 1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's data on proposed form release agent

05

02

17

BR


2. Manufacturer's data on proposed formwork system including form ties

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Concrete formwork shall be in accordance with ACI 301, ACI 318, and ACI 347. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMS AND FALSEWORK

A. All forms shall be smooth surface forms unless otherwise specified.

B. Wood materials for concrete forms and falsework shall conform to the following requirements:

1. Lumber for bracing, shoring, or supporting forms shall be Douglas Fir or Southern

Pine, construction grade or better, in conformance with U.S. Product Standard PS20. All lumber used for forms, shoring or bracing shall be new material.

2. Plywood for concrete formwork shall be new, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded,

exterior type Douglas Fir or Southern Pine high density overlaid (HDO) plywood manufactured especially for concrete formwork and shall conform to the requirements of PS1 for Concrete Forms, Class I, and shall be edge sealed. Thickness shall be as required to support concrete at the rate it is placed, but not less than 5/8-inch thick.

C. Other form materials such as metal, fiberglass, or other acceptable material that will not

adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape, form, line and grade indicated may be submitted to the Engineer for approval, but only materials that will produce a smooth form finish equal or better than the wood materials specified will be considered.

2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Form ties shall be provided with a plastic cone or other suitable means for forming a conical hole to insure that the form tie may be broken off back of the face of the concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties, or of other removable form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section, shall not exceed 7/8-inch, and all such fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for reaming.

B. Form ties for water-retaining structures shall have integral waterstops. Removable taper ties

may be used when acceptable to the Engineer. A preformed mechanical EPDM rubber plug shall be used to seal the hole left after the removal of the taper tie. Plug shall be X-Plug by the Greenstreak Group, Inc., or approved equal. Friction fit plugs shall not be used.

C. Form release agent shall be a blend of natural and synthetic chemicals that employs a

chemical reaction to provide quick, easy and clean release of concrete from forms. It shall


not stain the concrete and shall leave the concrete with a paintable surface. Formulation of the form release agent shall be such that it would minimize formation of "bug holes" in cast-in-place concrete.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FORM DESIGN

A. Forms and falsework shall be designed for total dead load, plus all construction live load as outlined in ACI 347. Design and engineering of formwork and safety considerations during construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Forms shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain their position and shape under

the loads and operations incident to placing and vibrating the concrete. The maximum deflection of facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view shall be 1/240 of the span between structural members.

C. All forms shall be designed for predetermined placing rates per hour, considering expected

air temperatures and setting rates. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION

A. The type, size, quality, and strength of all materials from which forms are made shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. No falsework or forms shall be used which are not clean and suitable. Deformed, broken or defective falsework and forms shall be removed from the work.

B. Forms shall be smooth and free from surface irregularities. Suitable and effective means

shall be provided on all forms for holding adjacent edges and ends of panels and sections tightly together and in accurate alignment so as to prevent the formation of ridges, fins, offsets, or similar surface defects in the finished concrete. Joints between the forms shall be sealed to eliminate any irregularities. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to a practical minimum.

C. Forms shall be true to line and grade, and shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent displacement

and sagging between supports. Curved forms shall be used for curved and circular structures. Straight panels joined at angles will not be acceptable for forming curved structures. Forms shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain their position and shape under a load of freshly-placed concrete. Facing material shall be supported with studs or other backing which shall prevent both visible deflection marks in the concrete and deflections beyond the tolerances specified.

D. Forms shall be mortar tight so as to prevent the loss of water, cement and fines during

placing and vibrating of the concrete. Specifically, the bottom of wall forms that rest on concrete footings or slabs shall be provided with a gasket to prevent loss of fines and paste during placement and vibration of concrete. Such gasket may be a 1 to 1-1/2 inch diameter polyethylene rod held in position to the underside of the wall form.


E. All vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed, and side forms shall be provided for all footings, slab edges and grade beams, except where placement of the concrete against the ground is called for on the Drawings. Not less than 1-inch of concrete shall be added to the thickness of the concrete member as shown where concrete is permitted to be placed against trimmed ground in lieu of forms. Such permission will be granted only for members of comparatively limited height and where the character of the ground is such that it can be trimmed to the required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing until the concrete has been placed.

F. All forms shall be constructed in such a manner that they can be removed without

hammering or prying against the concrete. Wood forms shall be constructed for wall openings to facilitate loosening and to counteract swelling of the forms.

G. Adequate clean-out holes shall be provided at the bottom of each lift of forms. Temporary

openings shall be provided at the base of column forms and wall forms and at other points to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before the concrete is deposited. The size, number and location of such clean-outs shall be as acceptable to the Engineer.

H. Construction joints shall not be permitted at locations other than those shown or specified,

except as may be acceptable to the Engineer. When a second lift is placed on hardened concrete, special precautions shall be taken in the way of the number, location and tightening of ties at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new to prevent any unsatisfactory effect whatsoever on the concrete. For flush surfaces at construction joints exposed to view, the contact surface of the form sheathing over the hardened concrete in the previous placement shall be lapped by not more than 1 inch. Forms shall be held against hardened concrete to prevent offset or loss of mortar at construction joints and to maintain a true surface.

I. The formwork shall be cambered to compensate for anticipated deflections in the formwork

due to the weight and pressure of the fresh concrete and due to construction loads. Set forms and intermediate screed strips for slabs accurately to produce the designated elevations and contours of the finished surface. Ensure that edge forms and screed strips are sufficiently strong to support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds if the nature of the finish specified requires the use of such equipment. When formwork is cambered, set screeds to a like camber to maintain the proper concrete thickness.

J. Positive means of adjustment (wedges or jacks) for shores and struts shall be provided and

all settlement shall be taken up during concrete placing operation. Shores and struts shall be securely braced against lateral deflections. Wedges shall be fastened firmly in place after final adjustment of forms prior to concrete placement. Formwork shall be anchored to shores or other supporting surfaces or members to prevent upward or lateral movement of any part of the formwork system during concrete placement. If adequate foundation for shores cannot be secured, trussed supports shall be provided.

K. Runways shall be provided for moving equipment with struts or legs. Runways shall be

supported directly on the formwork or structural member without resting on the reinforcing steel.

3.03 TOLERANCES


A. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, formwork shall be constructed so

that the concrete surfaces will conform to the tolerance limits listed in ACI 117.

B. Structural framing of reinforced concrete around elevators and stairways shall be accurately plumbed and located within 1/4 in. tolerance from established dimensions.

C. The Contractor shall establish and maintain in an undisturbed condition and until final

completion and acceptance of the project, sufficient control points and bench marks to be used for reference purposes to check tolerances. Plumb and string lines shall be installed before concrete placement and shall be maintained during placement. Such lines shall be used by Contractor's personnel and by the Engineer and shall be in sufficient number and properly installed. During concrete placement, the Contractor shall continually monitor plumb and string line form positions and immediately correct deficiencies.

D. Regardless of the tolerances specified, no portion of the building shall extend beyond the

legal boundary of the building. 3.04 FORM ACCESSORIES

A. Suitable moldings shall be placed to bevel or round all exposed corners and edges of beams, columns, walls, slabs, and equipment pads. Chamfers shall be 3/4 inch unless otherwise noted.

B. Form ties shall be so constructed that the ends, or end fasteners, can be removed without

causing appreciable spalling at the faces of the concrete. After ends, or end fasteners of form ties have been removed, the embedded portion of the ties shall terminate not less than 2 inches from the formed face of the concrete that is exposed to water or enclosed surfaces above the water surface, and not less than 1 inch from the formed face of all other concrete. Holes left by the removal of form tie cones shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers so as to leave the surface of the holes clean and rough before being filled with mortar as specified in Section 03350 - Concrete Finishing. No form-tying device or part thereof, other than metal, shall be left embedded in the concrete. Ties shall not be removed in such manner as to leave a hole extending through the interior of the concrete member. The use of snap-ties which cause spalling of the concrete upon form stripping or tie removal will not be permitted. No snap ties shall be broken off until the concrete is at least three days old. If steel panel forms are used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the ties pass through the form in order to prevent loss of cement paste.

3.05 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT

A. Forms for concrete surfaces that will not be subsequently waterproofed shall be coated with a form release agent. Form release agent shall be applied on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.06 INSERTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Sleeves, pipe stubs, inserts, anchors, expansion joint material, waterstops, and other embedded items shall be positioned accurately and supported against displacement prior to


concreting. Voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor slots shall be filled temporarily with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete into the voids.

3.07 FORM CLEANING AND REUSE

A. The inner faces of all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to concreting. Forms may be reused only if in good condition and only if acceptable to the Engineer. Light sanding between uses will be required wherever necessary to obtain uniform surface texture. Unused tie rod holes in forms shall be covered with metal caps or shall be filled by other methods acceptable to the Engineer.

3.08 FORM REMOVAL AND SHORING

A. Forms shall not be disturbed until the concrete has attained sufficient strength. Sufficient strength shall be demonstrated by structural analysis considering proposed loads, strength of forming and shoring system, and concrete strength data. Shoring shall not be removed until the supported member has acquired sufficient strength to support its weight and the load upon it. Members subject to additional loads during construction shall be adequately shored to sustain all resulting stresses. Forms shall be removed in such manner as not to impair safety and serviceability of the structure. All concrete to be exposed by form removal shall have sufficient strength not to be damaged thereby.

B. Provided the strength requirements specified above have been met and subject to the

Engineer's approval, forms may be removed at the following minimum times. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the strength of all such components from which forms are removed prior to the concrete attaining its full design compressive strength. Shoring may be required at the option of the Engineer beyond these periods.

Ambient Temperature (°F.) During Concrete Placement

Over 95° 70°-95° 60°-70° 50°-60° Below 50°

Walls 5 days 2 days 2 days 3 days Do not remove until directed by Engineer (7 days minimum)

Columns 7 days 2 days 3 days 4 days

Beam Soffits 10 days 7 days 7 days 7 days

Elevated Slabs 12 days 7 days 7 days 7 days

C. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions of the work or weather justify, forms may be required to remain in place for longer periods of time.

D. An accurate record shall be maintained by the Contractor of the dates of concrete placings

and the exact location thereof and the dates of removal of forms. These records shall be available for inspection at all times at the site, and two copies shall be furnished the Engineer upon completion of the concrete work.


3.09 RESHORING

A. When reshoring is permitted or required the operations shall be planned in advance and subjected to approval by the Engineer.

B. Reshores shall be placed after stripping operations are complete but in no case later than

the end of the working day on which stripping occurs.

C. Reshoring for the purpose of early form removal shall be performed so that at no time will large areas of new construction be required to support their own weight. While reshoring is under way, no construction or live loads shall be permitted on the new construction. Reshores shall be tightened to carry their required loads but they shall not be overtightened so that the new construction is overstressed. Reshores shall remain in place until the concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength, unless otherwise specified.

D. For floors supporting shores under newly placed concrete, the original supporting shores

shall remain in place or reshores shall be placed. The shoring or reshoring system shall have a capacity sufficient to resist the anticipated loads and in all cases shall have a capacity equal to at least one-half of the capacity of the shoring system above. Reshores shall be located directly under a reshore position above unless other locations are permitted.

E. In multi-story buildings, reshoring shall extend over a sufficient number of stories to distribute

the weight of newly placed concrete, forms, and construction live loads so the design superimposed loads of the floors supporting shores are not exceeded.

- END OF SECTION –


- THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK -


SECTION 03200

REINFORCING STEEL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all concrete reinforcing including all cutting, bending, fastening and any special work necessary to hold the reinforcing steel in place and protect it from injury and corrosion in accordance with the requirements of this section.

B. Provide deformed reinforcing bars to be grouted into reinforced concrete masonry walls.


A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork

B. Section 03250 - Concrete Accessories

C. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

D. Section 03400 - Precast Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS



2. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Institute Manual of Standard Practice

3. ACI SP66 - ACI Detailing Manual

4. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcing

5. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 6. ICC-ES AC193 Acceptance Criteria for Expansion and Screw Anchors

(Concrete) 7. WRI - Manual of Standard Practice for Welded Wire Fabric

11

12

87

BR


8. ASTM A 615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcing

9. ASTM A 1064 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete 1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Detailed placing and shop fabricating drawings, prepared in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI Detailing Manual - (SP66), shall be furnished for all concrete reinforcing. These drawings shall be made to such a scale as to clearly show joint locations, openings, and the arrangement, spacing and splicing of the bars.

2. Mill test certificates - 3 copies of each.

3. Description of the reinforcing steel manufacturer's marking pattern.

4. Requests to relocate any bars that cause interferences or that cause placing

tolerances to be violated.

5. Proposed supports for each type of reinforcing.

6. Request to use splices not shown on the Drawings.

7. Request to use mechanical couplers along with manufacturer's literature on mechanical couplers with instructions for installation, and certified test reports on the couplers' capacity.

8. Request for placement of column dowels without the use of templates.

9. Request and procedure to field bend or straighten partially embedded reinforcing. 10. International Code Council–Evaluation Services Report (ICC-ES ESR) for dowel

adhesives. 11. Certification that all installers of dowel adhesive are certified as Adhesive Anchor

Installers in accordance with the ACI-CRSI Anchor Installer Certification Program. 12 Adhesive dowel testing plan.


A. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide samples from each load of reinforcing steel delivered in a quantity adequate for testing. Costs of initial tests will be paid by the Owner. Costs of additional tests due to material failing initial tests shall be paid by the Contractor.


B. Provide a list of names of all installers who are trained by the Manufacturer’s Field Representative on this jobsite prior to installation of products. Record must include the installer name, date of training, products included in the training and trainer name and contact information.

C. Provide a copy of the current ACI/CRSI “Adhesive Anchor Installer” certification cards for

all installers who will be installing adhesive anchors in the horizontal to vertically overhead orientation.

D. Inspections of the adhesive dowel system may be made by the Engineer or other

representatives of the Owner in accordance with the requirements of the ESR published by the manufacturer. Provide adequate time and access for inspections of products and anchor holes prior to injection, installation, and proof testing.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Bar reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 615 for Grade 60 Billet Steel reinforcing. All reinforcing steel shall be from domestic mills and shall have the manufacturer's mill marking rolled into the bar which shall indicate the producer, size, type and grade. All reinforcing bars shall be deformed bars. Smooth reinforcing bars shall not be used unless specifically called for on Drawings.

B. Welded wire fabric reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 1064 and the

details shown on the Drawings.

C. A certified copy of the mill test on each load of reinforcing steel delivered showing physical and chemical analysis shall be provided, prior to shipment. The Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to obtain separate test results from an independent testing laboratory in the event of any questionable steel. When such tests are necessary because of failure to comply with this Specification, such as improper identification, the cost of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.

D. Field welding of reinforcing steel will not be allowed. E. Use of coiled reinforcing steel will not be allowed.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessories shall include all necessary chairs, slab bolsters, concrete blocks, tie wires, dips, supports, spacers and other devices to position reinforcing during concrete placement. Wire bar supports shall be plastic protected (CRSI Class 1).

B. Concrete blocks (dobies), used to support and position bottom reinforcing steel, shall have

the same or higher compressive strength as specified for the concrete in which it is located.


2.03 MECHANICAL COUPLERS

A. Mechanical couplers shall develop a tensile strength which exceeds 100 percent of the ultimate tensile strength and 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing bars being spliced. The reinforcing steel and coupler used shall be compatible for obtaining the required strength of the connection.

B. Where the type of coupler used is composed of more than one component, all components

required for a complete splice shall be supplied. C. Hot forged sleeve type couplers shall not be used. Acceptable mechanical couplers are

Dayton Superior Dowel Bar Splicer System by Dayton Superior, Dayton, Ohio, or approved equal. Mechanical couplers shall only be used where shown on the Drawings or where specifically approved by the Engineer.

D. Where the threaded rebar to be inserted into the coupler reduces the diameter of the bar,

the threaded rebar piece shall be provided by the coupler manufacturer. 2.04 DOWEL ADHESIVE SYSTEM

A. Where shown on the Drawings, reinforcing bars anchored into hardened concrete with a dowel adhesive system shall use a two-component adhesive mix which shall be injected with a static mixing nozzle following manufacturer's instructions.

B. All holes shall be drilled in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions except that core drilled holes shall not be permitted unless specifically allowed by the Engineer. Cored holes, if allowed by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer, shall be roughened in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

C. Thoroughly clean drill holes of all debris, drill dust, and water in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to installation of adhesive and reinforcing bar.

D. Degree of hole dampness shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

Installation conditions shall be either dry or water-saturated. Water filled or submerged holes shall not be permitted unless specifically approved by the Engineer.

E. Injection of adhesive into the hole shall be performed in a manner to minimize the formation

of air pockets in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Embedment Depth: 1. The embedment depth of the bar shall be as shown on the Drawings. Although all

manufacturers listed below are permitted, the embedment depth shown on the Drawings is based on “Pure 110+” by DeWalt” ESR 3298 issued 7/2016. If the Contractor submits one of the other named dowel adhesives from the list below, the Engineer shall evaluate the required embedment and the Contractor shall provide the required embedment depth stipulated by the Engineer specific to the approved dowel adhesive.


2. Where the embedment depth is not shown on the Drawings, the embedment depth

shall be determined to provide the minimum allowable bond strength equal to the tensile strength of the rebar according to the manufacturer’s ICC-ES ESR.

3. The embedment depth shall be determined using the actual concrete compressive

strength, a cracked concrete state, maximum long term temperature of 110 degrees F, and maximum short term temperature of 140 degrees F. In no case shall the embedment depth be less than the minimum, or more than the maximum, embedment depths stated in the manufacturer’s ICC-ES ESR.

G. Engineer's approval is required for use of this system in locations other than those shown on

the Drawings.

H. The adhesive system shall be IBC compliant for use in both cracked and uncracked concrete in all Seismic Design Categories and shall be "Epcon C6+ Adhesive Anchoring System" as manufactured by ITW Redhead, " HIT-HY 200 Adhesive Anchoring System" as manufactured by Hilti, Inc. “SET-XP Epoxy Adhesive Anchors” as manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie Co. or “Pure 110+ Epoxy Adhesive Anchor System” by DeWalt. Fast-set epoxy formulations shall not be acceptable. No “or equal” products will be considered, unless pre-qualified and approved.

I. All individuals installing dowel adhesive system shall be certified as an Adhesive Anchor

Installer in accordance with the ACI-CRSI Anchor Installation Certification Program. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 TEMPERATURE REINFORCING

A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or in the absence of the concrete reinforcing being shown, the minimum cross sectional area of horizontal and vertical concrete reinforcing in walls shall be 0.0033 times the gross concrete area and the minimum cross sectional area of reinforcing perpendicular to the principal reinforcing in slabs shall be 0.0020 times the gross concrete area. Temperature reinforcing shall not be spaced further apart than five times the slab or wall thickness, nor more than 18 inches.

3.02 FABRICATION

A. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately formed to the dimensions and shapes shown on the Drawings and the fabricating details shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI 318, except as modified by the Drawings.

B. The Contractor shall fabricate reinforcing bars for structures in accordance with the bending

diagrams, placing lists and placing Drawings.

C. No fabrication shall commence until approval of Shop Drawings has been obtained. All reinforcing bars shall be shop fabricated unless approved to be bent in the field. Reinforcing


bars shall not be straightened or rebent in a manner that will injure the material. Heating of bars will not be permitted.

D. Welded wire fabric with longitudinal wire of W9.5 size or smaller shall be either furnished in

flat sheets or in rolls with a core diameter of not less than 10 inches. Welded wire fabric with

longitudinal wires larger than W9.5 size shall be furnished in flat sheets only.

3.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All reinforcing shall be neatly bundled and tagged for placement when delivered to the job

site. Bundles shall be properly identified for coordination with mill test reports.

B. Reinforcing steel shall be stored above ground on platforms or other supports and shall be

protected from the weather at all times by suitable covering. It shall be stored in an orderly

manner and plainly marked to facilitate identification.

C. Reinforcing steel shall at all times be protected from conditions conducive to corrosion until

concrete is placed around it.

D. The surfaces of all reinforcing steel and other metalwork to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar and other foreign substances immediately before the concrete is placed. Where there is delay in depositing concrete, reinforcing shall be reinspected and if necessary recleaned.

3.04 PLACING

A. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately positioned as shown on the Drawings and shall be supported and wired together to prevent displacement, using annealed iron wire ties or suitable clips at intersections. All reinforcing steel shall be supported by concrete, plastic or plastic protected (CRSI Class 1) metal supports, spacers or metal hangers which are strong and rigid enough to prevent any displacement of the reinforcing steel. Where concrete is to be placed on the ground, supporting concrete blocks (or dobies) shall be used in sufficient numbers to support the reinforcing bars without settlement. In no case shall concrete block supports be continuous.

B. The portions of all accessories in contact with the formwork shall be made of plastic or steel

coated with a 1/8 inch minimum thickness of plastic which extends at least 1/2 inch from the concrete surface. Plastic shall be gray in color.

C. Tie wires shall be bent away from the forms in order to provide the specified concrete

coverage.

D. Reinforcing bars additional to those shown on the Drawings, which may be found necessary or desirable by the Contractor for the purpose of securing reinforcing in position, shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Reinforcing placing, spacing, and protection tolerances shall be within the limits specified in

ACI 318 except where in conflict with the Building Code, unless otherwise specified.


F. Reinforcing bars may be moved within one bar diameter as necessary to avoid interference

with other concrete reinforcing, conduits, or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter, or enough to exceed placing tolerances, the resulting arrangement of bars shall be as acceptable to the Engineer.

G. Welded wire fabric shall be supported on slab bolsters spaced not less than 30 inches on

centers, extending continuously across the entire width of the reinforcing mat and supporting the reinforcing mat in the plane shown on the Drawings.

H. Reinforcing shall not be straightened or rebent unless specifically shown on the drawings.

Bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings shall not be used. Coiled reinforcement shall not be used.

I. Dowel Adhesive System shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and as required in Article 2.04 above. A representative of the manufacturer must be on site prior to adhesive dowel installation to provide instruction on proper installation procedures for all adhesive dowel installers. Testing of adhesive dowels shall be as indicated below. If the dowels have a hook at the end to be embedded in subsequent work, an approved mechanical coupler shall be provided at a convenient distance from the face of existing concrete to facilitate adhesive dowel testing while maintaining required hook embedment in subsequent work.

J. All adhesive dowel installations in the horizontal or overhead orientation shall be conducted by a certified Adhesive Anchor Installer as certified by ACI/CSRI per ACI 318-11 9.2.2. Current AAI Certificated must be submitted to the Engineer of Record for approval prior to commencement of any adhesive anchor installations.

K. Adhesive Dowel Testing

1. At all locations where adhesive dowels are shown on the Drawings, at least 25 percent of all adhesive dowels installed shall be tested to the value indicated on the Drawings, with a minimum of one tested dowel per group. If no test value is indicated on the Drawings but the installed dowel is under direct tension, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer to verify the required test value.

2. Contractor shall submit a plan and schedule indicating locations of dowels to be tested, load test values and proposed dowel testing procedure (including a diagram of the testing equipment proposed for use) prior to conducting any testing. The testing equipment shall have a minimum of three support points and shall be of sufficient size to locate the edge of supports no closer than two times the anchor embedment depth from the center of the anchor.

3. Where Contract Documents indicate adhesive dowel design is the Contractor’s responsibility, the Contractor shall submit a plan and schedule indicating locations of dowels to be tested and load test values, sealed by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the State of California. The Contractor shall also submit documentation indicating the Contractor’s testing procedures have been reviewed and the proposed procedures are acceptable.


4. Adhesive Dowel shall have no visible indications of displacement or damage during or after the proof test. Concrete cracking in the vicinity of the dowel after loading shall be considered a failure. Dowels exhibiting damage shall be removed and replaced. If more than 5 percent of tested dowels fail, then 100 percent of dowels shall be proof tested.

5. Proof testing of adhesive dowels shall be performed by an independent testing

laboratory hired directly by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs of all testing, including additional testing required due to previously failed tests.

3.05 SPLICING

A. Reinforcing bar splices shall only be used at locations shown on the Drawings. When it is necessary to splice reinforcing at points other than where shown, the splice shall be as acceptable to the Engineer.

B. The length of lap for reinforcing bars, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings shall be in

accordance with ACI 318 for a class B splice. C. Laps of welded wire fabric shall be in accordance with ACI 318. Adjoining sheets shall be

securely tied together with No. 14 tie wire, one tie for each 2 running feet. Wires shall be staggered and tied in such a manner that they cannot slip.

D. Mechanical splices shall be used only where shown on the drawings or when approved by

the Engineer.

E. Couplers which are located at a joint face shall be a type which can be set either flush or recessed from the face as shown on the Drawings. The couplers shall be sealed during concrete placement to completely eliminate concrete or cement paste from entering. After the concrete is placed, couplers intended for future connections shall be plugged and sealed to prevent any contact with water or other corrosive materials. Threaded couplers shall be plugged with plastic plugs which have an O-ring seal.

3.06 INSPECTION

A. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of his intentions to place concrete and shall allow him adequate time to inspect all reinforcing steel before concrete is placed.

B. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of his intentions to place grout in masonry walls

and shall allow him adequate time to inspect all reinforcing steel before grout is placed. 3.07 CUTTING OF EMBEDDED REBAR

A. The Contractor shall not cut embedded rebar cast into structural concrete without prior approval.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 03250

CONCRETE ACCESSORIES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all materials, labor and equipment required to provide all concrete accessories including waterstops, expansion joint material, joint sealants, expansion joint seals, contraction joint inserts, and epoxy bonding agent.


A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork B. Section 03290 - Joints in Concrete C. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete D. Section 07900 - Joint Fillers, Sealants, and Caulking

1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. ASTM C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems

for Concrete 2. ASTM D412 Standard Tests for Rubber Properties in Tension 3. ASTM D 624 Standard Test method for Rubber Property - Tear Resistance 4. ASTM D 638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics 5. ASTM D1751 Standard Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint fillers for

Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (nonextruding and resilient bituminous types)

6. ASTM D 1752 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork

Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction

7. ASTM D 1171 Standard Test Method for Ozone Resistance at 500 pphm

10

23

17

BR


8. ASTM D 471 Standard Test Method for Rubber Properties

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's literature on all products specified herein including material certifications.

2. Proposed system for supporting PVC waterstops in position during concrete placement

3. Samples of products if requested by the Engineer.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) WATERSTOPS

A. PVC waterstops for construction joints shall be flat ribbed type, 6 inches wide with a minimum thickness at any point of 3/8 inches.

B. Waterstops for expansion joints shall be ribbed with a center bulb. They shall be 9 inches

wide with a minimum thickness at any point of 3/8 inch unless shown or specified otherwise. The center bulb shall have a minimum outside diameter of 1 inch and a minimum inside diameter of 1/2 inch.

C. The waterstops shall be manufactured from virgin polyvinyl chloride plastic compound and

shall not contain any scrap or reclaimed material or pigment whatsoever. The properties of the polyvinyl chloride compound used, as well as the physical properties of the waterstops, shall exceed the requirements of the U.S. Army Corps. of Engineers' Specification CRD-C572. The waterstop material shall have an off-white, milky color.

D. The required minimum physical characteristics for this material are:

1. Tensile strength - 1,750 psi (ASTM D-638). 2. Ultimate elongation - not less than 280% (ASTM D-638).

E. No reclaimed PVC shall be used for the manufacturing of the waterstops. The Contractor shall furnish certification that the proposed waterstops meet the above requirements.

F. PVC waterstops shall be as manufactured by BoMetals, Inc., DuraJoint Concrete

Accessories, or Sika Greenstreak. G. All waterstop intersections, both vertical and horizontal, shall be made from factory

fabricated corners and transitions. Only straight butt joint splices shall be made in field. 2.02 RETROFIT WATERSTOPS


A. Retrofit waterstops shall be used where specifically shown on Drawings for sealing joints

between existing concrete construction and new construction. B. Retrofit waterstops shall be PVC waterstops fabricated from material as described in Section

2.01 of this Specification. C. Retrofit waterstop shall be attached to existing concrete surface as shown on Drawings. D. Use of split waterstop in lieu of specially fabricated retrofit waterstop will not be acceptable. E. Retrofit Waterstop manufacturer must provide a complete system including all Waterstop,

stainless steel anchoring hardware, and epoxy for installation. F. For construction joints, retrofit waterstop shall be style number 609 by Sika Greenstreak,

RF-638 by BoMetals, Inc., Type 18 kit by DuraJoint Concrete Accessories, or approved equal. For expansion joints, retrofit waterstop shall be style number 667 by Sika Greenstreak, RF-912 by BoMetals, Inc., Type 18-9 kit by DuraJoint Concrete Accessories, or approved equal.

2.03 CHEMICAL RESISTANT WATERSTOPS

A. Where specifically noted on Contract Drawings, chemical resistant waterstops shall be used instead of PVC waterstops.

B. Chemical resistant waterstops for construction joints shall be ribbed with a center bulb. They

shall be 6 inches wide with a minimum thickness at any point of 3/16 inches. C. Chemical resistant waterstops for expansion joints shall be ribbed tear web. They shall be 9

inches wide with a tear web designed to accommodate 1 inch of free movement minimum. D. Chemical resistant retrofit waterstop shall be a minimum of 2½” wide along the ribbed side

and a minimum 5” wide along the side attached to the existing concrete surface. Retrofit waterstop shall include a centerbulb and shall have a minimum thickness of 3/16”. Retrofit waterstop manufacturer shall provide a complete system including waterstop, stainless steel anchoring hardware and epoxy for installation.

E. Chemical resistant waterstops shall be manufactured from a fully crosslinked thermoplastic

vulcanizate rubber. F. Waterstops shall be TPER by BoMetals, Inc., Earth Shield TPV/TPE-R by JP Specialties,

Inc., Westec TPER by Westec Barrier Technologies, or TPE-R by DuraJoint Concrete Accessories.

2.04 HYPALON RUBBER WATERSTOPS

A. Hypalon rubber waterstops shall be Sikadur Combiflex by Sika Corporation or approved equal. Minimum width of waterstop material shall be twelve (12) inches unless shown otherwise on Contract Drawings.


2.05 EXPANDING RUBBER WATERSTOP

A. Expanding rubber shall be designed to expand under hydrostatic conditions. Waterstops shall be Adeka Ultra Seal MC-2010MN by Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc., or Hydrotite CJ-1020-2K by Sika Greenstreak, for concrete thickness greater than nine inches. For thicknesses less than nine inches, Adeka Ultra Seal KBA-1510FF or Hydrotite CJ-1020-2K shall be used.

B. Waterstop shall be a chemically modified natural rubber product with a hydrophilic agent. C. Waterstop has a stainless steel mesh or coextrusion of non-hydrophilic rubber to direct

expansion in the thickness direction and restrict the expansion in the longitudinal direction. 2.06 WATERSTOP ADHESIVE

A. Adhesive between waterstops and existing concrete shall be 20+F Contact Cement by Miracle Adhesives Corporation, Neoprene Adhesive 77-198 by JGF Adhesives, Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel by Sika Corporation, DP-605 NS Urethane Adhesive by 3M Adhesive Systems.

B. Hydrophilic, non-bentonite water swelling elastic sealant shall be used to bond expanding

rubber waterstops to rough surfaces. Hydrophilic elastic sealant shall be P-201 by Adeka Ultra Seal/OCM, Inc., Leakmaster LV-1 by Sika Greenstreak, or approved equal.

2.07 JOINT SEALANTS

A. Joint sealants shall comply with Section 07900, Joint Fillers, Sealants, and Caulking. 2.08 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL

A. Preformed expansion joint material shall be non-extruding, and shall be of the following types: 1. Type I - Sponge rubber, conforming to ASTM D1752, Type I. 2. Type II - Cork, conforming to ASTM D1752, Type II. 3. Type III - Self-expanding cork, conforming to ASTM D1752, Type III.

4. Type IV - Bituminous fiber, conforming to ASTM Designation D1751. 2.09 EXPANSION JOINT SEAL

A. Expansion Joint Seal System shall consist of a preformed neoprene profile, installed using

the same dimensions as the joint gap, bonded with a two-component epoxy adhesive and pressurized during the adhesive cure time.

B. The expansion joint system shall be Hydrozo/Jeene Structural Sealing joint system by

Hydrozo/Jeene, Inc.


2.10 CONTRACTION JOINT INSERTS

A. Contraction joint inserts shall be Zip-Cap by Greenstreak Plastic Products, Zip-Joint by BoMetals, Inc. control joint formers.

2.11 EPOXY BONDING AGENT

A. Epoxy bonding agent shall conform to ASTM C881 and shall be Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J.; Euco #452 Epoxy System, Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, OH, MasterInject 1500 by BASF Master Builder Solutions (BASF).

2.12 EPOXY RESIN BINDER

A. Epoxy resin binder shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C-881, Type III, Grade 3, Class B and C for epoxy resin binder and shall be Sikadur 23, Low-Mod-Gel, manufactured by the Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J., Flexocrete Gel manufactured by DuraJoint Concrete Accessories or Euco #352 Gel, Euclid Chemical Company, MasterEmaco ADH 327 or 327 RS by BASF Master Builder Solutions.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 PVC AND CHEMICAL RESISTANT WATERSTOPS

A. PVC and chemical resistant waterstops shall be provided in all construction and expansion joints in water bearing structures and at other such locations as required by the Drawings.

B. Waterstops shall be carefully positioned so that they are embedded to an equal depth in

concrete on both sides of the joint. They shall be kept free from oil, grease, mortar or other foreign matter. To ensure proper placement, all waterstops shall be secured in correct position at 12" on center along the length of the waterstop on each side, prior to placing concrete. Such method of support shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. Grommets or small pre-punched holes as close to the edges as possible will be acceptable for securing waterstops.

C. Splices in PVC waterstops and chemical resistant waterstops shall be made with a thermostatically controlled heating element. Only straight butt joint splices will be allowed in the field. Factory fabricated corners and transitions shall be used at all intersections. Splices shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended instructions and procedures. At least three satisfactory sample splices shall be made on the site. The Engineer may require tests on these splices by an approved laboratory. The splices shall exhibit not less than 80 percent of the strength of the unspliced material.

D. All splices in waterstops will be subject to rigid review for misalignment, bubbles, inadequate

bond, porosity, cracks, offsets, discoloration, charring, and other defects which would reduce the potential resistance of the material to water pressure at any point. All defective joints shall be replaced with material which will pass said review and all faulty material shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.


E. Retrofit waterstops shall be installed as shown on Contract Drawings using approved

waterstop adhesive and Type 316 stainless steel batten bars and expansion anchors. F. Waterstop installation and splicing defects which are unacceptable include, but are not

limited to the following:

1. Tensile strength not less than 80 percent of parent material. 2. Overlapped (not spliced) Waterstop. 3. Misalignment of Waterstop geometry at any point greater than 1/16 inch. 4. Visible porosity or charred or burnt material in weld area. 5. Visible signs of splice separation when splice (24 hours or greater) is bent by hand at

sharp angle. 3.02 HYPALON RUBBER AND EXPANDING RUBBER WATERSTOPS

A. Waterstops shall be installed only where shown on the Drawings. B. Waterstops shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.03 WATERSTOP ADHESIVE

A. Adhesive shall be applied to both contact surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Adhesive shall be used where waterstops are attached to existing concrete surfaces.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL AND SEALANTS

A. Type I, II, or III shall be used in all expansion joints in structures and concrete pavements unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. Type IV shall be used in sidewalk and curbing and other locations specifically shown on the Drawings.

B. All expansion joints exposed in the finish work, exterior and interior, shall be sealed with the

specified joint sealant. Expansion joint material and sealants shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures and as shown on the Drawings.

C. Expansion joint material that will be exposed after removal of forms shall be cut and trimmed

to ensure a neat appearance and shall completely fill the joint except for the space required for the sealant. The material shall be held securely in place and no concrete shall be allowed to enter the joint or the space for the sealant and destroy the proper functions of the joint.

D. A bond breaker shall be used between expansion joint material and sealant. The joint shall

be thoroughly clean and free from dirt and debris before the primer and the sealant are


applied. Where the finished joint will be visible, masking of the adjoining surfaces shall be carried out to avoid their discoloration. The sealant shall be neatly tooled into place and its finished surfaces shall present a clean and even appearance.

E. Type 1 joint sealant shall be used in all expansion and contraction joints in concrete, except

where Type 7 or Type 8 is required as stated below, and wherever else specified or shown on the Drawings. It shall be furnished in pour grade or gun grade depending on installation requirements. Primers shall be used as required by the manufacturer. The sealant shall be furnished in colors as directed by the Engineer.

F. Type 8 joint sealant shall be used in all concrete pavements and floors subject to heavy

traffic and wherever else specified or shown on the Drawings. G. Type 7 joint sealant shall be used for all joints in chlorine contact tanks and wherever

specified or shown on the Drawings. 3.05 EXPANSION JOINT SEAL

A. The expansion joint seal system shall be installed as shown on the Drawings in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.06 CONTRACTION JOINT INSERTS

A. For contraction joints in slabs, inserts shall be floated in fresh concrete during finishing. B. For contraction joints in walls, inserts shall be secured in place prior to casting wall. C. Inserts shall be installed true to line at the locations of all contraction joints as shown on the

Drawings. D. Inserts shall extend into concrete sufficient depth as indicated on the Drawings or specified

in Section 03290, Joints in Concrete. E. Inserts shall not be removed from concrete until concrete has cured sufficiently to prevent

chipping or spalling of joint edges due to inadequate concrete strength. 3.07 EPOXY BONDING AGENT

A. The Contractor shall use an epoxy bonding agent for bonding fresh concrete to existing concrete as shown on the Drawings.

B. Bonding surface shall be clean, sound and free of all dust, laitance, grease, form release

agents, curing compounds, and any other foreign particles. C. Application of bonding agent shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. D. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against existing concrete if epoxy bonding agent has lost

its tackiness.


3.08 EPOXY RESIN BINDER

A. Epoxy resin binder shall be used to seal all existing rebar cut and burned off during demolition operations. Exposed rebar shall be burned back 1/2-inch minimum into existing concrete and the resulting void filled with epoxy resin binder.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 03290

JOINTS IN CONCRETE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all materials, labor and equipment required for the construction of all joints in concrete specified herein and shown on the Drawings.

B. Types of joints in concrete shall be as follows:

1. Construction Joints - Joints between adjacent concrete placements continuously

connected with reinforcement. 2. Expansion Joints - Joints in concrete which allow thermal expansion and contraction

of concrete. Reinforcement terminates within concrete on each side of joint. 3. Contraction Joints - Joints formed in concrete to provide a weakened plane in

concrete section to control formation of shrinkage cracks. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork B. Section 03250 - Concrete Accessories C. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete D. Section 07900 - Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking



1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings 2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 3. ACI 350 – Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures 4. ACI 224.3 – Joints in Concrete Construction

03

07

17

BR


1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Layout drawings showing location and type of all joints to be placed in each structure.

2. Details of proposed joints in each structure. 3. For sawcut contraction joints submit documentation indicating the following:

a. Proposed method of sawcutting indicating early entry or conventional sawing. b. Description of how work is to be performed including equipment to be

utilized, size of crew performing the work and curing methods. c. Description of alternate method in case of time constraint issues or failure of

equipment. PART 2 -- MATERIALS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. All materials required for joint construction shall comply with Section 03250 - Concrete Accessories, and Section 07900 - Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

A. Construction joints shall be as shown on the Drawings. Otherwise, Contractor shall submit description of the joint and its location to Engineer for approval.

B. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, construction joints shall be located near the middle

of the spans of slabs, beams, and girders unless a beam intersects a girder at this point. In this case, the joints in the girders shall be offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam. Joints in walls and columns shall be at the underside of floors, slabs, beams, or girders and the top of footings or floor slabs unless noted otherwise on Drawings. Beams, girders, brackets, column capitals, haunches, and drop panels shall be placed at the same time as slabs. Joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement.

C. Maximum distance between horizontal joints in slabs and vertical joints in walls shall be

45'-0". For exposed walls with fluid or earth on the opposite side, the spacing between vertical and horizontal joints shall be a maximum of 25’-0”.

D. All corners shall be part of a continuous placement, and should a construction joint be

required, the joint shall not be located closer than five feet from a corner.


E. All reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric shall be continued across construction joints. Keys and inclined dowels shall be provided as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Longitudinal keys shall be provided in all joints in walls and between walls and slabs or footings, except as specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. Size of keys shall be as shown on the Drawings.

F. All joints in water bearing structures shall have a waterstop. All joints below grade in walls or

slabs which enclose an accessible area shall have a waterstop. 3.02 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Size and location of expansion joints shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. All expansion joints in water-bearing structures shall have a center-bulb type waterstop. All

expansion joints below grade in walls or slabs which enclose an accessible area shall have a center-bulb type waterstop. Waterstop shall be as shown on Drawings and specified in Section 03250, Concrete Accessories.

3.03 CONTRACTION JOINTS

A. Location of contraction joints shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Contraction joints shall be formed either by sawcutting or with contraction joint inserts as

specified in Section 03250, Concrete Accessories. Sawcutting of joints will not be permitted unless specifically approved by the Engineer.

C. If approved by the Engineer, sawcutting of contraction joints in lieu of forming shall conform

to the following requirements:

1. Joints shall be sawed as soon as the concrete can support foot traffic without leaving any impression, normally the same day as concrete is placed and in no case longer than 24 hours after concrete is placed.

2. Curing shall be performed using wet curing methods as indicated in Section 03370 –

Concrete Curing. Curing mats, fabrics or sheeting materials shall remain in place to the extent possible while cutting of joint is being performed. Curing materials shall only be removed as required and shall be immediately reinstalled once cutting of the joint has been completed.

3. Depth of joint shall be as shown on the drawings or noted in these specifications. At

locations where the joint cannot be installed to full depth due to curbs or other stopping points hand tools shall be used to complete joints.

4. Saw cut joints shall meet the requirements of ACI 224.3, Section 2.8, Jointing

Practice.

D. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, depth of contraction joints shall be 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete and 1/3 of concrete thickness in unreinforced concrete.


3.04 JOINT PREPARATION

A. No concrete shall be allowed to enter the joint or the space for the sealant and destroy the proper functions of the joint.

B. The surface of the concrete at all joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and all laitance removed

by wire brushing, air or light sand blasting. C. The joint shall be thoroughly clean and free from dirt and debris before the primer and the

sealant are applied. Where the finished joint will be visible, masking of the adjoining surfaces shall be carried out to avoid their discoloration. The sealant shall be neatly tooled into place and its finished surface shall present a clean and even appearance.

D. All joints shall be sealed as shown on the Drawings and specified in Section 03250,

Concrete Accessories.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Provide all labor, equipment, materials and services necessary for the manufacture, transportation and placement of all plain and reinforced concrete work, as shown on the Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer.

B. The requirements in this section shall apply to the following types of concrete:

1. Class A2 Concrete: Normal weight structural concrete in all structures other than structures qualifying as environmental concrete structures, and for all sidewalks and pavement.

2. Class A4 Concrete: Normal weight structural concrete to be used where specifically

called for on Contract Drawings or areas where specifically requested by Contractor and approved by Engineer. Class A4 concrete is identical to Class A2 concrete except that coarse aggregate specified in Article 2.05 below shall be Size #8 in accordance with ASTM C33.

3. Class B Concrete: Normal weight structural concrete used for duct bank

encasements, catch basins, fence and guard post embedment, concrete fill, and other areas where specifically noted on Contract Drawings.


A. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork

B. Section 03200 - Reinforcing Steel

C. Section 03250 - Concrete Accessories

D. Section 03290 - Joints in Concrete

E. Section 03350 - Concrete Finishes

F. Section 03370 - Concrete Curing G. Section 03600 - Grout


10

09

18

BR


A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid.

1. California Building Code 2. ACI 214 Guide to Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete 3. ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete 4. ACI 304 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 5. ACI 305 Guide to Hot Weather Concreting 6. ACI 306 Guide to Cold Weather Concreting 7. ACI 309 Guide for Consolidation of Concrete 8. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and

Commentary 9. ACI 350 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete

Structures 10. ASTM C 31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test

Specimens in the Field 11. ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 12. ASTM C 39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens 13. ASTM C42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores

and Sawed Beams of Concrete 14. ASTM C 88 Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by use of

Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate 15. ASTM C 94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete 16. ASTM C 114 Standard Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic

Cement 17. ASTM C 136 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates 18. ASTM C 138 Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air

Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete


19. ASTM C 143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 20. ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement 21. ASTM C 172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete 22. ASTM C 192 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test

Specimens in the Laboratory 23. ASTM C 231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete

by the Pressure Method 24. ASTM C 260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 25. ASTM C 295 Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for

Concrete 26. ASTM C 457 Standard Test Method for Microscopical Determination of the

Air-Void System in Hardened Concrete 27. ASTM C 494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 28. ASTM C 595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements 29. ASTM C 618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined

Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete 30. ASTM C 989 Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and

Mortars 31. ASTM C 1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete

Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation

32. ASTM C 1260 Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar

Bar Method) 33. ASTM C 1567 Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-Silica

Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)

34. ASTM C 1602 Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production

of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 35. ASTM C 1778 Reducing the Risk of Deleterious Alkali – Aggregate Reaction in

Concrete 1.04 SUBMITTALS



1. Sources of all materials and certifications of compliance with specifications for all

materials.

2. Certified current (less than 1 year old) chemical analysis of the Portland Cement or Blended Cement to be used.

3. Certified current (less than 1 year old) chemical analysis of fly ash or slag cement to

be used.

4. Aggregate test results showing compliance with required standards, i.e., sieve analysis, potential reactivity, aggregate soundness tests, petrographic analysis, mortar bar expansion testing, etc.

5. Manufacturer's data on all admixtures stating compliance with required standards.

6. Concrete mix design for each class of concrete specified herein.

7. Field experience records and/or trial mix data for the proposed concrete mixes for

each class of concrete specified herein.


A. Tests on materials used in the production of concrete shall be required as specified in PART 2 -- PRODUCTS. These tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Trial concrete mixes shall be tested when required in accordance with Article 3.01 at no

additional cost to the Owner.

C. Field quality control tests, as specified in Article 3.10, unless otherwise stated, will be performed by a materials testing consultant employed by the Owner. However, the Contractor shall be charged for the cost of any additional tests and investigation on work performed which does not meet the Specifications. Any individual who samples and tests concrete to determine if the concrete is being produced in accordance with this Specification shall be certified as a Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade I, in accordance with ACI CP-2. Testing laboratory shall conform to requirements of ASTM C-1077.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 HYDRAULIC CEMENT

A. Portland Cement


1. Portland Cement shall be Type II conforming to ASTM C 150. Type I cement may be used provided either fly ash or slag cement is also included in the mix in accordance with Articles 2.02 or 2.03 respectively.

2. When potentially reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are to be used in

concrete mix, cement shall meet the following requirements:

a. For concrete mixed with only Portland Cement, the total alkalies in the cement (calculated as the percentage of NA2O plus 0.658 times the percentage of K2O) shall not exceed 0.40%.

b. For concrete mixed with Portland Cement and an appropriate amount of fly ash (Article 2.02) or slag cement (Article 2.03) the total alkalies in the Portland Cement (calculated as the percentage of NA2O plus 0.658 times the percentage of K2O) shall not exceed 0.85%.

3. When non-reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are used in concrete mix,

total alkalies in the cement shall not exceed 1.0%. 4. The proposed Portland Cement shall not contain more than 8% tricalcium aluminate

and more than 12% tetracalcium aluminoferrite. B. Blended Cement

1. Blended cements shall be Type IP (Portland Fly Ash Cement) or Type IS (Portland Slag Cement) conforming to ASTM C 595.

2. Type IP cement shall be an interground blend of Portland Cement and fly ash in

which the fly ash constituent is between 15% and 25% of the weight of the total blend.

3. Type IS cement shall be an interground blend of Portland Cement and slag cement

in which the slag constituent is between 35% and 50% of the weight of the total blend.

4. Fly ash and slag cement used in the production of blended cements shall meet the

requirements of Articles 2.02 and 2.03, respectively. 5. When reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are used in concrete mix, the

total alkalies in the Portland Cement (calculated as the percentage of Na2O plus 0.658 times the percentage of K2O) shall not exceed 0.85%. The percentage of fly ash or slag cement shall be set to meet provisions of Article 2.05.G.2.

C. Different types of cement shall not be mixed nor shall they be used alternately except when

authorized in writing by the Engineer. Different brands of cement or the same brand from different mills may be used alternately. A resubmittal will be required if different cements are proposed during the Project.


D. Cement shall be stored in a suitable weather-tight building so as to prevent deterioration or contamination. Cement which has become caked, partially hydrated, or otherwise damaged will be rejected.

2.02 FLY ASH

A. Fly ash shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 618 for Class F, except that the loss on ignition shall not exceed 4%. Fly ash shall also meet the optional physical requirements for uniformity as shown in Table 3 of ASTM C 618.

B. For fly ash to be used in the production of type IP cement, the Pozzolan Activity Index shall

be greater than 75% as specified in Table 3 of ASTM C 595.

C. Where reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are used in concrete mix, the fly ash constituent shall be between 15% and 25% of the total weight of the combined Portland Cement and fly ash. The percentage of fly ash shall be set to meet the mean mortar bar expansion requirements in provisions of Article 2.05.G.2.

D. For Type A1 concrete as required for use in environmental concrete structures, i.e. process

structures or fluid containing structures, inclusion of fly ash or slag cement in the concrete mix, is mandatory.

E. Additional fly ash shall not be included in concrete mixed with Type IS or IP cement.

2.03 SLAG CEMENT

A. Slag cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 989 including tests for effectiveness of slag in preventing excessive expansion due to alkali-aggregate reactivity as described in Appendix X-3 of ASTM C 989.

B. Where reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are used in concrete mix, the slag

cement constituent shall be between 35% and 40% of the total weight of the combined Portland Cement and slag. The percentage of slag cement shall be set to meet the mean mortar bar expansion requirements in provisions of Article 2.05.G.2.

C. For Type A1 concrete as required for use in environmental concrete structures, i.e. process

structures or fluid containing structures, inclusion of fly ash or slag cement in the concrete mix, is mandatory.

D. Additional slag cement shall not be included in concrete mixed with type IS or IP cement.

2.04 WATER

A. Water used for mixing concrete shall be clear, potable and free from deleterious substances such as objectionable quantities of silty organic matter, alkali, salts and other impurities.

B. Water shall not contain more than 100 PPM chloride.

C. Water shall not contain more than 500 PPM dissolved solids.


D. Water shall have a pH in the range of 4.5 to 8.5. E. Water shall meet requirements of ASTM C 1602.

2.05 AGGREGATES

A. All aggregates used in normal weight concrete shall conform to ASTM C 33. B. Fine Aggregate (Sand) in the various concrete mixes shall consist of natural or

manufactured siliceous sand, clean and free from deleterious substances, and graded within the limits of ASTM C 33.

C. Coarse aggregates shall consist of hard, clean, durable gravel, crushed gravel or crushed

rock. Coarse aggregate shall be size #57 or #67 as graded within the limits given in ASTM C 33 unless otherwise specified.

D. For Class A4 concrete, coarse aggregate shall be Size #8 in accordance with ASTM C33. E. Aggregates shall be tested for gradation by sieve analysis tests in conformance with

ASTM C 136. F. Aggregates shall be tested for soundness in accordance with ASTM C 88. The loss

resulting after five cycles shall not exceed 10 percent for fine or coarse aggregate when using either magnesium sulfate or sodium sulfate.

G. All aggregates shall be evaluated in accordance with ASTM C 1778 to determine potential

reactivity. All aggregates shall be considered reactive unless they meet the requirements below for non-reactive aggregates. Aggregates with a lithology essentially similar to sources in the same region found to be reactive in service shall be considered reactive regardless of the results of the tests above.

1. Non-reactive aggregates shall meet the following requirements:

A petrographic analysis in accordance with ASTM C295 shall be performed to identify the constituents of the fine and coarse aggregate. Non-reactive aggregates shall meet the following limitations:

(a) Optically strained, microfractured, or microcrystalline quartz, 5.0%,

maximum.

(b) Chert or chalcedony, 3.0%, maximum.

(c) Tridymite or cristobalite, 1.0%, maximum.

(d) Opal, 0.5%, maximum.

e) Natural volcanic glass in volcanic rocks, 3.0%, maximum.


2. Concrete mixed with reactive aggregates shall meet the following requirements:

(a) If aggregates are deemed potentially reactive as per ASTM C-1778 and fly ash or slag cement is included in proposed concrete mix design, proposed concrete mix including proposed aggregates shall be evaluated by ASTM C-1567. Mean mortar bar expansions at 16 days shall be less than 0.08%. Tests shall be made using exact proportion of all materials proposed for use on the job in design mix submitted.

(b) If aggregates are deemed potentially reactive as per ASTM C-1778 and a

straight cement mix without fly ash or slag cement is proposed for concrete mix design, aggregates shall be evaluated by ASTM C-1260. Mean mortar bar expansions at 16 days shall be less than 0.08%.

H. Contractor shall submit a new trial mix to the Engineer for approval whenever a different

aggregate or gradation is proposed. 2.06 STRUCTURAL MACRO FIBERS

A. Not used. 2.07 ADMIXTURES

A. Air entraining agent shall be added to all concrete unless noted otherwise. The agent shall consist of a neutralized vinsol resin solution or a purified hydrocarbon with a cement catalyst which will provide entrained air in the concrete in accordance with ASTM C 260. The admixture proposed shall be selected in advance so that adequate samples may be obtained and the required tests made. Air content of concrete, when placed, shall be within the ranges given in the concrete mix design.

B. The following admixtures are required or used for water reduction, slump increase, and/or adjustment of initial set. Admixtures permitted shall confirm to the requirements of ASTM C 494. Admixtures shall be non-toxic after 30 days and shall be compatible with and made by the same manufacturer as the air-entraining admixtures.

1. Water reducing admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A and shall contain

no more than 0.05% chloride ions. Acceptable products are “Eucon Series” by the Euclid Chemical Company, “Master Pozzolith Series” by BASF, and “Plastocrete Series” by Sika Corporation.

2. High range water reducer shall be sulfonated polymer conforming to ASTM C 494,

Type F or G. The high range water reducer shall be added to the concrete at either the batch plant or at the job site and may be used in conjunction with a water reducing admixture. The high range water reducer shall be accurately measured and pressure injected into the mixer as a single dose by an experienced technician. A standby system shall be provided and tested prior to each day’s operation of the job site system. Concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for a minimum of 100 mixer revolutions after the addition of the high range water reducer. Acceptable products are “Eucon 37” or Plastol 5000 by the Euclid Chemical Company, “Master


Rheobuild 1000 or Master Glenium Series” by BASF, and “Daracem 100 or Advaflow Series” by W.R. Grace.

3. A non-chloride, non-corrosive accelerating admixture may be used where specifically

approved by the Engineer. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type C or E, and shall not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. The admixture manufacturer must have long-term non-corrosive test data from an independent testing laboratory (of at least a year’s duration) using an acceptable accelerated corrosion test method such as that using electrical potential measures. Acceptable products are “Accelguard 80/90 or NCA” by the Euclid Chemical Company and “Daraset” by W.R. Grace.

4. A water reducing retarding admixture may be used where specifically approved by

the Engineer. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type D and shall not contain more than 0.05% chloride ions. Acceptable products are “Eucon NR or Eucon Retarder 100” by the Euclid Chemical Company, “Pozzolith Retarder” by BASF, and “Plastiment” by Sika Corporation.

C. Admixtures containing calcium chloride, thiocyanate or more than 0.05 percent chloride ions

are not permitted. The addition of admixtures to prevent freezing is not permitted.

D. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data including the chloride ion content of each admixture and certification from the admixture manufacturer that all admixtures utilized in the design mix are compatible with one another and properly proportioned prior to mix design review.

2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

A. The proportions of cement, aggregates, admixtures and water used in the concrete mixes shall be based on the results of field experience or preferably laboratory trial mixes in conformance with Section 5.3. "Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures" of ACI 318 and ACI 350. When trial mixes are used they shall also conform to Article 3.01 of this Section of the Specifications. If field experience records are used, concrete strength results shall be from concrete mixed with all of the ingredients proposed for use on job used in similar proportions to mix proposed for use on job. Contractor shall submit verification confirming this stipulation has been followed. Field experience records and/or trial mix data used as the basis for the proposed concrete mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer along with the proposed mix.

B. Structural concrete shall conform to the following requirements. Cementitious materials

refer to the total combined weight of all cement, fly ash, and slag cement contained in the mix.


1. Compressive Strength (28-Day) a. Concrete Class A1, A5 4,500 psi (minimum) b. Concrete Class A2, A3, A4 4,000 psi (minimum) c. Concrete Class B 3,000 psi (minimum) 2. Water/cementitious materials

ratio, by weight

Maximum Minimum a. Concrete Class A1, A5, 0.42 0.39 b. Concrete Class A2, A3, A4 0.45 0.39 c. Concrete Class B 0.50 0.39 3. Slump range 4" nominal unless high range water reducing

admixture is used. 8” max if high range water reducing admixture is

used. 4. Air Content a. Class A1, A2, A4, A5 6% ±1.5% b. Class A3, B 3% Max (non air-entrained)

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 TRIAL MIXES

A. When trial mixes are used to confirm the quality of a proposed concrete mix in accordance with Section 5.3, "Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures" of ACI 318 and ACI 350, an independent qualified testing laboratory designated and retained by the Contractor shall test a trial batch of each of the preliminary concrete mixes submitted by the Contractor. The trial batches shall be prepared using the aggregates, cement and admixtures proposed for the project. The trial batch materials shall be of a quantity such that the testing laboratory can obtain enough samples to satisfy requirements stated below. Tests on individual materials stated in PART 2 -- PRODUCTS should already be performed before any trial mix is done. The cost of laboratory trial batch tests for each specified concrete mix will be borne by the Contractor and the Contractor shall furnish and deliver the materials to the testing laboratory at no cost to the Owner.

B. The independent testing laboratory shall prepare a minimum of fifteen (15) standard test

cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31 in addition to conducting slump (ASTM C 143), air content (C 231) and unit weight (C 138) tests. Compressive strength test on the cylinders shall subsequently be performed by the same laboratory in accordance with ASTM C 39 as follows: Test 3 cylinders at age 7 days; test 3 cylinders at age 21 days; test 3 cylinders at age 28 days and test 3 cylinders at 56 days. The cylinders shall be carefully identified as "Trial Mix, Contract No. , Product ." If the average 28-day compressive


strength of the trial mix is less than that specified, or if any single cylinder falls below the required strength by more than 500 psi, the mix shall be corrected, another trial batch prepared, test cylinders taken, and new tests performed as before. Any such additional trial batch testing required shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Adjustments to the mix shall be considered refinements to the mix design and shall not be the basis for extra compensation to the Contractor.

3.02 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE

A. All concrete shall be machine mixed. Hand mixing of concrete will not be permitted. The Contractor may supply concrete from a ready mix plant or from a site mixed plant. In selecting the source for concrete production the Contractor shall carefully consider its capability for providing quality concrete at a rate commensurate with the requirements of the placements so that well bonded, homogenous concrete, free of cold joints, is assured.

B. Ready-Mixed Concrete

1. At the Contractor's option, ready-mixed concrete may be used meeting the

requirements for materials, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing as specified herein and in accordance with ASTM C 94.

2. Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically-actuated counters by which the

number of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter shall be of the resettable, recording type, and shall be mounted in the driver's cab. The counters shall be actuated at the time of starting mixers at mixing speeds.

3. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less than 100

revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of equipment. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. All materials including mixing water shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of revolutions of mixing.

4. Truck mixers and their operation shall be such that the concrete throughout the

mixed batch, as discharged, is within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to consistency, mix and grading. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4 and 3/4 points of the load during discharge give slumps differing by more than one inch when the specified slump is 3 inches or less, or if they differ by more than 2 inches when the specified slump is more than 3 inches, the mixer shall not be used on the work unless the causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is verified by additional slump tests. All mechanical details of the mixer, such as water measuring and discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed of rotation, general mechanical condition of the unit and clearance of the drum, shall be checked before a further attempt to use the unit will be permitted.

5. Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered to the site for the work and discharge shall

be completed before the drum has been revolved 300 revolutions and within the time requirements stated in Article 3.03 of this Section.


6. Each and every concrete delivery shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket containing at least the following information:

a. Date and truck number b. Ticket number c. Mix designation of concrete d. Cubic yards of concrete e. Cement brand, type and weight in pounds f. Weight in pounds of fine aggregate (sand) g. Weight in pounds of coarse aggregate (stone) h. Air entraining agent, brand, and weight in pounds and ounces i. Other admixtures, brand, and weight in pounds and ounces j. Water, in gallons, stored in attached tank k. Water, in gallons, maximum that can be added without exceeding design

water/cementitious materials ratio l. Water, in gallons, actually used (by truck driver) m. Time of loading n. Time of delivery to job (by truck driver)

7. Any truck delivering concrete to the job site, which is not accompanied by a delivery

ticket showing the above information will be rejected and such truck shall immediately depart from the job site.

8. The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be

permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready-mixed concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at the batching plant by the Engineer.

C. Site Mixed Concrete

1. Scales for weighing concrete ingredients shall be accurate when in use within ±0.4

percent of their total capacities. Standard test weights shall be available to permit checking scale accuracy.

2. Operation of batching equipment shall be such that the concrete ingredients are

consistently measured within the following tolerances:

a. Cement, fly ash, or slag cement ± 1 percent b. Water ± 1 percent c. Aggregates ± 2 percent

d. Admixtures ± 3 percent3. Each batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter in advance of the cement and aggregates. Water shall continue for a period which may extend to the end of the first 25 percent of the specified mixing time. Controls shall be provided to prevent batched ingredients from entering the mixer before the previous batch has been completely discharged.

4. The concrete shall be mixed in a batch mixer capable of thoroughly combining the

aggregates, cement, and water into a uniform mass within the specified mixing time,


and of discharging the concrete without harmful segregation. The mixer shall bear a manufacturer's rating plate indicating the rate capacity and the recommended revolutions per minute and shall be operated in accordance therewith.

5. Mixers with a rate capacity of 1 cu.yd. or larger shall conform to the requirements of

the Plant Mixer Manufacturers' Division of the Concrete Plant Manufacturers' Bureau.

6. Except as provided below, batches of 1 cu. yd. or less shall be mixed for not less

than 1 minute. The mixing time shall be increased 15 seconds for each cubic yard or fraction thereof of additional capacity.

7. Shorter mixing time may be permitted provided performance tests made in

accordance with of ASTM C 94 indicate that the time is sufficient to produce uniform concrete.

8. Controls shall be provided to insure that the batch cannot be discharged until the

required mixing time has elapsed. At least three-quarters of the required mixing time shall take place after the last of the mixing water has been added.

9. The interior of the mixer shall be free of accumulations that will interfere with mixing

action. Mixer blades shall be replaced when they have lost 10 percent of their original height.

10. Air-entraining admixtures and other chemical admixtures shall be charged into the

mixer as solutions and shall be measured by means of an approved mechanical dispensing device. The liquid shall be considered a part of the mixing water. Admixtures that cannot be added in solution may be weighed or may be measured by volume if so recommended by the manufacturer.

11. If two or more admixtures are used in the concrete, they shall be added separately to

avoid possible interaction that might interfere with the efficiency of either admixture or adversely affect the concrete.

12. Addition of retarding admixtures shall be completed within 1 minute after addition of

water to the cement has been completed, or prior to the beginning of the last three-quarters of the required mixing, whichever occurs first. Retarding admixtures shall not be used unless approved by the Engineer.

13. Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use and within the time and mixing

requirements of ASTM C 94.3.03 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. No concrete shall be placed prior to approval of the concrete mix design. Concrete placement shall conform to the recommendations of ACI 304.

B. Prior to concrete placement, all reinforcement shall be securely and properly fastened in its

correct position. Formwork shall be clean, oiled and form ties at construction joints shall be retightened. All bucks, sleeves, castings, hangers, pipe, conduits, bolts, anchors, wire, and any other fixtures required to be embedded therein shall be in place. Forms for openings to


be left in the concrete shall be in place and anchored by the Contractor. All loose debris in bottoms of forms or in keyways shall be removed and all debris, water, snow, ice and foreign matter shall be removed from the space to be occupied by the concrete. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of placement, allowing sufficient time for a concurrent inspection and for any corrective measures which are subsequently required.

C. On horizontal joints where concrete is to be placed on hardened concrete, flowing concrete

containing a high range water reducing admixture or cement grout shall be placed with a slump not less than 8 inches for the initial placement at the base of the wall. Concrete or cement grout shall meet all strength and service requirements specified herein for applicable class of concrete. This concrete shall be worked well into the irregularities of the hard surface.

D. All concrete shall be placed during the daylight hours except with the consent of the

Engineer. If special permission is obtained to carry on work during the night, adequate lighting must be provided.

E. When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, as indicated

by the Specifications, water may be added to bring the concrete within the specified slump range provided that the design water-cementitious materials ratio is not exceeded. The water shall be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at least half of the total mixing required. Water may be added only to full trucks. On-site tempering shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing a concrete mix that meets all specified requirements.

F. Concrete shall be conveyed as rapidly as practicable to the point of deposit by methods

which prevent the separation or loss of the ingredients. It shall be so deposited that rehandling will be unnecessary. Discharge of the concrete to its point of deposit shall be completed within 90 minutes after the addition of the cement to the aggregates. In hot weather, or under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, the time between the introduction of the cement to the aggregates and discharge shall not exceed the requirements stated in Article 3.09 of this Section.

G. Where concrete is conveyed to position by chutes, a practically continuous flow in the chute

shall be maintained. The angle and discharge arrangement of the chute shall be such as to prevent segregation of the concrete ingredients. The delivery end of the chute shall be as close as possible to the point of deposit and in no case shall the free pour from the delivery end of the chute exceed five feet, unless approved otherwise.

H. Special care must be exercised to prevent splashing of forms or reinforcement with

concrete, and any such splashes or accumulations of hardened or partially hardened concrete on the forms or reinforcement above the general level of the concrete already in place must be removed before the work proceeds. Concrete shall be placed in all forms in such way as to prevent any segregation.

I. Placing of concrete shall be so regulated that the pressure caused by the wet concrete shall

not exceed that used in the design of the forms.

J. All concrete for walls shall be placed through openings in the form spaced at frequent intervals or through tremies (heavy duct canvas, rubber, etc.), equipped with suitable hopper


heads. Tremies shall be of variable lengths so the free fall shall not exceed five (5) feet and a sufficient number shall be placed in the form to ensure the concrete is kept level at all times.

K. When placing concrete which is to be exposed, sufficient illumination shall be provided in the

interior of the forms so the concrete, at places of deposit, is visible from deck and runways.

L. Concrete shall be placed so as to thoroughly embed all reinforcement, inserts, and fixtures.

M. When forms are removed, surfaces shall be even and dense, free from aggregate pockets or honeycomb. To achieve this, concrete shall be consolidated using mechanical vibration, supplemented by forking and spading by hand in the corners and angle of forms and along form surfaces while the concrete is plastic under the vibratory action. Consolidation shall conform to ACI 309.

N. Mechanical vibration shall be applied directly to the concrete, unless otherwise approved by

the Engineer. The bottom of vibrators used on floor slabs must not be permitted to ride the form supporting the slab. Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of freshly placed concrete by a vertical penetration of the vibrator. Vibrators shall not be used to move concrete laterally within the forms.

O. The intensity of vibration shall be sufficient to cause settlement of the concrete into place

and to produce monolithic joining with the preceding layer. It shall be of sufficient duration to accomplish thorough compaction and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures with a vibrator transmitting not less than 7,500 impulses per minute. Since the duration of vibration per square foot of surface is dependent on the frequency (impulses per minute), size of vibrator, and slump of concrete, the length of time must therefore be determined in the field. Vibration, however, shall not be continued in any one location to the extent that pools of grout are formed.

P. Care shall be taken to prevent cold joints when placing concrete in any portion of the work.

The concrete placing rate shall be such as to ensure that each layer is placed while the previous layer is soft or plastic, so that the two layers can be made monolithic by penetration of the vibrators. Maximum thickness of concrete layers shall be 18 inches. The surface of the concrete shall be level whenever a run of concrete is stopped.

Q. To prevent featheredges, construction joints located at the tops of horizontal lifts near

sloping exposed concrete surfaces shall be inclined near the exposed surface, so the angle between such inclined surface and the exposed concrete surface will be not less than 50°.

R. In placing unformed concrete on slopes, the concrete shall be placed ahead of a non-

vibrated slip-form screed extending approximately 2-1/2 feet back from its leading edge. The method of placement shall provide a uniform finished surface with the deviation from the straight line less than 1/8 inch in any concrete placement. Concrete ahead of the slip-form screed shall be consolidated by internal vibrators so as to ensure complete filling under the slip-form. Prior to placement of concrete on sloped walls or slabs, the Contractor shall submit a plan specifically detailing methods and sequence of placements, proposed concrete screed equipment, location of construction joints and waterstops, and/or any proposed deviations from the aforementioned to the Engineer for review and approval.


S. Concrete shall not be placed during rains sufficiently heavy or prolonged to wash mortar from coarse aggregate on the forward slopes of the placement. Once placement of concrete has commenced in a block, placement shall not be interrupted by diverting the placing equipment to other uses.

3.04 PLACING FLOOR SLABS ON GRADE

A. The subgrade for slabs on ground shall be well drained and of adequate and uniform loadbearing nature. The in-place density of the subgrade soils shall be at least the minimum required by the specifications. No foundation, slab, or pavement concrete shall be placed until the depth and character of the foundation soils have been inspected and approved by the materials testing consultant.

B. The subgrade shall be free of frost before concrete placing begins. If the temperature inside

a building where concrete is to be placed is below freezing it shall be raised and maintained above 50° long enough to remove all frost from the subgrade.

C. The subgrade shall be moist at the time of concreting. If necessary, it shall be dampened

with water in advance of concreting, but there shall be no free water standing on the subgrade nor any muddy or soft spots when the concrete is placed.

D. Thirty-pound felt paper shall be provided between edges of slab-on-grade and vertical and

horizontal concrete surfaces, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

E. Contraction joints shall be provided in slabs-on-grade at locations indicated on the Drawings. Contraction joints shall be installed as per Section 03290 - Joints in Concrete.

F. Floor slabs shall be screeded level or pitched to drain as indicated on the Drawings.

Finishes shall conform with requirements of Section 03350 - Concrete Finishes. Interior floor slabs shall be placed with non-air-entrained concrete (Class A3) if a steel troweled or hardened finish is required.

3.05 PLACING CONCRETE UNDERWATER (CLASS A5 CONCRETE)

A. Not used. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE UNDER PRESSURE

A. Where concrete is conveyed and placed by mechanically applied pressure, the equipment shall have the capacity for the operation. The operation of the pump shall be such that a continuous stream of concrete without air pockets is produced. To obtain the least line resistance, the layout of the pipeline system shall contain a minimum number of bends with no change in pipe size. If two sizes of pipe must be used, the smaller diameter should be used at the pump end and the larger at the discharge end. When pumping is completed, the concrete remaining in the pipelines, if it is to be used, shall be ejected in such a manner that there will be no contamination of the concrete or separation of the ingredients.

B. Priming of the concrete pumping equipment shall be with cement grout only. Use of

specialty mix pump primers or pumping aids will not be allowed.


C. No aluminum parts shall be in contact with the concrete during the entire placing of concrete

under pressure at any time.

D. Prior to placing concrete under pressure, the Contractor shall submit the concrete mix design together with test results from a materials testing consultant proving the proposed mix meets all requirements. In addition, an actual pumping test under field conditions is required prior to acceptance of the mix. This test requires a duplication of anticipated site conditions from beginning to end. The batching and truck mixing shall be the same as will be used; the same pump and operator shall be present and the pipe and pipe layouts will reflect the maximum height and distance contemplated. All submissions shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

E. If the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, the Contractor shall

discontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods.

F. The pumping equipment must have two cylinders and be designed to operate with one

cylinder only in case the other one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, the Contractor may have a standby pump on the site during pumping.

G. The minimum diameter of the hose (conduits) shall be four inches.

H. Pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that are not functioning properly shall be replaced.

I. Concrete samples for quality control in accordance with Article 3.10 will be taken at the

placement (discharge) end of the line. 3.07 ORDER OF PLACING CONCRETE

A. In order to minimize the effects of shrinkage, the concrete shall be placed in units as bounded by construction joints shown on the Drawings and maximum lengths as indicated on Drawings. Where required on the Drawings and wherever else practical, the placing of such units shall be done in a strip pattern in accordance with ACI 302.1. A minimum of 72 hours shall pass prior to placing concrete directly adjacent to previously placed concrete.

3.08 CONCRETE WORK IN COLD WEATHER

A. Cold weather concreting procedures shall conform to the requirements of ACI 306.

B. The Engineer may prohibit the placing of concrete at any time when air temperature is 40°F. or lower. If concrete work is permitted, the concrete shall have a minimum temperature, as placed, of 55°F. for placements less than 12" thick, 50°F. for placements 12" to 36" thick, and 45°F. for placements greater than 36" thick. The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed the aforementioned minimum values by more than 20°F, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

C. All aggregate and water shall be preheated. Precautions shall be taken to avoid the

possibility of flash set when aggregate or water are heated to a temperature in excess of


100°F. in order to meet concrete temperature requirements. The addition of admixtures to the concrete to prevent freezing is not permitted. All reinforcement, forms, and concrete accessories with which the concrete is to come in contact shall be defrosted by an approved method. No concrete shall be placed on frozen ground.

3.09 CONCRETE WORK IN HOT WEATHER

A. Hot weather concreting procedures shall conform to the requirements of ACI 305.

B. When air temperatures exceed 85°F., or when extremely dry conditions exist even at lower temperatures, particularly if accompanied by high winds, the Contractor and his concrete supplier shall exercise special and precautionary measures in preparing, delivering, placing, finishing, curing and protecting the concrete mix. The Contractor shall consult with the Engineer regarding such measures prior to each day's placing operation and the Engineer reserves the right to modify the proposed measures consistent with the requirements of this Section of the Specifications. All necessary materials and equipment shall be on hand an in position prior to each placing operation.

C. Preparatory work at the job site shall include thorough wetting of all forms, reinforcing steel

and, in the case of slab pours on ground or subgrade, spraying the ground surface on the preceding evening and again just prior to placing. No standing puddles of water shall be permitted in those areas which are to receive the concrete.

D. The temperature of the concrete mix when placed shall not exceed 90°F.

E. Temperature of mixing water and aggregates shall be carefully controlled and monitored at

the supplier's plant, with haul distance to the job site being taken into account. Stockpiled aggregates shall, if necessary, be shaded from the sun and sprinkled intermittently with water. If ice is used in the mixing water for cooling purposes, it must be entirely melted prior to addition of the water to the dry mix.

F. Delivery schedules shall be carefully planned in advance so that concrete is placed as soon

as practical after it is properly mixed. For hot weather concrete work (air temperature greater than 85°F), discharge of the concrete to its point of deposit shall be completed within 60 minutes from the time the concrete is batched.

G. The Contractor shall arrange for an ample work force to be on hand to accomplish

transporting, vibrating, finishing, and covering of the fresh concrete as rapidly as possible. 3.10 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field Testing of Concrete

1. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer's project representative the on-site scheduling of the materials testing consultant personnel as required for concrete testing.

2. Concrete for testing shall be supplied by the Contractor at no additional cost to the

Owner, and the Contractor shall provide assistance to the materials testing


consultant in obtaining samples. The Contractor shall dispose of and clean up all excess material.

B. Consistency

1. The consistency of the concrete will be checked by the materials testing consultant

by standard slump cone tests. The Contractor shall make any necessary adjustments in the mix as the Engineer and/or the materials testing consultant may direct and shall upon written order suspend all placing operations in the event the consistency does not meet the intent of the specifications. No payment shall be made for any delays, material or labor costs due to such eventualities.

2. Slump tests shall be made in accordance with ASTM C 143. Slump tests will be

performed as deemed necessary by the materials testing consultant and each time compressive strength samples are taken.

3. Concrete with a specified nominal slump shall be placed having a slump within 1”

(higher or lower) of the specified slump. Concrete with a specified maximum slump shall be placed having a slump less than the specified slump.

C. Unit Weight

1. Samples of freshly mixed concrete shall be tested for unit weight by the materials testing consultant in accordance with ASTM C 138.

2. Unit weight tests will be performed as deemed necessary by the Engineer and each

time compressive strength samples are taken. D. Air Content

1. Samples of freshly mixed concrete will be tested for entrained air content by the

materials testing consultant in accordance with ASTM C 231.

2. Air content tests will be performed as deemed necessary by the materials testing consultant and each time compressive strength samples are taken.

3. In the event test results are outside the limits specified, additional testing shall occur.

Admixture quantity adjustments shall be made immediately upon discovery of incorrect air entrainment.

E. Compressive Strength

1. Samples of freshly mixed concrete will be taken by the materials testing consultant

and tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 172, C 31 and C 39, except as modified herein.

2. In general, one sampling shall be taken for each placement in excess of five (5)

cubic yards, with a minimum of one (1) sampling for each day of concrete placement


operations, or for each one hundred (100) cubic yards of concrete, or for each 5,000 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls, whichever is greater.

3. Each sampling shall consist of at least five (5) 6x12 cylinders or (8) 4x8 cylinders.

Each cylinder shall be identified by a tag, which shall be hooked or wired to the side of the container. The materials testing consultant will fill out the required information on the tag, and the Contractor shall satisfy himself that such information shown is correct.

4. The Contractor shall be required to furnish labor to the Owner for assisting in

preparing test cylinders for testing. The Contractor shall provide approved curing boxes for storage of cylinders on site. The insulated curing box shall be of sufficient size and strength to contain all the specimens made in any four consecutive working days and to protect the specimens from falling over, being jarred or otherwise disturbed during the period of initial curing. The box shall be erected, furnished and maintained by the Contractor. Such box shall be equipped to provide the moisture and to regulate the temperature necessary to maintain the proper curing conditions required by ASTM C 31. Such box shall be located in an area free from vibration such as pile driving and traffic of all kinds and such that all specimen are shielded from direct sunlight and/or radiant heating sources. No concrete requiring inspection shall be delivered to the site until such storage curing box has been provided. Specimens shall remain undisturbed in the curing box until ready for delivery to the testing laboratory but not less than sixteen hours.

5. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the temperatures of the curing

box during the initial curing of test specimens with the temperature preserved between 60°F and 80°F as measured by a maximum-minimum thermometer. The Contractor shall maintain a written record of curing box temperatures for each day curing box contains test specimens. Temperature shall be recorded a minimum of three times a day with one recording at the start of the work day and one recording at the end of the work day.

6. When transported, the cylinders shall not be thrown, dropped, allowed to roll, or be

damaged in any way.

7. Compression tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 39. For 6x12 cylinders, two test cylinders will be tested at seven days and two at 28 days. For 4x8 cylinders, three test cylinders will be tested at seven days, three at 28 days. The remaining cylinders will be held to verify test results, if needed.

F. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete

1. Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete shall be

according to the requirements of ACI 214, ACI 318, and ACI 350.

2. The strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if all of the following conditions are satisfied.


a. Every arithmetic average of any three consecutive strength tests equals or exceeds the minimum specified 28-day compressive strength for the mix (see Article 2.08).

b. No individual compressive strength test results falls below the minimum

specified strength by more than 500 psi.

3. In the event any of the conditions listed above are not met, the mix proportions shall

be corrected for the next concrete placing operation.

4. In the event that condition 2B is not met, additional tests in accordance with Article 3.10, paragraph H shall be performed.

5. When a ratio between 7-day and 28-day strengths has been established by these

tests, the 7-day strengths shall subsequently be taken as a preliminary indication of the 28-day strengths. Should the 7-day test strength from any sampling be more than 10% below the established minimum strength, the Contractor shall:

a. Immediately provide additional periods of curing in the affected area from

which the deficient test cylinders were taken.

b. Maintain or add temporary structural support as required.

c. Correct the mix for the next concrete placement operation, if required to remedy the situation.

6. All concrete which fails to meet the ACI requirements and these specifications is

subject to removal and replacement at no additional cost to the Owner.

G. When non-compliant concrete is identified, test reports shall be sent immediately to the Engineer for review.

H. Additional Tests

1. When ordered by the Engineer, additional tests on in-place concrete shall be

provided and paid for by the Contractor.

2. In the event the 28-day test cylinders fail to meet the minimum strength requirements as outlined in Article 3.10, paragraph F, the Contractor shall have concrete core specimens obtained and tested from the affected area immediately.

a. Three cores shall be taken for each sample in which the strength

requirements were not met.

b. The drilled cores shall be obtained and tested in conformance with ASTM C 42. The tests shall be conducted by a materials testing consultant approved by the Engineer.


c. The location from which each core is taken shall be approved by the Engineer. Each core specimen shall be located, when possible, so its axis is perpendicular to the concrete surface and not near formed joints or obvious edges of a unit of deposit.

d. The core specimens shall be taken, if possible, so no reinforcing steel is

within the confines of the core.

e. The diameter of core specimens should be at least 3 times the maximum nominal size of the course aggregate used in the concrete, but must be at least 2-inches in diameter.

f. The length of specimen, when capped, shall be at least twice the diameter of

the specimen.

g. The core specimens shall be taken to the laboratory and when transported, shall not be thrown, dropped, allowed to roll, or damaged in any way.

h. Two (2) copies of test results shall be mailed directly to the Engineer. The

concrete in question will be considered acceptable if the average compressive strength of a minimum of three test core specimens taken from a given area equal or exceed 85% of the specified 28-day strength and if the lowest core strength is greater than 75% of the specified 28-day strength.

3. In the event that concrete placed by the Contractor is suspected of not having proper

air content, the Contractor shall engage a materials testing consultant approved by the Engineer, to obtain and test samples for air content in accordance with ASTM Specification C 457.

3.11 CARE AND REPAIR OF CONCRETE

A. The Contractor shall protect all concrete against injury or damage from excessive heat, lack of moisture, overstress, or any other cause until final acceptance by the Owner. Particular care shall be taken to prevent the drying of concrete and to avoid roughening or otherwise damaging the surface. Care shall be exercised to avoid jarring forms or placing any strain on the ends of projecting reinforcing bars. Any concrete found to be damaged, or which may have been originally defective, or which becomes defective at any time prior to the final acceptance of the completed work, or which departs from the established line or grade, or which, for any other reason, does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be satisfactorily repaired or removed and replaced with acceptable concrete at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Areas of honeycomb shall be chipped back to sound concrete and repaired as directed.

C. Concrete formwork blowouts or unacceptable deviations in tolerances for formed surfaces

due to improperly constructed or misaligned formwork shall be repaired as directed. Bulging or protruding areas, which result from slipping or deflecting forms shall be ground flush or chipped out and redressed as directed.


D. Areas of concrete in which cracking, spalling, or other signs of deterioration develop prior to final acceptance shall be removed and replaced, or repaired as directed. This stipulation includes concrete that has experienced cracking due to drying or thermal shrinkage of the concrete. Structural cracks shall be repaired using an approved epoxy injection system. Non-structural cracks shall be repaired using an approved hydrophilic resin pressure injected grout system, unless other means of repair are deemed necessary and approved. All repair work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Concrete which fails to meet the strength requirements as outlined in Article 3.10,

paragraph F, will be analyzed as to its adequacy based upon loading conditions, resultant stresses and exposure conditions for the particular area of concrete in question. If the concrete in question is found unacceptable based upon this analysis, that portion of the structure shall be strengthened or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. The method of strengthening or extent of replacement shall be as directed by the Engineer.



SECTION 03350

CONCRETE FINISHES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide finishes of all concrete surfaces specified herein and shown on the Drawings.


A. Section 03100 – Concrete Formwork

B. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete

C. Section 03600 – Grout 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS


1. ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings

2. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's literature on all products specified herein. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER

A. Floor sealer shall be Diamond Clear VOX or Super Diamond Clear VOX by the Euclid Chemical Company, MasterKure CC 300 SB by BASF Master Builder Solutions.

2.02 CONCRETE LIQUID DENSIFIER AND SEALANT

05

11

18

BR


A. Concrete liquid densifier and sealant shall be a high performance, deeply penetrating concrete densifier and sealant. Product shall be odorless, colorless, VOC-compliant, non-yellowing siliconate based solution designed to harden, dustproof and protect concrete floors subjected to heavy vehicular traffic and to resist black rubber tire marks on concrete surfaces. The product must contain a minimum solids content of 20% of which 50% is siliconate. Acceptable products are Diamond Hard by the Euclid Chemical Company, Seal Hard by L&M Construction Chemicals and MasterKure HD 210 WB by BASF Master Builder Solutions.

2.03 NON-METALLIC FLOOR HARDENER

A. The specified non-metallic mineral aggregate hardener shall be formulated, processed, and packaged under stringent quality control at the manufacturer’s owned and controlled factory. The hardener shall be a factory-blended mixture of specifically processed graded mineral aggregate, selected Portland cement, and necessary plasticizing agents. Acceptable products shall be “Surflex” by the Euclid Chemical Company, “Harcol” by Sonneborn, “Maximent” by BASF, and “Mastercon” by BASF.

2.04 NON-OXIDIZING HEAVY DUTY METALLIC FLOOR HARDENER

A. Non-oxidizing heavy duty metallic floor hardener shall be formulated, processed, and packaged under stringent quality control at the manufacturer’s owned and controlled factory. The hardener shall be a mixture of specifically processed non-rusting aggregate, selected Portland cement, and necessary plasticizing agents. Product shall be “Diamond-Plate” by the Euclid Chemical Company, or Masterplate by BASF Construction Chemicals.

2.05 NON-SLIP FLOORING ADDITIVE

A. Non-slip flooring additives for slip resistant floors shall be non-metallic. Non-slip flooring additives shall be Frictex NS by BASF Construction Chemicals, A-H Alox by Anti-Hydro, or Euco Grip by the Euclid Chemical Company.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FINISHES ON FORMED CONCRETE SURFACES

A. After removal of forms, the finishes described below shall be applied in accordance with Article 3.05 - Concrete Finish Schedule. Unless the finish schedule specifies otherwise, all surfaces shall receive at least a Type I finish. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of acceptability of all concrete finish work.

1. Type I - Rough: All fins, burrs, offsets, marks and all other projections left by the

forms shall be removed. Projections, depressions, etc. below finished grade required to be removed will only be those greater than ¼-inch. All holes left by removal of ends of ties, and all other holes, depressions, bugholes, air/blow holes or voids shall be filled solid with cement grout after first being thoroughly wetted and then struck off flush. The only holes below grade to be filled will be tie holes and any other holes larger than ¼-inch in any dimension. Honeycombs shall be chipped


back to solid concrete and repaired as directed by the Engineer. All holes shall be filled with tools, such as sponge floats and trowels, that will permit packing the hole solidly with cement grout. Cement grout shall consist of one part cement to three parts sand, epoxy bonding agent (for tie holes only) and the amount of mixing water shall be as little as consistent with the requirements of handling and placing. Color of cement grout shall match the adjacent wall surface.

2. Type II - Grout Cleaned: Where this finish is required, it shall be applied after

completion of Type I finish. After the concrete has been predampened, a slurry consisting of one part cement (including an appropriate quantity of white cement in order to produce a color matching the surrounding concrete) and 1-1/2 parts sand passing the No. 16 sieve, by damp loose volume, shall be spread over the surface with clean burlap pads or sponge rubber floats. Mix proportions shall be submitted to the Engineer after a sample of the work is established and accepted. Any surplus shall be removed by scraping and then rubbing with clean burlap.

3. Type III - Smooth Rubbed: Where this finish is required, it shall be applied after the

completion of the Type II finish. No rubbing shall be done before the concrete is thoroughly hardened and the mortar used for patching is firmly set. A smooth, uniform surface shall be obtained by wetting the surface and rubbing it with a carborundum stone to eliminate irregularities. Unless the nature of the irregularities requires it, the general surface of the concrete shall not be cut into. Corners and edges shall be slightly rounded by the use of the carborundum stone. Brush finishing or painting with grout or neat cement will not be permitted. A 100 square foot example shall be established at the beginning of the project to establish acceptability.

3.02 SLAB AND FLOOR FINISHES

A. The finishes described below shall be applied to floors, slabs, flow channels and top of walls in accordance with Article 3.05 - Concrete Finish Schedule. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of acceptability of all such finish work.

1. Type "A" - Screeded: This finish shall be obtained by placing screeds at frequent

intervals and striking off to the surface elevation required. When a Type "F" finish is subsequently to be applied, the surface of the screeded concrete shall be roughened with a concrete rake to 1/2” minimum deep grooves prior to final set.

2. Type "B" - Wood or Magnesium Floated: This finish shall be obtained after

completion of a Type "A" finish by working a previously screeded surface with a wood or magnesium float or until the desired texture is reached. Floating shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared and when the concrete has sufficiently hardened so that a person's foot leaves only a slight imprint. If wet spots occur, water shall be removed with a squeegee. Care shall be taken to prevent the formation of laitance and excess water on the finished surface. All edges shall be edged with an 1/8-inch tool as directed by the Engineer. The finished surface shall be true, even, and free from blemishes and any other irregularities.


3. Type "C" - Cork Floated: This finish shall be similar to Type "B" but slightly smoother than that obtained with a wood float. It shall be obtained by power or band floating with cork floats.

4. Type "D" - Steel Troweled: This finish shall be obtained after completion of a Type

"B" finish. When the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess fine material from working to the surface, the surface shall be compacted and smoothed with not less than two thorough and complete steel troweling operations. In areas which are to receive a floor covering such as tile, resilient flooring, or carpeting, the applicable Specification Sections and Contract Drawings shall be reviewed for the required finishes and degree of flatness. In areas that are intermittently wet such as pump rooms, only one troweling operation is required to provide some trowel marks for slip resistance. All edges shall be edged with an 1/8-inch tool as directed by the Engineer. The finish shall be brought to a smooth, dense surface, free from defects and blemishes.

5. Type "E" - Broom or Belt: This finish shall provide the surface with a transverse

scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface immediately after completion of a Type "B" finish. All edges shall be edged with an 1/8-inch tool as directed by the Engineer.

6. Type "F" - Swept in Grout Topping: This finish shall be applied after a completion of

a Type "A" finish. The concrete surface shall be properly cleaned, washed, and coated with a mixture of water and Portland Cement. Cement grout in accordance with Section 03600 shall then be plowed and swept into neat conformance with the blades or arms of the apparatus by turning or rotating the previously positioned mechanical equipment. Special attention shall be paid to true grades, shapes and tolerances as specified by the manufacturer of the equipment. Before beginning this finish, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the equipment manufacturer of the details of the operation and obtain approval and recommendations.

7. Type “G” Hardened Finish: This finish shall be applied after completion of a Type “B”

or Type “C” finish and prior to application of a Type “D” finish. Hardeners shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Hardeners shall be applied using a mechanical spreader. The hardener shall be applied in two shakes with the first shake comprising 2/3 of the total amount. Type “D” finish shall be applied following completion of application of the hardener.

a. Non-metallic floor hardener shall be applied where specifically required on

the Contract Drawings at the rate of 1.0 pounds/ft.2.

b. Non-oxidizing heavy duty metallic floor hardener shall be applied at the loading docks and where specifically required on the Contract Drawings or specified herein at the rate of 1.5 pounds/ft.2.

8. Type "H" - Non-Slip Finish: This finish shall be provided by applying a non-slip

flooring additive concurrently with the application of a Type "D" finish and/or installation of floor sealants. Application procedure shall be in accordance with


manufacturer's instructions. Finish shall be applied where specifically required on the Contract Drawings or specified herein.

9. Type "J" - Raked Finish: This finish shall be provided by raking the surface as soon

as the condition of the concrete permits by making depressions of ±1/4 inch. 3.03 CONCRETE SEALERS

A. Concrete sealers shall be applied where specifically required on the Contract Drawings or specified herein.

B. Sealers shall be applied after installation of all equipment, piping, etc. and after completion

of any other related construction activities. Application of sealers shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

C. Sealers shall be applied to all floor slabs not painted and not intended to be immersed. D. Floor slabs subjected to vehicular traffic shall be sealed with the concrete liquid densifier and

sealer. E. All other floor slabs to receive sealer shall be sealed with concrete floor sealer.

3.04 FINISHES ON EQUIPMENT PADS

A. Formed surfaces of equipment pads shall receive a Type III finish.

B. Top surfaces of equipment pads, except those surfaces subsequently required to receive grout and support equipment bases, shall receive a Type "D" finish, unless otherwise noted. Surfaces which will later receive grout shall, before the concrete takes its final set, be made rough by removing the sand and cement that accumulates on the top to the extent that the aggregate will be exposed with irregular indentations in the surface up to 1/2 inch deep.

3.05 CONCRETE FINISH SCHEDULE

Item Type of Finish

Concrete surfaces indicated to receive textured coating (as noted on Drawings)

I

Inner face of walls of tanks, flow channels, wet wells, perimeter walls, and miscellaneous concrete structures:

From 1 feet below water surface to bottom of wall I

From top of wall to 1 feet below water surface II

Exterior concrete walls below grade I

Exterior exposed concrete walls, ceilings, beams, manholes, hand holes, miscellaneous structures and columns (including top of wall) to one foot below grade. All other exposed concrete surfaces not specified elsewhere

II


Item Type of Finish

All interior exposed concrete walls and vertical surfaces III

Interior exposed ceiling, including beams III

Floors of process equipment tanks or basins, wetwells, flow channels and slabs to receive roofing material or waterproof membranes

B

All interior finish floors of buildings and structures and walking surfaces which will be continuously or intermittently wet

E

All interior finish floors of buildings and structures which are not continuously or intermittently wet

D

Floors to receive tile, resilient flooring, or carpeting D

Exterior concrete sidewalks, steps, ramps, decks, slabs on grade and landings exposed to weather

E

Floors of process equipment tanks indicated on Drawings to receive grout topping

F

Garage, storage area floors, and loading docks G

Precast concrete form panels, hollow core planks, double tees J

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 03370

CONCRETE CURING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Protect all freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and from the weather elements. The concrete shall be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for the hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete in accordance with the requirements specified herein.


A. Section 03100 – Concrete Formwork

B. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

C. Section 03350 – Concrete Finishes 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS


1. ACI 301 – Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings

2. ACI 304 – Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete

3. ACI 305 – Hot Weather Concreting

4. ACI 306 – Cold Weather Concreting

5. ACI 308 – Standard Practice for Curing Concrete

6. ASTM C171 – Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete

7. ASTM C309 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for

Curing Concrete

8. ASTM C1315 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete

1.04 SUBMITTALS

07

01

14

BR



1. Proposed procedures for protection of concrete under wet weather placement

conditions. 2. Proposed normal procedures for protection and curing of concrete.

3. Proposed special procedures for protection and curing of concrete under hot and

cold weather conditions.

4. Proposed method of measuring concrete surface temperature changes.

5. Manufacturer's literature and material certification for proposed curing compounds. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING CURING COMPOUND

A. Clear curing and sealing compound shall be a clear styrene acrylate type complying with ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A with a minimum solids content of 30%. Moisture loss shall not be greater than 0.40 kg/m2 when applied at 300 sq.ft./gal. Manufacturer’s certification is required. Acceptable products are Super Diamond Clear VOX by the Euclid Chemical Company, MasteKure CC 300 SB by BASF Master Builder Solutions, and Cure & Seal 30 Plus by Symons Corporation.

B. Where specifically approved by Engineer, on slabs to receive subsequent applied finishes,

compound shall conform to ASTM C 309. Acceptable products are “Kurez DR VOX” or “Kurez W VOX” by the Euclid Chemical Company. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

2.02 EVAPORATION REDUCER

A. Evaporation reducer shall be BASF, "MasterKure ER 50”, or Euclid Chemical "Euco-Bar". PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION AND CURING

A. All freshly placed concrete shall be protected from the elements, flowing water and from defacement of any nature during construction operations.

B. As soon as the concrete has been placed and horizontal top surfaces have received their

required finish, provision shall be made for maintaining the concrete in a moist condition for at least a 5-day period thereafter except for high early strength concrete, for which the period shall be at least the first three days after placement. Horizontal surfaces shall be kept covered, and intermittent, localized drying will not be permitted.


C. Walls that will be exposed on one side with either fluid or earth backfill on the opposite side

shall be continuously wet cured for a minimum of five days. Use of a curing compound will not be acceptable for applications of this type.

D. The Contractor shall use one of the following methods to insure that the concrete remains in

a moist condition for the minimum period stated above.

1. Ponding or continuous fogging or sprinkling. 2. Application of mats or fabric kept continuously wet. 3. Continuous application of steam (under 150°F). 4. Application of sheet materials conforming to ASTM C171. 5. If approved by the Engineer, application of a curing compound in accordance with

Article 3.04.

E. The Contractor shall keep absorbent wood forms wet until they are removed. After form removal, the concrete shall be cured by one of the methods in paragraph D.

F. Any of the curing procedures used in Paragraph 3.01-D may be replaced by one of the other

curing procedures listed in Paragraph 3.01-D after the concrete is one-day old. However, the concrete surface shall not be permitted to become dry at any time.

3.02 CURING CONCRETE UNDER COLD WEATHER CONDITIONS

A. Suitable means shall be provided for a minimum of 72 hours after placing concrete to maintain it at or above the minimum as placed temperatures specified in Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete, for concrete work in cold weather. During the 72-hour period, the concrete surface shall not be exposed to air more than 20°F above the minimum as placed temperatures.

B. Stripping time for forms and supports shall be increased as necessary to allow for

retardation in concrete strength caused by colder temperatures. This retardation is magnified when using concrete made with blended cements or containing fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag. Therefore, curing times and stripping times shall be further increased as necessary when using these types of concrete.

C. The methods of protecting the concrete shall be approved by the Engineer and shall be such

as will prevent local drying. Equipment and materials approved for this purpose shall be on the site in sufficient quantity before the work begins. The Contractor shall assist the Engineer by providing holes in the forms and the concrete in which thermometers can be placed to determine the adequacy of heating and protection. All such thermometers shall be furnished by the Contractor in quantity and type which the Engineer directs.

D. Curing procedures during cold weather conditions shall conform to the requirements of

ACI 306.


3.03 CURING CONCRETE UNDER HOT WEATHER CONDITIONS

A. When air temperatures exceed 85°F, the Contractor shall take extra care in placing and finishing techniques to avoid formation of cold joints and plastic shrinkage cracking. If ordered by the Engineer, temporary sun shades and/or windbreakers shall be erected to guard against such developments, including generous use of wet burlap coverings and fog sprays to prevent drying out of the exposed concrete surfaces.

B. Immediately after screeding, horizontal surfaces shall receive an application of evaporation reducer. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Final finish work shall begin as soon as the mix has stiffened sufficiently to support the workmen.

C. Curing and protection of the concrete shall begin immediately after completion of the

finishing operation. Continuous moist-curing consisting of method 1 or 2 listed in paragraph 3.01D is mandatory for at least the first 24 hours. Method 2 may be used only if the finished surface is not marred or blemished during contact with the coverings.

D. At the end of the initial 24-hour period, curing and protection of the concrete shall continue

for at least six (6) additional days using one of the methods listed in paragraph 3.01D.

E. Curing procedures during hot weather conditions shall conform to the requirements of ACI 305.

3.04 USE OF CURING COMPOUND

A. Curing compound shall be used only where specifically approved by the Engineer. Curing compound shall never be used for curing exposed walls with fluid or earth backfill on the opposite side. A continuous wet cure for a minimum of five days is required for these applications. Curing compound shall not be used on surfaces exposed to water in potable water storage tanks and treatment plants unless curing compound is certified in accordance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61.

B. When permitted, the curing compound shall maintain the concrete in a moist condition for

the required time period, and the subsequent appearance of the concrete surface shall not be affected.

C. The compound shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations

after water sheen has disappeared from the concrete surface and after finishing operations. Maximum coverage for the curing and sealing compound shall be 300 square feet per gallon for trowel finishes and 200 square feet per gallon for floated or broom surfaces. Maximum coverage for compounds placed where subsequent finishes will be applied shall be 200 square feet per gallon. For rough surfaces, apply in two directions at right angles to each other.

3.05 EARLY TERMINATION OF CURING

A. Moisture retention measures may be terminated earlier than the specified times only when at least one of the following conditions is met:


1. The strength of the concrete reaches 85 percent of the specified 28-day

compressive strength in laboratory-cured cylinders representative of the concrete in place, and the temperature of the in-place concrete has been constantly maintained at 50 degrees Fahrenheit or higher.

2. The strength of concrete reaches the specified 28-day compressive strength as

determined by accepted nondestructive methods or laboratory-cured cylinder test results.



SECTION 03400

PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall construct all precast concrete items as required in the Contract Documents, including all appurtenances necessary to make a complete installation.


A. Section 02604 - Utility Structures B. Section 03200 - Reinforcing Steel

C. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete D. Section 03350 - Concrete Finishes E. Section 03370 - Concrete Curing F. Section 03600 - Grout G. Section 05010 - Metal Materials H. Section 05035 - Galvanizing I. Section 05050 - Metal Fastening J. Section 05830 - Bearing Devices


A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the end of the Bid.

1. California Building Code 2. ACI 318-Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 3. PCI Standard MNL-116 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of

Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products

09

11

08

BR


4. PCI Design Handbook 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit the following for review in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals.

1. Shop drawings for all precast concrete items showing all dimensions, locations, and

type of lifting inserts, and details of reinforcement and joints. 2. A list of the design criteria used by the manufacturer for all manufactured, precast

items. 3. Design calculations, showing at least the design loads and stresses on the item,

shall be submitted. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of California.

4. Certified reports for all lifting inserts, indicating allowable design loads. 5. Information on lifting and erection procedures.


A. All manufactured precast concrete units shall be produced by an experienced manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such items. All manufactured precast concrete and site-cast units shall be free of defects, spalls, and cracks. Care shall be taken in the mixing of materials, casting, curing and shipping to avoid any of the above. The Engineer may elect to examine the units at the casting yard or upon arrival of the same at the site. The Engineer shall have the option of rejecting any or all of the precast work if it does not meet with the requirements specified herein or on the Drawings. All rejected work shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications

The precast concrete manufacturing plant shall be certified by the Prestressed Concrete Institute, Plant Certification Program, prior to the start of production. Certification is only required for plants providing prestressed structural members such as hollow core planks, double-T members, etc.

C. Plant production and engineering must be under direct supervision and control of an

Engineer who possesses a minimum of five years experience in precast concrete work. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE

A. Concrete materials including portland cement, aggregates, water, and admixtures shall conform to Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.


B. For prestressed concrete items, minimum compressive strength of concrete at 28 days shall

be 5,000 psi unless otherwise specified. Minimum compressive strength of concrete at transfer of prestressing force shall be 3,500 psi unless otherwise specified.

C. For non-prestressed concrete items, minimum compressive strength of concrete at 28 days

shall be 4000 psi unless otherwise specified. 2.02 GROUT

A. Grout for joints between panels shall be a cement grout in conformance with Section 03600, Grout.

B. Minimum compressive strength of grout at 7 days shall be 3,000 psi.

2.03 REINFORCING STEEL

A. Reinforcing steel used for precast concrete construction shall conform to Section 03200, Reinforcing Steel.

2.04 PRESTRESSING STRANDS

A. Prestressing strands shall be 7-wire, stress-relieved, high-strength strands Grade 250K or 270K.

2.05 STEEL INSERTS

A. Steel inserts shall be in accordance with Section 05010, Metal Materials. B. All steel inserts protruding from or occurring at the surface of precast units shall be

galvanized in accordance with Section 05035, Galvanizing. 2.06 WELDING

A. Welding shall conform to Section 05050, Metal Fastening. 2.07 BEARING PADS

A. Neoprene bearing pads shall conform to Section 05830, Bearing Devices and Anchors. B. Plastic bearing pads shall be multi-monomer plastic strips which are non-leaching and

support construction loads with no visible overall expansion, manufactured specifically for the purpose of bearing precast concrete.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION AND CASTING


A. All precast members shall be fabricated and cast to the shapes, dimensions and lengths shown on the Drawings and in compliance with PCI MNL-116. Precast members shall be straight, true and free from dimensional distortions, except for camber and tolerances permitted later in this clause. All integral appurtenances, reinforcing, openings, etc., shall be accurately located and secured in position with the form work system. Form materials shall be steel and the systems free from leakage during the casting operation.

B. All cover of reinforcing shall be the same as detailed on the Drawings. C. Because of the critical nature of the bond development length in prestressed concrete panel

construction, if the transfer of stress is by burning of the fully tensioned strands at the ends of the member, each strand shall first be burned at the ends of the bed and then at each end of each member before proceeding to the next strand in the burning pattern.

D. The Contractor shall coordinate the communication of all necessary information concerning

openings, sleeves, or inserts to the manufacturer of the precast members. E. Concrete shall be finished in accordance with Section 03350, Concrete Finishes. Grout all

recesses due to cut tendons which will not otherwise be grouted during erection. F. Curing of precast members shall be in accordance with Section 03370, Concrete Curing.

Use of a membrane curing compound will not be allowed. G. The manufacturer shall provide lifting inserts or other approved means of lifting members.

3.02 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING AND STORING

A. Precast members shall not be transported away from the casting yard until the concrete has reached the minimum required 28 day compressive strength and a period of at least 5 days has elapsed since casting, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

B. No precast member shall be transported from the plant to the job site prior to approval of

that member by the plant inspector. This approval will be stamped on the member by the plant inspector.

C. During handling, transporting, and storing, precast concrete members shall be lifted and

supported only at the lifting or supporting points as indicated on the shop drawings. D. All precast members shall be stored on solid, unyielding, storage blocks in a manner to

prevent torsion, objectionable bending, and contact with the ground. E. Precast concrete members shall not be used as storage areas for other materials or

equipment. F. Precast members damaged while being handled or transported will be rejected or shall be

repaired in a manner approved by the Engineer. 3.03 ERECTION


A. Erection shall be carried out by the manufacturer or under his supervision using labor, equipment, tools and materials required for proper execution of the work.

B. Contractor shall prepare all bearing surfaces to a true and level line prior to erection. All

supports of the precast members shall be accurately located and of required size and bearing materials.

C. Installation of the precast members shall be made by leveling the top surface of the

assembled units keeping the units tight and at right angles to the bearing surface. D. Connections which require welding shall be properly made in accordance with

Section 05050, Metal Fastening. E. Grouting between adjacent precast members and along the edges of the assembled precast

members shall be accomplished as indicated on the drawings, care being taken to solidly pack such spaces and to prevent leakage or droppings of grout through the assembled precast members. Any grout which seeps through the precast members shall be removed before it hardens.

F. In no case shall concentrated construction loads, or construction loads exceeding the design

loads, be placed on the precast members. In no case shall loads be placed on the precast members prior to the welding operations associated with erection, and prior to placing of topping (if required).

G. No Contractor, Subcontractor or any of his employees shall arbitrarily cut, drill, punch or

otherwise tamper with the precast members. H. Precast members damaged while being erected will be rejected or shall be repaired in a

manner approved by the Engineer.



SECTION 03600

GROUT PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all grout used in concrete work and as bearing surfaces for base plates, in accordance with the Contract Documents.


A. Requirements of related work are included in Division 1 and Division 2 of these Specifications.



1. CRD-C 621 Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-shrink Grout

2. ASTM C 109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic

Cement Mortars (Using 2 inch or 50 mm cube Specimens)

3. ASTM C 531 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings

4. ASTM C 579 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant

Mortars and Monolithic Surfacings

5. ASTM C 827 Standard Test Method for Early Volume Change of Cementitious Mixtures

6. ASTM C 144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

7. ASTM C 1107 Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement

Grout (Nonshrink) 1.04 SUBMITTALS


04

04

16

BR


1. Certified test results verifying the compressive strength and shrinkage and expansion requirements specified herein.

2. Manufacturer's literature containing instructions and recommendations on the

mixing, handling, placement and appropriate uses for each type of grout used in the work.


A. Field Tests

1. Compression test specimens will be taken during construction from the first placement of each type of grout and at intervals thereafter as selected by the Engineer to insure continued compliance with these Specifications. The specimens will be made by the Engineer or its representative.

a. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for cement grout and non-

shrink grout will be performed as specified in ASTM C 109 at intervals during construction as selected by the Engineer. A set of three specimens will be made for testing at seven days, 28 days and any additional time period as appropriate.

b. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for epoxy grout will be

performed as specified in ASTM C 579, Method B, at intervals during construction as selected by the Engineer. A set of three specimens will be made for testing at seven days and any other time period as appropriate.

2. The cost of all laboratory tests on grout will be borne by the Owner, but the

Contractor shall assist the Engineer in obtaining specimens for testing. The Contractor shall be charged for the cost of any additional tests and investigation on work performed which does not meet the specifications. The Contractor shall supply all materials necessary for fabricating the test specimens, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. All grout, already placed, which fails to meet the requirements of these

Specifications, is subject to removal and replacement at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Cement Grout

1. Cement grout shall be composed of Portland Cement and sand in the proportion specified in the Contract Documents and the minimum amount of water necessary to obtain the desired consistency. If no proportion is indicated, cement grout shall consist of one part Portland Cement to three parts sand. Water amount shall be as


required to achieve desired consistency without compromising strength requirements. White Portland Cement shall be mixed with the Portland Cement as required to match color of adjacent concrete.

2. The minimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 4000 psi.

3. For beds thicker than 1-1/2 inch and/or where free passage of grout will not be

obstructed by coarse aggregate, 1-1/2 parts of coarse aggregate having a top size of 3/8 inch should be added. This stipulation does not apply for grout being swept in by a mechanism. These applications shall use a plain cement grout without coarse aggregate regardless of bed thickness.

4. Sand shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C144.

B. Non-Shrink Grout

1. Non-shrink grout shall conform to CRD-C 621 and ASTM C 1107, Grade B or C

when tested at a max. fluid consistency of 30 seconds per CDC 611/ASTM C939 at temperature extremes of 45°F and 90°F and an extended working time of 15 minutes. Grout shall have a min. 28-day strength of 7,000 psi. Non-shrink grout shall be, "Euco N-S" by the Euclid Chemical Company, "Sikagrout 212" by Sika Corporation, “Conspec 100 Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout” by Conspec, “Masterflow 555 Grout” by BASF Master Builder Solutions.

C. Epoxy Grout

1. Epoxy grout shall be "Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod" by Sika Corporation, "Duralcrete LV" by

Tamms Industries, or "Euco #452 Series" by Euclid Chemical, “MasterEmaco ADH 1090 RS” by BASF Master Builder Solutions.

2. Epoxy grout shall be modified as required for each particular application with

aggregate per manufacturer's instructions.

D. Epoxy Base Plate Grout

1. Epoxy base plate grout shall be “Sikadur 42, Grout-Pak” by Sika Corporation, or “Masterflow 648” by BASF Master Builder Solutions.

2.02 CURING MATERIALS

A. Curing materials shall be as specified in Section 03370, Concrete Curing for cement grout and as recommended by the manufacturer for prepackaged grouts.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL


A. The different types of grout shall be used for the applications stated below unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. Where grout is called for in the Contract Documents which does not fall under any of the applications stated below, non-shrink grout shall be used unless another type is specifically referenced.

1. Cement grout shall be used for grout toppings and for patching of fresh concrete.

2. Non-shrink grout shall be used for grouting beneath base plates of structural metal

framing.

3. Epoxy grout shall be used for bonding new concrete to hardened concrete. 4. Epoxy base plate grout shall be used for precision seating of base plates including

base plates for all equipment such as engines, mixers, pumps, vibratory and heavy impact machinery, etc.

B. New concrete surfaces to receive cement grout shall be as specified in Section 03350,

Concrete Finishes, and shall be cleaned of all dirt, grease and oil-like films. Existing concrete surfaces shall likewise be cleaned of all similar contamination and debris, including chipping or roughening the surface if a laitance or poor concrete is evident. The finish of the grout surface shall match that of the adjacent concrete. Curing and protection of cement grout shall be as specified in Section 03370, Concrete Curing.

C. All mixing, surface preparation, handling, placing, consolidation, and other means of

execution for prepackaged grouts shall be done according to the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer.

D. The Contractor, through the manufacturer of a non-shrink grout and epoxy grout, shall

provide on-site technical assistance upon request, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 CONSISTENCY

A. The consistency of grouts shall be that necessary to completely fill the space to be grouted for the particular application. Dry pack consistency is such that the grout is plastic and moldable but will not flow.

3.03 MEASUREMENT OF INGREDIENTS

A. Measurements for cement grout shall be made accurately by volume using containers. Shovel measurement shall not be allowed.

B. Prepackaged grouts shall have ingredients measured by means recommended by the

manufacturer. 3.04 GROUT INSTALLATION

A. Grout shall be placed quickly and continuously, shall completely fill the space to be grouted and be thoroughly compacted and free of air pockets. The grout may be poured in place, pressure grouted by gravity, or pumped. The use of pneumatic pressure or dry-packed


grouting requires approval of the Engineer. For grouting beneath base plates, grout shall be poured from one side only and thence flow across to the open side to avoid air-entrapment.



SECTION 03732

CONCRETE REPAIRS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment, tools, etc., required for the repair, renovation, and replacement of concrete and/or reinforcing steel as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, and determined by field survey.

The Contractor, in conjunction with the Engineer, shall determine the extent of cracked or deteriorated concrete to be rehabilitated and/or resurfaced. A summary of the work to be performed shall be submitted to the Engineer for review, and such summary shall be approved by the Engineer prior to commencement of the Work.

B. Concrete repairs include the following:

1. Repair concrete walls and slabs where demolition of old equipment and structural

elements, or demolition for new equipment are shown on the Drawings.


A. Division 1 - General Requirements

B. Division 3 - Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS

A. Shall be as specified in Section 01090, Reference Standards. 1.04 SUBCONTRACTOR/APPLICATOR QUALIFICATIONS

The Contractor shall furnish the name of all subcontractors/applicators which he proposes to use for this work, including necessary evidence and/or experience records to ascertain their qualifications in the application of epoxy, urethane, and polymer-modified mortars and grouts. Approved applicator qualifications shall include:

A. A minimum of 5 years experience in applying epoxy, urethane, and polymer-modified and

cement-based compounds similar to those specified in this Section.

B. A letter from the manufacturer of the specified materials, on the manufacturer's letterhead, signed by an officer of the company, stating that the subcontractor/applicator has been trained in the proper techniques for applying the product, including surface preparation and

06

05

14

BR


mixing, placing, curing, and caring for the manufacturer's products. This letter shall further state that the subcontractor/applicator is on the manufacturer's approved list of contractors.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Material certifications and technical data sheets on all grouts, mortars, epoxy resins, aggregates and repair products specified in this Section.

B. Subcontractor/Applicator qualifications as specified in Section 1.04.

C. Shop Drawings detailing any planned deviation from the proposed construction sequence

and/or method of repair.

D. The Contractor, based on their experience in their profession, may submit to the Engineer for approval, alternative materials and/or methods of work to assure the durability and watertight integrity of the repair work performed.

1.06 ADDITIONAL GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall guarantee all repair work performed under this Contract against defects in workmanship resulting in leakage and/or failure of concrete bond for a period of two years from the date of the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 -- MATERIALS 2.01 WATER

A. The water used for mixing concrete repair products shall be clear, potable, and free of deleterious substances.

2.02 AGGREGATE

A. All aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. The aggregate supplier shall submit to the Engineer documentation that the proposed aggregates comply with ASTM C-33 and the requirements listed below:

B. Pea Gravel - Pea gravel shall meet the gradation and material requirements of Standard

Size 14 as defined by ASTM C-33. Pea gravel shall be clean and free from deleterious matter and shall contain no limestone.


A. An epoxy bonding agent shall be used when applying fresh concrete to previously placed concrete. Epoxy bonding agent shall conform to ASTM C-881 Type I, II, IV or V; Grade 2 for epoxy resin adhesives, depending on the application. The class of epoxy bonding agent shall be suitable for all ambient and substrate temperatures. The epoxy resin shall be "Sikadur Hi-Mod Series” as manufactured by the Sika Corp, Lyndhurst, NJ, "CR 246" as manufactured by Sto Corporation, Atlanta, GA, "Duralbond" as manufactured by Euclid


Chemical Company, Cleveland, OH, “Euco #452 Series” by the Euclid Chemical Company, or “MasterEmaco ADH series” by BASF Master Builder Solutions.

2.04 ANTI-CORROSION REBAR COATING

A. All reinforcing steel cut or exposed during demolition and/or repair operations shall be protected with an anti-corrosive coating. The anti-corrosive coating shall be a two-component, polymer-modified cementitious material such as "Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem " manufactured by Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ, "CR 246" manufactured by Sto Corporation, Atlanta, GA, “Duralprep A.C.” by the Euclid Chemical Company, or “MasterEmaco P 124” by BASF Master Builder Solutions.

2.05 STRUCTURAL CRACK REPAIR MATERIAL

A. Structural crack repair material shall be a two-component, polymer-modified or silica fume enhanced cementitious mortar and shall conform to EPA/USPHS standards for surface contact with potable water supplies. Structural crack repair material shall be "Sikatop 123 Plus" manufactured by Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ, or “Emaco S88 CI” or “MasterSeal 590” by BASF Master Builder Solutions.

2.06 EPOXY CRACK REPAIR BINDER

A. Epoxy crack repair binder shall be a two-component, 100% solids, high-modulus, low viscosity epoxy adhesive designed for structural repair. The epoxy adhesive shall be "Sikadur 52" manufactured by Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ, "Duralcrete LV" manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, OH, “Sto Poxy Binder CR633” manufactured by Sto Corporation, Atlanta, GA, “Eucopoxy Injection Resin” by the Euclid Chemical Company, or “ MasterInject 1500” by BASF Master Builder Solutions.

2.07 WATERPROOF INJECTION GROUT

A. Waterproof crack repair material shall be a one-component, water-activated polyurethane hydrophilic/hydrophobic injection grout capable of 700% expansion. Polyurethane grout shall form a tough flexible/rigid foam seal that is impenetrable to water. Hydrophilic injection grout shall be "Prime Flex 900 XLV" manufactured by Prime Resins, Conyers, GA, "AV-333 Injectaflex" manufactured by Avanti International, Webster, TX, or "DeNeef Sealfoam" manufactured by Grace Construction Products. Hydrophobic injection grout shall be "Prime Flex 920" manufactured by Prime Resins, Conyers, GA, "Sikafix HHLV or “Sikafix HH+” manufactured by Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ, or "DeNeef Flex PURe" manufactured by Grace Construction Products.

2.08 SPALL REPAIR PATCHING MATERIAL

A. All spall repairs not requiring formwork shall be repaired using a two-component, polymer-modified non-shrink cementitious mortar and shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7,000 psi. Spall repair mortar for use in horizontal applications shall be "Sikatop 122 Plus" manufactured by Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ, "CR 700" manufactured by Sto Corporation, Atlanta, GA, “Eucocrete Supreme” by the Euclid Chemical Company, or MBT SD-2 or Emaco R310 by BASF Construction Chemicals. Spall repair mortar for use in


vertical applications shall be "Sikatop 123 Plus" manufactured by Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ, "Duraltop Gel" manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company, "CR 702" manufactured by Sto Concrete Restoration Division, Atlanta, GA, “Verticoat or Verticoat Supreme” by the Euclid Chemical Company, or “MasterEmaco N 425” or “MasterEmaco N 400” by BASF Master Builder Solutions.

B. All spall repairs requiring formwork shall be repaired using a two-component, polymer-

modified cementitious mortar/pea gravel mixture and shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7,000 psi. Spall repair mortar shall be "SikaTop 111 PLUS" manufactured by Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ, "Eucocrete Supreme” manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, OH, “Sto Flowable Mortar CR730” manufactured by Sto Corporation, Atlanta, GA, or “MasterEmaco T 310 CI” by BASF Master Builder Solutions.

C. All spall repair materials shall conform to EPA/USPHS standards for surface contact with

potable water supplies. 2.09 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE PATCH

A. Waterproof membrane patch shall be a hypalon sealing strip secured to the concrete substrate with an epoxy adhesive. Sealing system shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations and shall be "Sikadur Combiflex" manufactured by Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ. Minimum width of waterproof membrane patch shall be twelve (12) inches unless shown otherwise on Contract Drawings.

2.10 CEMENT BASED TEXTURED COATING

A. Cement based textured coating shall be "SikaTop 144" manufactured by Sika Corp., Lyndhurst, NJ, “MasterSeal 581” manufactured by BASF Master Builder Solutions, "Duraltop Coating" manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, OH, “Eucoseal or Tamoseal” by the Euclid Chemical Company. Cement based textured coating shall have a minimum durability of 10 years and be able to seal cracks with a width up to 1/8 inch.

2.11 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

A. The Contractor shall provide an area for repair material storage free from exposure to moisture in any form, before, during, and after delivery to the site. Manufactured materials shall be delivered in unbroken containers labeled with the manufacturer's name and product type. All mortar products shall be stored on raised platforms. Materials susceptible to damage by freezing shall be stored in a dry, heated, insulated area. Any material that has hardened, partially set, become caked and/or has been contaminated or deteriorated shall be rejected. All aggregates shall be stored in clean bins, scows or platforms.

PART 3 -- INSTALLATION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. No repair work shall be undertaken when ambient temperatures are below manufacturer's safe recommendations. No admixtures, except those required by the manufacturer, shall be used in the repairs specified herein. All products shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall furnish and install safe scaffolding


and ladders for the Engineer's prework inspection, the repair work activities, and the Engineer's final inspection

B. Sandblast or waterblast (3000-4000 psi waterjet) deteriorated areas to remove all loose

concrete, existing coatings, unsound material, debris, and laitance. All surfaces shall be clean, free of dirt, grease, loose particles, and deleterious substances and shall be prepared according to manufacturer's requirements.


A. Existing concrete surfaces shall be roughened prior to application of bonding agent. Concrete surface shall be clean and sound, free of all foreign particles and laitance. Repair material shall be placed while bonding agent is still tacky. If bonding agent cures prior to placement of repair material, bonding agent shall be reapplied.

B. Repairing concrete with epoxy mortars shall conform to all the requirements of ACI 503.4

"Standard Specification for Repairing Concrete with Epoxy Mortars" (latest edition), except as modified herein.

3.03 ANTI-CORROSION REBAR COATING

A. Reinforcing steel cut or exposed during demolition and/or repair operations shall be sandblasted and cleaned prior to coating with an anti-corrosive coating. Anti-corrosive coating shall be applied as soon as the reinforcement is exposed and cleaned. Coating shall thoroughly cover all exposed parts of the steel and shall be applied according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.04 STRUCTURAL CRACK REPAIR MATERIAL

A. Where indicated on the Drawings, all existing structural cracks 1/16" and wider shall be repaired with a structural crack repair material. Rout crack to 3/4" wide by 3/4" deep V-notch to expose sound concrete. Where rebar has deteriorated, crack shall be routed to expose 3/4" all around rebar. The resulting void in concrete shall be patched flush with the existing concrete surface using structural crack repair material.

3.05 EPOXY CRACK REPAIR BINDER

A. Where indicated on the Drawings, all existing structural cracks 1/4" or smaller shall be repaired by pressure injecting an epoxy crack repair binder into the prepared crack. Seal crack surface and install injection ports per manufacturer's recommendations. Holes drilled for injection ports shall not cut rebar. If rebar is encountered during drilling, the hole shall be abandoned and relocated, and the abandoned hole shall be patched immediately with non-shrink grout flush with the surface of the existing concrete. Once the surface sealing material has cured, inject crack with epoxy crack repair binder using standard pressure injection equipment as directed by the manufacturer.

B. Where indicated on the Drawings, all existing structural cracks wider than 1/4" shall be

repaired by gravity feeding an epoxy crack repair binder into the prepared crack. First rout the concrete surface to form a 1/4" wide by 1/4" deep v-notch and clean the crack to remove


all loose and foreign particles. Fill the crack with clean, dry sand and then pour epoxy crack repair binder into V-notch, completely filling crack. As binder penetrates into crack, additional binder shall be applied to the V-notch.

3.06 WATERPROOF INJECTION GROUT

A. All existing, leaking cracks 1/4" or smaller shall be repaired by pressure injecting a waterproof injection grout into the prepared crack. Seal crack surface and install injection ports per manufacturer's recommendations. Holes drilled for injection ports shall not cut rebar. If rebar is encountered during drilling, the hole shall be abandoned and relocated, and the abandoned hole shall be patched immediately with non-shrink grout flush with the surface of the existing concrete. Once the surface sealing material has cured, inject crack with waterproof injection grout using standard pressure injection equipment as directed by the manufacturer.

3.07 SPALL REPAIR PATCHING MATERIAL

A. All voids or spalled areas to be repaired shall be chipped back to sound concrete a minimum 1/8" deep, cleaned and repaired with spall repair patching material according to manufacturer's recommendations. All patching shall provide a final finished surface which is flat, level and even with the existing concrete surface. Repair mortar shall not be feathered to meet existing concrete surface. Final patching on horizontal surfaces shall receive a broom finish consistent with the finish on the existing structure.

3.08 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE PATCH

A. Thoroughly clean the concrete substrate and apply waterproof membrane patch according to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.09 CEMENT BASED TEXTURED COATING

A. Thoroughly clean the concrete substrate and apply cement based textured coating according to manufacturer's recommendations. All necessary concrete repairs as detailed on the Contract Drawings shall be completed prior to applying coating.

3.10 CURING

A. All repair products shall be cured in strict accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 3.11 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES

A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain safe working conditions for all employees and subcontractors. Fresh air shall be supplied continuously to confined spaces through the combined use of existing openings, forced-draft fans and temporary ducts to the outside, or by direct air supply to individual workers. Fumes shall be exhausted to the outside from the lowest level of the confined space. Electrical fan motors shall be explosion-proof if in contact with fumes. No smoking or open fires shall be permitted in or near areas where volatile fumes may accumulate.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 04100

MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and specified herein.

B. Principal items of work include:

1. Mortar for unit masonry work.

2. Grout for grouting masonry.

3. Mortar for pointing and touchup.


A. Section 04150 - Masonry Accessories

B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents:

1. ASTM C91 Standard Specification for Masonry Cement

2. ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

3. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement

4. ASTM C207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry

Purposes

5. ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry

6. ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry

7. ASTM C979 Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete

8. ASTM C1019 Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Grout

083012B

R


9. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 Specification for Masonry Structures

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's data and mixing instructions for each product.

2. Certificate of compliance with these specifications for each material specified below.

3. Test reports.

4. Samples of colored masonry mortar. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, bearing labels indicating product and manufacturer's name.

B. Store cementitious materials in waterproof locations to prevent damage by elements. Reject

containers showing evidence of damage.

C. Store aggregates in separate bins to prevent intrusion of foreign particles. Do not use bottom 6 inches of sand or other aggregate stored in contact with the ground.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications provide products manufactured by one of the following:

1. LaFarge, Reston, VA

2. Lehigh Cement Company, Allentown, PA

3. Holcim, Inc., Dundee, MI

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Mortar and Grout Materials

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I above grade and Type II below grade.

2. Hydrated lime: ASTM C-207, Type "S".

3. Sand: Clean, coarse, free of loam, salt, organic and foreign matter and conforming to ASTM C-144.


4. Coarse and fine aggregates for grout: ASTM C-404.

5. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type S and meet the following criteria:

a. Prepackaged masonry cement shall contain Portland Cement, hydrated lime

and plasticizing admixtures or hydraulic hydrated lime. Masonry cements which contain other materials, including ground limestone, ground slag, or other cementitious and non-cementitious materials, are not acceptable.

6. Water - clean, fresh, potable and free from injurious amounts of oil, acids, alkalies,

salts, organic matter or other deleterious substances.

B. Admixtures

1. Do not use calcium chloride.

2. Provide water repellant admixture in mortar used for architectural concrete masonry units. Admixture shall be compatible with ACMU water repellant admixture.

3. Do not use admixtures, without written approval of Engineer.

C. Mortar pigment

1. Natural or synthetic iron oxide and chromium oxides meeting the requirements of

ASTM C979.

2. Pigment shall not exceed 10% of the weight of Portland cement. Carbon black shall not exceed 2% of Portland cement.

3. Color shall be selected by the Owner from the manufacturer's full range of colors.

2.03 GROUT AND MORTAR MIXES

A. Masonry mortar shall be Type "S" according to ASTM C-270. Proportions for masonry mortar shall be one of the following:

1. Proportions by volume: 1 part Portland cement to 1/4 - 1/2 parts hydrated lime, and

aggregate volume of not less than 2-1/4 or more than 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime.

2. Proportions by volume: 1/2 part Portland cement to 1 part masonry cement, and

aggregate volume of not less than 1-1/4 or more than 3 times the sum of the volumes of cement and lime.

B. Proportions for pointing mortar.

1. Proportions by volume: 1 part Portland cement to 1/4 part hydrated lime and 2 parts

extra fine sand.


C. Masonry Grout shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 476 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6,

strength of grout, tested in accordance with ASTM C 1019 shall be equal to f'm as specified in Section 04200, but not less than 2,000 psi.

1. Test grout for every 5,000 square feet of masonry, with a minimum of one test per

structure. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD MORTAR MIXING

A. Mixing shall be by mechanically operated batch mixer. Entirely discharge before recharging. Mix sand, lime, cement and admixtures dry for two (2) minutes minimum, add water and mix for three (3) minutes minimum. Control batching procedures by measuring materials by volume. Measurement by shovel count shall not be permitted. Mix mortar with less water than the maximum amount, consistent with workability, to provide near maximum tensile bond strength. Mix only quantity that can be used before initial set, or within the first one-half hour.

B. Mixers, wheel barrows, mortar boards, etc., shall be kept clean.

C. Retempering of mortar will not be permitted and mortar allowed to stand more than one (1)

hour shall not be used. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install mortar and grout in accordance with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 3.03 REPOINTING MORTAR

A. Prehydrate the mortar by mixing ingredients together dry, and then add only enough water to make a damp, stiff mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. After one to two hours, add water to bring it to the proper consistency.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 04150

MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT



1. Metal joint reinforcement for masonry.

2. Accessories for masonry construction.


A. Section 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout

B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications, Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents:

1. ASTM A1064/1064M Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Wire and

Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete

2. ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron

and Steel Hardware 3. ASTM A 951 Standard Specification for Steel Wire Masonry Joint

Reinforcement 4. ASTM D1056 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials -

Sponge or Extruded Rubber 5. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 Specifications for Masonry Structures

1.04 SUBMITTALS


01

14

16

BR


1. Provide manufacturer's complete product data.

2. Provide manufacturer's certification attesting compliance of material and source of each material specified below.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS FOR MASONRY REINFORCEMENT

A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products manufactured by the

following:

1. AA Wire Products, Company, Chicago, IL

2. Dur-O-Wal, Inc., Arlington Heights, IL

3. Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL.

4. Holman and Barnard, Inc., Hauppauge, NY. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Multi Wythe Joint Reinforcement

Steel ladder type reinforcement conforming to ASTM A 951 with adjustable pintel and eye assembly; 3/16 inch side rods and 9 gauge continuous cross rods; manufactured with wire conforming to ASTM A1064/1064M, with widths 2-inches less than nominal wall thickness. Provide seismic clip with 9 gauge continuous wire.

B. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement

Steel ladder type reinforcement conforming to ASTM A 951 with 3/16 inch side rods and 9 gauge continuous cross rods; manufactured with wire conforming to ASTM A1064/1064M, with widths 2-inches less than nominal wall thickness.

C. Anchors: Cast into concrete or weld to steel.

1. Dovetail Slot shall be 1 inch back by 1 inch deep by 5/8 inch throat, 22 gauge, foam

filled.

2. Dovetail Anchor - accessory for anchoring triangular flexible tie to dovetail slot, shall be 12 gage by 1 inch wide 1/2 inch long dovetail section.

3. Wire/Strap Anchor - 1/4 inch wire or 12 gauge x 3/4 inch x length required, welded or

mechanically attached to back up structure.

D. Ties


1. Triangular Flexible Tie: 3/16 inch wire, sized to suit application.

2. Adjustable Tie: Pintel and eye full tie; properly sized for application, 3/16 inch cold drawn steel.

E. Seismic Clip and Continuous Wire

1. Seismic clip shall be impact resistant PVC with retaining ridges to accept continuous wire.

2. Continuous wire shall be 9 gauge galvanized steel.

F. Top of Wall Anchor

1. Top of wall anchor shall be a 3/8” diameter rod welded to a 3/16” plate with two anchor holes. Provide a plastic tube to allow vertical deflection.

G. Finish

1. Reinforcements, anchorages and ties shall be hot dipped galvanized, Class B-2,

after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153. 2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Expansion and Joint Filler Material

1. Closed cell neoprene material conforming to ASTM D 1056, with a minimum compressibility of 50%. Horizontal joint filler shall be 1/4 inch thick. Expansion joints shall be a minimum 3/8" thick.

B. Weep and Vent Holes

1. Open head joints for brick and half-head joints for concrete masonry veneer.

C. Control Joint

1. Wide flange rapid preformed neoprene or PVC gasket.

D. Hardware Cloth

1. Waterproof paper backed with 1/2 inch hardware cloth.

E. Through Wall Flashing

1. Self-sealing, fully adhering composite flashing consisting of 32 mil rubberized asphalt

bonded to an 8 mil cross laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall 40 mil thickness.


2. Provide Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing by W.R. Grace, Flash-Bond by Wire-Bond or Poly-Barrier Wall Flashing by Polytite Manufacturing Corporation.

F. Cavity Drainage Mat

1. CavClear Masonry Mat by CavClear, Hudson WI. Or approved equal. Description:

Fluid conducting, non-absorbent, mold and mildew resistant polymer mesh consisting of 100% recycled polymer with PVC binder. Thickness of actual air space minus tolerances recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. In masonry wall panels, place horizontal joint reinforcement at a vertical spacing of 16 inches on center, unless otherwise noted.

B. Lap side rods at each end joint a minimum of 6 inches.

C. Install prefabricated corner and tee assemblies at each wall corner and intersection.

D. Mitre and butt end joints are prohibited.

E. Place horizontal joint reinforcement in approximate center of out-to-out wall assembly and

assuring a 5/8 inch, minimum, mortar coverage on exterior face and 1/2 inch on interior face.

F. Adjustable anchor assemblies may be offset no more than that which is stated in manufacturer's published instructions. Pintles may be installed either up or down.

G. Install horizontal joint reinforcement continuous, terminating only at vertical control joints.

H. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below

openings. Extend 24 inches minimum each side of opening. I. Place joint reinforcement continuous and at 8 inches on center vertically above roof.

J. Place reinforcing bars supported and secured against displacement. Maintain position with

½ inch to true dimension.

K. Coordinate and verify that dowels and anchorages embedded in concrete and attached to structural steel members are properly placed.

L. Provide wall ties for masonry veneer at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 16

inches on center horizontally. Place at maximum 8 inches on center each way around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings.

M. Masonry adjacent to steel and concrete columns to be attached to the column with masonry

anchors at 16 inches on center. Anchors to be attached to each face of the column which is adjacent to a masonry wall, unless otherwise noted.


3.02 DOVETAIL SLOTS AND ANCHORS

A. Provide dovetail slots to concrete contractor for placement into the concrete construction. Dovetail slots shall be placed vertically and spaced 16 inches on center horizontally.

B. Remove slot filler after forms are removed.

C. Hook dovetail anchor into slots and set in masonry joints at 16 inches on center.

3.03 BENDING, CUTTING AND SPLICING REINFORCEMENT

A. Make bends and splices in reinforcement only where indicated, or prior-approval by Engineer. Bend reinforcement only when cold, and prior to any placement in construction, forming around a steel pin of diameter at least 6 times the reinforcement size. Cut bars only by approved sawing, shearing or welding methods. Make ends of reinforcement straight, square, clean and free of defects before splicing. Do not heat or weld bends and splices at points of maximum stress. Clip and bend any tie wires as required to direct the ends away from external surfaces of masonry walls.

B. Where welding is necessary, provide materials and perform welding in accordance with

AWS requirements.

C. All lap splices to be 48 bar diameters, unless otherwise noted. 3.04 THROUGH WALL FLASHING

A. Clean areas to receive flashing. Surface shall be free of voids, spalled areas, or sharp protrusions. Concrete surfaces shall be cured a minimum of 7 days.

B. Apply Primer as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Apply flashing in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

Sidelaps shall be a minimum of 2½ inches. End laps shall have a 6" minimum lap. Provide end dams at ends of lintels and other interruptions.

D. Seal flashing where vertical reinforcing penetrates flashing with a mastic approved for use

by manufacturer. 3.05 CAVITY DRAINAGE MAT

A. Install cavity drainage mat in air-space between insulation and masonry veneer construction full height of cavity.

B. Cavity drainage mat shall be temporarily fastened in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.



SECTION 04200

UNIT MASONRY PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and specified work.

1. Principal items of work include:

a. Exterior masonry wall construction.

b. Interior masonry wall construction.

c. Installation of masonry reinforcement and accessories.

d. Masonry unit lintels.

e. Installing dampproofing, insulation, flashing and work required to be built

into masonry work.

f. Building into masonry work all anchors, inserts, hangers and the like provided under other Sections.

g. Pointing and cleaning of exposed masonry surfaces.


A. Section 04100 – Mortar and Masonry Grout

B. Section 04150 – Masonry Accessories

C. Section 07150 – Dampproofing

D. Section 07210 – Building Insulation

E. Section 07600 – Flashing and Sheet Metal 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents:

12

11

17

BR


1. TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

2. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 Specifications for Masonry Structures

a) ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, jointly published by the American Concrete Institute

and the American Society of Civil Engineers, hereafter referred to as ACI 530.1 shall be considered minimum specifications for all materials, workmanship, methods and techniques for all masonry work.

b) Obtain a copy of the above Specifications prior to beginning any work in

this Section.

3. ASTM C62 Standard Specification for Building Brick 4. ASTM C90 Standard Specification for Load-Bearing Concrete

Masonry Units 5. ASTM C140 Standard Methods for Sampling and Testing

Concrete Masonry Units 6. ASTM C216 Standard Specification for Facing Brick 7. ASTM C744 Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and

Calcium Silicate Masonry Units 8. ANSI A41.1 R70 Code Requirements for Masonry

1.04 TESTING

A. Tests

The Owner reserves the right to test materials for compliance with these specifications. Sampling and testing will be done in accordance with the ASTM standard, by an independent testing agency employed by the Owner. Materials that fail to meet requirements are considered defective. Subsequent tests to establish compliance (of the same or new materials) shall be paid for by the Contractor.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


1. Samples of each material to be used showing full range of colors.

2. Manufacturer's specifications and certifications of compliance to the Specifications, including results of tests on masonry units showing such compliance, for each type of masonry. Provide handling, storage, and


installation instructions along with protection instructions. Indicate by transmittal that installer has received copies of each instruction.

3. Cold and/or hot weather construction procedures in accordance with

ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 sections 2.3.2.2. and 2.3.2.3. 4. Cleaning procedures and cleaner for each masonry type.

1.06 MOCK-UPS

A. Build mock-ups at the site, where directed, full thickness and approximately 4 feet x 4 feet, indicating the proposed color range, texture and workmanship for each type of masonry. Obtain Engineer's acceptance of visual qualities of the mock-up before start of masonry work. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-ups until Work is completed and removal is directed by the Engineer.


A. Deliver materials in the manufacturer's original unbroken, undamaged and unopened packaging with labels bearing the name of the manufacturer and the product. Masonry units and brick shall be factory packaged and strapped, delivered to the site and stored on skids.

B. Store and handle materials to prevent inclusion of water or foreign matter and to prevent

damage of any nature.

C. Distribute materials on floor slabs to prevent overloading. Designated live loads shown for floor shall not be exceeded.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide special shape, type or size indicated or for application requiring a form, size or finish which cannot be produced from standard masonry units by sawing. Provide solid units where masonry unit is exposed.

B. Masonry units for fire-rated walls shall comply with Underwriter's Laboratory

requirements for fire rating shown on the Drawings. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Mortar

1. In accordance with Section 04100 - Mortar and Masonry Grout

B. Face Brick


1. ASTM C-216, Type FBS, SW. modular as manufactured and distributed by

Belden Brick Company, Glen-Gery Corporation, Cherokee Sanford Group, Inc. or equal. Face brick shall be selected and approved by the Owner from samples submitted. Select color from manufacturer's gray and brown color range. Sand finished brick shall not be accepted.

2. Net area compressive strength of brick masonry units shall be a minimum of

3,350 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C67. Compressive strength of masonry (f'm) shall be a minimum of 1,500 psi in accordance with ACI 530.1 when these units are used with the mortar specified in Section 04100.

C. Concrete Masonry Units

1. Provide units conforming to ACI 530.1 unless otherwise specified.

2. Provide light weight units meeting the requirements of ASTM C90 for hollow and

solid load bearing CMU.

3. Manufacture units of Portland Cement, conforming to ASTM C-150 and light weight aggregate conforming to ASTM C331 and ASTM C33. Weight of unit shall not exceed 105 lb. per cu. ft. when measured in accordance with provisions of ASTM C140. Units shall be nominally 8 inches x 16 inches x thicknesses shown or as required. Masonry units shall be manufactured not less than 30 days prior to being used and stored under cover until shipment. All units shall have true, sharp edges and corners, free from cracks or other defects. Provide half special sizes and shapes as required by the Drawings or to meet job conditions.

4. Net area compressive strength of concrete masonry units shall be a minimum of

2,000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C140. Compressive strength of masonry (f'm) shall be a minimum of 2,000 psi in accordance with ACI 530.1 when these units are used with the mortar specified in Section 04100.

D. Concrete Masonry Lintels

Specially formed units with reinforcing bars and grout fill provided where shown and wherever openings in masonry are indicated without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

E. Glazed Architectural Concrete Masonry Units

1. Plane face, colored, satin finished units conforming to ASTM C-744.

2. Concrete masonry unit for glazing: ASTM C-90 for hollow and solid load bearing

units.


3. Surface burning Characteristics of Facing: ASTM E-84; flame spread less than 25, fuel contribution zero, smoke density less than 50.

4. Size: Nominal face dimension 8 inches x 16 inches x thickness as required and

shown on the Drawings.

5. Colors: Owner to select from manufacturer's complete color selections. Provide a minimum of 60 colors.

6. Acceptable Products: Spectra-Glaze by Burns and Russell Company, Asta-

Glaze by Trenwyth Industries, Inc., or equal.

F. Sound Absorptive Concrete Masonry Units

1. 8-inch by 8-inch by 16-inch and Type RSC/RF4 by Sounblox. 2. Units shall meet the requirements of ASTM C90. 3. The fillers shall have metal septa laminated to one side of the fibrous material

and installed with the septa facing away from the slots at the factory. Cut filler and septa accurately to size, and install as recommended by the Manufacturer.

G. Glass Block

1. Size: 8"x8"x4"

2. Color: Clear.

3. Pattern: None.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers

a. J. Weck GmbH u. Company, Arlington Heights, IL

b. Pittsburg Corning Corp., Pittsburg, PA.

H. Architectural Concrete Masonry Units

1. Scored smooth and split-face CMU shall be manufactured by firm producing

architectural concrete masonry units for a minimum of five years.

2. Units shall conform to ASTM C-90, Type I, normal weight.

3. Provide units with integral water repellant admixture. Absorption shall not exceed 10 lbs per cubic foot.

4. Minimum compressive strength shall be 2700 psi on wet area of a single unit.


5. Color shall be selected from manufacturer full line of colors. Up to two colors

shall be selected.

I. Insulated Block System

1. Pre-Insulated specially formed masonry units with individually molded insulation. Units shaped to reduce cross-web thermal conductance. CMU and Insulation shall be configured to provide a near continuous insulated plane within wall.

a. Provide light weight units conforming to ASTM C90. Weight of unit shall

not exceed 105 lb. per cu. ft. when measured in accordance with provisions of ASTM C140.

b. Individually molded expandable polystyrene, conforming to ASTM C578. c. Reinforced insulated block system wall thermal resistance shall be R-10,

minimum. d. Exterior finish shall be split faced. e. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products from one

of the following manufacturers: i. Korfil Hi-R Masonry Wall System, by Concrete Block Insulating

Systems, West Brookfield, MA. ii. Omni Block Insulated Concrete Block, by Omni Block, Las Vegas,

NV. iii. Or Approved Equal.


A. Examine areas and conditions under which masonry is to be installed and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Do not wet concrete masonry units.

C. Brick having absorption rates in excess of 0.025 oz. per square inch per minute (as

determined per ASTM C 67) shall be wetted sufficiently so that the rate of absorption, when brick is laid, does not exceed this amount.


D. Clean reinforcing, removing loose rust, ice or other coatings from bars, before placement.

E. Thickness of cavity and composite walls, and other masonry construction shall be the full

thickness shown. Build single wythe walls to the actual size of masonry units.

F. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades.

G. Build other work into masonry work as shown, fitting masonry units around other work and grouting to assure anchorage.

H. Cut masonry units with motor driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp,

unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown or specified, and to fit adjoining work neatly.

I. Cold and hot weather construction.

1. No masonry shall be erected when ambient temperature has dropped below

45°F unless it is rising and at no time when it has dropped below 40°F. Provisions shall be made for heating and drying of materials, and the complete work shall be protected in accordance with the ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 Section 2.3.2.2. Masonry shall not be laid with ice or frost on its surfaces, and no masonry shall be laid on frozen work. Any work which freezes before the mortar has set shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's own expense. Do not use any admixtures or antifreeze in the mortar.

2. When the temperature is above 100°F or 90°F with a wind velocity greater than 8

mph, mortar beds shall be spread no more than 4 feet ahead of masonry and masonry units shall be set within one minute of spreading mortar.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1/4" in 10', or 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20', nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 10', 1/2" maximum.

B. Variation from level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets,

horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements in 10' or 1/16" within width of a single unit.

C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown on plan and related portion of

columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more.


D. Variation in Cross Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4" nor plus 1/2".

E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by

more than plus or minus 1/8", with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2". Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8".

3.03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half size units at corners, jambs, and wherever possible at other locations.

B. Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately

spaced and coordinated with other work.

C. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown or, if not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2 unit length in each course; do not tooth.

Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh mortar.

E. Cover top of walls at the end of each day. Protect wall from water infiltration from the

top until wall is capped.

F. Built-In Work: As work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of these Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless

otherwise indicated.

2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of hardware cloth in the joint below and rod grout into core.

3. Fill cores in hollow masonry units with grout 3 courses (24") under bearing plates,

beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise noted.

4. Seal masonry tight around wall penetrations such as beams, joists, pipes, ducts, and conduit by cutting masonry units to fit as tightly as possible, then closing final gap all around with mortar, or joint filler and caulking as necessary.

3.04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints.


B. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical

face shells; also bed webs with mortar in starting courses on footing or floors, and where adjacent cells are to be reinforced or filled with grout. For starting courses where cells are not grouted, spread full mortar bed including areas under cells.

C. Maintain joint widths of 3/8", except for minor variations required to maintain bond

alignment.

D. Tooling: Joints shall be tooled to a uniform concave joint. Head joints first and then the bed joints.

E. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not

pound corners and jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean and reset in fresh mortar.

3.05 JOINT REINFORCING

A. Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints not more than 16" o.c. vertically.

B. Parapets: Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal joints at

8" o.c. vertically.

C. Reinforced masonry openings greater than 12" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in 2 horizontal joints immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcements 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints.

D. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.

F. Intersecting Load-bearing Walls: Provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2'-0" o.c

vertically. Embed ends in mortar-filled cores.

G. Non-loadbearing Interior Partitions: Build full height of story to underside of solid floor or structure above, unless shown otherwise. Fill joint with mortar after dead load deflection of structure above approaches final position.

3.06 CAVITY WALLS

A. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavity, flush.


B. Tie exterior wythe to back-up wythe of masonry with horizontal joint reinforcement at 16" o.c. vertically.

C. Coordinate placement of dampproofing and insulation board with work to ensure there

are no gaps or air spaces between pieces of insulation board.

D. Weep joints shall be placed in exterior wythe of cavity wall, spaced a maximum of 32" o.c. horizontally, immediately above ledges, at lintels over openings, and as shown.

3.07 CAVITY WALL INSULATION

A. Provide and install insulation as shown and as specified in Section 07210, Building Insulation.

3.08 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Provide vertical and horizontal expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Where not shown provide vertical control joints in concrete masonry units at 40 feet on center maximum or as recommended by the masonry unit manufacturer. Build-in related items as the masonry work progresses.

3.09 LINTELS

A. Install galvanized steel lintels where indicated.

B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 8" for brick size units and 1'-4" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or poured-in-place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.

C. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed "U"-shaped lintel units with

reinforcement bars placed as shown and filled with grout.

D. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb. 3.10 FLASHING

A. Provide flashing as shown and as specified in Section 07600, Flashing and Sheet Metal. 3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY

A. Vertical reinforcement shall be held in place by means of frames or other suitable means. Place horizontal joint reinforcement as masonry work progresses. Provide minimum clear distance between longitudinal bars equal to nominal diameter of bar. Minimum thickness of mortar or grout between masonry and reinforcement shall be 1/4", except 6 gage or smaller wires may be laid in 3/8" mortar joints. Collar joints which contain both horizontal and vertical reinforcement shall have a minimum width of 1/2" larger than the diameter of the horizontal and vertical reinforcement.


B. Bar splices shall be contact lap splices. Length of splice shall be a minimum of 24" for

#4 bars and 30" for #5 bars.

C. Low lift grouting shall be used when grout space is less than 2" in width. Place grout at maximum intervals of 24" in lifts of 6 to 8 inches as the work progresses. Cores to be grouted shall be clean of mortar, mortar dropping and debris. Agitate grout to assure complete filling and coverage of reinforcement. Hold grout 1-1/2 inches below to top of masonry if work is discontinued for more than an hour.

D. High lift grouting may be used when the grout space is greater than 2". Grout shall not

be placed in lifts greater than 4 feet. Grout core shall be kept clean of mortar, mortar dripping and debris. Provide cleanout holes as required for inspection and cleaning. Replace cleanout plugs after inspection and acceptance. Do not place grout until entire wall has been in place a minimum of 3 days. Hold grout 1-1/2 inches below top of masonry if work is discontinued for more than an hour.

E. Forms and shoring shall be substantial and tight to prevent leakage of mortar or grout.

Brace and shore forms to maintain position and shape. Do not remove forms or shoring until masonry gains enough strength to sufficiently carry its own weight and any other loads, temporary or permanent, placed on it during construction.

3.12 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Exposed masonry surfaces shall be protected from staining. Tops of wall shall be covered with nonstaining waterproof coverings when work is not in progress. Installed material shall be secure in high winds.

B. Protection shall be provided for all openings in the walls to prevent damage to sills,

jambs, etc., from all causes. Aluminum or steel frames and other finish materials shall be protected from damage during masonry work.

3.13 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing of Masonry: At the completion of the masonry work, all holes in exposed

masonry shall be pointed. Defective joints shall be cut out and tuckpointed solidly with mortar. Pointing and tuckpointing shall be done with a pre-hydrated mortar. The mortar cement shall be controlled so that, after curing of the mortar, no difference in texture or color exists with that of adjacent masonry.

C. Masonry Cleaning: While laying masonry units, good workmanship and job

housekeeping practices shall be used so as to minimize the need for cleaning the masonry work. Protect the base of the wall from mud splashes and mortar droppings.


The technique for laying masonry shall be such that mortar does not run down the face of the wall or smear onto the face.

1. After the joints are tooled, cut off mortar failings with the trowel and brush excess

mortar burrs and dust from the face of the masonry, use a bricklayer's brush made with medium soft hair.

2. Remove all large mortar particles with a hardwood scraper.

3. If, after using the above outlined techniques, additional cleaning of the walls is

found necessary, allow the walls to cure one month prior to initiating further cleaning processes.

D. Clean masonry to comply with the masonry manufacturer's directions and applicable

NCMA "Tek" bulletins or BIA technical notes and the following requirements.

1. Saturate the wall with clean water. The wall shall be thoroughly saturated prior to and at the time the cleaning solution is applied.

2. Clean masonry with an approved cleaning solution for each type of masonry

applied with a brush, starting at the top of the wall. Approved cleaners shall be composed primarily of detergents, wetting agents, buffering agents, and a maximum of 10% muriatic acid. Do not use acids on masonry surfaces that will be damaged by use of an acid cleaner. The use of any of the above cleaning agents shall first be approved in writing by the manufacturer of the masonry being cleaned and the Engineer. The concentration, method of application of the cleaning solution, and method of scraping shall be as outlined on the container by the manufacturer.

3. High pressure water and sandblasting shall not be used for cleaning except with

the recommendation of the masonry manufacturer and the written approval of the Engineer.

4. Immediately after cleaning a small area, the wall shall be rinsed thoroughly with

quantities of water.

5. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials during masonry cleaning operations.

6. After the walls are cleaned, take the necessary precautions to ensure that other contractors and subcontractors do not damage or soil the walls. Mud protection around the base of walls shall be left in place until the grading work is done.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 05010

METAL MATERIALS

PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Metal materials not otherwise specified shall conform to the requirements of this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Materials for fasteners are included in Section 05050, Metal Fastening.

B. Requirements for specific products made from the materials specified herein are included in other sections of the Specifications. See the section for the specific item in question.


A. ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Structural Steel B. ASTM A47 Standard Specification for Malleable Iron Castings C. ASTM A48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings D. ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated Welded and Seamless E. ASTM A167 Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip F. ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars

and Shapes G. ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded

Standard Fasteners H. ASTM A446 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by

the Hot-Dip Process, Structural (Physical) quality I. ASTM A500 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless

Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes J. ASTM A501 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon

Steel Structural Tubing

04

09

18

BR


K. ASTM A529 Standard Specification for Structural Steel with 42 000 psi (290 Mpa) Minimum Yield Point (1/2 in. (12.7 mm) Maximum Thickness)

L. ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings M. ASTM A570 Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip,

Structural Quality N. ASTM A572 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-

Vanadium Structural Steel O. ASTM A992 Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes P. ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip,

Plate, and Flat Bar for Structural Applications Q. ASTM A1085 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow

Structural Sections (HSS) R. ASTM B26 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings S. ASTM B85 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Die Castings T. ASTM B108 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings U. ASTM B138 Standard Specification for Manganese Bronze Rod, Bar, and Shapes V. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate W. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,

Shapes, and Tubes X. ASTM B308 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Standard Structural

Shapes, Rolled or Extruded Y. ASTM B574 Standard Specification for Nickel-Molybdenum-Chromium Alloy Rod Z. ASTM F468 Standard Specification for Nonferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and

Studs for General Use a. ASTM F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Fasteners

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Material certifications shall be submitted along with any shop drawings for metal products and fabrications required by other sections of the Specifications.



A. Owner may engage the services of a testing agency to test any metal materials for conformance with the material requirements herein. If the material is found to be in conformance with Specifications the cost of testing will be borne by the Owner. If the material does not conform to the Specifications, the cost of testing shall be paid by the Contractor and all materials not in conformance as determined by the Engineer shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. In lieu of replacing materials the Contractor may request further testing to determine conformance, but any such testing shall be paid for by the Contractor regardless of outcome of such testing.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 CARBON AND LOW ALLOY STEEL

A. Material types and ASTM designations shall be as listed below:

1. Steel W Shapes A992

2. Steel HP Shapes A572 Grade 50

3. Steel M, S, C,and MC shapes and Angles, Bars, and Plates

A36

4. Rods F 1554 Grade 36

5. Pipe - Structural Use A53 Grade B

6. Hollow Structural Sections A500 Grade C or A1085

7. Cold-Formed Steel Framing A 653

2.02 STAINLESS STEEL

A. All stainless steel fabrications exposed to underwater service shall be Type 316. All other stainless steel fabrications shall be Type 304, unless noted otherwise.

B. Material types and ASTM designations are listed below:

1. Plates and Sheets ASTM A167 or A666 Grade A

2. Structural Shapes ASTM A276

3. Fasteners (Bolts, etc.) ASTM F593

2.03 ALUMINUM

A. All aluminum shall be alloy 6061-T6, unless otherwise noted or specified herein.

B. Material types and ASTM designations are listed below:

1. Structural Shapes ASTM B308

2. Castings ASTM B26, B85, or B108


3. Extruded Bars ASTM B221 - Alloy 6061

4. Extruded Rods, Shapes and Tubes ASTM B221 - Alloy 6063

5. Plates ASTM B209 - Alloy 6061

6. Sheets ASTM B221 - Alloy 3003

C. All aluminum structural members shall conform to the requirements of Section 05140,

Structural Aluminum.

D. All aluminum shall be provided with mill finish unless otherwise noted.

E. Where bolted connections are indicated, aluminum shall be fastened with stainless steel bolts.

2.04 CAST IRON

A. Material types and ASTM designations are listed below:

1. Gray ASTM A48 Class 30B

2. Malleable ASTM A47

3. Ductile ASTM A536 Grade 60-40-18

2.05 BRONZE

A. Material types and ASTM designations are listed below:

1. Rods, Bars and Sheets ASTM B138 - Alloy B Soft 2.06 HASTELLOY

A. All Hastelloy shall be Alloy C-276. 2.07 DISSIMILAR METALS

A. Dielectric isolation shall be installed wherever dissimilar metals are connected according to the following table.


Zin

c

Ga

lva

niz

ed

Ste

el

Alu

min

um

Ca

st Ir

on

Du

ctile

Iro

n

Mild

Ste

el/

Ca

rbo

n S

tee

l

Co

pp

er

Bra

ss

Sta

inle

ss

Ste

el

Zinc ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Galvanized Steel

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Aluminum ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Cast Iron ● ● ● ● ● ●

Ductile Iron ● ● ● ● ● ●

Mild Steel/ Carbon Steel

● ● ● ● ● ●

Copper ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Brass ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Stainless Steel ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

1. "●" signifies dielectric isolation is required between the two materials noted. 2. Consult Engineer for items not listed in table.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION (NOT USED) - END OF SECTION –


SECTION 05035

GALVANIZING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Where galvanizing is called for in the Contract Documents, the galvanizing shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of this Section unless otherwise noted.


A. Further requirements for galvanizing specific items may be included in other Sections of the Specifications. See section for the specific item in question.

1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS



2. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on

Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip

3. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and

Steel Hardware 4. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated

(Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

4. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel

Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

5. ASTM A780 - Standard Practice of Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

6. ASTM F2329 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip,

Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners

1.04 SUBMITTALS

09

08

17

6B

R



1. Certification that the item(s) are galvanized in accordance with the applicable ASTM

standards specified herein. This certification may be included as part of any material certification that may be required by other Sections of the Specifications.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 GALVANIC COATING

A. Material composition of the galvanic coating shall be in accordance with the applicable ASTM standards specified herein.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATED PRODUCTS

A. Products fabricated from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, and strips, 1/8 inch thick and heavier which are to be galvanized shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Products shall be fabricated into the largest unit which is practicable to galvanize before the galvanizing is done. Fabrication shall include all operations necessary to complete the unit such as shearing, cutting, punching, forming, drilling, milling, bending, and welding. Components of bolted or riveted assemblies shall be galvanized separately before assembly. When it is necessary to straighten any sections after galvanizing, such work shall be performed without damage to the zinc coating. The galvanizer shall be a member of American Galvanizers Association.

B. Components with partial surface finishes shall be commercial blast cleaned prior to pickling. C. Sampling and testing of each lot shall be performed prior to shipment from the galvanizer’s

facility per ASTM A123. 3.02 HARDWARE

A. Iron and steel hardware which is to be galvanized shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 and ASTM F2329.

3.03 ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS

A. Assembled steel products which are to be galvanized shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. All edges of tightly contacting surfaces shall be completely sealed by welding before galvanizing.

B. Assemblies shall be provided with vent and drain holes as required by the fabricator. Vent and drain hole sizes and locations shall be included in the structural steel shop drawings required in Specification 05120 Structural Steel for approval. All vent and drain holes shall


be plugged and finished to be flush with and blend in with the surrounding surface. Where water intrusion can occur, the plug shall be carefully melted into the surrounding zinc coating using an appropriate fluxing agent.

3.04 METAL DECK

A. Unless noted otherwise, metal deck shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 G60 minimum. In moist environments or as indicated on the Contract Drawings, galvanizing shall meet the requirements of ASTM A653 G90.

B. Galvanized metal deck shall meet the requirements of ASTM A924.

3.05 REPAIR OF GALVANIZING

A. Galvanized surfaces that are abraded or damaged at any time after the application of zinc coating shall be repaired by thoroughly wire brushing the damaged areas and removing all loose and cracked coating, after which the cleaned areas shall be painted with 2 coats of zinc rich paint meeting the requirements of Federal Specification DOD-P-21035A and shall be thoroughly mixed prior to application. Zinc rich paint shall not be tinted. The total thickness of the 2 coats shall not be less than 6 mils. In lieu of repairing by painting with zinc rich paint, other methods of repairing galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780 may be used provided the proposed method is acceptable to the Engineer.



SECTION 05050

METAL FASTENING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all metal welds and fasteners not otherwise specified, in accordance with the Contract Documents.


A. Section 05010 - Metal Materials B. Section 05035 - Galvanizing C. Section 05061 – Stainless Steel D. Section 05120 - Structural Steel


A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid. 1. California Building Code 2. AC 193 Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in

Concrete Elements 3. AC 308 Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive

Anchors in Concrete Elements 4. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 5. ACI 355.2 Qualifications of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors

in Concrete 6. ACI 355.4 Qualifications of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in

Concrete 7. ICC-ES AC193 Acceptance Criteria for Expansion and Screw

11

28

17

BR


Anchors (Concrete) 8. AISC 348 The 2009 RCSC Specification for Structural Joints 9. AISC Code of Standard Practice 10. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel 11. AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminum 12. AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel 13. Aluminum Association Specifications for Aluminum Structures 14. ASTM A572/A572M-94C Standard Specification for High Strength Low-Alloy

Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel Grade 50 15. ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 16. ASTM A325 Standard Specification for High-Strength Bolts for

Structural Steel Joints 17. ASTM A489 Standard Specification for Eyebolts 18. ASTM A490 Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered

Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints 19. ASTM A563 Standard Specifications for Carbon and Alloy Steel

Nuts 20. ASTM D1785 Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

Plastic Pipe 21. ASTM E488 Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in

Concrete and Masonry Elements 22. ASTM F436 Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers 23. ASTM F467 Standard Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for

General Use 24. ASTM F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts; Hex

Cap Screws, and Studs 25. ASTM F594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts


26. ASTM F1554 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Shop Drawings providing the fastener's manufacturer and type and certification of the fastener's material and capacity.

2. Anchor design calculations sealed by a Professional Engineer currently registered

in the State of California. Only required if design not shown on Contract Drawings. 3. A current ICC-ES Evaluation Service Report shall be submitted for all anchors

that will be considered for use on this project. 4. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 5. Copy of valid certification for each person who is to perform field welding. 6. Certified weld inspection reports, when required. 7. Welding procedures.

8. Installer qualifications.

9. Certification of Installer Training.

10. Inspection Reports.

10. Results of Anchor Proof Testing.


A. Fasteners not manufactured in the United States shall be tested and certification provided with respect to specified quality and strength standards. Certifications of origin shall be submitted for all U.S. fasteners supplied on the project.

B. Installer Qualifications: All concrete anchors shall be installed by an Installer with at least

three years of experience performing similar installations. Concrete adhesive anchor installer shall be certified as an Adhesive Anchor Installer in accordance with ACI-CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installation Certification Program.

C. Installer Training: For concrete adhesive, expansion and screw anchors, conduct a

thorough training with the manufacturer or the manufacturer’s representative for the Installer on the project. Training shall consist of a review of the complete installation process to include but not be limited to the following:


1. Hole drilling procedure. 2. Hole preparation and cleaning technique. 3. Adhesive injection technique and dispenser training/maintenance. 4. Concrete adhesive anchor preparation and installation. 5. Proof loading/torquing. 6. Provide a list of names of all installers who are trained by the Manufacturer’s

Field Representative on this jobsite prior to installation of products. Record must include the installer name, date of training, products included in the training and trainer name and contact information

7. Provide a copy of the current ACI/CRSI “Adhesive Anchor Installer” certification

cards for all installers who will be installing adhesive anchors in the horizontal to vertically overhead orientation.

D. All steel welding shall be performed by welders certified in accordance with AWS D1.1.

All aluminum welding shall be performed by welders certified in accordance with AWS D1.2. All stainless steel welding shall be performed by welders certified in accordance with AWS D1.6. Certifications of field welders shall be submitted prior to performing any field welds.

E. Welds and high strength bolts used in connections of structural steel will be visually

inspected in accordance with Article 3.04. F. The Owner may engage an independent testing agency to perform testing of welded

connections and to prepare test reports in accordance with AWS. Inadequate welds shall be corrected or redone and retested to the satisfaction of the Engineer and/or an acceptable independent testing laboratory, at no additional cost to the Owner.

G. Provide a welding procedure for each type and thickness of weld. For welds that are not

prequalified, include a Performance Qualification Report. The welding procedure shall be given to each welder performing the weld. The welding procedure shall follow the format in Annex E of AWS D1.1 with relevant information presented.

H. Inspections of the adhesive dowel system shall be made by the Engineer or other

representatives of the Owner in accordance with the requirements of the ESR published by the manufacturer. Provide adequate time and access for inspections of products and anchor holes prior to injections, installation, and proof testing.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 ANCHOR RODS (ANCHOR BOLTS)


A. Anchor rods shall conform to ASTM F1554 Grade 36 except where stainless steel or other approved anchor rods are shown on the Drawings. Anchor rods shall have hexagonal heads and shall be supplied with hexagonal nuts meeting the requirements of ASTM A563 Grade A.

B. Where anchor rods are used to anchor galvanized steel or are otherwise specified to be

galvanized, anchor rods and nuts shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM F1554.

C. Where pipe sleeves around anchor rods are shown on the Drawings, pipe sleeves shall

be cut from Schedule 40 PVC plastic piping meeting the requirements of ASTM D1785. 2.02 HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS

A. High strength bolts and associated nuts and washers shall be in accordance with ASTM A325 or ASTM A490. Bolts, nuts and washers shall meet the requirements of AISC 348 "The 2009 RCSC Specification for Structural Joints”.

B. Where high strength bolts are used to connect galvanized steel or are otherwise specified

to be galvanized, bolts, nuts, and washers shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A325.

2.03 STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS

A. Stainless steel bolts shall conform to ASTM F-593. All underwater fasteners, fasteners in confined areas containing fluid, and fasteners in corrosive environments shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless noted otherwise. Fasteners for aluminum and stainless steel members not subject to the above conditions shall be Type 304 stainless steel unless otherwise noted.

B. Stainless steel bolts shall have hexagonal heads with a raised letter or symbol on the bolts indicating the manufacturer, and shall be supplied with hexagonal nuts meeting the requirements of ASTM F594. Nuts shall be of the same alloy as the bolts.

2.04 CONCRETE ANCHORS

A. General

1. Where concrete anchors are called for on the Drawings, one of the types listed below shall be used; except, where one of the types listed below is specifically called for on the Drawings, only that type shall be used. The determination of anchors equivalent to those listed below shall be on the basis of test data performed by an approved independent testing laboratory. There are two types used:

a. Expansion anchors shall be mechanical anchors of the wedge, sleeve,

drop-in or undercut type.


b. Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods or bolts anchored with an adhesive system into hardened concrete. Adhesive anchors shall be two part injection type using the manufacturer’s static mixing nozzle and shall be supplied as an entire system.

c. Concrete screw anchors shall be one piece, heavy duty screw anchor with

a finished hex head

2. Expansion anchors shall not be used to hang items from above or in any other situations where direct tension forces are induced in anchor.

3. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete anchors which are submerged or are used in

hanging items or have direct tension induced upon them, or which are subject to vibration from equipment such as pumps and generators, shall be adhesive anchors.

4. Adhesive anchors shall conform to the requirements of ACI 355.4 or alternately to

AC 308. Expansion, concrete screw or mechanical anchors shall conform to the requirements of ACI 355.2 or alternately to AC 193. Anchors in Seismic Design Categories C through F shall conform to the California Building Code and ACI 318 Chapter 17 requirements as applicable, including seismic test requirements.

5. Fire Resistance: All anchors installed within fire resistant construction shall either be enclosed in a fire resistant envelope, be protected by approved fire-resistive materials, be used to resist wind and earthquake loads only, or anchor non-structural elements.

6. Engineer’s approval is required for use of concrete anchors in locations other than

those shown on the Drawings.

B. Concrete Anchor Design:

An anchor design consists of specifying anchor size, quantity, spacing, edge distance and embedment to resist all applicable loads. Where an anchor design is indicated on the Drawings, it shall be considered an engineered design and anchors shall be installed to the prescribed size, spacing, embedment depth and edge distance. If all parts of an anchor design are provided on the Drawings except embedment depth, the anchors will be considered an engineered design and the Contractor shall provide the embedment depth as indicated in Paragraph B.3 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Where an anchor design is not indicated by the Engineer on the Drawings, the Contractor shall provide the anchor design per the requirements listed below.

1. Structural Anchors: All concrete anchors shall be considered structural anchors if they transmit load between structural elements; transmit load between non-structural components that make up a portion of the structure and structural elements; or transmit load between life-safety related attachments and structural elements. Examples of structural concrete anchors include but are not limited to column anchor bolts, anchors supporting non-structural walls, sprinkler piping support anchors, anchors supporting heavy, suspended piping or equipment,


anchors supporting barrier rails, etc. For structural anchors, the Contractor shall submit an engineered design with signed and sealed calculations performed by an Engineer currently registered in the State of California. Structural anchors shall be of a type recommended by the anchor manufacturer for use in cracked concrete and shall be designed by the Contractor in accordance with ACI 318 Chapter 17.

2. Non-Structural Anchors: All other concrete anchors may be considered non-

structural concrete anchors. The Contractor shall perform an engineered design for non-structural anchors. The Engineer may request the Contractor provide anchor design details for review, but submission of a signed, sealed design is not required. Non-structural anchors shall be designed by the contractor for use in uncracked concrete.

3. Embedment Depth

a. Minimum anchor embedment shall be as indicated on the Drawings or determined by the Contractor’s engineered design. Although all manufacturers listed are permitted, the embedment depth indicated on the Drawings is based on ““Pure 110+ by DeWalt” ESR 3298 issued 7/2017. If the contractor submits one of the other concrete adhesive anchors listed, the Engineer shall evaluate the required embedment and the Contractor shall provide the required embedment depth stipulated by the Engineer specific to the approved dowel adhesive.

b. Where the embedment depth is not shown on the Drawings, concrete

anchors shall be embedded no less than the manufacturer’s standard embedment (expansion or mechanical anchors) or to provide a minimum allowable bond strength equal to the allowable yield capacity of the rod according to the manufacturer (adhesive anchors).

c. The embedment depth shall be determined using the actual concrete

compressive strength, a cracked concrete state, maximum long term temperature of 110 degrees F, and maximum short term temperature of 140 degrees F. In no case shall the embedment depth be less than the minimum or more than the maximum stated in the manufacturer’s literature.

C. Structural Anchors:

1. Mechanical Anchors:

a. Wedge Anchors: Wedge anchors shall be “Kwik Bolt TZ” by Hilti, Inc., “TruBolt +” by ITW Redhead, “Strong-Bolt 2” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co. or “Power-Stud+SD1” or “Power-Stud+ SD-2” by DeWalt.

b. Screw Anchors: Screw anchors shall be “Kwik HUS-EZ” and “KWIK HUS-

EZ-I” by Hilti, Inc., “Titen HD” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., or “Screw-Bolt+” by DeWalt. Bits specifically provided by manufacturer of chosen system shall be used for installation of anchors.


c. Sleeve Anchors: Sleeve anchors shall be “HSL-3 Heavy Duty Sleeve

Anchor” by Hilti, Inc. or “Power-Bolt +” by DeWalt.

d. Undercut Anchors: Undercut anchors shall be “HDA Undercut Anchor” by Hilti, Inc., “Torq-Cut Undercut Anchor” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., “Atomic + Undercut Anchor” by DeWalt

e. Shallow Embedment Internally Threaded Insert (3/4” max embedment): “Mini-Undercut +Anchor” by DeWalt, “HSC-A” by Hilti, Inc. or approved equal.

2. Adhesive Anchors:

a. Adhesive anchors shall be “Epcon C6+ Adhesive Anchoring System” by

ITW Redhead, “HIT HY-200 Adhesive Anchoring System” by Hilti, Inc., “SET-XP Epoxy Adhesive Anchors” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., or “Pure 110+ Epoxy Adhesive Anchor System” by DeWalt.

b. Structural adhesive anchor systems shall be IBC compliant and capable of

resisting short term wind and seismic loads (Seismic Design Categories A through F) as well as long term and short term sustained static loads in both cracked and uncracked concrete in all Seismic Design Categories. Structural adhesive anchor systems shall comply with the latest revision of ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria AC308, and shall have a valid ICC-ES report in accordance with the applicable building code. No “or equal” products will be considered unless prequalified and approved by the Engineer and Owner.

D. Non-Structural Anchors: In addition to the acceptable non-structural anchors listed below,

all structural anchors listed above may also be used as non-structural anchors.

1. Mechanical Anchors:

a. Wedge Anchors: Wedge anchors shall be “Kwik Bolt 3” by Hilti, Inc., “Power-Stud+ SD1” by DeWalt, “Wedge-All” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co. or “TruBolt” by ITW Redhead.

b. Screw Anchors: Screw anchors shall be “Kwik HUS” by Hilti, Inc., “Screw

Bolt+” or 316 Stainless Steel Wedge-Bolt” by DeWalt, “Large Diameter Tapcon (LDT) Anchor” by ITW Redhead, or “Titen HD” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co. Bits specifically provided by manufacturer of chosen system shall be used for installation of anchors.

c. Sleeve Anchors: Sleeve anchors shall be “HSL Heavy Duty Sleeve

Anchors” by Hilti, Inc. “Power-Bolt+” by DeWalt “Dynabolt Sleeve Anchor” by ITW Redhead, or “Sleeve-All” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co.


d. Drop-In Anchors: Drop-in anchors shall be “Drop-In” by Simpson Strong-

Tie Co., “HDI Drop-In Anchor” by Hilti, Inc., “Smart DI” by DeWalt or “Multi-Set II Drop-In Anchor” by ITW Redhead.

e. Undercut Anchors: Undercut anchors shall be “HDA Undercut Anchor” by

Hilti, Inc., “Atomic Undercut+” by DeWalt or “Torq-Cut” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co.

2. Adhesive Anchors:

a. Adhesive anchors shall be “Epcon A7” or “Epcon C6+ Adhesive Anchoring

System” by ITW Redhead, “HIT HY-200 Adhesive Anchoring System” by Hilti, Inc., “SET Epoxy Tie High Strength Anchoring Adhesive” or “AT High Strength Anchoring Adhesive” by Simpson Strong-Tie Co., or AC100+ Gold” Adhesive Anchoring System” by DeWalt

b. Non-structural adhesive anchors systems shall be IBC compliant and

capable of resisting short term wind and seismic (Seismic Design Categories A and B) as well as long term and short term sustained static loads in uncracked concrete.

c. Non-structural adhesive anchor embedment depth of the rod shall provide

a minimum allowable bond strength that is equal to the allowable yield capacity of the rod unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

d. No “or equal” products will be considered unless prequalified and

approved by the Engineer and Owner.

E. Concrete Anchor Rod Materials:

1. Concrete anchors used to anchor structural steel shall be a threaded steel rod per manufacturer’s recommendations for proposed adhesive system, but shall not have a yield strength (fy) less than 58 ksi nor an ultimate strength (fu) less than 72.5 ksi, unless noted otherwise. Where steel to be anchored is galvanized, concrete anchors shall also be galvanized unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2. Concrete anchors used to anchor aluminum, FRP, or stainless steel shall be

Type 304 stainless steel unless noted otherwise. All underwater concrete anchors shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

3. Nuts, washers, and other hardware shall be of a material to match the anchors.

2.05 MASONRY ANCHORS

A. Anchors for fastening to solid or grout-filled masonry shall be adhesive anchors as specified above for concrete anchors.


B. Anchors for fastening to hollow masonry or brick shall be adhesive anchors consisting of

threaded rods or bolts anchored with an adhesive system dispensed into a screen tube inserted into the masonry. The adhesive system shall use a two-component adhesive mix and shall inject into the screen tube with a static mixing nozzle. Thoroughly clean drill holes of all debris and drill dust prior to installation of adhesive and anchor. Contractor shall follow manufacturer’s installation instructions. The adhesive system shall be “HIT HY-70 System” as manufactured by Hilti, Inc., or “AC100+ Acrylic Adhesive” by DeWalt, “SET-XP” as manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie Co.

C. Masonry anchors used to anchor steel shall be a threaded steel rod per manufacturer’s recommendations for proposed adhesive system, but shall not have a yield strength (fy) less than 58 ksi nor an ultimate strength (fu) less than 72.5 ksi, unless noted otherwise. Where steel to be anchored is galvanized, masonry anchors shall also be galvanized.

D. Masonry anchors used to anchor aluminum, FRP, or stainless steel shall be Type 304

stainless steel unless noted otherwise. All underwater anchors shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

E. Although all manufacturers listed are permitted, the masonry anchor design is based on

“SET-XP by Simpson Strong-Tie ER 265 Revised 1-31-2017. If the contractor submits one of the other concrete adhesive anchors listed, the Engineer shall evaluate the proposed product and the Contractor shall provide the conditions stipulated by the Engineer specific to the approved adhesive anchor.

2.06 WELDS

A. Electrodes for welding structural steel and all ferrous steel shall comply with AWS Code, using E70 series electrodes for shielded metal arc welding (SMAW), or F7 series electrodes for submerged arc welding (SAW).

B. Electrodes for welding aluminum shall comply with the Aluminum Association

Specifications and AWS D1.2. C. Electrodes for welding stainless steel and other metals shall comply with AWS D1.6.

2.07 WELDED STUD CONNECTORS

A. Welded stud connectors shall conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1 Type C. 2.08 EYEBOLTS

A. Eyebolts shall conform to ASTM A489 unless noted otherwise. 2.09 HASTELLOY FASTENERS

A. Hastelloy fasteners and nuts shall be constructed of Hastelloy C-276.


2.10 ANTISEIZE LUBRICANT

A. Antiseize lubricant shall be C5-A Anti-Seize by Loctite Corporation, Molykote P-37 Anti-Seize Paste by Dow Corning, 3M Anti-Seize by 3M, or equal.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 MEASUREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and review the Drawings and shall report any discrepancies to the Engineer for clarification prior to starting fabrication.

3.02 ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Anchor Rods, Concrete Anchors, and Masonry Anchors

1. Anchor rods shall be installed in accordance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice" by setting in concrete while it is being placed and positioned by means of a rigidly held template. Overhead adhesive anchors, and base plates or elements they are anchoring, shall be shored as required and securely held in place during anchor setting to prevent movement during anchor installation. Movement of anchors during curing is prohibited.

2. The Contractor shall verify that all concrete and masonry anchors have been

installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and that the capacity of the installed anchor meets or exceeds the specified safe holding capacity.

3. Concrete anchors shall not be used in place of anchor rods without Engineer's

approval. 4. All stainless steel threads shall be coated with antiseize lubricant.

B. High Strength Bolts

1. All bolted connections for structural steel shall use high strength bolts. High

strength bolts shall be installed in accordance with AISC 348 "The 2009 RCSC Specification for Structural Joints”. All bolted joints shall be Type N, snug-tight, bearing connections in accordance with AISC Specifications unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

C. Concrete Anchors

1. Concrete at time of anchor installation shall be a minimum age of 21 days, have a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi, and shall be at least 50 degrees F.


2. Concrete anchors designed by the Contractor shall be classified as structural or non-structural based on the requirements indicated above.

3. Concrete Anchor Testing:

a. At all locations where concrete anchors meet the requirements for

structural anchors at least 25 percent of all concrete anchors installed shall be proof tested to the value indicated on the Drawings, with a minimum of one tested anchor per anchor group. If no test value is indicated on the Drawings but the installed anchor meets the requirements for structural anchors, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer to allow verification of whether anchor load proof testing is required.

b. Contractor shall submit a plan and schedule indicating locations of anchors

to be proof tested, load test values and proposed anchor testing procedure (including a diagram of the testing equipment proposed for use) to the Engineer for review prior to conducting any testing. Proof testing of anchors shall be in accordance with ASTM E488 for the static tension test. If additional tests are required, inclusion of these tests shall be as stipulated on Contract Drawings.

c. Where Contract Documents indicate anchorage design to be the

Contractor’s responsibility and the anchors are considered structural per the above criteria, the Contractor shall submit a plan and schedule indicating locations of anchors to be proof tested and load test values, sealed by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the State of California. The Contractor’s Engineer shall also submit documentation indicating the Contractor’s proof testing procedures have been reviewed and the proposed procedures are acceptable. Proof testing procedures shall be in accordance with ASTM E488.

d. Concrete Anchors shall have no visible indications of displacement or

damage during or after the proof test. Concrete cracking in the vicinity of the anchor after loading shall be considered a failure. Anchors exhibiting damage shall be removed and replaced. If more than 5 percent of tested anchors fail, then 100 percent of anchors shall be proof tested.

e. Proof testing of concrete anchors shall be performed by an independent

testing laboratory hired directly by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs of all proof testing, including additional testing required due to previously failed tests.

4. All concrete anchors shall be installed in strict conformance with the

manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. A representative of the manufacturer shall be on site when required by the Engineer.

5. All holes shall be drilled in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions except

that cored holes shall not be allowed unless specifically approved by the Engineer.


If cored holes are allowed by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer, cored holes shall be roughened in accordance with manufacturer requirements. Thoroughly clean drill holes of all debris, drill dust, and water in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions prior to installation of adhesive and threaded rod unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Degree of hole dampness shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer recommendations. Installation conditions shall be either dry or water-saturated. Water filled or submerged holes shall not be permitted unless specifically approved by the Engineer. . Injection of adhesive into the hole shall be performed to minimize the formation of air pockets in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Wipe rod free from oil that may be present from shipping or handling.

6. All adhesive anchor installations in the horizontal to vertically overhead orientation

shall be conducted by a certified Adhesive Anchor Installer as certified by ACI/CSRI per ACI 318-11 9.2.2. Current AAI Certificate must be submitted to the Engineer of Record prior to commencement of any adhesive anchor installations

D. Other Bolts

1. All dissimilar metal shall be connected with appropriate fasteners and shall be

insulated with a dielectric or approved equal. 2. All stainless steel bolts shall be coated with antiseize lubricant.

3.03 WELDING

A. All welding shall comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, quality of welds, qualifications of welders and methods used in correcting welded work.

B. Welded stud connectors shall be installed in accordance with AWS D1.1.

3.04 INSPECTION

A. High strength bolting will be visually inspected in accordance with AISC 348 "The 2009 RCSC Specification for Structural Joints”. Rejected bolts shall be either replaced or retightened as required.

B. Field welds will be visually inspected in accordance with AWS Codes. Inadequate welds

shall be corrected or redone as required in accordance with AWS Codes.

C. Post-installed concrete anchors shall be inspected as required by ACI 318. 3.05 CUTTING OF EMBEDDED REBAR

A. The Contractor shall not cut embedded rebar cast into structural concrete during installation of post-installed fasteners without prior approval of the Engineer.



SECTION 05061

STAINLESS STEEL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and erect the stainless steel work as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein.

B. Stainless steel work shall be furnished complete with all accessories, mountings and

appurtenances of the type of stainless steel and finish as specified or required for a satisfactory installation.


A. Section 05010 - Metal Materials B. Section 05050 - Metal Fastening C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A193 - Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service.

B. ASTM A194 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and

High-Temperature Service. C. ASTM A262 - Practice for Detecting Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in

Austenitic Stainless Steel. D. ASTM A276 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. E. ASTM A314 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Billets and Bars for

Forging. F. ASTM A380 - Practice for Cleaning and Descaling Stainless Steel Parts,

Equipment and Systems. G. ASTM A473 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Forgings. H. ASTM A666 - Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar. I. ASTM A774 - Stainless Steel Pipe Fittings

12

21

09

BR


J. ASTM A778 - Stainless Steel Pipe K. ASTM F593 - Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs. L. ASTM F594 - Stainless Steel Nuts. M. ANSI/ASME B1.1 - Unified Inch Screw Thread (UN and UNR Thread Form).

1.04 TESTS

A. All stainless steel materials including stainless test welds, shall be checked for compliance with tests for susceptibility to intergranular attack. Such tests shall be Practices A, B and E of ASTM A262. Detailed procedures for the tests shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to start of work. Practice A shall be used only for acceptance of materials but not for rejection of materials, and shall be used for screening material intended for testing in Practice B and Practice E. The maximum acceptable corrosion rate under Practice B shall be 0.004 inch per month, rounded off to the third decimal place. If the certified mill report indicates that such test has been satisfactory performed, the fabricator may not be required to repeat the test. Material passing Practice E shall be acceptable.

B. Sample selection for the susceptibility to intergranular attack tests shall be as follows:

1. One (1) sample per heat treatment lot for plates and forgings; 2. One (1) sample per each Welding Procedure Qualification regardless of the joint

design; 3. If tests indicate a reduction in corrosion resistance, welding procedure shall be

adjusted or heat treatment determined as needed to restore required corrosion resistance.

4. The samples so chosen shall have received all the post-weld heat treatments

identical to the finished part. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval shop drawings for all stainless steel fabrication as required for submittals.

B. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Certified test reports for susceptibility to intergranular attack. 2. Affidavit of compliance with type of stainless steel shown on the Contract

Drawings or specified herein. 3. Certified weld inspection reports.


4. Cleaning and handling of stainless steel in accordance with Paragraph 3.04,

Cleaning and Handling. C. Samples of finish, on each type of stainless steel to be furnished, shall be submitted to

the Engineer upon request. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Shop inspections may be made by the Engineer. The Contractor shall give ample notice

to the Engineer prior to the beginning of any stainless steel fabrication work so that inspection may be provided. The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for the inspection of materials and workmanship in the shop, and the inspectors shall be allowed free access to the necessary parts of the works.

B. Inspectors shall have the authority to reject any materials or work which does not meet

the requirements of the Contract Drawings or the Specifications. C. Inspection at the shop is intended as a means of facilitating the work and avoiding

errors, but is expressly understood that it will in no way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for furnishing proper materials or workmanship.

1.07 HANDLING, STORAGE AND DELIVERY

A. Mechanical damage (e.g., scratches and gouges) to the stainless steel material shall not be permitted and is cause for rejection. Care shall be taken in the material handling since such mechanical damage will result in the passive oxide film being "punctured" leading to a possible lower resistance to the initiation of corrosion than the surrounding chemically-passivated surface.

B. Stainless steel plates and sheets shall be stored vertically in racks and not be dragged

out of the racks or over one another. Racks shall be protected to prevent iron contamination.

C. Heavy stainless steel plates shall be carefully separated and chocked with wooden

blocks so that the forks of a fork-lift could be inserted between plates without mechanically damaging the surface.

D. Stainless steel plates and sheets laid out for use shall be off the floor and be divided by

wooden planks to prevent surface damage and to facilitate subsequent handling. E. Plate clamps, if used, shall be used with care as the serrated faces can dig in, indent

and gouge the surface. F. Stainless steel fabrications shall be loaded in such a manner that they may be

transported and unloaded without being overstressed, deformed or otherwise damaged. G. Stainless steel fabrications and packaged materials shall be protected from corrosion

and deterioration and shall be stored in a dry area. Materials stored outdoors shall be


supported above ground surfaces on wood runners and protected with approved effective and durable covers.

H. Stainless steel fabrications shall not be placed in or on a structure in a manner that

might cause distortion or damage to the fabrication. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged stainless steel fabrications or materials as directed by the Engineer.

1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and shall make any field measurements necessary and shall be fully responsible for accuracy and layout of the work.

B. The Contractor shall review the Contract Drawings and any discrepancies shall be

reported to the Engineer for clarification prior to starting fabrication. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Stainless steel shall be Type 304 unless it is used for underwater service. Stainless steel for underwater service shall be Type 316. Minimum mechanical finish shall be No. 4 as stated in Table 2 unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings.

B. The basic mill forms (sheet, strip, plate and bar) are classified by size as shown on

Table 1. Tables 2, 3 and 4 identify finishes and conditions in which sheet, bar and plate are available.

C. Tables 2, 3 and 4 show numbered finishes and conditions for sheet, bar and plate.

While there are no specific designations for polished finishes on bar or plate, the sheet finish designations are used to describe the desired effect. This also applies to finishes on ornamental tubing.

D. There are three standard finishes for strip, which are broadly described by the finishing

operations employed:

1. No. 1 Strip Finish

No. 1 strip finish is approximately the same as No. 2D Sheet Finish. It varies in appearance from dull gray matte to a fairly reflective surface, depending largely on alloy composition and amount of cold reduction.

2. No. 2 Strip Finish is approximately the same as a No. 2B sheet finish. It is

smoother, more reflective than No. 1, and likewise varies with alloy composition. 3. Bright annealed finish is a highly reflective finish that is retained by final

annealing in a controlled atmosphere furnace.

Bid

Set

05

06

1-6

B

low

er

Ele

ctr

ific

ation

Pro

ject

Ja

nua

ry,

20

19

Ta

ble

1

C

lass

ific

ati

on

of

Sta

inle

ss

Ste

el P

rod

uct

Fo

rm

Item

D

esc

rip

tio

n

Dim

en

sio

ns

Th

ick

ne

ss

Wid

th

Dia

me

ter

or

Siz

e

Sh

ee

t C

oils

and

cu

t le

ng

th:

Mill

fin

ish

es N

os. 1

, 2

D a

nd 2

B

Po

lish

ed

fin

ish

es N

os. 3

, 4

, 6

, 7

& 8

u

nd

er

3/1

6"

und

er

3/1

6"

24"

and o

ve

r a

ll w

idth

s

--

--

Str

ip

Co

ld f

inis

hed

, co

ils o

r cut le

ng

ths

Po

lish

ed

fin

ish

es N

os. 3

, 4

, 6

,7 &

8

und

er

3/1

6"

und

er

3/1

6"

und

er

24"

all

wid

ths

--

--

Pla

te

Fla

t ro

lled o

r fo

rge

d

3/1

6"

and

ove

r o

ve

r 1

0"

--

Ba

r H

ot fin

ish

ed

ro

un

ds,

sq

ua

res, o

cta

go

ns a

nd

hexa

go

ns

Ho

t fin

ish

ed

fla

ts

Co

ld f

inis

hed

ro

un

ds,

sq

ua

res, o

cta

gon

s a

nd

hexa

go

ns

Co

ld f

inis

hed

fla

ts

--

1/8

" to

8"

incl.

--

1/8

" to

4-1

/2"

--

1/4

" to

10"

incl.

--

3/8

" to

4-1

/2"

1/4

" a

nd

over

--

ove

r 1

/8"

--

Wire

Co

ld f

inis

hes o

nly

: (in

co

il)

Ro

un

d,

sq

uare

, o

cta

go

n, h

exa

go

n a

nd f

lat

wire

u

nd

er

3/1

6"

und

er

3/8

" --

Pip

e &

T

ubin

g

Se

ve

ral d

iffe

rent cla

ssific

ation

s,

with

d

iffe

rin

g s

pecific

atio

ns, a

re a

va

ilable

.

Extr

usio

n

No

t co

nsid

ere

d “

sta

ndard

” sh

ap

es. C

urr

ently lim

ite

d in

siz

e t

o a

pp

roxim

ate

ly 6

-1/2

" d

iam

ete

r or

str

uctu

rals

.

Bid

Set

05

06

1-7

B

low

er

Ele

ctr

ific

ation

Pro

ject

Ja

nua

ry,

20

19

Ta

ble

2

S

tan

dard

Me

ch

an

ical S

hee

t F

inis

hes

Un

po

lis

he

d o

r R

oll

ed

Fin

ish

es:

No

. 1

A r

oug

h d

ull

su

rfa

ce w

hic

h r

esults f

rom

hot

rolli

ng

to t

he s

pecifie

d t

hic

kn

ess f

ollo

we

d b

y a

nn

ea

ling

and

de

sca

ling.

No

. 4

A

polis

hed

su

rfa

ce

obta

ined

b

y

fin

ish

ing

with

a

120-1

50

m

esh

abra

siv

e,

follo

win

g

initia

l g

rin

din

g

with

co

ars

er

abra

siv

es.

Th

is i

s a

ge

nera

l p

urp

ose

brig

ht

fin

ish w

ith

a

vis

ible

"g

rain

" w

hic

h p

reve

nts

m

irro

r re

fle

ctio

n.

No

. 2

D

A

dull

fin

ish

wh

ich

re

sults

from

co

ld

rolli

ng

fo

llow

ed b

y a

nn

ea

ling

a

nd

d

esca

ling

, a

nd

m

ay

perh

ap

s

get

a

fin

al

ligh

t ro

ll p

ass

thro

ug

h

unp

olis

hed

ro

lls.

A

2D

fin

ish

is

u

sed

wh

ere

a

pp

ea

ran

ce

is o

f n

o c

once

rn.

No

. 6

A

dull

sa

tin

fin

ish

h

avin

g

low

er

refle

ctivity

tha

n

No

. 4

fin

ish.

It

is p

roduce

d b

y T

am

pic

o b

rushin

g

the N

o.

4 f

inis

h in

a m

ediu

m o

f a

bra

siv

e a

nd

oil.

It

is

used

fo

r arc

hitectu

ral

app

lica

tion

s

an

d

orn

am

enta

tion w

here

a h

igh l

uste

r is

und

esira

ble

, a

nd

to c

ontr

ast

with

brig

hte

r fin

ish

es.

No

. 2

B

A b

rig

ht

co

ld-r

olle

d fin

ish

re

sultin

g in

th

e sam

e

ma

nn

er

as

No

. 2

D

fin

ish

, e

xce

pt

that

the

ann

ea

led

and

d

esca

led

sh

ee

t re

ceiv

es

a

fin

al

ligh

t ro

ll p

ass t

hro

ug

h p

olis

hed

ro

lls.

Th

is i

s t

he

ge

nera

l p

urp

ose

co

ld-r

olle

d

fin

ish

th

at

ca

n

be

u

sed

as is,

or

as a

pre

limin

ary

ste

p to

po

lish

ing.

No

. 7

A h

igh

refle

ctive

fin

ish

th

at

is o

bta

ined

by b

uff

ing

fin

ely

g

rou

nd

surf

aces

but

not

to

the

exte

nt

of

co

mp

lete

ly

rem

ovin

g

the

"g

rit"

lin

es.

It

is

use

d

ch

iefly f

or

arc

hite

ctu

ral an

d o

rnam

enta

l p

urp

ose

s.

Po

lis

he

d F

inis

he

s:

No

. 3

An

in

term

edia

te

polis

h

su

rfa

ce

obta

ined

b

y

fin

ish

ing

with

a 1

00

grit

ab

rasiv

e.

Ge

ne

rally

used

wh

ere

a

sem

i-fin

ish

ed

polis

hed

surf

ace

is

re

qu

ire

d.

A

N

o.

3

fin

ish

usua

lly

receiv

es

add

itio

na

l p

olis

hin

g d

uring

fa

brica

tion

.

No

. 8

Th

e m

ost

refle

ctive

su

rfa

ce,

wh

ich

is o

bta

ined

by

polis

hin

g

with

su

ccessiv

ely

fin

er

abra

siv

es

and

buff

ing

e

xte

nsiv

ely

u

ntil

all

grit

lines

from

p

relim

inary

grin

din

g o

pera

tion

s a

re r

em

ove

d.

It

is

used

fo

r ap

plic

ation

s

su

ch

as

mirro

rs

an

d

refle

cto

rs.

Bid

Set

05

06

1-8

B

low

er

Ele

ctr

ific

ation

Pro

ject

Ja

nua

ry,

20

19

Ta

ble

3

C

on

dit

ion

s a

nd

Fin

ish

es

fo

r B

ar

Co

nd

itio

ns

Su

rfa

ce

Fin

ish

es

1

Ho

t w

ork

ed o

nly

(a

) S

ca

le n

ot re

mo

ve

d (

exclu

din

g s

pot co

nd

itio

nin

g)

(b)

Ro

ug

h tu

rne

d2

(c)

Pic

kle

d o

r b

last cle

an

ed

and

pic

kle

d.

An

ne

ale

d o

r oth

erw

ise

he

at tr

eate

d.

(a)

Sca

le n

ot re

mo

ve

d (

exclu

din

g s

pot co

nd

itio

nin

g)

(b)

Ro

ug

h tu

rne

d

(c)

Pic

kle

d o

r b

last cle

an

ed

and

pic

kle

d

(d)

Co

ld d

raw

n o

r co

ld r

olle

d

(e)

Ce

nte

rless g

rou

nd

(f)

Po

lish

ed

An

ne

ale

d a

nd

co

ld w

ork

ed

to h

igh t

ensile

str

eng

th3

(d)

Co

ld d

raw

n o

r co

ld r

olle

d

(e)

Ce

nte

rless g

rou

nd

(f)

Polis

hed

1

Surf

ace

finis

hes

(b

), (

e) a

nd (

f) a

re a

ppli

cable

to r

ound b

ars

only

. 2

Bar

s of

the

4x

x s

erie

s st

ainle

ss s

teel

s w

hic

h a

re h

ighly

har

den

able

, su

ch a

s T

ypes

414,

420,

42

0F

, 43

1,

440A

, 4

40

B a

nd 4

40

C,

are

ann

eale

d

bef

ore

ro

ugh

tu

rnin

g.

Oth

er h

arden

able

gra

des

, su

ch a

s T

ypes

403,

410,

416 a

nd 4

16S

e, m

ay a

lso r

equ

ire

annea

lin

g d

epen

din

g o

n t

hei

r

com

posi

tio

n a

nd s

ize.

3

Pro

duce

d i

n T

yp

es 3

02

, 303

Se,

30

4 a

nd 3

16.

100% Submittal 05061-9 Blower Electrification Project December, 2018

Table 4

Conditions and Finishes for Plate

Condition and Finish Description and Remarks

Hot rolled Scale not removed. Not heat treated. Plates not recommended for final use in this condition.4

Hot rolled, annealed or heat treated Scale not removed. Use of plates in this condition is generally confined to heat resisting applications. Scale impairs corrosion resistance.1

Hot rolled, annealed or heat treated, blast cleaned or pickled

Condition and finish commonly preferred for corrosion resisting and most heat resisting applications.

Hot rolled, annealed, descaled and temper passed

Smoother finish for specialized applications.

Hot rolled, annealed, descaled cold rolled, annealed, descaled, optionally temper passed

Smooth finish with greater freedom from surface imperfection than the above.

Hot rolled, annealed or heat treated, surface cleaned and polished

Polished finishes refer to Table 2.

4 Surface inspection is not practicable on plates which have not been pickled or otherwise descaled.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION

A. Holes for bolts and screws shall be drilled. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Joints exposed to the weather shall be formed to exclude water.

B. As far as practicable, all fabricated units shall be fitted and assembled in the shop, with

all cuts and bends made to precision measurements in accordance with details shown on approved shop drawings.

C. Work shall be fabricated so that it is installed in a manner that will provide for expansion

and contraction, prevent the shearing of bolts, screws and other fastenings, ensure rigidity, and provide close fitting of sections.

D. All finished and/or machined faces shall be true to line and level. Stainless steel

sections shall be well formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles; curved work shall be sprung evenly to curves.

E. All work shall be fitted together at the shop as far as possible, and delivered complete


and ready for erection. Proper care shall be exercised in handling all work so as not to injure the finished surfaces.

3.02 WELDING

A. Welding shall be done in a manner that will prevent buckling and in accordance with Specification 05050 – Metal Fastening, and as modified hereinafter.

B. All welds exposed in the work shall be ground smooth and finished to match the finish of

the adjacent stainless steel surfaces. C. Select weld rods that provide weld filler metal having corrosion resistant properties as

nearly identical or better than the base metal to insure preservation of the corrosion-resistant properties. Provide heat treatment at welds where testing of weld procedure indicates it is required to restore the corrosion resistance.

D. Thermal conductivity of stainless steel is about half that of other steels; and the following

methods may be used to accommodate this situation:

1. Use lower weld current setting. 2. Use skip-weld techniques to minimize heat concentration. 3. Use back-up chill bars or other cooling techniques to dissipate heat.

E. Edges of the stainless steel to be welded shall be cleaned of contaminants.

3.03 FASTENERS

A. Stainless steel fasteners shall be used for joining stainless steel work. B. Stainless steel fasteners shall be made of alloys that are equal to or more corrosion

resistant than the materials they join. 3.04 CLEANING AND HANDLING

A. All stainless steel surfaces shall be precleaned, descaled, passivated and inspected before, during and after fabrication in accordance with the applicable sections of ASTM A380 and as detailed in the procedures to be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to start of work. Degreasing and passivation of stainless steel articles shall be conducted as the last step after fabrication.

B. Measures to protect cleaned surfaces shall be taken as soon as final cleaning is

completed and shall be maintained during all subsequent handling, storage and shipping.

1. The Contractor shall submit for approval specific procedures listing all the steps

to be followed in detecting contamination and in descaling, cleaning, passivation and protecting of all stainless steel.


2. Area showing clear indications of contamination shall be recleaned, repassivated

and reinspected. C. At approved stages in the shop operations, contaminants such as scale, embedded iron,

rust, dirts, oil, grease and any other foreign matter shall be removed from the metal, as directed or approved by the Engineer. The adequacy of these operations shall be checked by the Engineer. Operations in the shop shall be conducted so as to avoid contamination of the stainless steel and to keep the metal surfaces free from dirt and foreign matter.

D. In order to prevent incipient corrosion during fabrication, special efforts shall be made at

all times to keep all stainless steel surfaces from coming in contact with other metals.

1. Stainless steel and stainless steel welds shall be cleaned with clean sand free of iron, stainless steel wool, stainless steel brushes, or other approved means and shall be protected at all times from contamination by any materials, including carbon steel, that shall impair its resistance to corrosion.

2. Approved methods of cutting, grinding and handling shall be used to prevent

contamination. If air-arc, or carbon-arc cutting is used, additional metal shall be removed by approved mechanical means so as to provide clean, weldable edges. All grinding of stainless steel shall be performed with aluminum oxide or silicon carbide grinding wheels bonded with resin or rubber. Grinding wheels used on carbon steel shall not be used on stainless steel.

3. Sand, grinding wheels, brushes and other materials used for cleaning stainless

steel shall be checked periodically by the Engineer for contaminants. Cleaning aids found to contain contaminants shall not be used on the work.

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. All stainless steel fabrications shall be erected square, plumb and true, accurately fitted, adequately anchored in place, set at proper elevations and positions.

B. All inserts, anchor rods and all other miscellaneous work specified in the Detailed

Specifications or shown on the Contract Drawings or required for the proper completion of the work, which are embedded in concrete, shall be properly set and securely held in position in the forms before the concrete is placed.

C. All stainless steel fabrications shall be installed in conformance with details shown on

the Contract Drawings or on the approved shop drawings.

-END OF SECTION –


SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and services required to provide all structural steel work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The term "structural steel" shall include items as defined in the AISC "Code of Standard Practice".


A. Section 05010 - Metal Materials B. Section 05035 - Galvanizing C. Section 05050 - Metal Fastening


A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents.

1. California Building Code 2. AISC - "Code of Standard Practice." 3. AISC - "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings". 4. AISC 348 - "The 2009 RCSC Specification for Structural Joints”. 5. AWS - "Structural Welding Code".

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Certified Mill Test Reports 2. Affidavit of Compliance with grade specified 3. Shop Drawings which include the following:

a. Layout drawings indicating all structural shapes, sizes, and dimensions.

09

08

17

BR


b. Beam and column schedules. c. Detailed drawings indicating jointing, anchoring and connection details and

vent and drain holes where required. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Shop inspection may be required by the Owner at his own expense. The Contractor shall give ample notice to the Engineer prior to the beginning of any fabrication work so that inspection may be provided. The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for the inspection of materials and workmanship in the shop, and the inspectors shall be allowed free access to the necessary parts of the work. Inspectors shall have the authority to reject any materials or work which do not meet the requirements of these Specifications. Inspection at the shop is intended as a means of facilitating the work and avoiding errors, but is expressly understood that it will in no way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for furnishing proper materials or workmanship under this Specification.

B. The erector shall be a qualified installer who participates in the AISC Certification program

and is designated an AISC Certified Erector, Category ACSE.

C. The fabricator shall be a qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Certification

program and is designated an AISC Certified Plant, Category STD. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel

1. Structural steel for W shapes shall conform to ASTM A992 unless otherwise indicated.

2. Structural steel for HP shapes shall conform to ASTM A572 Grade 50 unless

otherwise indicated. 3. Structural steel for S, M, C, and MC shapes and angles and plates shall conform to

ASTM A36 unless otherwise indicated. 4. Steel pipe shall be ASTM A53, Grade B. 5. HSS shall be ASTM A500, Grade C or ASTM A1085. All members shall be

furnished full length without splices unless otherwise noted or accepted by the Engineer.

6. All unidentified steel will be rejected and shall be removed from the site and replaced

by the Contractor, all at the expense of the Contractor.


7. Fasteners for structural steel shall be in accordance with Section 05050, Metal Fastening.

B. Welds

1. Electrodes for welding shall be in accordance with Section 05050, Metal Fastening.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 MEASUREMENT

A. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and shall make any field measurements necessary and shall be fully responsible for accuracy and layout of work. The Contractor shall review the Drawings and any discrepancies shall be reported to the Engineer for clarification prior to starting fabrication.

3.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication shall be in accordance with the AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings and AISC "Code of Standard Practice". Fabrication shall begin only after Shop Drawing approval.

B. Except where otherwise noted on the Drawings or in this Specification, all shop connections

shall be welded. C. All holes in structural steel members required for anchors, anchor rods, bolts, sag rods, vent

and drain holes or other members or for attachment of other work shall be provided by the fabricator and detailed on the Shop Drawings.

D. All materials shall be properly worked and match-marked for field assembly. E. Where galvanizing of structural steel is required, it shall be done in accordance with

Section 05035, Galvanizing. 3.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Structural members shall be loaded in such a manner that they may be transported and unloaded without being over-stressed, deformed or otherwise damaged.

B. Structural steel members and packaged materials shall be protected from corrosion and

deterioration. Material shall be stored in a dry area and shall not be placed in direct contact with the ground. Materials shall not be placed on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structures. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

3.04 ERECTION


A. The erection of all structural steel shall conform to the applicable requirements of the AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" and AISC "Code of Standard Practice". All temporary bracing, guys and bolts as may be necessary to ensure the safety of the structure until the permanent connections have been made shall be provided by the Contractor.

B. Structural members shall be set accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. The

various members shall be aligned and adjusted to form a part of a complete frame or structure before permanently fastened.

C. No cutting of structural steel members in the field will be allowed except by the written

approval of the Engineer. D. Bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned

before assembly. E. Field welding shall not be permitted unless specifically indicated in the Drawings or approved

in writing by the Engineer. All field welding shall comply with Section 05050, Metal Fastening.

F. All bolted connections shall use high strength bolts in accordance with Section 05050, Metal

Fastening. High strength bolts shall be installed in accordance with AISC 348 “The 2009 RCSC Specification for Structural Joints”. Bolts specified or noted on the Drawings to be a tension or slip critical “SC” type connection shall be fully pretensioned with proper preparation of the faying surfaces. All other bolts shall be snug tightened unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

G. All field connections shall be accurately fitted up before being bolted. Drifting shall be only

such as will bring the parts into position and shall not be sufficient to enlarge the holes or to distort the metal. All unfair holes shall be drilled or reamed.

H. Misfits at Bolted Connections

1. Where misfits in erection bolting are encountered, the Engineer shall be immediately

notified. The Contractor shall submit a method to remedy the misfit for review by the Engineer. The Engineer will determine whether the remedy is acceptable or if the member must be refabricated.

2. Incorrectly sized or misaligned holes in members shall not be enlarged by burning or

by the use of drift pins. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately and shall submit a proposed method of remedy for review by the Engineer.

3. Where misalignment between anchor rods and rod holes in steel members are

encountered, the Engineer shall be immediately notified. The Contractor shall submit a method to remedy the misalignment for review by the Engineer.

I. Grouting of Base Plates and Bearing Plates


1. The bottom surface of the plates shall be cleaned of all foreign materials, and concrete or masonry bearing surface shall be cleaned of all foreign materials and roughened to improve bonding.

2. Accurately set all base and bearing plates to designated levels with steel wedges or

leveling plates. 3. Baseplates shall be grouted with non-shrink grout to assure full uniform bearing.

Grouting shall be done prior to placing loads on the structure. Non-shrink grout shall conform to Section 03600, Grout.

4. Anchor rods shall be tightened after the supported members have been positioned

and plumbed and the non-shrink grout has attained its specified strength.

J. Where finishing is required, assembly shall be completed including bolting and welding of units before start of finishing operations.

3.05 PAINTING

A. Painting shall be performed according to Section 09900, Painting and the following additional requirements.

1. Concrete Encased Steel: Steel members which will be encased in concrete shall be

cleaned but not painted prior to encasement. 2. Contact Surfaces: Contact surfaces such as at field connections, shall be cleaned

and primed but not painted. 3. Finished Surfaces: Machine finished surfaces shall be protected against corrosion

by a rust-inhibiting coating which is easily removed prior to erection or which has characteristics that make removal unnecessary prior to erection.

4. Surfaces Adjacent to Field Welds: Surfaces within 2 inches of any field weld location

shall be free of materials that would prevent proper welding or produce objectionable fumes while welding is being done.



SECTION 05140

STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all equipment, labor, materials, and services required to provide all structural aluminum work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The term "structural aluminum" shall include items as defined in the Aluminum Association "Specifications for Aluminum Structures".


A. Section 05010 - Metal Materials B. Section 05050 - Metal Fastening C. Section 09900 - Painting


A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of the Bid.

1. California Building Code 2. Aluminum Association "Specifications for Aluminum Structures" 3. AWS D1.2 - "Structural Welding Code".

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals.

1. Certified Mill Test Reports 2. Affidavit of Compliance with grade specified 3. Shop Drawings which include the following:

a. Layout drawings indicating all structural shapes, sizes, and dimensions. b. Beam and column schedules.

12

21

09

BR


c. Detailed drawings indicating jointing, anchoring and connection details.


A. Shop inspection may be required by the Owner at his own expense. The Contractor shall give ample notice to the Engineer prior to the beginning of any fabrication work so that inspection may be provided. The Contractor shall furnish all facilities for the inspection of materials and workmanship in the shop, and the inspectors shall be allowed free access to the necessary parts of the work. Inspectors shall have the authority to reject any materials or work which do not meet the requirements of these Specifications. Inspection at the shop is intended as a means of facilitating the work and avoiding errors, but is expressly understood that it will in no way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for furnishing proper materials or workmanship under this Specification.


A. Structural aluminum shall comply with Section 05010, Metal Materials. B. Fasteners for structural aluminum shall be in accordance with Section 05050, Metal

Fastening. C. Electrodes for welding shall be in accordance with Section 05050, Metal Fastening.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 MEASUREMENT

A. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and shall make any field measurements necessary and shall be fully responsible for accuracy and layout of work. The Contractor shall review the Drawings and any discrepancies shall be reported to the Engineer for clarification prior to starting fabrication.

3.02 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication shall be in accordance with the Aluminum Association "Specifications for Aluminum Structures". Fabrication shall begin only after Shop Drawing approval.

B. Except where otherwise noted on the Drawings or in this Specification, all shop connections

shall be welded. C. All holes in structural aluminum members required for anchors, anchor rods, bolts, or other

members or for attachment of other work shall be provided by the fabricator and detailed on the Shop Drawings.


D. All materials shall be properly worked and match-marked for field assembly. 3.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Structural members shall be loaded in such a manner that they may be transported and unloaded without being over-stressed, deformed or otherwise damaged.

B. Structural aluminum members and packaged materials shall be protected from corrosion

and deterioration. Material shall be stored in a dry area and shall not be placed in direct contact with the ground. Materials shall not be placed on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to the members or the supporting structures. The Contractor shall repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

3.04 ERECTION

A. All temporary bracing, guys and bolts as may be necessary to ensure the safety of the structure until the permanent connections have been made shall be provided by the Contractor.

B. Structural members shall be set accurately to the lines and elevations indicated. The

various members shall be aligned and adjusted to form a part of a complete frame or structure before being permanently fastened.

C. No cutting of structural aluminum members in the field will be allowed except by the written

approval of the Engineer. D. Bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned

before assembly. E. Field welding shall not be permitted unless specifically indicated in the Drawings or approved

in writing by the Engineer. All field welding shall comply with Section 05050, Metal Fastening.

F. All bolted connections shall comply with Section 05050, Metal Fastening. G. All field connections shall be accurately fitted up before being bolted. Drifting shall be only

such as will bring the parts into position and shall not be sufficient to enlarge the holes or to distort the metal. All unfair holes shall be drilled or reamed.

H. Misfits at Bolted Connections

1. Where misfits in erection bolting are encountered, the Engineer shall be immediately

notified. The Contractor shall submit a method to remedy the misfit for review by the Engineer. The Engineer will determine whether the remedy is acceptable or if the member must be refabricated.

2. Incorrectly sized or misaligned holes in members shall not be enlarged by burning or

by the use of drift pins. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer immediately and shall submit a proposed method of remedy for review by the Engineer.


3. Where misalignment between anchor bolts and bolt holes in aluminum members are

encountered, the Engineer shall be immediately notified. The Contractor shall submit a method to remedy the misalignment for review by the Engineer.

I. Grouting of Base Plates and Bearing Plates

1. The bottom surface of the plates shall be cleaned of all foreign materials, and

concrete or masonry bearing surface shall be cleaned of all foreign materials and roughened to improve bonding.

2. Accurately set all base and bearing plates to designated levels with steel wedges or

leveling plates. 3. Baseplates shall be grouted with non-shrink grout to assure full uniform bearing.

Grouting shall be done prior to placing loads on the structure. Non-shrink grout shall conform to Section 03600, Grout.

4. Anchor bolts shall be tightened after the supported members have been positioned

and plumbed and the non-shrink grout has attained its specified strength.

J. Where finishing is required, assembly shall be completed including bolting and welding of units before start of finishing operations.

3.05 PAINTING

A. Painting shall be performed according to Section 09900, Painting. B. Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete or dissimilar metals shall be thoroughly

protected with two coats of epoxy paint with a minimum total thickness of 16 mils or other approved isolating material in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900 - Painting.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all metal fabrications not specifically included in other Sections, complete and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Work shall include but may not be limited to lintels, guard posts, hoppers, and chutes.


A. Section 05010 - Metal Materials B. Section 05050 - Metal Fastening C. Section 05035 - Galvanizing D. Certain specific items are included in other Sections of the Specifications. See the section

for the specific item in question. 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all work specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of Bid.

1. California Building Code 2. AISC - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings 3. AISI - Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members 4. Aluminum Association Specifications for Aluminum Structures

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Complete fabrication and erection drawings of all metalwork specified herein.

01

17

05

BR


2. Other submittals as required in accordance with Section 05010, Metal Materials, and Section 05050, Metal Fastening.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL MATERIALS

A. Metal materials used in metal fabrications shall conform to Section 05010, Metal Materials, unless noted otherwise.

2.02 METAL FASTENING

A. All welds and fasteners used in metal fabrication shall conform to Section 05050, Metal Fastening, unless noted otherwise.

2.03 LINTELS

A. Provide lintels as shown on the Drawings and specified herein with 8 inches minimum bearing each side unless noted otherwise.

B. All lintels shall be steel in accordance with Section 05120, Structural Steel, and shall be

galvanized in accordance with Section 05035, Galvanizing, unless noted otherwise. 2.04 GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS)

A. Guard posts shall be 6-inch diameter Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe in accordance with ASTM A53.

B. Guard posts shall be concrete filled and crowned, as detailed in the Drawings.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION

A. All measurements and dimensions shall be based on field conditions and shall be verified by the Contractor prior to fabrication. Such verification shall include coordination with adjoining work.

B. All fabricated work shall be shop fitted together as much as practicable, and delivered to the

field, complete and ready for erection. All miscellaneous items such as stiffeners, fillets, connections, brackets, and other details necessary for a complete installation shall be provided.

C. All work shall be fabricated and installed in a manner that will provide for expansion and

contraction, prevent shearing of bolts, screws, and other fastenings, ensure rigidity, and provide a close fit of sections.


D. Finished members shall conform to the lines, angles, and curves shown on the Drawings and shall be free from distortions of any kind.

E. All shearings shall be neat and accurate, with parts exposed to view neatly finished. Flame

cutting is allowed only when performed utilizing a machine. F. All shop connections shall be welded unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or

specified herein. Bolts and welds shall conform to Section 05050, Metal Fastening. All fastenings shall be concealed where practicable.

G. Fabricated items shall be shop painted when specified in Section 09900, Painting.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Assembly and installation of fabricated system components shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. All miscellaneous metalwork shall be erected square, plumb and true, accurately fitted,

adequately anchored in place, and set at proper elevations and positions C. Metal work shall be field painted when as specified in accordance with Section 09900,

Painting.



SECTION 05531

GRATINGS, ACCESS HATCHES, AND ACCESS DOORS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required to provide all gratings, floor plates, and hatches in accordance with the Contract Documents.


A. Section 05010 - Metal Materials B. Section 05035 - Galvanizing C. Section 05050 - Metal Fastening



1. California Building Code 2. Aluminum Association Specifications for Aluminum Structures 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Complete fabrication and erection Drawings of all gratings, access hatches, and access doors specified herein.

2. Other submittals as required in accordance with Section 05010, Metal Materials, and

Section 05050, Metal Fastening. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL MATERIALS

A. Metal materials used for gratings, floor plates, and hatches shall conform to Section 05010, Metal Materials, unless noted otherwise.

06

05

15

BR


2.02 METAL FASTENING

A. All welds and fasteners used for gratings, floor plates, and hatches shall conform to Section 05050, Metal Fastening, unless noted otherwise.

2.03 GRATING

A. General - Grating, including support frames, fastenings, and all necessary appurtenances for a complete installation, shall be furnished as indicated on the Drawings.

1. All exposed bearing ends of grating shall be enclosed in a perimeter band of the

same dimensions and material as the main bars, including ends at all cutouts. 2. Grating shall be fabricated into easily removable sections and shall be fastened at

each corner and as required with fasteners provided by the grating manufacturer. No fasteners shall be permitted to project above the walking surface.

3. Grating shall be designed for a loading of 150 psf unless otherwise required by the

Drawings. Grating deflection shall not exceed 1/4 inch under a uniform load of 100 psf. Minimum grating depth shall be 1-1/2 inches, unless structural requirements based on clear span require more depth.

4. Grating installed in cast-in-place concrete shall be provided with embedded support

frames on all perimeter and bearing edges. Support frames shall include anchor straps or headed studs at a maximum of 18” on-center, a minimum of two each side. Support frames shall be fabricated from the same material as the grating.

B. Aluminum Grating

1. Aluminum grating shall be of I-bar type and shall consist of extruded bearing bars

positioned and locked by crossbars. All supports, cross members, etc. shall be aluminum. Plank clips for grating holddowns or other required attachments, shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Bolts shall be stainless steel. Provide embedded aluminum support frames for cast-in-place concrete installations.

2. Grating shall be “19-SI-4 I-Bar Swage Locked” by Alabama Metal Industries

Corporation (AMICO), “IB” by Harsco Industrial IKG, “I-Bar 19SGI4", by Ohio Grating Inc., or “I-Bar” by Thompson Fabricating LLC.

C. Aluminum Plank Grating

1. Aluminum plank grating shall be unpunched planks of extruded aluminum welded

together to form panels. Panel ends shall have an extruded aluminum end bar welded in place. All support members shall be aluminum. Plank clips for grating holddowns or other required attachments, shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Bolts shall be stainless steel. Provide embedded aluminum support frames for cast-in-place concrete installations.


2. Aluminum plank grating shall be HD-P manufactured by Harsco Industrial IKG., Heavy Duty Series manufactured by Ohio Gratings, Inc., or Unpunched Duo-Grip Extruded Series manufactured by Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (AMICO).

D. Heavy Duty Steel Grating

1. Heavy duty steel grating shall be galvanized according to Section 05035,

Galvanizing. 2. Main bearing bars shall conform to ASTM A36. Cross bars shall be flush with the

top of the grating. Provide embedded galvanized steel support frames for cast-in-place concrete installations.

3. Grating span shall be 36 inches maximum and shall satisfy AASHTO loading for H-

20 truck. 4. Grating shall be manufactured by Harsco Industrial IKG, Alabama Metal Industries

Corporation (AMICO), and Ohio Gratings, Inc. 2.04 ACCESS HATCHES

A. Not used.

2.05 ACCESS DOORS

A. General

1. Not used.

B. Floor, Wet Well and Dry Pit Access Doors

1. Not used.

C. Roof Access Doors

1. Not used.

D. Fixed Ladders

1. Not used. 2.06 FALL THROUGH PREVENTION SYSTEM

A. Not used. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION


A. All measurements and dimensions shall be based on field conditions and shall be verified by

the Contractor prior to fabrication. Such verification shall include coordination with adjoining work.

B. All fabricated work shall be shop fitted together as much as practicable, and delivered to the field, complete and ready for erection. All miscellaneous items such as stiffeners, fillets, connections, brackets, and other details necessary for a complete installation shall be provided.

C. All work shall be fabricated and installed in a manner that will provide for expansion and contraction, prevent shearing of bolts, screws, and other fastenings, ensure rigidity, and provide a close fit of sections.

D. Finished members shall conform to the lines, angles, and curves shown on the Drawings and shall be free from distortions of any kind.

E. All shearings shall be neat and accurate, with parts exposed to view neatly finished. Flame cutting is allowed only when performed utilizing a machine.

F. All shop connections shall be welded unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Bolts and welds shall conform to Section 05050, Metal Fastening. All fastenings shall be concealed where practicable.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Assembly and installation of fabricated system components shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. All gratings, access hatches, and access doors shall be erected square, plumb and true, accurately fitted, adequately anchored in place, and set at proper elevations and positions. Embedded support frames shall be set level and square.

C. Grating shall not be field cut or modified unless approved by Engineer.

D. Grating shall not be used for equipment support or anchorage.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 05830

BEARING DEVICES AND ANCHORING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install bearing plates, pads, expansion devices, anchor rods and bolts and/or other devices used in conjunction with bearings and anchoring of bearing devices and assemblies at supports in accordance with this item and in conformity with the Drawings.


A. Section 05010 - Metal Materials B. Section 05035 - Galvanizing C. Section 05050 - Metal Fastening D. Section 05120 - Structural Steel E. Section 05140 - Structural Aluminum F. Section 09900 - Painting


A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these Specifications, all work specified hereunder shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents to the extent that the provisions of such documents are not in conflict with the requirements of this Section.

1. RMA Rubber A4-F3-T.063-B2, Grade 2, Method B

Handbook 2. ASTM A240, Standard Specification for Heat Resisting Chromium and

Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Plate and Sheet 3. ASTM A480 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-

Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip

4. ASTM D395, Standard Test for Rubber Property – Compression Set

Method B

02

07

14

BR


5. ASTM D412 Standard Test for Rubber Properties In Tension 6. ASTM D471 Standard Test for Rubber Property - Effect of Liquids 7. ASTM D573 Standard Test for Rubber-Deterioration In Air Oven 8. ASTM D575, Standard Test for Rubber Properties In Compression

Method A 9. ASTM D624, Die C Standard Test for Rubber Property - Tear Resistance 10. ASTM D746 Standard Test for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and

Elastomers by Impact 11. ASTM D792 Standard Test for Specific Gravity and Density of Plastics

by Displacement 12. ASTM D1149 Standard Test for Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone

Cracking In a Chamber (Flat Specimens) 13. ASTM D1785 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40 14. ASTM D2240 Standard Test for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness 15. ASTM D2256 Standard Test for Breaking Load (Strength) and Elongation

of Yarn by the Single-Strand Method 16. ASTM D4894 Standard Specification for PTFE Granular Molding and

RPM Extension Materials 17. ASTM D4895 Standard Specification for PTFE Resin Produced From

Dispersion 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following as required for submittals:

1. Certification of compliance that the materials furnished under this section meet and conform to the property and physical requirements, including all testing, as stated herein and as referenced. Specifically, the certification shall state compliance with the applicable standards (ASTM, ANSI, etc.) for fabrication and testing.

2. Shop Drawings for all materials, including installation and adjustment instructions.

Included with the Shop Drawings shall be all material certifications, mill test results, working drawings, etc., which are required by this and other applicable sections of the Specifications.


PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS

A. The elastomer portion of pads shall be new neoprene compound. Pads shall be cast under heat and pressure and may be individually molded or cut from pressure-cast stock. Variations from the dimensions shown on the Drawings shall not be more than the following: thickness, ±1/16 inch; width, -1/8 to +1/4 inch; length, -1/8 to +1/4 inch. Tolerances, dimensions, finish and appearance, flash, and rubber-to-metal bonding shall conform to the requirements of A 4-F3-T.063-B2, Grade 2, Method B, in accordance with the RMA Rubber Handbook. Pads shall be furnished in one piece and shall not be laminated unless otherwise specified. Pads shall be furnished in identifiable packages.

B. Adhesive for use with elastomer pads shall be an epoxy-resin compound compatible with the

elastomer having a sufficient shear strength to prevent slippage between pads and adjacent bearing surfaces. Adhesive shall be 20+F Contact Cement by Miracle Adhesives Corporation, Neoprene Adhesive 77-198 by IGI Adhesives, Sikodur 31, Hi-Mod Gel by Sika Corporation, or DP-605 NS Urethane Adhesive by 3M Adhesive Systems.

C. Laminated pads shall consist of alternate laminations of elastomer and hot-rolled steel

sheets molded together as a unit. Outer metal laminations shall be 3/16 inch, and inner laminations shall be 14 gage. Outer laminations of elastomer shall be 1/4 inch, and inner laminations shall be of equal thickness (at least 3/8 but not more than 1/2 inch), depending on the number of laminations and thickness of the pad. Edges of metal laminations shall have a cover of approximately 1/8 inch of elastomer. The top and bottom bearing surfaces shall each have an integral sealing rib approximately 1/8 inch in depth, in addition to the specified total thickness, and 3/16 inch in width around their peripheries. The bond between the elastomer and metal shall be such that failure shall occur in the elastomer and not between the elastomer and steel when tested for separation. Variations from specified dimensions for individual laminations shall not be more than those specified herein. The total thickness of the complete pad shall not vary more than ±1/8 inch.

D. Material having a nominal durometer hardness of 70 and 50 shall be used for nonlaminated

pads and laminated pads, respectively. Test samples will be prepared from finished pads. Samples of each thickness will be taken from 2 full-size pads from each shipment of 300 pads or less, with 1 additional pad for each additional increment of 300 pads or fraction thereof. When tested using the ASTM methods designated, samples shall comply with the following physical requirements.

1. Original Physical Properties: Test results for tear resistance, tensile strength, and ultimate elongation shall not be more than 10 percent below the following specified value:

Nominal

50

Hardness

70

Min. tear resistance, ASTM D624, Die C (lb/in of thickness)

180 200

Hardness, ASTM D2240 (points) 50±5 70±5


Min. tensile strength, ASTM D412 (average psi of longitudinal and transverse)

2,500 2,500

Min. ultimate elongation (%) 400 300

The compressive deflection tested in accordance with ASTM D575, Method A, shall be as follows:

a. Laminated Pads: The maximum compression deflection shall be 5 and 7 percent of the total rubber thickness at loads of 500 and 800 pounds per square inch, respectively. The maximum shear resistance shall be 50 pounds per square inch of the plan area at 25 percent shear deformation at –20°F. Test pads shall be subjected to a compressive load of 1.5 times the maximum design load without visible damage to the bearing.

b. Nonlaminated Pads: When loaded within 300 to 800 pounds per square inch, material shall show a compressive deflection within 20 percent of that given in the charts of Method A, interpolating for actual measured hardness.

2. Changes in Original Physical Properties: When pads are oven aged 70 hours at 212°F in accordance with ASTM D573, changes shall not be more than the following:

Property Value Hardness (points change) 0 to +15 Tensile strength (% change) ±15 Ultimate elongation (% change) -40

3. Extreme Temperature Characteristics: Compression set under constant deflection, ASTM D395, Method B, 22 hours at 212°F, shall not be more than 35 percent. With the low-temperature brittleness test, ASTM D746, breaks shall not occur above –20°F.

4. Ozone Cracking Resistance: Upon exposure to 100 parts per million of ozone in air by volume at a strain of 20 percent and a temperature of 100±2°F in a test otherwise in accordance with ASTM D1149, cracks shall not develop within 100 hours. Samples shall be wiped with solvent before the test to remove traces of surface impurities.

5. Oil Swell: The volume change shall not be more than +120 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D471 with ASTM Oil No. 3, 70 hours at 212°F.

2.02 TFE BEARING SURFACES

A. TFE resin shall be virgin material conforming to the requirements of ASTM D4894 or D4895. The specific gravity shall be 2.13 to 2.19. The melting point shall be 623±2°F.

B. Filler material shall be milled glass fibers, carbon, or other approved inert filler materials.


C. Adhesive material shall be an epoxy resin conforming to FS MMM-A-134, FEB film or equal,

as approved by the Engineer. D. When tested in accordance with ASTM D4894 or D4895, finished unfilled TFE sheets shall

have a tensile strength of at least 2,800 pounds per square inch and an elongation of at least 200 percent.

E. Filled TFE sheets shall contain inert filler material uniformly blended with TFE resin.

Finished filled TFE sheets containing glass fiber or carbon shall conform to the following:

ASTM

Method

15% Glass

Fibers 25% Carbon

Min. tensile strength D4894/D4895 2,000 psi 1,300 psi

Min. elongation D4894/D4895 150% 75%

Min. specific gravity D792 2.20 2.10

Melting point D4894/D4895 327±10°C 317 ±10°C

F. Fabric containing TFE fibers shall be manufactured from oriented multifilament TFE

fluorocarbon fibers and other fibers as required by specific designs. When tested in accordance with ASTM D2256, the tensile strength of TFE fibers shall be at least 24,000 pounds per square inch and the elongation shall be at least 75 percent.

G. Where TFE sheets are to be epoxy bonded, one surface of the sheet shall be factory treated

by an approved manufacturer using the sodium naphthalene or sodium ammonia process. H. Stainless steel mating surfaces shall be at least 16 gage in thickness and shall conform to

the requirements of ASTM A240, Type 304. The mating surface shall be a true plane surface with a Brinnell hardness of at least 125 and a surface finish of an at least No. 8 mirror finish in accordance with ASTM A480. Stainless steel mating surfaces shall be polished or rolled as necessary to conform to the friction requirements specified herein. The stainless steel shall be attached to the sole plate by means of a seal weld around the entire perimeter of the facing material.

I. The coefficient of friction for the completed bearing assembly shall not be more than the

following:

Material

Bearing Pressure

500 psi

(3.447 MPa)

2,000 psi

(13.790 Mpa)

3,500 psi

(24.132 MPa) Unfilled TFE, fabric Containing TFE fibers, TFE perforated metal composite

.08 .06 .04

Filled TFE .12 .10 .08


Interlocked bronze and filled TFE structures

.10 .07 .05

2.03 PREFORMED FABRIC BEDDING MATERIAL

A. Material shall be composed of multiple layers of 8-ounce cotton duck impregnated and bound with high-quality natural rubber or its equivalent and equally suitable materials compressed into resilient pads of uniform thickness. The number of plys shall be such as to produce the specified thickness after compression and vulcanizing. Finished pads shall withstand compression loads perpendicular to the plane of the laminations of at least 10,000 pounds per square inch without a detrimental reduction in thickness or extrusion.

2.04 ANCHOR RODS

A. Anchor bolts shall be as specified in Section 05050, Metal Fastening. 2.05 PIPE SLEEVES AND COLLARS

A. Pipe sleeves and collars shall be cut from schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM D1785 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 STEEL PLATES, SHAPES, AND BARS

A. Unless galvanizing is indicated on the Drawings, items shall be painted in accordance with the Drawings and Section 09900, Painting.

B. If galvanizing is indicated on the Drawings, steel bearing assemblies for both structural steel

beams and girders and prestressed concrete members shall be galvanized as specified in Section 05035, Galvanizing. Except for attachments of bearing plates to beams, all fabrication and welding of bearing plate assemblies shall be performed before the steel is galvanized. All joints of welded parts shall be sealed with weld material. Welds made for attaching bearing plates to beams or girders shall be cleaned and given 2 coats of zinc rich paint having a minimum total coating thickness of 3 mils.

3.02 BRONZE PLATES

A. Sliding surfaces of bronze plates shall be polished. 3.03 COPPER-ALLOY PLATES

A. Finishing of rolled copper-alloy plates will not be required provided their surfaces are plane, true, and smooth.

3.04 SELF-LUBRICATING PLATES

A. Plates shall be fabricated from cast bronze or rolled copper alloy.


B. Sliding surfaces of plates shall be provided with annular grooves or cylindrical recesses or a

combination thereof, which shall be filled with a lubricating compound. The lubricating compound shall be compressed into recesses under sufficient pressure to form a nonplastic lubricating inset. The inset shall comprise at least 25 percent of the total area of the plate. The frictional coefficient shall not be more than 0.10. The compound shall be free from material that will cause abrasive or corrosive action on metal surfaces and able to withstand extremely high pressures and atmospheric elements over long periods of time.

C. Items shall be the standard products of the manufacturer of such materials for the

application. D. Prior to assembly, the steel surface that will bear on the self-lubricating bearing plate shall

be thoroughly lubricated with additional antioxidant lubricant furnished by the manufacturer. Coatings shall be removed before application of antioxidant lubricant.

3.05 ELASTOMERIC PADS

A. Care shall be taken in fabricating pads and related metal parts so that effects detrimental to their proper performance, such as uneven bearing and excessive bulging, will not occur.

3.06 PLACEMENT OF BEARING PLATES AND PADS

A. Bearing areas shall be finished to a true level plane which shall not vary perceptibly from a straightedge placed in any direction across the area.

B. Bearing plates or pads shall be set level in exact position and shall have a uniform bearing

over the entire area. Provision shall be made to keep plates or pads in the correct position during erection of beams or placement of concrete.

C. Elastomeric pads and other flexible bearing materials shall be placed directly on masonry surfaces finished to a roughness equivalent to that of a No. 36 to No. 46 grit. Pads, bearing areas, or bridge seats and metal bearing plates shall be thoroughly cleaned and free from oil, grease, and other foreign materials. Metal bearing plates or bottoms of prefabricated beams that are to bear on elastomeric pads shall be coated with epoxy and then surfaced with a No. 36 to No. 46 silicon carbide or aluminum oxide grit. Bearing areas shall be finished to equivalent roughness.

D. Metal bearing plates shall be bedded on seats as follows:

1. The seat bearing areas shall be thoroughly swabbed with approved paint, and three layers of duck, 12 to 15 ounce per square yard, shall be placed on it, each layer being thoroughly swabbed with paint on its top surface.

2. Superstructure shoes or pedestals shall be placed in position while paint is plastic. As an alternate to duct and paint, preformed fabric bedding material at least 1/8 inch in thickness may be used when called for on the Drawings or approved in writing by the Engineer.

3.07 PLACEMENT OF ANCHOR RODS


A. All necessary anchor rods and bolts (anchors) shall be accurately set either in the concrete as they are being placed, in formed holes, or in holes cored after the concrete has set. If set in the concrete, the rods and bolts shall be accurately positioned by means of templates and rigidly held in position while the concrete is being placed. Holes may be formed by inserting or casting in the fresh concrete oiled wooden plugs, metal pipe or plastic sleeves, or other approved devices, and withdrawing them after the concrete has partially set or left in place as indicated on the Drawing’s or approved by the Engineer. Holes so formed shall be at least 3 inches in diameter or at least 2.5 times the diameter of the rod or bolt. If cored, holes shall be at least 2.5 times the diameter of the anchor used or as indicated on the Drawings. Equipment used for coring concrete shall have been approved by the Engineer. Impact tools will not be permitted. Reinforcing steel shall be placed to provide adequate space to core rod/bolt holes without cutting the reinforcing steel. For cored holes, anchor rods and bolts shall be adequately held in place at the centroid of the hole or as specified on the Drawings by using approved pre-fabricated equalizers designed to allow grout to penetrate and fill the hole completely and spaced as approved by the Engineer.

B. During freezing conditions, anchor holes shall be protected from water accumulations at all

times. C. Anchors which are to be placed in holes of sufficient and specified diameter after the

concrete has set shall be bonded to the concrete with a non-shrink high-strength Portland cement grout in accordance with Section 03600 – Grout or shall be adhesive anchors in accordance with Section 05050 - Metal Fastening. The type anchoring system and grout shall be as indicated on the Drawings. The grout or adhesive shall completely fill the holes. Anchors shall be tested for sufficient pull-out capacity as indicated in applicable sections of the Specifications or as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Anchors that are not designed to project through bearing plates shall be checked for proper

projection above the masonry bearing area immediately prior to placement of bearing plates and beams. Nuts on anchor rods at expansion ends shall be adjusted to permit free movement of the span.

E. Angles for anchor assemblies to be attached to sides of concrete beams shall not be

installed until beams have received their full dead load and supporting falsework has been removed.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 06100

ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on the Drawings and specified herein.


1. Wood blocking, nailers, grounds, furring, ties, centering, etc., necessary or required

for attachment or support of work under this Section, and other Sections.

2. Fasteners, including nails, screws, bolts, anchors and other fastenings, required to secure work under this Section.

3. Temporary enclosures and protective boarding.

4. Wood preservative treatment for all wood members in contact with roofing, masonry,

concrete, and exposed to the elements. 1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents:

1. AWPA-CA Preservative Standards, Lumber and Plywood.

2. AWPA-C20 Structural Lumber Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process.

3. AWPC-C27 Plywood Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process.

4. AWPA-M4 Standards for Care of Preservative Treated Wood Products.

5. APA Guide to Plywood Grades. 6. FM 1-49 Perimeter Flashing

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Certifications of Preservative and Fire Retardant Treatment.

06

08

17

BR


2. Warranty of treatment manufacturer.

3. Certification of type and grade of lumber to be used.

4. Certification of type, rating and conformance to APA Standards. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Take all measures necessary to protect products against damage during delivery and storage.

B. Store lumber in enclosed places in such a manner to provide ventilation and protection from

the weather. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Blocking, nailers, grounds and the like: Eastern Spruce or Douglas Fir - No. 3 Dimension Lumber or Construction Grade, with a moisture content not to exceed 19%.

B. Plates, blocking, and nailers in contact with concrete or masonry: Pressure treated southern

yellow pine.

C. Plywood: Identified with APA Grade trademarks of the American Plywood Association, in thickness as shown on the Drawings.

1. Exterior: AC-EXT-APA where exposed to view or a finish is required, CD-EXT-APA

where concealed.

2. Interior: AC-INT-APA where exposed to view or a finish is required, CD-INT-APA where concealed.

D. Structural Framing Lumber: Douglas Fir No.1 grade with fb = 1,500 pounds per square inch

and E = 1,700,000 pounds per square inch, 19 percent moisture content.

E. Fasteners: Provide clamps, connectors, straps, nails, bolts, screws, anchors, ties and other accessories and fasteners shown or required to properly secure all rough carpentry. Fasteners and accessories shall be stainless steel, galvanized, or other noncorrosive metal recommended for use. Fasteners used with pressure treated wood shall be compatible with the wood preservative treatment to prevent corrosion of fasteners.

F. Wood Preservative Treatment: Waterborne pressure treatment in conformance with the

American Wood Preservers' Association standard P5. Retention shall be in accordance with AWPA Standards and be a minimum of 0.40 pounds per cubic foot for contact with or below ground, concrete, or masonry and 0.25 pounds per cubic foot for above ground. Stamp each piece of treated wood with a trademark identifying the classification of the treatment or a certificate from the processor for each shipment.


G. Fire Retardant Treatment: Fire-retardant lumber and plywood must have an Underwriters

Laboratories stamp signifying a FR-S rating and certifying a 25 or less flame spread and smoke developed value, when tested in accordance to UL 723, ASTM E 84, and NFPA 255 "Tunnel Test", and when the test is extended for 20 additional minutes. Treatment formulation shall contain no halogens, sulfates, chlorides or ammonium phosphate. Smoke toxicity shall be no more than that of untreated wood.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with all trades as to nailers, blocking, grounds and the like required for the attachment of their work and other items requiring same. Carry out all work as required to cooperate work of other trades.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in conformance manufacturer's recommendations and specifications, industry, national and local standards and codes.

B. Layout, cut, fit and erect rough blocking, nailers, furring and other rough carpentry. Do

cutting work in connection with carpentry and finish for other trades. Brace plumb and level all members in true alignment and rigidly secure in place with sufficient nails, spikes, screws and bolts. Defects which render any piece or part unable to serve its intended purpose shall be discarded or, cut out and replaced.

C. Provide all bracing, supports and shoring required to support construction.

D. Protect all masonry including edges of concrete platforms and similar items. Remove

protective covering when directed. Take special precautions at masonry openings and corners of the building.

E. Set all rough hardware, such as plates, spikes, bolts, nails, lag screws, lagging bolts,

anchors, etc., as required to hold woodwork together or to anchor or secure it to other materials and construction.

F. Provide wood grounds, nailing strips and similar items wherever necessary or required

throughout the project for the support, proper erection or installation of the work and support of mirrors, cabinets, shelf cleats, base and similar items. Thoroughly secure in place by approved means.

G. Secure wood grounds, nailing strips and similar items to metal plugs set in masonry, toggle

or expansion bolts. Give the mason all necessary information to enable him to lay out correctly the location for metal wall plugs. Wood plugs will not be accepted.


H. Construct joints to support dead loads, live loads, snow loads, wind loads, or combinations in conformance with "National Design Specifications for Stress Grade Lumber and its Fastenings", recommended by National Forest Products Association.

I. Nailers and Blocking: Provide and secure wood nailers, blocking, for the reception of roof

curbs, roofing, etc. in accordance with FM I-49, or as required by the Building Code, whichever is most stringent. Coordinate attachment with roofing system, where roofing system design includes design of nailers provide attachment in accordance with engineered roofing design.

1. Provide nailers of sizes, shapes and profiles indicated on the Drawings. Nailers shall

not be less than 2 x6. Build up nailers as required to achieve thickness of insulation or as required to provide proper attachment of roofing and curbs. Provide anchors as required for secure attachment of roofing systems, copings, gravel stops or other edge terminations.

3.03 TEMPORARY PROTECTION

A. Provide and install all temporary protection in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, OSHA regulations, and as follows: 1. Temporary protection shall include wood doors, railings, protection of floor or roof

openings, temporary partitions, and the like; adequately maintained in good repair during the life of the Contract.

2. Furnish and set temporary partitions with wood doors at all exterior doorways,

exterior openings or in locations exposed to weather. Substantially build and hang, with proper hinges, locks and other necessary hardware, and remove and reset whenever required to accommodate the Work and keep in good repair.

3. Provide substantial temporary wood covering or guards for openings left in floor or

roof slabs for ducts, shafts, etc., using rough planking at least 2 inch thick, cleated together and otherwise made sufficiently strong and put in place wherever required immediately after the forms have been removed.

3.04 JOB CONDITIONS

A. If the installation of metal frames and glass does not promptly follow the completion of the exterior enclosures, and if the absence of enclosures would cause damage, close in all such openings temporarily by the use of heavy polyethylene plastic sheeting, or canvas stretched over and nailed to frames of 1 inch x 2 inch or heavier strips.

3.05 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY WORK

A. Remove all temporary protection when so directed, or prior to acceptance of this project.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 07600

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT



A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry

B. Section 07530 – Single Ply Membrane Roofing

C. Section 07700 – Roof Specialties and Accessories

D. Section 07900 - Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking 1.03 REFERENCES SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS


1. OF-506C Flux, Soldering, Paste, and Liquid 2. ASTM A176 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium Steel Plate, Sheet and

Strip 3. ASTM B32 Specifications for Solder Metal 4. ASTM D1187 Test Method for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for use as Protective

Coatings for Metal

5. "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's literature and installation instructions.

2. Complete layout and installation Drawings and schedules with clearly indicated dimensions.

07

27

17

BR


3. Color samples.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials in a clean dry protected area in such manner to preclude damage by denting, warping, or other distortion.

PART 2 -- MATERIALS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing

1. Exposed to View: Provide prefinished 0.050 inches aluminum. Finish shall be dark bronze anodized in accordance with AA-C22A44, Class 1. Provide a full-strength Kynar 500 baked-on paint finish with a 20 year warranty where additional color selections are required.

2. Concealed from View: Provide a minimum of 22 ga. galvanized. steel sheet,

stainless steel sheet, or mill-finished aluminum sheet.

B. Nails, screws, rivets, bolts and other fasteners: same material as sheet metal being attached. Nails shall be 18 gauge diameter shank, 1/4 inch diameter flat head, annular-thread, diamond point, long enough to penetrate backing by at least 1 inch. Nails shall be spaced 3 inches on center unless other spacing is indicated. Exposed fasteners shall match finish of metal being fastened.

C. Reglets shall be formed of 300 series stainless steel, minimum of 0.020 inch. Reglets shall

be Model CO for insertion in concrete, MA-4 for insertion in masonry as manufactured by FRY Reglet Corporation. Corners shall be factory made, mitered and sealed. Furnish reglets to proper trade in sufficient time to be incorporated into the masonry or concrete work.

D. Plastic cement shall conform to ASTM D4586.

E. Sealants shall be silicone type.

F. Sealer tape shall be polyisobutylene tape specifically manufactured for setting flanges on

bituminous roofing such as Morrison and Company CL-50. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate Work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry


standards. Fabricate for waterproof and weather resistant performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, and damage or deterioration of the work. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed work without excessive oil-canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

B. Roof penetration sheet metal work shall be provided and coordinated with the roofing

system. The design and details shall conform to SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Sheet metal items shall be built into roofing in strict accordance with the instructions of the roofing manufacturer.



SECTION 07700

ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for the complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and specified herein.


A. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry

B. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal

C. Section 07900 - Joint Fillers, Sealants and Caulking 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS


1. TT-P-641 (1) Primer Coating, Zinc Dust - Zinc Oxide (for galvanized surfaces 2. ASTM A 525 Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc

Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM A 526 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the

Hot-Dip Process, Commercial Quality. 4. ASTM B 209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association "Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual" (ASMM). 6. The Aluminum Association "Specification for Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in Building

Construction." 7. American Welding Society (AWS).

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturers literature and installation instructions.

09

01

17

BR


2. Samples, of each material listed.


A. Deliver all materials in factory packed unopened cartons and crating bearing the manufacturer's labels.

B. Store materials in clean, dry protected area in such manner to preclude damage of any

nature.

C. Handle all materials with proper care to avoid denting, marring, warping or other distortions during delivery, storage and handling.


A. General: Provide roof specialties and accessories of design and construction compatible and approved for use with roofing manufacturer.

B. Fasteners: Provide all fasteners and attachments required to secure item to substrate and

support loads required by applicable Building Code. Use only non-corrosive fasteners which are compatible with materials being joined.

C. Colors: Colors shall be selected by Owner.

2.02 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS

A. Material: 0.040 inch aluminum.

B. Design: Manufacture gutters tapered and notched to provide telescoping joint. Design gutters and downspouts to accommodate expected thermal movement.

C. Supports and Fasteners: Provide manufacturers' standard straps, brackets and fasteners.

Place supports and fasteners at 36 inches on center or as recommended by the manufacturer. Finish of supports, brackets and fasteners shall match gutter and downspout.

D. Accessories: Provide end caps, flashing, trim, and other items required for a complete

installation.

E. Finish: Baked on Kynar, with 20 year warranty. 2.03 ROOF CURBS

A. Material: 18 gauge, G-90 galvanized steel, 12 inches high with mitered and continuous welded corners and seams, factory installed pressure treated wood nailers, and rigid fiberglass insulation.


B. Design: Provide roof curb units manufactured to fit manufactured roof panels. Provide

integral water diverter. Design roof curb to support weight of equipment. Coordinate roof curb unit with roof panel manufacturer to ensure proper fit. Roof curb shall be approved for use by manufacturer.

C. Accessories: Provide interior liner, flashing, trim and other items required for a complete

installation. 2.04 GRAVEL STOPS

A. Fascia: 0.050 inches extruded aluminum of 6063-T5 alloy.

B. Cant Dam: Commercial 24 gauge galvanized steel.

C. Concealed Splice Plates: 0.032 inches aluminum and finished to match fascia. Allow 1/4" at ball butt joints per twelve feet of length for expansion.

D. Accessories

1. Prefabricated Corners: Provide manufacturer's standard mitered and welded units.

2. Scuppers: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Finish: Color Anodized in accordance with AA-C22A44, Class 1 or Clear Anodized in

accordance with AA-C22A41 or "Baked" on Kynar, with 20 year warranty. 2.05 COPINGS

A. Material: 0.050 inches aluminum with smooth surfaces.

B. Splice Plate: Aluminum and finished to match coping. Provide six inch wide units at twelve foot centers with extruded butyl seal strips.

C. Anchor Plate: Galvanized steel. Anchor to substrate with anchors as recommended by

manufacturer.

D. Finish: Color Anodized in accordance with AA-C22A44, Class 1. *** or Clear Anodized in accordance with AA-C22A41 or “Baked" on Kynar, with 20 year warranty.

E. Guarantees: Twenty year performance guarantees relative to blow-off, leaktightness and

finish. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL


A. Install roof accessories and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Provide a complete watertight and weatherproof installation. Install with provision for expansion and contraction.

3.02 DAMAGED MATERIAL

A. Repair or replace materials damaged during installation. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Check levels and adjust as necessary after roofing and flashing is complete.

B. Protect materials from damage by other trades. Remove protective coatings at completion of project.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 07900

JOINT FILLERS, SEALANTS AND CAULKING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for the complete execution of Work shown on the Drawings and specified herein.


A. Section 03250 - Concrete Accessories

B. Section 03290 - Joints in Concrete 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS


1. ASTM C-920 Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM D-1056 Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber 3. SWRI Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturers literature and installation instructions.

2. Color samples of each type of sealant. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator shall be a company specializing in the installation of sealants with a minimum of five years experience.


A. Deliver materials in unopened labeled packages.

08

01

13

BR


B. Store materials in location protected from freezing or damages.

C. Reject and remove from the site materials within broken or damaged packaging. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Sealants

1. Type 1: Multi-component, non-sag, low-modulus polyurethane rubber sealant meeting ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT, M, A, and O. Capable of withstanding 50% in extension or compression such as Sikaflex-2C NS/SL, Sika Corporation, or Sonolastic NP-2, Sonneborn, or DynaTrol II by Pecora Corporation.

2. Type 2: Single component polyurethane sealant meeting ASTM C-920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, and O. Capable of withstanding 25% in extension or compression such as Sikaflex 1A by Sika Corporation, DynaTrol 1-XL by Pecora Corporation, or Sonolastic NP-1 by BASF Construction Chemicals.

3. Type 3: Single component, low-modulus moisture curing silicone meeting ASTM

C-920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, and A. Capable of withstanding 50% extension and compression. Pecora 890 by Pecora Corporation, Sonolastic Omni Seal by BASF Construction Chemicals.

4. Type 4: Single component, mildew resistant, moisture-curing silicone meeting ASTM

C-920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, and A. Pecora 898 by Pecora Corporation, Sonolastic Omni Plus by BASF Construction Chemicals.

5. Type 5: Single component, acrylic latex meeting ASTM C-834. AC-20+ Silicone by

Pecora Corporation, Sonneborn Sonolac by BASF Construction Chemicals.

6. Type 6: High grade butyl sealant meeting Federal Specification TT-S-00-1657. BC-158 by Pecora Corporation or equal.

7. Type 7: Multi-component chemical resistant polysulfide sealant conforming to ASTM

C-920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25 such as Deck-O-Seal by W.R. Meadows, Tammsflex by DuraJoint Concrete Accessories, or Synthacalk GC2+ by Pecora Corporation.

8. Type 8: Nonsag, Multi Component, traffic grade polyurethane sealant meeting

ASTM C920, Type 19, Grade NS, Class 25, use T, M, A, and O. DynaTread by Pecora Corporation, Sonolastic Ultra by BASF Construction Chemicals.

B. Primer: Non-staining primer recommended by sealant manufacturer for the substrates on

this project.


C. Backer Rod: Closed cell foam, nonreactive with caulking materials, non-oily, and approved by the sealant manufacturer. Minimum density shall be 2.00 pounds per cubic foot. Use no asphalt or bitumen-impregnated fiber with sealants.

D. Joint Cleaner: Recommended by sealant or caulking compound manufacturer.

E. Bond breaker: Either polyethylene film or plastic tape as recommended by the sealant

manufacturer.

F. Color: Where manufacturer’s standard colors do not closely match materials being sealed, provide a custom color.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Coordinate work with details shown on approved shop drawings prepared by other trades.

B. Verify conditions in the field.

C. Schedule work to follow closely the installation of other trades.

D. Apply sealants and related items in temperatures and dry conditions recommended by the manufacturers.

E. Do not paint sealant, unless recommended by sealant and paint manufacturer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect finished surfaces adjoining by using masking tape or other suitable materials.

B. Clean and prime joints before starting any caulking or sealing work.

C. Thoroughly clean joints and spaces of mortar and other foreign materials. Cleaning agent shall be Xylol or similar non-contaminating solvent to remove any film from metal surfaces. Masonry or concrete surfaces shall be brushed or air jet cleaned.

D. Joint Requirements

1. All joints and spaces to be sealed in exterior work shall be less than 1/2 inch deep and not less than 1/4 inch wide. If joints in masonry are less than that specified herein, the mortar shall be cut out to the required width and depth. All joints and spaces to receive sealant shall be completely prepared and thoroughly dry before installation of sealant.

2. Unless otherwise specified, joints and spaces which are open to a depth of 1/2 inch or greater shall be solidly filled with back-up material to within 1/4 inch of the surface. Back-up material shall be packed tightly and made continuous throughout the length of the joints. Bond breaker shall be applied as required. If joints are less than 1/4 inch deep, the back-up material may be omitted, a bond breaker substituted and


the joint completely filled with sealant. The back-up material shall not project beyond the 1/4 inch depth of the open space in any joint. The following width-to-depth ratio table shall be adhered to, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer.

Joint Width

Sealant Depth

Minimum Maximum

¼ inch 1/4 inch 1/4 inch Over 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch 1/4 inch Equal to width Over 1/2 inch to 1 inch 1/2 inch Equal to width Over 1 inch to 2 inch 1/2 inch 1/2 of width

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Exercise care before, during, and after installation so as not to damage any material by tearing or puncturing. All finished work shall be approved before covering with any other material or construction.

B. Apply sealant by an approved type of gun except where the use of a gun is not practicable,

suitable hand tools shall be used. Avoid applying the compound to any surface outside of the joints or spaces to be sealed. Mask areas where required to prevent overlapping of sealant.

C. All joints shall be waterproof and weathertight.

D. Point sealed joints to make a slightly concave joint, the edges of which are flush with the

surrounding surfaces. Exposed joints in the interior side of the door and other frames shall be neatly pointed flush or to match adjacent jointing work.

E. Adjacent materials which have been soiled shall be cleaned immediately and the work left in neat and clean condition.

F. Comply with sealant manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise.

3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Remove misplaced sealant compounds promptly using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer, as the work progresses.

B. Allow sealants to cure and remove protective edging, of doors, louvers, saddles windows etc. as directed by the Engineer.

3.05 SCHEDULE


Schedule of Sealants

Application Sealant Color

Vertical and horizontal expansion and construction joints in concrete structures unless noted otherwise herein or on Drawings.

Type 1 To closely match adjacent surfaces or mortar and as selected by the Owner.

Vertical and horizontal joints bordered on both sides by masonry, precast concrete, natural stone or other porous building material, unless noted otherwise herein or on Drawings.

Type 2 To closely match adjacent surfaces or mortar and as selected by the Owner.

Vertical and horizontal joints bordered on both sides by painted metals, anodized aluminum, mill finished aluminum, PVC, glass or other non-porous building material.

Type 3 To closely match adjacent surfaces and as selected by the Owner.

Masonry expansion and control joints less than 1¼" wide.


Masonry expansion and control joints equal or greater than 1¼ inches wide and not to exceed 2”.


Interior – wood trim and finish joints. Type 5 Color to be selected by Owner

Sanitary areas, joints in ceramic tile, around plumbing fixtures, countertops, and back splashes. See Note 1.


Perimeter sealing of doors, windows, louvers, piping, ducts, and electrical conduit. See Note 2.

Type 2 OR Type 3

To closely match adjacent surfaces and as selected by the Owner.

Below thresholds. Type 6 Manufacturer's standard

Submerged in liquids. See Note 4. Type 1 Manufacturer's standard

Submerged in liquids with high concentration of chlorine (> 2 ppm).

Type 7 Manufacturer’s standard

Horizontal Joints exposed to vehicular or pedestrian traffic.

Type 8 To closely match adjacent surfaces.

Other joints indicated on the drawings or Type recommended by

To closely match adjacent surfaces and as selected


Application Sealant Color

customarily sealed but not listed. manufacturer by the Owner.

Note 1. Sealant for Laboratory Countertop shall be as recommended by countertop manufacturer. Note 2. Provide UL approved sealants for penetrations thru fire-rated walls and as specified in

Section 07270. Note 3. Sealants which will come in contact with potable water shall meet the requirements of

NSF 61. Note 4. Where sealant will be immersed in liquid chemicals verify compatibility prior to installation

of sealant.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 08110

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish labor, material, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and specified herein.


A. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware

B. Section 09900 - Painting 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications, the work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents:

1. ANSI/DHI A115 Series Specifications for Steel Door and Frame

Preparation for Hardware 2. ANSI/SDI 100 Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and

Frames 3. ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron

and Steel Hardware 4. ASTM A366/A 366M Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-

Rolled Commercial Quality 5. ASTM A525 Standard Specification for General Requirements for

Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.

6. ASTM E152 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 7. NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Windows

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01300, Submittals, submit the following:

02

18

16

BR


1. Manufacturer's product data. 2. Complete layout and installation drawings and schedules with clearly marked

dimensions. Indicate details of construction, profiles, gauges, reinforcing and location of doors and frames.

3. Certify that shop applied primer is compatible with finish coats specified in

Section 09900, Painting. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100.

B. Locations where fire-rated door and frame assemblies are required, provide assemblies which comply with NFPA 80 and have been tested and labeled in accordance with ASTM E152 by agency acceptable to governing authorities.

C. Provide certificate or label for fire-rated doors which exceed sizes tested from a independent

testing and inspection agency. Certificate or label shall indicate that door and frame assembly conforms to the requirements of the design.

D. Provide stairwell doors which have temperature rise rating of 450 degrees F maximum in

30 minutes of fire exposure. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products boxed or crated suitable for storage.

B. Store products under cover, raised above ground level, and stacked to prevent warping and damage.

C. Replace items damaged during delivery, storage, or handling.


A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products from one of the following

manufacturers:

1. Curries Company, Mason City, Iowa

2. Amweld Building Products, Inc.

3. Steelcraft, Cincinnati, Ohio 2.02 MATERIALS


A. Steel Sheets: Commercial quality hot or cold rolled. Galvanize sheet steel in accordance with ASTM A525, commercial quality, A60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

B. Anchorages: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gauge.

C. Fasteners and Inserts: Galvanized units standard with manufacturer. D. Primer: Rust-inhibitive coating, suitable to receive finish coatings specified in Section

09900, Painting. 2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop-fabricate assemblies to greatest extent possible.

B. Fabricate exterior and interior doors, frames and louvers from hot-dip galvanized steel.

C. Where exposed screws and fasteners are used, provide countersunk, flat Phillips-head fasteners.

D. Fabricate exterior, vestibule and other doors indicated to be insulated in the schedule with

foam in place insulation. Door and frame assembly shall have a maximum calculated core U-Value of 0.10 BTU per hour per square foot per degree F in accordance with ASTM C518.

E. Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series specifications for door and frame hardware preparation.

Prepare door and frame using final hardware schedule and templates from hardware supplier.

F. Shop Painting

1. Clean surfaces thoroughly before beginning painting operations, removing rust,

scale, oil, grease and other contaminants.

2. Apply primer evenly to provide full protection of all exposed surfaces. 2.04 STEEL (HOLLOW METAL) DOORS

A. Provide doors of size and style indicated.

1. Exterior Doors: SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty, Model 4, seamless, 16 gauge for doors less than four feet wide and 14 gauge for doors greater than four feet wide.

2. Interior Doors: SDI 100, Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 3, seamless, 18 gauge for

doors less than four feet wide and 16 gauge for doors greater than four feet wide.

B. Top and bottom closures on all doors and a weather tight cap on all exterior doors.

C. Where indicated, provide doors with sightproof and weatherproof louvers formed of 24 gauge galvanized steel. Provide louvers with 50% free area, Exterior doors indicated to have louvers shall include an 18x14 aluminum insect screen.


D. Glass lite kits shall be provided to accommodate glass shown or specified. Fame material

shall be 20 gauge (minimum) cold rolled steel with mitered corners. 2.05 STEEL (HOLLOW METAL) DOOR FRAMES

A. Fabricate door frames with mitered and welded corners.

B. Provide concealed fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide galvanized plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of finish hardware cutouts.

D. Drill frames to receive three silencers on strike jamb of side swinging doors, and two silencers on heads of double doors, unless doors are to receive weatherstripping.

E. Provide a minimum of three jamb anchors per jamb for doors 96 inches or less in height and

one additional anchor for each additional 24 inches of height. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All doors and frames specified herein shall be neatly installed in designated locations indicated on Drawings.

B. Install frames in accordance with SDI-105 and as herein specified.

C. Install doors in accordance with SDI-100 and as herein specified.

D. Install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80.

3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Provide protection against stains, dirt or damage to the finished installation. Adjust doors for proper operation.

B. Immediately after erection and prior to finish painting, remove rusted or damaged prime coat

and apply touch-up primer compatible with original primer and final coats.

- END OF SECTION -


SECTION 08710

FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for the complete execution of Work as shown on Drawings and specified herein.


A. Section 08110 – Steel Doors and Frames 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications, the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents:

1. ANSI/BHMA 156

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 01300 - Submittals, submit the following:

1. Manufacturers data for each item of hardware. Include installation and maintenance

instructions.

2. Furnish templates to fabricators of other work which is to receive hardware.

3. Hardware schedule organized into "hardware sets," indicating complete designation of every item required for each door or opening. Furnish initial draft of schedule at the earliest possible date, in order to facilitate the fabrication of other work (such as hollow metal frames) which may be critical in the project construction schedule. Furnish final draft of schedule after samples, manufacturer's data sheets, coordination with shop drawings for other work, delivery schedules and similar information has been completed and accepted.

4. Prepare a keying schedule in consultation with the Owner.


A. Provide materials, assemblies, equipment and services from a single source for each category except that locksets, latchsets and cylinders must originate from the same manufacturer.

01

08

15

BR


B. Replace any item of finish hardware which cannot be installed or will not function properly.

C. Provide hardware complying with NFPA 80 and UL labeled for fire rated openings.

D. Furnish templates or information to door and frame manufacturer. Coordinate between the

manufacturers where two or more articles of hardware are to be mounted on the same door. Verify all dimensions, new and existing.

E. Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on

doors and frames of the thicknesses, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function.


A. Handle, store, distribute, protect and install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions or recommendations. Deliver packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact.

B. Properly mark or label, so each piece of hardware is readily identifiable with the approved

hardware schedule. Tag each change key or otherwise identifying the door of which its cylinder is intended. Where double cylinder functions are used or where it is not obvious which is the key side of a door, appropriate instructions shall be included with the lock and hardware schedule.

C. Provide secure storage area for hardware.

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Hand of Door

1. Drawings show swing or hand of each door leaf (left, right, reverse bevel, etc.). Furnish hardware for proper installation and operation of door.

B. Manufacturer's Name Plate

1. Do not use manufacturer's products which have name or trade name displayed in a

visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with required UL labels.

C. Base Metals

1. Produce hardware units of the basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's non-corrosive metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness but in no case of lesser quality material than specified.


D. Fasteners

1. Manufacture hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.

2. Furnish stainless steel fasteners for installation with each hardware item. Exposed

finish (under any condition) to match hardware finish or surfaces of adjacent work. Match the finish of adjacent work as closely as possible, including surfaces to receive painted finish.

3. Provide fasteners which are compatible with unit fastened and the substrate, and

which will not cause corrosion of deterioration of finish hardware, base material or fastener.

E. Tools for Maintenance

1. Furnish a complete set of specialized tools as needed for Owner's continued

adjustment, maintenance, removal and replacement of builder’s hardware.

F. Hardware Finishes

1. Stainless steel, US32D unless otherwise noted.

2. Closers shall have a USP finish unless otherwise noted.

G. Field Checks

1. Make periodic checks during installation of finish hardware to ascertain the correctness of the installation. After completion of the work, certify in writing, that all items of finish hardware have been installed, adjusted and are functioning in accordance with Specification requirements.

2.02 DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCTS

A. Hinges

1. Stainless steel full mortise concealed oil impregnated ball bearing type, five knuckle with non-rising pins for interior doors, and non-removable and non-rising pins for exterior doors. Tips shall be flat.

2. Sizes and weights of hinges:

a. Doors up to 36 inches – 4-1/2 inches regular weight.

b. Doors 36 inches to 40 inches – 5 inches regular weight.

c. Doors 40 inches to 48 inches – 5 inches heavy weight.


d. Fire Rated Doors up to 36 inches – 5 inches regular weight.

3. Provide three hinges per door leaf up to and including 90 inches and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Stanley Hardware, Hager Hardware

B. Locksets and Latchsets

1. Stainless steel, heavy-duty mortise type conforming to ANSI A156.13 Series 1000,

Grade 1.

2. Wrought steel box strikes.

3. Stainless steel deadbolt with 1" throw approval.

4. 2 3/4 inch back set, 3/4 inch throw, two-piece anti-friction latchbolt.

5. Non-ferrous critical internal parts.

6. Cylinders shall be manufactured to conform to grand master key program.

7. Trim Design: LWM with wrought escutcheon by Corbin\Russwin or equal lever with return. Provide knurling on all levers leading into hazardous rooms and electrical rooms.

8. Acceptable Manufacturers: Yale, Corbin\Russwin, Schlage

C. Keys and Keying

1. Provide construction keyed, removable core master key system as directed by the

Owner.

2. Furnish ten core removal keys and a quantity of master keys as directed by the Owner, not to exceed ten each per group. Furnish a minimum of 15 change keys per cylinder.

3. Coordinate and furnish cylinders that match Owner’s keying system.

4. Provide a key schedule showing all key numbers and spaces to which each permits

entry.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers: Yale, Corbin\Russwin, Schlage

D. Closers

1. Cast iron case with seamless one-piece forged steel spring tub.

2. Heavy duty forged steel arm.


3. Non-sized fully adjustable from size 1-6.

4. Backcheck intensity and location valves.

5. Delayed action closing.

6. Full metal cover.

7. Mechanical hold open device, except at fire rated doors.

8. ANSI 156.4, Grade 1.

9. Conforms to ADA 5 lbf. maximum door opening force requirement for non-fire rated

interior doors.

10. Provide mounting brackets, and fasteners required for proper attachment. 11. Provide closers at fire rated doors.

12. Acceptable manufacturers: Corbin/Russwin, LCN, Norton

E. Kickplates

1. Stainless steel, 0.050" thick, beveled 3 sides, 8" high, width 2 inches less than door

width.

2. Acceptable manufacturers: H.B. Ives, Hagar Hardware, and Builders Brass Works.

F. Thresholds

1. Extruded aluminum saddle type and fiberglass for opening with fiberglass door and frames. Provide with stainless steel fasteners. Six inches wide or as shown on drawings.

2. Acceptable manufacturers: Pemko, National Guard Products, Incorporated, and Zero

International. Fiberglass threshold by fiberglass door and frame manufacturer. G. Door Bottom Seal

1. Extruded aluminum with neoprene seal.

2. Acceptable manufacturers and products: Pemko Model 57, Zero International Model

328 and National Guard Products, Inc. Model 96.

H. Weatherstripping

1. Extruded aluminum with neoprene seal.


2. U.L. Labeled.

3. Acceptable manufacturers and products: Pemko Model 294, National Guard Products, Inc. Model 190, and Zero International Model 328.


A. Templates

1. After the hardware schedule is approved furnish to the various manufacturers, required blueprint templates for fabrication purposes. Templates shall be made available not more than ten (10) days after receipt of the approved hardware schedule.

B. Packaging and Marking

1. Ship hardware with proper non-corrosive fastenings for secure application. Each

package of hardware shall be legibly marked indicating the part of the work for which it is intended. Markings shall correspond with the item numbers shown on the approved hardware schedule. Keys shall be tagged within each package set and plainly marked on the face of the envelope with the key control number, door designation and all identification as necessary.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in a manner which will eliminate cracks on surfaces.

B. Mount hardware units at heights recommended in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware" by BHMA, except as otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.

D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment

substrate as is necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with factory standards.

F. Cut and fit thresholds and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitered corners and

hair-line joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, if any.

G. Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws, of the proper type for permanent

anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel which will not corrode in contact with the


threshold metal.

H. Set thresholds in a bed of either butyl rubber sealant or polyisobutylene mastic sealant to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant.

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function. Lubricate moving parts as recommended by manufacturer. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application.

B. Final Adjustment

1. One week prior to acceptance or occupancy make a final check and adjustment of

all hardware items. Clean and relubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices and compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

C. Instruct Owner personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware

finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. 3.04 HARDWARE SETS

A. The door hardware sets on the Drawings indicates functional and general requirements. Items shall be quality and finish as specified. Hardware set identification refers to set numbers indicated on the Drawings. Provide hardware required to meet Code requirements. Consult Drawings for set number required.

B. Hardware shall be as follows:

Hardware Sets

1. Hinges

Entrance Lock Set Door Closer Kickplate Threshold Door Bottom Seal Weatherstripping



SECTION 09825

ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL SYSTEM PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish labor, materials equipment, and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and Specified herein.

B. Acoustical wall panels shall be located a minimum of 8’-0” above finish floor. Cut panels

as required to miss mechanical, electrical, and HVAC equipment and accessories. Panels shall cover 60% of wall area above 8’-0” and 60% of ceiling area. Patterns shall be symmetrical and regular.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data

1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data and brochures for each type of specified system required. All products furnished shall have a flame spread classification of 0-25 for a Class A or 1 rating in accordance with ASTM C423.

B. Shop Drawings

1. Shop drawings shall show dimensions, sizes, thickness, finishes, joining,

attachments, and relationship of adjoining work. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Firm with manufacturing and delivery capacity required for the project shall have successfully completed at least ten projects within the past five years, utilizing systems, materials and techniques as herein specified.


A. All materials shall be protected during fabrication, shipment, site storage and erection to prevent damage to the finished work from other trades. Store acoustical panels inside a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry, and protected from the weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.



A. Acoustical Panel System

1. AlphaPerf Metal Wall Panels by Acoustical Solutions 2. Or approved equal.

2.02 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION

A. Wall Panels shall be AlphaPerf Metal. All panels, perimeter trims and mounting components plus acoustical component shall be provided as a complete package of this work.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Mounting Accessories

1. Accessories shall include Z-Furring, J Trim, or inside/outside angles in a size and length to completely support panels and provide a finished trim on all four sides. All mounting accessories shall be finished to match color of Wall Panels.

2. Materials shall be fabricated from 050” smooth aluminum and match color and finish

of wall panels. 3. Panels shall be mounted on walls with a 2” offset.

B. Metal Panels

1. Aluminum sheet shall be 3003-H14 alloys, minimum .020 (ASTM B 209). 2. The metal acoustical wall panels shall be corrugated and perforated with 1/8”

diameter holes on 21/64” staggered centers, approximately 13% open area. 3. The panels shall be fabricated of smooth aluminum (.032”). 4. Acoustical Qualities

a. Provide fiberglass 2”x2#. The fiberglass panel shall be wrapped in Class A polyvinylchloride, low gloss black.

b. All material as furnished shall be tested in accordance with ASTM G423 for

sound absorption. Test results shall yield a NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient) of 1.0.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Aluminum shall receive a factory applied and baked finish of a 70% Kynar®.

B. Apply finish to aluminum sheet after perforation and fabrication. C. Apply finish to other grid, frames, and extrusions that are exposed, after fabrication.


D. Color shall be selected by Owner.

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine building structure scheduled to receive ceiling system for unevenness or irregularities that would affect quality and execution of work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer’s printed instructions, governing regulations for Seismic Codes, and with the Ceiling & Interior Systems Construction Association standards applicable to work. Attachment system shall resist vibrations caused by generators, fans, and other equipment.

B. Space Enclosure: Do not install any work until space is enclosed and weatherproofed, wet-

work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temperature and humidity is continuously maintained at values near those of final occupancy.

C. Metal Wall Panels

1. Fit metal panel units in place, free from defects detrimental to appearance and

function. 2. Install units in level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. 3. If necessary cut panels to fit borders and other penetrations.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean all surfaces following installation. B. Replace units having scratched, abrasion, or other defects, with unblemished panels. C. Maintenance per manufacturer’s finish maintenance instructions.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protection of Acoustical Wall Panel Systems from damage by other trades after installation to be provided by general contractor.



SECTION 09900

PAINTING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 THE REQUIREMENT

A. Furnish labor, materials, equipment and appliances required for complete execution of Work shown on Drawings and Specified herein.

B. Section Includes:

1. Paint Materials

2. Shop Painting

3. Field Painting

a. Surface Preparation

b. Piping and Equipment Identification

c. Schedule of Colors

d. Work in Confined Spaces

e. OSHA Safety Colors

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15030 - Piping and Equipment Identification Systems 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Without limiting the generality of these specifications the Work shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents:

1. SSPC – The Society for Protective Coatings Standards

a. SSPC-Vis 1 Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting

Steel Structures b. SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning c. SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning d. SSPC-SP5 White Metal Blast Cleaning

05

15

17

BR


e. SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaning f. SSPC-SP10 Near-White Metal Blast g. SSPC-SP13/NACE6 Surface Preparation of Concrete

2. NACE - National Association of Corrosion Engineers

3. ASTM D1737 - Test Method for Elongation of Attached Organic Coatings

with Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus

4. ASTM B117 - Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Testing

5. ASTM D4060 - Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coating by the Taber Abraser

6. ASTM D3359 - Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Manufacturer's literature and Material Safety Data Sheets for each product.

2. Painting schedule identifying surface preparation and paint systems proposed. Cross-reference with Tables 9-1 and 9-2. Provide the name of the paint manufacturer, and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer's representative who will inspect the work. Submit schedule for approval as soon as possible following the Award of Contract, so approved schedule may be used to identify colors and specify shop paint systems for fabricated items.

1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Work shall include surface preparation, paint application, inspection of painted surfaces and corrective action required, protection of adjacent surfaces, cleanup and appurtenant work required for the proper painting of all surfaces to be painted. Surfaces to be painted are designated within the Painting Schedule and may include new and existing piping, miscellaneous metals, equipment, buildings, exterior fiberglass, exposed electrical conduit and appurtenance.

B. Perform Work in strict accordance with manufacturer's published recommendations and

instructions, unless the Engineer stipulates that deviations will be for the benefit of the project.

C. Paint surfaces which are customarily painted, whether indicated to be painted or not, with

painting system applied to similar surfaces, areas and environments, and as approved by Engineer.


D. Piping and equipment shall receive color coding and identification. Equipment shall be the same color as the piping system.


A. Painting operations shall be accomplished by skilled craftsman and licensed by the state to perform painting work.

B. Provide a letter indicating that the painting applicator has five years of experience, and 5

references which show previously successful application of the specified or comparable painting systems. Include the name, address, and the telephone number for the Owner of each installation for which the painting applicator provided services.

1.07 STORAGE AND DELIVERY

A. Bring materials to the job site in the original sealed and labeled containers.

B. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a

maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 -- MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL INFORMATION

A. The term "paint" is defined as both paints and coatings including emulsions, enamels, stains, varnishes, sealers, and other coatings whether organic or inorganic and whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.

B. Purchase paint from an approved manufacturer. Manufacturer shall assign a representative

to inspect application of their product both in the shop and field. The manufacturer's representative shall submit a report to the Engineer at the completion the Work identifying products used and verifying that surfaces were properly prepared, products were properly applied, and the paint systems were proper for the exposure and service.

C. Provide primers and intermediate coats produced by same manufacturer as finish coat. Use

only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and only within manufacturer's recommended limits.

D. Ensure compatibility of total paint system for each substrate. Test shop primed equipment

delivered to the site for compatibility with final paint system. Provide an acceptable barrier coat or totally remove shop applied paint system when incompatible with system specified, and repaint with specified paint system.


E. Use painting materials suitable for the intended use and recommended by paint manufacturer for the intended use.

F. Require that personnel perform work in strict accordance with the latest requirements of

OSHA Safety and Health Standards for construction. Meet or exceed requirements of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction and the manufacturer's published instructions and recommendations. Maintain a copy of all Material Safety Data Sheets at the job site of each product being used prior to commencement of work. Provide and require that personnel use protective and safety equipment in or about the project site. Provide respiratory devices, eye and face protection, ventilation, ear protection, illumination and other safety devices required to provide a safe work environment.

2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products from one of the following manufacturers:

1. Tnemec Company Inc. 2. PPG/Ameron 3. CARBOLINE 4. Sherwin-Williams 5. International

PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.01 SHOP PAINTING

A. Shop prime fabricated steel and equipment with at least one shop coat of prime paint compatible with finish paint system specified. Prepare surface to be shop painted in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations and as specified. Finish coats may be shop applied, if approved by the Engineer. Package, store and protect shop painted items until they are incorporated into Work. Repair painted surfaces damaged during handling, transporting, storage, or installation to provide a painting system equal to the original painting received at the shop.

B. Identify surface preparation and shop paints on Shop Drawings. Verify compatibility with

field applied paints. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General

1. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and dry, and free of dust, rust, scale, and foreign matter. No solvent cleaning, power or hand tool cleaning shall be permitted unless approved by the Engineer.


2. Protect or remove, during painting operations, hardware, accessories, machined

surfaces, nameplates, lighting fixtures, and similar items not intended to be painted prior to cleaning and painting. Reposition items removed upon completion of painting operations.

3. Examine surfaces to be coated to determine that surfaces are suitable for specified

surface preparation and painting. Report to Engineer surfaces found to be unsuitable in writing. Do not start surface preparation until unsuitable surfaces have been corrected. Starting surface preparation precludes subsequent claim that such surfaces were unsuitable for the specified surface preparation or painting.

4. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with specifications and manufacturer's

recommendations. Provide additional surface preparation, and fill coats where manufacturer recommends additional surface preparation, in addition to requirements of specification.

5. Touch-up shop or field applied coatings damaged by surface preparation or any

other activity, with the same shop or field applied coating; even to the extent of applying an entire coat when required to correct damage prior to application of the next coating. Touch-up coats are in addition to the specified applied systems, and not considered a field coat.

6. Protect motors and other equipment during blasting operation to ensure blasting

material is not blown into motors or other equipment. Inspect motors and other equipment after blasting operations and certify that no damage occurred, or where damage occurred, the proper remedial action was taken.

7. Field paint shop painted equipment in compliance with Color Coding and as

approved by Engineer.

B. Metal Surface Preparation

1. Conform to current The Society for Protective Coatings Standards (SSPC) Specifications for metal surface preparation. Use SSPC-Vis-1 pictorial standards or NACE visual standards TM-01-70 or TM-01-75 to determine cleanliness of abrasive blast cleaned steel.

2. Perform blast cleaning operations for metal when following conditions exist:

a. Moisture is not present on the surface.

b. Relative humidity is below 80%.

c. Ambient and surface temperatures are 5°F or greater than the dew point

temperature.

d. Painting or drying of paint is not being performed in the area.

e. Equipment is in good operating condition.


f. Proper ventilation, illumination, and other safety procedures and equipment

are being provided and followed.

3. Sandblast ferrous metals to be shop primed, or component mechanical equipment in accordance with SSPC-SP5, White Metal Blast.

4. Sandblast field prepared ferrous metals in accordance with SSPC-SP10, Near White

Metal Blast, where metal is to be submerged, in a corrosive environment, or in severe service.

5. Sandblast field prepared ferrous metals in accordance with SSPC-SP6 Commercial

Blast, where metal is to be used in mild or moderate service, or non-corrosive environment.

6. Clean nonferrous metals, copper, or galvanized metal surfaces in accordance to

SSPC-SP1, Solvent Cleaning, or give one coat of metal passivator or metal conditioner compatible with the complete paint system.

7. Prime cleaned metals immediately after cleaning to prevent rusting.

8. Clean rusted metals down to bright metal by sandblasting and immediately field

primed. C. Concrete Surface Preparation

1. Cure concrete a minimum of 30 days before surface preparation, and painting

begins.

2. Test concrete for moisture content, pH and salts using test method recommended by the paint manufacturer. Do not begin surface preparation, or painting until moisture content is acceptable to manufacturer.

3. Prepare concrete surfaces to receive coatings in accordance with SSPC-13 –

Concrete Surface Preparation. Remove contaminants, open bugholes, surface voids, air pockets, and other subsurface irregularities using blasting or grinding. Do not expose underlying aggregate. Use dry, oil-free air for blasting operations. Surface texture after blasting shall achieve profile as required by manufacturer or where not defined by manufacturer similar to that of medium grit sandpaper. Remove residual abrasives, dust, and loose particles by vacuuming or other approved method.

4. Surface defects, such as hollow areas, bugholes, honeycombs, and voids shall be

filled with polymeric filler compatible with painting system. Complete fill coats may be used in addition to specified painting system and as approved by the Engineer. Fins, form marks, and all protrusions or rough edges shall be removed.

5. Repair existing concrete surfaces which are deteriorated to the point that surface

preparation exposes aggregate with fill coats or patching mortar as recommended by paint manufacturer and as directed by the Engineer.


6. Clean concrete of all dust, form oils, curing compounds, oil, tar, laitance,

efflorescence, loose mortar, and other foreign materials before paints are applied.

D. Wood

1. Clean wood surfaces free of all foreign matter, with cracks and nail holes and other defects properly filled and smoothed. Remove sap and resin by scraping and wipe clean with rags dampened with mineral spirits.

2. Saturate end grain, cut wood, knots, and pitch pockets with an appropriate sealer

before priming.

3. Prime and backprime wood trim before setting in place.

4. After prime coat has dried, fill nailholes, cracks, open joints, and other small holes with approved spackling putty. Lightly sand wood trim prior to applying second coat of paint.

E. Castings

1. Prepare castings for painting by applying a brush or a knife-applied filler. Fillers are

not to be used to conceal cracks, gasholes, or excessive porosity.

2. Apply one coat of primer with a minimum thickness of 1.2 mils in addition to coats specified. Allow sufficient drying time before further handling.

F. Masonry

1. Cure for a minimum of 30 days prior to paint application.

2. Clean masonry surfaces free from all dust, dirt, oil, grease, loose mortar, chalky

deposits, efflorescence, and other foreign materials.

3. Test masonry for moisture content. Use test method recommended by paint manufacturer. Do not begin painting until moisture content is acceptable to manufacturer.

G. Gypsum Drywall

1. Sand joint compound with sandpaper to provide a smooth flat surface. Avoid

sanding of adjacent drywall paper.

2. Remove dust, dirt, and other contaminants.

H. Previously-Painted Surfaces

1. Totally remove existing paint when: surface is to be submerged in a severe environment, paint is less than 75% intact, brittle, eroded or has underfilm rusting.


2. Surfaces which are greater than 75% intact require removal of failed paints and then spot primed. Spot priming is in addition to coats specified.

3. Remove surface contamination such as oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale, dirt,

foreign matter, rust, mold, mildew, mortar, efflorescence, and sealers.

4. Clean and dull glossy surfaces prior to painting in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

5. Check existing paints for compatibility with new paint system. If incompatible, totally

remove existing paint system or apply a barrier coat recommended by the paint manufacturer. Remove existing paints of undetermined origin. Prepare a test patch of approximately 3 square feet over existing paint. Allow test patch to dry thoroughly and test for adhesion. If proper adhesion is not achieved remove existing paint and repaint.

3.03 APPLICATION OF PAINT

A. Apply paint by experienced painters with brushes or other applicators approved by the Engineer, and paint manufacturer.

B. Apply paint without runs, sags, thin spots, or unacceptable marks. C. Apply at rate specified by the manufacturer to achieve at least the minimum dry mil thickness

specified. Apply additional coats, if necessary, to obtain thickness.

D. Special attention shall be given to nuts, bolts, edges, angles, flanges, etc., where insufficient film thicknesses are likely. Stripe paint prior to applying prime coat. Stripe painting shall be in addition to coats specified.

E. Perform thinning in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and with the full

knowledge and approval of the Engineer and paint manufacturer.

F. Allow paint to dry a minimum of twenty-four hours between application of any two coats of paint on a particular surface, unless shorter time periods are a requirement by the manufacturer. Longer drying times may be required for abnormal conditions as defined by the Engineer and paint manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended drying time between coats.

G. Suspend painting when any of the following conditions exist:

1. Rainy or excessively damp weather.

2. Relative humidity exceeds 85%.

3. General air temperature cannot be maintained at 50F or above through the drying period, except on approval by the Engineer and paint manufacturer.

4. Relative humidity will exceed 85% or air temperature will drop below 40F within 18 hours after application of paint.


5. Surface temperature of item is within 5 degrees of dewpoint.

6. Dew or moisture condensation are anticipated.

7. Surface temperature exceeds the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.04 INSPECTION

A. Each field coat of paint will be inspected and approved by the Engineer or his authorized representative before succeeding coat is applied. Tint successive coats so that no two coats for a given surface are exactly the same color. Tick-mark surfaces to receive black paint in white between coats.

B. Use magnetic dry film thickness gauges and wet fiber thickness gauges for quality control.

Furnish magnetic dry film thickness gauge for use by the Engineer.

C. Coatings shall pass a holiday detector test.

D. Determination of Film Thickness: Randomly selected areas, each of at least 107.5 contiguous square feet, totaling at least 5% of the entire control area shall be tested. Within this area, at least 5 squares, each of 7.75 square inches, shall be randomly selected. Three readings shall be taken in each square, from which the mean film thickness shall be calculated. No more than 20 percent of the mean film thickness measurements shall be below the specified thickness. No single measurement shall be below 80 percent of the specified film thickness. Total dry film thickness greater than twice the specified film thickness shall not be acceptable. Areas where the measured dry film thickness exceeds twice that specified shall be completely redone unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. When measured dry film thickness is less than that specified additional coats shall be applied as required.

E. Holiday Testing: Holiday test painted ferrous metal surfaces which will be submerged in

water or other liquids, or surfaces which are enclosed in a vapor space in such structures. Mark areas which contain holidays. Repair or repaint in accordance with paint manufacturer's printed instructions and retest.

1. Dry Film Thickness Exceeding 20 Mils: For surfaces having a total dry film thickness

exceeding 20 mils: Pulse-type holiday detector such as Tinker & Rasor Model AP-W, D.E. Stearns Co. Model 14/20, shall be used. The unit shall be adjusted to operate at the voltage required to cause a spark jump across an air gap equal to twice the specified coating thickness.

2. Dry Film Thickness of 20 Mils or Less: For surfaces having a total dry film thickness

of 20 mils or less: Tinker & Rasor Model M1 non-destructive type holiday detector, K-D Bird Dog, shall be used. The unit shall operate at less than 75-volts. For thicknesses between 10 and 20 mils, a non-sudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo-Flow, shall be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge.

F. Paint manufacturer or his representative shall provide their services as required by the

Engineer. Services shall include, but not be limited to, inspecting existing paint,


determination of best means of surface preparation, inspection of completed work, and final inspection of painted work 11 months after the job is completed.

3.05 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PAINT AND FINISHED SURFACES

A. Use covers, masking tape, other method when protection is necessary, or requested by Owner or Engineer. Remove unwanted paint carefully without damage to finished paint or surface. If damage does occur, repair the entire surface adjacent to and including the damaged area without visible lapmarks and without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Take all necessary precautions to contain dispersion of sandblasting debris and paint to the

limits of the work. Take into account the effect of wind and other factors which may cause dispersion of the sandblasting debris and paint. Suspend painting operations when sanding debris or paint cannot be properly confined. Assume all responsibilities and cost associated with damage to adjacent structures, vehicles, or surfaces caused by the surface preparation and painting operations.

3.06 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Piping and equipment identification shall be in accordance with Section 15030, Piping and Equipment Identification Systems.

3.07 SCHEDULE OF COLORS

A. Match colors indicated. Piping and equipment colors are indicated in Section 15030. Colors which are not indicated shall be selected from the manufacturer's full range of colors by the Engineer. No variation shall be made in colors without the Engineer's approval. Color names and numbers shall be identified according to the appropriate color chart issued by the manufacturer of the particular product in question.

3.08 WORK IN CONFINED SPACES

A. Provide and maintain safe working conditions for all employees. Supply fresh air continuously to confined spaces through the combined use of existing openings, forced-draft fans and temporary ducts to the outside, or direct air supply to individual workers. Exhaust paint fumes to the outside from the lowest level in the contained space. Provide explosion-proof electrical fans, if in contact with fumes. No smoking or open fires will be permitted in, or near, confined spaces where painting is being done. Follow OSHA, state and local regulations at all times.

3.09 OSHA SAFETY COLORS

A. Paint wall around wall-mounted breathing or fire apparatus with the appropriate safety red color; area not exceed 2-feet wide by 3-feet high, unless apparatus covers the area. Fire apparatus include fire hoses, extinguisher, and hydrants.

B. Paint hazardous areas and objects in accordance with OSHA regulations.

TABLE 9-1 PAINTING SCHEDULE


SURFACE APPLICATION PAINTING SYSTEM &

NO. OF COATS

PRODUCT REFERENCE (TABLE 9.2)

TOTAL MIN. DRY FILM

THICKNESS (MILS)

Concrete and Masonry Interior masonry and concrete walls and ceilings

All new structures

1 coat sealer 2 coats acrylic epoxy

101 116

75-85 sq.ft./gal. 4-6/coat

Interior masonry and concrete walls in chemical rooms

1 coat sealer 2 coats epoxy polyamide

117 102

60-80 sq.ft./gal. 4-6/coat

Exterior below grade if interior is dry

Accessible areas (e.g. pipe galleries, pump rooms, basements, etc.)

Waterproofing See Section 07100

Submerged water Water retaining side of new wall surfaces where opposite side of wall is interior and dry and where indicated "epoxy waterproofing" on drawing

2 coats NSF approved epoxy polyamide Provide filler as required and recommended by manufacturer

105 4-6/coat

Submerged wastewater 2 coats high solids epoxy Provide filler as required and recommended by manufacturer

119 6-10/coat

Containment Liner1 Interior and exterior secondary containment floors, tank supports and walls

2 coats high solids epoxy coating

119 6-10/coat

Metals Interior and exterior nonsubmerged (gloss)

All new blowers, pumps, motors and mechanical equipment, piping, etc.

1 coat epoxy polyamide primer 1 coat epoxy polyamide 1 coat aliphatic polyurethane

104

102 115

4-6 4-6 3-5

Interior insulated 1 coat acrylic latex 103 4

Submerged water All metal piping, and mechanical equipment, etc.

2 coats NSF approved epoxy polyamide

105

4-6/coat

Submerged Wastewater 2 coats high solids epoxy 119 8-10/coat

Steel doors, windows and door frames, steel stairs, monorails, structural steel, misc. metals (steel)

1 coat epoxy polyamide 1 coat aliphatic polyurethane

102

115

5-8 3-4

Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete

2 coats coal tar 107 26

Shop Primed Structural Steel

All new work 1 barrier coat 1 coat epoxy 1 coat epoxy

113 114 120

2-3 3-4 3-4

1. Painting manufacturer shall verify compatibility of containment liner and chemical to be contained. Where incompatible substitute a compatible coating system.

TABLE 9-1

PAINTING SCHEDULE (CONTINUED)


SURFACE APPLICATION PAINTING SYSTEM &

NO. OF COATS

PRODUCT REFERENCE (TABLE 9.2)

TOTAL MIN. DRY FILM

THICKNESS (MILS)

Other Interior: Gypsum Wallboard

All new structures

2 coats acrylic latex matte or satin

103

2-3/coat

Interior: Tar-dipped piping where color is required

2 coats epoxy resin sealer 2 coats epoxy polyamide

112

102

5-8/coat 5-8/coat

PVC Piping 1 coat epoxy polyamide 1 coat aliphatic polyurethane

102 115

5-8 3-4

Bid

Se

t 0

99

00

-13

B

low

er

Ele

ctr

ific

ation

Pro

ject

Ja

nu

ary

, 2

01

9

TA

BL

E 9

-2

PR

OD

UC

T L

IST

ING

P

RO

DU

CT

RE

F.

SY

ST

EM

P

UR

PO

SE

T

ne

me

c S

eri

es

PP

G/A

ME

RO

N

CA

RB

OL

INE

S

he

rwin

-Will

iam

s

10

1

Acry

lic f

ille

r P

rim

er-

se

ale

r 1

30

-66

01

B

LO

XF

IL 4

00

0

Sa

nitile

10

0

Ce

me

nt-

Ple

x 8

75

10

2

Ep

oxy p

oly

am

ide

F

inis

h c

oa

t se

mi-

glo

ss o

r g

loss

N6

9

AM

ER

LO

CK

2

Ca

rbo

gu

ard

89

0

Du

ra-P

late

23

5

10

3

Acry

lic la

tex

Se

ale

r 1

02

8/1

02

9

PIT

T T

EC

H P

LU

S

Ca

rbo

cry

lic

33

59

DT

M

DT

M A

cry

lic P

rim

er/

Fin

ish

10

4

Ep

oxy P

oly

am

ide

–

me

tal

Pri

me

r 6

6

AM

ER

CO

AT

38

5

Ca

rbo

gu

ard

89

3S

G

Ma

cro

po

xy 6

46

10

5

Ep

oxy

Pri

me

r/F

inis

h

20

A

ME

RL

OC

K 2

C

arb

og

ua

rd

56

1/5

6L

T

Ma

cro

po

xy 6

46

PW

10

6

Co

al ta

r e

po

xy

Fin

ish

hig

h-c

oa

t b

uild

4

6H

-41

3

AM

ER

CO

AT

78

HB

B

itu

ma

stic 3

00

M

Hi-

Mil

Sh

er

Ta

r E

po

xy

10

7

Co

al ta

r S

ea

ler

46

-46

5

AM

ER

CO

AT

78

HB

B

itu

ma

stic 3

00

M

Hi-

Mil

Sh

er

Ta

r E

po

xy

10

8

Alk

yd

-me

diu

m o

il F

inis

h c

oa

t 2

H

DE

VG

UA

RD

43

08

C

arb

oco

at 8

21

5

Ind

ustr

ial E

na

me

l

10

9

Alk

yd

-lo

ng

oil

Fin

ish

co

at

10

29

D

EV

GU

AR

D 4

30

8

Ca

rbo

co

at 8

21

5

Ind

ustr

ial E

na

me

l

11

0

Ep

oxy p

oly

am

ide

P

rim

er

66

-12

11

A

ME

RC

OA

T 3

85

C

arb

og

ua

rd 8

93

SG

M

acro

po

xy 6

46

11

2

Ep

oxy p

oly

am

ide

S

ea

ler

66

-12

11

A

ME

RC

OA

T 3

85

C

arb

og

ua

rd 8

93

SG

M

acro

po

xy 9

20

Pre

-Pri

me

11

3

Ure

tha

ne

B

arr

ier

co

at

53

0

AM

ER

LO

CK

SE

AL

ER

R

ustb

on

d

--

11

4

Po

lya

min

e E

po

xy

Inte

rme

dia

te c

oa

t 2

7

AM

ER

LO

CK

38

5

Ca

rbo

gu

ard

89

3S

G

--

11

5

Alip

ha

tic P

oly

ure

tha

ne

F

inis

h c

oa

t 1

07

4 o

r 1

07

5

AM

ER

CO

AT

45

0 H

S

Ca

rbo

tha

ne

13

4H

G

Acro

lon

21

8H

S

11

6

Acry

lic e

po

xy

Fin

ish

co

at

11

3 o

r 1

14

A

QU

AP

ON

WB

S

an

itile

25

5

Wa

ter-

Ba

se

d C

ata

lyze

d

Ep

oxy

11

7

Ep

oxy b

lock f

ille

r S

ea

ler

12

54

A

ME

RL

OC

K 1

14

S

an

itile

60

0

Ke

m C

ati-C

oa

t H

S E

po

xy

Fill

er

11

8

Ca

taly

ze

d e

po

xy

Fin

ish

co

at

84

A

ME

RL

OC

K 2

/40

0

Ca

rbo

gu

ard

89

0

Ma

cro

po

xy 6

46

11

9

Hig

h s

olid

s e

po

xy

Fin

ish

co

at

10

4

AM

ER

LO

CK

40

0

Ca

rbo

gu

ard

89

0

Du

ra-P

late

23

5

12

0

Ep

oxy

To

p c

oa

t N

69

A

ME

RL

OC

K 2

/40

0

Ca

rbo

gu

ard

89

0

--

-

EN

D O

F S

EC

TIO

N –

Bid

Se

t 0

99

00

-14

B

low

er

Ele

ctr

ific

ation

Pro

ject

Ja

nu

ary

, 2

01

9

- T

HIS

PA

GE

LE

FT

IN

TE

NT

ION

AL

LY

BL

AN

K -

SPECIFICATION NO. 1360S - EMWD · 13127 Aluminum Flat Cover 1 thru 4 13205 . Aboveground Fuel...

Documents

Transcript of SPECIFICATION NO. 1360S - EMWD · 13127 Aluminum Flat Cover 1 thru 4 13205 . Aboveground Fuel...